Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority, Version 2019

Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority, Version 2019 DTR Stream Rehabilitation SECTION 000110 – Table of Contents The following Specifications are Incorporated into the contract documents.

Division 00 Conditions of the Contract

00 01 10 Table of Contents

00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions

00 73 19 Safety and Health Requirements

Division 01 General Requirements

01 10 00 Summary Project and General Information

01 14 00 Work Restrictions

01 20 00 Price and Payment Procedures

01 22 00 Unit Prices

01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures

01 29 00 Application for Payment

01 30 00 Administrative Requirements

01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination

01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation

01 32 33 Photographic and Video Recording Documentation

01 33 00 Submittal Procedures

01 35 43 Environmental Procedures

01 40 00 Quality Requirements

01 40 00 Quality Requirements

01 42 00 References

01 45 00 Quality Control

01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls

01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls

01 60 00 Product Requirements

01 60 00 Product Requirements

01 70 00 Execution and Closeout Requirements

Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority, Version 2019 DTR Stream Rehabilitation

01 71 00 Examination and Preparation

01 73 00 Execution

01 77 00 Closeout Procedures

01 78 39 Project Record Documents

190000 VDOT Material Specifications

190200 General

190201 Mineral Filler

190202 Fine Aggregate

190203 Coarse Aggregate

190208 Subbase and Aggregate Base Material

190210 Asphalt Materials

190211 Asphalt Concrete

190221 Guardrail

190244 Roadside Development Materials

190000 VDOT Specifications

190303 Earthwork

190310 Tack Coat

190315 Asphalt Concrete Placement

190432 Rock Cross Vane Structure

190434 In-Channel Log Sill

190435 Rock-Soil Mix

190505 Guardrail and W-Beam Median Barriers

190512 Maintenance of Traffic

190513 Mobilization

190603 Seeding

190605 Planting

Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority, Version 2019 DTR Stream Rehabilitation

190611 Soil Stabilization Matting

190612 Livestakes

310000 Earthwork

312514 Stormwater Pollution Prevention

Permit Requirements

Nationwide Permit #3 Requirements

Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority, Version 2019

Dulles Toll Road Stream Rehabilitation

SECTION 007300 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 1

SECTION 007300 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY The articles and paragraphs of this Section represent supplements or additions to the Contract Provisions or the Special Provisions.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, and other Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PERMITTING

A. Comply with all requirements set forth in the Authority's “Building Codes Manual”. This manual describes Building Codes organization, Construction permitting process, Building Code inspection process, Certificate of Occupancy requirements, and information regarding elevators, escalators, and moving walks.

B. The Airports Authority will file for the construction permit per the Authority’s “Building Codes

Manual”. The Authority provide and pay for the construction permit.

3.2 AIRFIELD AND TERMINAL BUILDING OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The Work, or a portion thereof, may be performed in proximity to the Air Operations Area (AOA), including, active runways, taxiways, and aprons. Normal airport operations will continue adjacent to the Work during all phases of the Project. These activities include, but are not limited to:

1. Aircraft movement on runways, taxiways, aprons; aircraft landing and takeoff operations. 2. Aircraft parking, refueling and other aircraft servicing. 3. Baggage handling. 4. Routine aircraft maintenance. 5. Apron maintenance, snow removal and ice control. 6. Mobile lounge and Plane mate operations at Dulles Airport.

B. Not Applicable

1. Not Applicable 2. Not Applicable 3. Not Applicable 4. Not Applicable 5. Not Applicable 6. Not Applicable

C. Phase construction activities as necessary to accommodate all airport operations without

disruption. Adhere to all current Airport Orders and Instructions (O & Is), Airport Bulletins, and Airport Advisories. The Authority will provide relevant Orders and Instructions to Offerors in the




Solicitation Package. Bulletins and Advisories will be provided to the offeror by the Authority as they are issued.

3.3 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS

Not Applicable Not Applicable

3.4 TENANT OPERATIONAL REQUIREMENTS If Work of this Project will be performed in close proximity to tenant-occupied areas. Coordinate and conduct work activities in such fashion that public circulation, tenant operations, and access to the tenant spaces will not be impaired in any manner except as detailed on Contractor's Work Plans. COTR will review and approve in writing all Work Plans.

3.5 ARCHAEOLOGICAL AND HISTORICAL FINDINGS Notify COTR immediately if subsurface structural features, concentrations of artifacts, rubble, bone/shell, or burnt material are uncovered or otherwise discovered. Prompt reporting will avoid potentially severe problems resulting from the destruction of significant resources and may limit the impact on construction operations and schedules.

3.6 DAMAGES AND PRE-EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Be responsible for all damages caused by Contractor’s construction activities. Provide all labor, materials, etc. to return any damaged areas, systems or equipment to their original condition at no additional cost to the Authority.

B. Perform a survey of pre-existing conditions in the vicinity of Contractor’s construction activities,

utilizing photographs and other means as necessary to document existing damage or conditions. Submit two copies of this survey to the Contracting Officer or COTR within 21 calendar days after Notice-to-Proceed and before mobilizing to the site. This survey will assist in resolving any damage claims against the Contractor during and after construction.

C. Preserve all roadways, pedestrian and directional signage. Deliver all signs removed and not

required for reinstallation to the Authority as directed by the COTR.

D. Replace or repair lost or damaged signs at no cost to the Authority.

3.7 MATERIAL HAULING

A. Restrict deliveries and removal of bulk materials, supplies, waste soils and equipment to and from the Project site to the Authority-designated roads and haul routes indicated on the Drawings.

B. Access and egress to and from the Airport for hauling operations shall be through the entrances

indicated on the Contract Documents. Conduct hauling operations as detailed in the Contract Documents or as coordinated with the COTR.

C. The designated haul routes for hauling operations will not require vehicles crossing and/or

utilizing existing taxi lanes or taxiways. Under no conditions shall the Contractor plan use of taxiways and taxi lanes for hauling equipment. Haul routes for this project are as indicated on the




Contract Documents of coordinated with the COTR.

D. Schedule, phase, and sequence work operations to minimize the impacts to Airports Operations. Submit a detailed Work Plan for Contractor’s entire operations to the COTR for approval 14 calendar days prior to commencing work. Obtain written approval from the COTR of the Work Plan. Identify clearly on Work Plan for each operation requiring coordination with Airport Operations.

1. For taxiway closures of short duration, provide flagmen, with radio contact with the FAA Airport Traffic Control Tower and the Authority Ramp Control Tower, at taxiway crossing intersections. COTR will determine the number of flagmen required.

2. For long-term taxiway closures, clearly mark, light, and barricade the taxiway closures and haul routes in accordance with FAA and Airport Operations requirements.

E. Notify the COTR at least 72 hours in advance of all closure requirements for scheduled taxiway,

taxi lane or roadway closures. Obtain the written approval of Airport Operations prior to closing or crossing a taxiway, taxi lane or roadway.

F. Bear all costs associated with establishing, maintaining, signing, lighting and marking haul routes

and taxiway crossings. These costs are considered incidental to the pay items of this Contract.

G. Use load covers on all dump trucks. Load dump trucks so that no spillage occurs during transit on the State, municipal, or Airport roadways, taxiways, and aprons. Clean wheels of trucks leaving the Project construction site of all soil and rocks. Provide a truck washing rack on the Project site to minimize the tracking of soil onto paved surfaces.

H. Be responsible for the cost of the immediate cleaning of earth tracking and spills on paved

surfaces resulting from the Contractor's operations. Because of the potential for extreme damage to aircraft engines due to the ingestion of foreign objects, maintain on the project mechanical sweeper/vacuum (wet/dry) equipment with nylon brushes complete with operators. Maintain a water truck on site at all times in order to effectively control dust rising from construction activities.

I. Not Applicable

3.8 PORTABLE LIGHTING

Portable lighting: If used for Contractor operations, aim and shield portable lighting at all times to eliminate glare that could impair runway, taxiway, apron, ground operations, and Airport Traffic Control Tower operations. Equip portable lighting with reflectors and glare shields to prevent spillover of light into operational areas.

3.9 HEIGHT LIMITATION

A. For all demolition and construction within the Airport, limit the height of Contractor's equipment to a maximum as indicated. on the Contract Documents or coordinated with the COTR.

B. Prior to beginning any work coordinate with the COTR the height of all cranes, boom trucks,

scaffolds or similar vehicles of construction. Properly mark all construction equipment with safety flags and warning lights in accordance with current FAA and Airport Operations requirements. Submit FAA Form 7460, for all variations on approved crane heights.




3.10 NOISE CONTROL

A. The Authority recognizes and can tolerate a normal level of noise created by a majority of

construction activity. However, in the interest of the Authority's neighbors, the maximum acceptable noise level between the hours of 5:00 pm and 7:00 am the following morning is limited to 55 decibels. During daytime hours of 7:00 am through 5:00 pm, the maximum acceptable noise level for sustained or repetitive noises is 72 decibels. Measure the noise level using an "A" scale at a point 4'‑0" above ground at property line nearest noise source.

B. Secure advance written approval from the COTR prior to scheduling any activity that is

anticipated to produce a sustained or repetitive noise level higher than the decibel limits indicated above.

C. In and around terminal facilities and buildings whose normal occupancy is from 7 a.m. to 7 p.m.,

perform work that causes noise that is disruptive to the airport’s tenants or the traveling public between the hours of 11:00 pm and 5:00 am. Measure noise for this situation using an “A” scale at a point 4’-0” above ground at the closest point to airport tenants or the traveling public.

3.11 EXAMINATION OF PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS AND SITE OF WORK

The offeror is expected to examine carefully the site of the proposed work, the proposal, plans, specifications, solicitation provisions, contract provisions, special provisions and contract forms before submitting a proposal. The submission of a proposal will be considered conclusive evidence that the offeror has made such examination and is satisfied as to the conditions to be encountered in performing the work as to the requirements of the Contract.

3.12 WORK ADJACENT TO METRO

A. Not Applicable

B. Not Applicable

C. Not Applicable

D. Not Applicable

E. Not Applicable PART 4 - MEASUREMENT (Not Used) PART 5 - PAYMENT The requirements of this section are the sole responsibility of the Contractor. No additional payment will be made to the Contractor to fulfill these requirements. END OF SECTION 007300



SECTION 007319 - SAFETY AND HEALTH REQUIREMENTS 1

SECTION 007319 - SAFETY AND HEALTH REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section serves to outline the key elements for the Contractor’s Safety and Health Program. This Section also includes a number of additional project specific requirements for the Contractor’s Safety and Health Program. In addition, reference is made to the minimum requirements set forth in the Construction Safety Manual.

B. The contractor must provide safe and healthful working conditions on each operation at all

times. Conduct the various operations connected with the Work so that they will not be injurious to safety or health. Comply with all provisions, regulations and recommendations issued pursuant to the Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, and the Construction Safety Act of 1969, as amended, and with laws, rules and regulations of other authorities having jurisdiction, with regard to all matters relating to the safety and health of workers and the general public. Comply with all provisions, regulations and recommendations issued pursuant to Virginia Department of Labor and Industry Occupational Safety & Health (VOSH) Unique Safety Standards for Construction. Compliance with government requirements is mandated by law and considered only a minimum level of safety performance. Perform all work in accordance with best safe work practices recognized by the construction industry.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and other Division

00/01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

B. Requirements included in this Section are the minimum acceptable and are in addition to the Airports Authority’s Construction Safety Manual, as well as all Local, State, and Federal requirements. Where conflicts or discrepancies exist between requirements, the more stringent requirement shall govern.

C. Related Work Described Elsewhere:

1. "Solicitation Provisions" in the Contract for this Work. 2. "Contract Provisions" in the Contract for this Work. 3. MWAA Construction Safety Manual.

D. Reference Codes, Standards and other Documents

1. OSHA - US Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Construction Standards and Interpretations, 29 CFR Parts 1910 and 1926.

2. US Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970, as amended. 3. US Department of Labor, Construction Safety Act of 1969, as amended. 4. Virginia OSHA Rules and Regulations (Virginia Occupational Safety & Health Unique Standards). 5. All other Federal, State and Local requirements and regulations in effect at the time of

construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Contractor is to provide all requirements per the newest version of the MWAA Construction Safety Manual.

3.2 Prior to the start of construction activities in the Airport Operations Area (AOA), the Contractor’s

Safety Manager, and Safety Engineers, shall tour airside with the Program Safety Manager and the COTR and his/her representative(s).

3.3 CONTRACTOR’S SAFETY AND HEALTH PROGRAM - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor’s Safety and Health Program shall include as a framework for safety and health

programming the following minimum basic elements: 1. A statement of the Contractor’s commitment to providing a safe and healthful project. 2. A statement of the Contractor’s responsibility for implementing its Safety and Health Program. 3. Detailed procedures for:

a. Training of site supervision. b. Safety and Health Project Orientation for workers. c. Ongoing Safety and Health training for workers. d. Providing safety and health information to the general public.

4. Specific assignments of safety and health-related roles and responsibilities. 5. Safety and health inspections on the project. 6. Procedures for accident-related record keeping, investigation and surveillance. 7. A disciplinary action procedure. 8. Schedule of safety related meetings and training. 9. A set of general work rules addressing hazards common to all types of construction and a site-

specific set of work rules addressing the hazards of the work at hand. 10. A list of required permits for specific construction operations. 11. An emergency action plan addressing all types of emergencies with which the Contractor may

reasonably and predictably be confronted. 12. A procedure for identifying how and under what circumstances job hazard analysis shall be

conducted. 13. Reporting formats for required reports and submissions. 14. Detailed site-specific procedures for conducting safe working conditions associated with:

a. Compressed air and gases. b. Concrete work. c. Confined spaces/permit-required confined spaces. d. Crane operations and maintenance. e. Rigging operations, equipment inspection and testing. f. Electrical hazards. g. Excavation and excavation support. h. Fall protection. i. Fire protection and prevention. j. First aid, CPR and blood borne pathogens. k. Hand and power tools. l. Hazard communication. m. Housekeeping. n. Scaffolding, ladders, and walking and working surfaces. o. Lockout/Control of Energy Sources.




p. Materials handling and storage. q. Mechanized equipment. r. Construction health hazard monitoring. s. Personal protective equipment and clothing. t. Respiratory protection. u. Sanitation. v. Welding and cutting. w. Existing utilities, including the requirement to provide, at no additional cost to the Airports

Authority, 3rd party verification of utility locations each and every time Miss Utility is utilized.

15. Detailed site-specific procedures shall, as a minimum, comply with the guidelines identified in the Construction Safety Manual. All detailed site-specific procedures shall include requirements for mandatory eye and head protection and adherence to the 6-foot fall protection requirements. Site-specific procedures shall require all chainsaws used on-site to be equipped with kickback guards/breaks and require all other power tools to be equipped with all protective features as provided by the manufacturer.

16. Hazardous material handling. 17. A silica exposure plan to limit exposure of workers to silica dust. The plan shall include the

applicable preventive measures recommended and contained in OSHA 1926.1153 “Occupational Exposure to Respirable Crystalline Silica”.

18. All equipment shall be inspected on a regular basis (monthly, if not more often as directed by the COTR) with copies of the inspection report being submitted to the COTR. The purpose of these inspections is to identify and document possible safety problems and repair these problems before someone is injured.

B. Not Applicable

1. Not Applicable 2. Not Applicable 3. Not Applicable 4. Not Applicable 5. Not Applicable 6. Not Applicable 7. Not Applicable 8. Not Applicable 9. Not Applicable 10. Not Applicable 11. Not Applicable 12. Not Applicable 13. Not Applicable 14. Not Applicable 15. Not Applicable 16. Not Applicable 17. Not Applicable 18. Not Applicable 19. Not Applicable 20. Not Applicable 21. Not Applicable 22. Not Applicable 23. Not Applicable




24. Not Applicable 25. Not Applicable 26. Not Applicable 27. Not Applicable 28. Not Applicable 29. Not Applicable

3.4 SAFETY PROGRAM ADMINISTRATION

A. The contractor is responsible for establishing a committed unified safety team in a positive

cooperative environment where all personnel and employees communicate, create, maintain, and verify the required level of safety in all aspects of construction as established in the Safety Plan and Contract Specifications. Staffing Levels: Provide sufficient qualified safety personnel to monitor each work activity at all times.

B. Roles and Responsibilities: The Contractor shall be directly responsible for establishing and

implementing a project-specific Contractor Safety and Health Program for the protection of its workers, the workers of its Subcontractors, the COTR, Architect/Engineer, the Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority (Airports Authority) and the general public.

C. This safety program shall meet the requirements in the MWAA Construction Safety Manual. The

Contractor shall include documentation of safety and health program implementation and accident experience as criteria for evaluating performance of its individual project managers and site supervisors.

3.5 SPECIFIC CONTRACTOR’S PROJECT SAFETY AND HEALTH PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor’s Project Safety and Health Program shall incorporate all basic elements of the

construction project safety and health program set forth in Sub-Part 3 "Contractors' Safety and Health Program - General Requirements" above, the Construction Safety Manual, and the following project-specific program elements:

1. A written, project-specific Safety and Health Plan (Plan), incorporating job hazard analysis for construction operations, encountering contaminated soil and water, detailed emergency action procedures and fire risk assessment shall be developed by the Contractor, for review by the COTR and PSM to point out deficiencies before the start of any construction. The Plan shall specifically address rescue operations, conditions affecting rescue operations, smoke venting procedures, back-up power supply and pumping systems, means of ingress and egress, communications, hot work permitting procedures, and training, orientation and refresher training for workers, emergency responders and visitors.

2. The Plan shall be updated as substantive changes in the underground work environment occur. The Airports Authority’s and local fire departments shall be provided with a copy of the most current Plan and advised of changes in the Plan as they are implemented. The fire departments will be requested to review and comment on the Plan and any changes that occur to the Plan.

3. The Contractor is required to send all project supervisory personnel to an Authority provided Orientation prior to the start of any work.

4. The Contractor’s Safety Manager shall train all workers and the COTR and his staff members in the details of the Plan.

5. In accordance with local and state regulations a permit system shall be used for all hot work performed on the project. The Contractor’s Safety and Health Plan shall detail the permit




system’s procedures. The permit system shall be implemented and supervised by the Contractor’s Safety Manager. The permits shall be made available for inspection by the Airports Authority, the COTR and the local fire department(s). Open flames and fire shall be prohibited in all construction operations, except as permitted for welding, cutting and other hot work operations pursuant to the Contractor’s Hot work Permit System. Smoking shall be allowed only in areas free of fire and explosion hazards. Readily visible signs prohibiting smoking and open flames shall be posted in areas having fire or explosion hazards.

6. The Contractor in all cases shall request responses by the fire department(s) to Project-related emergencies involving members of the general public. The Contractor shall fully coordinate and cooperate with the Airports Authority Fire and Rescue in its response to such emergencies.

7. In addition, the Contractor shall fully coordinate and cooperate with the Airports Authority’s Risk Management Department in its response to such emergencies.

8. The Contractor is required to obtain all permits required for the Contractor’s use of chemicals, and is responsible to meet all Federal, State and Local requirements. The Contractor shall develop a written chemical safety plan to address all chemicals used during construction. This safety plan shall include detailed procedures to prevent chemical accidents to the maximum extent possible during chemical transport, transfer, storage, use and disposal. The chemical safety plan shall include emergency response procedures, which identify all potential chemical emergencies and the recommended emergency response action to be taken for each incident. These procedures shall consider all potential chemical emergencies including chemical spills, incompatible reactions, fires and human exposures. Procedures shall describe methods to contain and isolate the accident, including the required protective clothing, equipment, first aid and response methods. Conduct, using Contractor’s staff emergency response training and drills to the extent necessary to control the specific chemicals used by the Contractor. The Contractor’s emergency response procedures shall be coordinated with support action from the Airports Authority’s and local fire departments and hazardous material response teams, to provide for a comprehensive emergency response plan. This coordinated response shall be adequate to manage all chemical emergencies and provide for the health, safety and evacuation of all site personnel as well the community. The Airports Authority’s and local fire departments shall be provided with a copy of the most current plan and be requested to review and comment on the plan. At all times when chemicals are on site, the Contractor shall maintain a trained emergency response staff, equipment, protective clothing and supplies as needed to implement the chemical safety plan.

9. The Contractor shall have at least one (1) employee on site at all times who is trained and qualified to administer first aid and cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) for every 25 employees on site.

10. The Contractor shall comply with all requirements identified in OSHA regulation § 1926.50 relating to medical services and first aid.

11. No visitors will be allowed on site without permission of the COTR.

3.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Contractor's Project Safety and Health Plan to COTR within 15 calendar days of Notice to Proceed and prior to the start of any construction activities. COTR and PSM must approve the Contractor’s Safety and Health Program prior to the start of any work.

B. Submit Fire Risk Assessment to COTR prior to any construction

C. Submit qualifications of Contractor’s Site Supervision to COTR within 15 calendar days of




employment at the project.

D. Submit Airports Authority provided Inspection reports by Contractor’s Safety Manager to COTR weekly.

E. Submit to COTR Weekly the following:

1. Meeting Minutes and attendance sheets of Safety Training 2. Weekly Safety Meetings and related communications by Contractors and Subcontractors.

F. Submit disciplinary action notices to COTR weekly.

G. Submit notices from public authorities to COTR as soon as possible but no later than 24 hours of

receipt by Contractor.

H. Submit Safety Data Sheets (SDS) for all substances to COTR for PSM review as received by Contractor along with written Hazard Communication Program.

I. Submit copy of Contractor’s chemical inventory list to COTR and the Airports Authority Fire

Marshal as developed and updated.

3.7 ACCIDENT REPORTING, INVESTIGATION AND SURVEILLANCE The Airports Authority’s Insurance Safety Consultant and Airports Authority Program Safety Manager seek to collect accident information for purposes of identifying patterns, trends, performance and establishing appropriate policies and procedures related to protection of safety and health. To that end prepare and submit reports of accidents as detailed above. PART 4 - MEASUREMENT (Not Used) PART 5 - PAYMENT (Not Used) END OF SECTION 007319



SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY 1

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY This Section includes the following:

A. Work covered by the Contract Documents. B. Type of the Contract. C. Work phases. D. Work under other contracts. E. Products ordered in advance. F. Authority-furnished products. G. Use of premises. H. The Airports Authority's occupancy requirements. I. Work restrictions. J. Specification formats and conventions.


Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and other Division 00/01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.3 Related Sections include the following: Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of the Airports Authority's facilities.

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Identification: Project consists of <Insert brief Project description>.

B. Project Location: [Washington Dulles International Airport] [Ronald Reagan Washington National Airport] [Dulles Toll Road].

C. Architect/Engineer Identification: The Contract Documents, dated June 15, 2020, were prepared

for Project by Johnson, Mirmran & Thompson, Inc., 40 Wight Avenue, Hunt Valley, Maryland, 21030.

D. The Work consists of <Insert an abbreviated summary of Project>.

1. The Work includes <Insert a brief listing of major products and systems included in Project>. 2. For additional requirements for the examination of plans, specifications, and Project site see

Section "Supplementary Conditions."

1.5 TYPE OF CONTRACT Project will be constructed under a general construction contract.

1.6 WORK PHASES

A. Not Applicable

1. Not Applicable




2. Not Applicable

B. Not Applicable

C. Not Applicable

D. Not Applicable

E. Not Applicable

1.7 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS

A. Not Applicable

B. Not Applicable 1. Not Applicable

C. Not Applicable

Not Applicable

D. Not Applicable Not Applicable

1.8 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Format: With the exception of Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) standard specifications and Virginia Department of Transportation standard specifications the Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 33-Division format using the CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat 2016" numbering system.

B. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section titles to help with cross-referencing in the

Contract Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete as all available Sections and Section numbers are not used and the CSI numbering system is not sequentially complete. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of sections in the Contract Documents.

C. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and

the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

D. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is

abbreviated. Interpret words and meanings as appropriate. Infer words implied, but not stated, as the sense requires. Interpret singular words as plural, and plural words as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.

E. Imperative mood and streamlined language are used in these Specifications. This imperative

language is directed to the Contractor, unless specifically noted otherwise. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe




responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted.

F. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

1.9 MARKING UTILITY SERVICES

A. The information in the Contract Documents concerning the type and location of underground

utilities is neither guaranteed nor inclusive. The Contractor is responsible for determining the type and location of underground utilities, regardless of whether such utilities are indicated or not, so as to avoid damage thereto.

B. Employ a Subsurface Utility Engineering company to locate and mark the horizontal and vertical

location of all utility lines in accordance with, ASCE C-I 38-02, Standard Guidelines for the Collection and Depiction of Existing Subsurface Utility Data, Quality level-A. Utilities that might be impacted by construction activities, including but not limited to the following:

1. Electric power lines. 2. Natural gas lines. 3. Sanitary Sewers. 4. Storm Sewers. 5. FAA communications, power, signal, and security lines. 6. Airfield series lighting lines 7. Water supply piping. 8. 530 KHz AM radio line - Parking Lot Availability Notification System -buried cable parallel to the

Airport access road. The system utilizes antennas on the Airport thus there are no buried cables for this system within the fenced portion of the Airport property.

9. Fuel Lines. 10. Telephone lines. 11. Data lines. 12. Underground Storage Tanks. 13. High Temperature Hot Water (HTHW) and chilled water lines.

C. Quality level A locating involves the use of nondestructive digging equipment at critical points to

determine the precise horizontal and vertical position of underground utilities, as well as the type, size, condition, material, and other characteristics.

D. Within 60 calendar days of Notice to Proceed, submit to the COTR a survey of all subsurface

utility engineering results, indicating the horizontal and vertical location, coordinates and elevation of all utilities. No land disturbance shall be performed until the utility survey is approved.

E. Contact the Airport Communications System (ACS) Help Desk at (703) 417-8300 a minimum of 72

hours prior to starting activities that include but are not limited to location and marking of horizontal locations of telephone and telecommunications lines belonging to the Airports Authority as part of the Airport Communication System.

F. Contact the Airport Communications System (ACS) Help Desk a minimum of 72 hours prior to

beginning operations, that include but are not limited to excavating, boring, pile-driving, [blasting (if allowed on specific projects)], digging or planting.




G. Note the ACS does not locate utilities. Location is the responsibility of the Contractor’s

underground utilities location subcontractor. The Airport Communications System (ACS) is merely notified as indicated previously.

H. Coordinate with the COTR, for access to and utilization of, Airport GIS information, MWAA

Excavation & Trenching Check List, and notification procedures for the Utilities Locate Group.

I. The Contractor is responsible for following the requirements of the Virginia Underground Utility Damage Prevention Act. (Calling Miss Utility-VA811).

J. Report any unmarked utilities encountered during construction to the COTR immediately.

K. Repair any damage to utility lines due to construction operations at no expense to the Airports

Authority.

L. Submit to the COTR the name of the independent Subsurface Utility Engineering (SUE) Company to be used. Individuals assigned by the SUE provider to carry out the work should be well-trained, experienced, and capable. Those in responsible charge of the work and responsible for certifying deliverables should be engineers, geologists, and land surveyors employed by the SUE provider in accordance with state professional registration requirements.

1.10 UTILITY OUTAGES

A. Prior to any utility outage/interruption, prepare a schedule of such outage. Include outage

schedule duration, identification of the service affected, temporary utility service to be provided, identification of available service alternative, and the action to be taken in any emergency. Apply for all outages of utility systems in writing. Fully coordinate outage requests with COTR. Obtain approval in writing from the Airports Authority. Schedule all outages at least 21 calendar days in advance with a 96-hour notification provided by the Contractor confirming date, time, and duration. Outages will normally be scheduled to occur between the hours of 11:00 pm and 5:30 am, Tuesday through Thursday.

B. Provide a suction/pump truck during all sanitary sewer line outages to support the disabled lift

stations. Transport sewage to alternate lift stations located on the Airport and dispose of in accordance with Airport procedures. Provide a suction/pump truck with a capacity of 3,000 gallons or greater.

END OF SECTION 011000



SECTION 011400 - WORK RESTRICTIONS 1

SECTION 011400 - WORK RESTRICTIONS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY This Section includes details of General Work Restrictions including Use of Site and Contractor Work Hours.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and other Division 00/01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS Division 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 USE OF SITE:

A. Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

B. Limits: Confine constructions operations to areas shown on the construction drawings.

C. Not Applicable.

D. Contractor shall have full use of premises for construction operations within the Contract Limit

Lines indicated during construction period, during the hours indicated, and as directed by COTR. Contractor's use of premises is limited only by the Airports Authority's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.

E. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and available to

the Airports Authority, the Airports Authority's employees, tenants, air carriers, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use driveways and entrances for parking or storage of materials.

1. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances. 2. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and

equipment on-site. 3. Utilize areas designated for Contractor staging, storage, and parking, as indicated. For

additional requirements, see Section "Supplementary Conditions."

3.2 USE OF EXISTING BUILDINGS (Not Used)

3.3 CONTRACTOR HOURS OF OPERATION

A. Contractor Working Hours: The Airports Authority anticipates that the Contractor may be required to work multiple shifts to accomplish the work of this Contract within the established



SECTION 011400 - WORK RESTRICTIONS 2

schedule. Contractor will be allowed to work between the hours of 8:00am to 5:00pm, seven days a week in the performance of the Work excluding MOT setup and removal work that is restricted to the hours of 10:00am to 3:00pm.

B. Work hours are subject to restrictions of the Airport operational requirements. Notify the COTR

24-hours in advance of any change to the work schedule. PART 4 - MEASUREMENT (Not Used) PART 5 - PAYMENT All costs incurred by the Contractor to acceptably implement the requirements of this Section shall be performed at no additional cost to the Airports Authority and are part of this Contract. END OF SECTION 011400



SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES 1

SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES

SECTION 012200 — UNIT PRICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1. RELATED DOCUMENTS

a. Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and other Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

b. The Price Proposal Form can be found in Section III, "Schedule”.

2. SUMMARY

a. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for unit prices.

b. Related Sections include the following:

1) Not Used. 2) Division 01 Section "Measurement and Payment" for procedures for measurement and

payment for unit-price items.

3. DEFINITIONS

a. Not Used.

b. A unit price is an amount proposed by offerors and stated on the Schedule as a price per unit of measurement for materials or services. An estimate of the quantities of work to be done and materials to be furnished under these specifications is given in Section III, "Schedule." It is given only as a basis for comparison of proposals and the award of the Contract. The Authority does not expressly or by implication agree that the actual quantities involved will correspond exactly therewith; nor shall Contractor plead misunderstanding or deception because of such estimates of quantities, or of the character, location, or other conditions pertaining to the work. Payment to Contractor will be made only for the actual quantities of work performed or materials furnished according to the plans and specifications. Refer to “Contract Provisions”, Section VII, Payments - Construction Contracts, Paragraph H, "Variation in Estimated Quantities."

4. PROCEDURES

a. Unit prices include all necessary material, plus cost for delivery, installation, insurance, applicable taxes, overhead, and profit. The sum of all extended unit prices in the Section III, "Schedule," shall be deemed to include all work described in the Contract Documents including Drawings and Specifications.



SECTION 012200 - UNIT PRICES 2

b. Measurement and Payment: Refer to individual Specification Sections for work that requires establishment of` unit prices. Methods of measurement and payment for unit prices are specified in those Sections and in Division 01 Section "Measurement and Payment."

c. The Authority reserves the right to reject Contractor's measurement of work-in-place that involves use of established unit prices and to have this work measured, at the Authority's expense, by an independent surveyor acceptable to Contractor.

d. List of Unit Prices: A list of unit prices is included in Section III “Schedule” of the Contract Documents Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials described under each unit price.

1) The Price Proposal Form can be found in Section III, "Schedule," of the Contract Documents. If applicable, Specification Sections referenced in the Schedule contain requirements for materials and methods described under each unit price.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

1. LIST OF UNIT PRICES (Not Used)




SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 1

SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms.

2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required

in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or

fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation method cannot be provided, if applicable.

b. Coordination of information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitutions with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes, such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects, with project names and addresses as well

as names and addresses of COTRs and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency, indicating and interpreting test results




for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from [ICC-

ES] <Insert applicable code organization>. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitutions

with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. l. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the

Contract Documents, except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials and is appropriate for applications indicated.

m. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

2. COTR Action: If necessary, COTR will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 calendar days of receipt of a request for substitution. COTR will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 calendar days of receipt of request, or 7 calendar days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or COTR's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

b. Use product specified if COTR does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.

3.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

3.3 PROCEDURES Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.

3.4 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for

change, but not later than 30 calendar days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.

1. Conditions: COTR will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following

conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, COTR will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results.

b. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. c. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. d. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. e. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. f. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. h. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has




been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed unless otherwise indicated.

C. Substitutions for Convenience: COTR will consider requests for substitution if received within 60

calendar days after the Notice to Proceed. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of COTR.

1. Conditions: COTR will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, COTR will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to COTR for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce

indicated results. d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has

been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

PART 4 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 5 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012500




THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK



SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 1

SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.

1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK COTR will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710 or other form as determined by the COTR.

1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: COTR will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by COTR are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Within 20 calendar days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the

Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to COTR 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work.

Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change,

including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES



SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 2

On Owner's approval of a Work Change Proposal Request, COTR will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701 or other document as dictated by the MWAA Contracting Manual aor the executed contract agreement for this work.

1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: COTR may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

B. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also

designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

C. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the

Construction Change Directive.

D. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

1.6 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Work Change Directive: COTR may issue a Work Change Directive on EJCDC Document C-940 or

other document as per the Contracting Manual or executed contract agreement for this work. Work Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. Work Change Directives contain a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the

Work Change Directive. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012600



SECTION 012900 - APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 1

SECTION 012900 - APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

B. Coordinate the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment with Contract CPM Schedule,

List of Subcontracts, and Submittal Log.


1.3 RELATED SECTIONS 1. Not Used. 2. Division 01 Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for administrative requirements governing use of unit

prices and determination of quantities of materials for use with unit prices. 3. Division 01 Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative

requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule.

4. Division 01 Section 017700 “Project Closeout” for submittal of items required before final payment.

5. Division 01 Section 017839 “Project Record Documents” for procedural requirements governing the submission of Project Record Documents.

6. Not Used.

1.4 DEFINITIONS Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and once accepted, to be used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets. b. Submittals Schedule. c. Contract CPM Schedule. d. List of products. e. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.




2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Contracting Officer at earliest possible date, but no later than 21 calendar days after the date of the Notice to Proceed.

3. On projects requiring cost-loaded CPM Schedules, the accepted cost loading will satisfy the requirements for the Schedule of Values.

4. Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide sub schedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment.

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items

for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:

a. Name of COTR. b. Name of Architect/Engineer. c. The Airports Authority’s Project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed:

a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Contract Modifications (numbers) that affect value. g. Dollar value. Percentage of the Contract Price to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted

to total 100 percent. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Price in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of

Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. Include separate line items under required principal subcontracts for the following items. The value assigned to the total of these line items shall be 5 percent of the Contract Price:

a. Testing and commissioning activities. b. Operation and Maintenance manuals. c. Punch list activities. d. Project Record Documents. e. Bonds and warranties. f. Demonstration and training.

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar. Total shall equal the Contract Price. 5. Contractor shall include all test and inspection activities in its CPM and establish a Schedule of

Values for all required QC documentation, all tests and inspection activities, reports, and procedures required in the Contract on a Section-by-Section basis. Additionally, Contractor shall include a pay line item specifically for Quality activities and QC Organizational personnel required by the General Conditions.

6. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Application for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

7. Differentiate between potential items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing if required.

8. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.




9. Allowances: If allowances are allowed provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.

10. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Application for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

11. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place must be shown as separate line items in the Schedule of Values.

12. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values with the next Applications for Payment when Contract Modifications result in a change in the Contract Price.

3.2 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as

certified by Contracting Officer and paid for by the Airports Authority.

B. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

C. Payment Application Times: Application for Payment shall coincide with CPM schedule monthly

update, or as otherwise indicated in the Agreement between the Airports Authority and Contractor. The period covered by each Application for Payment starts on the day following the end of the preceding period and shall not exceed one calendar month, unless otherwise approved by COTR.

D. Payment Application Forms: Use forms provided by the Contracting Officer, but supplied by

COTR, for Application for Payment.

E. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. The Airports Authority will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts of Contract Modifications issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

F. Transmittal: Submit Application for Payment through MWAA PMIS and MWAA Financial

Enterprise Management system and per executed Contract Agreement for this work. Transmit Applications for Payment with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application in a manner acceptable to Contracting Officer.

G. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With Final Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers.

1. The Airports Authority reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.

2. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to the Airports Authority.

H. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or




coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Schedule of unit prices. 5. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 8. Copies of building permits. 9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of

the Work. 10. Initial progress report. 11. Report of pre-construction conference. 12. Performance and payment bonds. 13. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required. 14. Submittal and approval of Contractor Safety Plan. 15. Subcontractor Payment Form: (Form J, "Contract Conditions," Section IX, "LDBE").

I. Monthly Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that shall accompany

the submittal of Contractor's monthly Application for Payment include the following: 1. Subcontractor Payment Form. 2. Monthly Progress Report, prepared according to requirements specified in Division 01 Section

"Construction Progress Documentation." 3. Evidence of payment for material on-site if reimbursement for such material is being requested. 4. Update of Contract Record Documents. 5. Monthly Quality Control Summary Report, prepared according to requirements specified in

Division 014000.

J. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Price.

2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Authority occupancy of designated portions of the Work, if applicable.

3. Advise COTR of change-over in security provisions.

K. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that

taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Price. 4. Evidence that claims have been settled. 5. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date

of Substantial Completion or when the Airports Authority took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

6. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement.




7. Return of all Airport identification badges and keys. PART 4 - MEASUREMENT (Not Used) PART 5 - PAYMENT (Not Used) END OF SECTION 012900







SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 1

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY This Section includes administrative requirements that the Contractor must provide for coordinating construction operations for the Contract including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Coordination drawings. 2. Conservation. 3. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 4. Project meetings:

a. Pre-award conference. b. Pre-construction conference. c. Pre-installation conference. d. Progress meetings. e. Partnering meetings



1.3 RELATED SECTIONS 1. Division 01 Section: "Execution" for the coordination of general installation and field-

engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 2. Division 01 Section "Project Closeout" for coordinating Contract closeout.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, mechanical, electrical, and otherwise. Contractor is cautioned that, where specific dimensions are not indicated or where Drawings are schematic in nature, as with most Electrical and Mechanical Drawings, Contractor shall have sole responsibility to coordinate the work to meet this requirement. Prepare and submit Coordination Drawings to COTR for review and approval as provided in "Coordination Drawings" Paragraph in "Submittals" Article of this Section.




4. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

C. Prepare similar memoranda for COTR and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is

required.

D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work and completion within the specified Contract duration. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Pre-installation conferences. 7. Start-up, check-out, and final acceptance of systems. 8. Project closeout activities. 9. Protection of existing and new work.

E. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with

consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.

F. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as the Airports Authority's property.

G. Temporary Utility Outages: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "General

Requirements."

3.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Before start of the Work, prepare Coordination Drawings for areas with limited space availability that necessitate maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components, and areas requiring coordination for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.

1. Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. 2. Indicate all dimensions provided on Contract Drawings and make specific note of dimensions

that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment, minimum clearance requirements, amounts of equipment and material to be installed, or other requirements. Provide alternate sketches for resolution of such conflicts to COTR for review. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations shall not be considered changes to the Contract.

3. Indicate required installation sequences. 4. Comply with requirements contained in Division 01 Section "Submittals." 5. Prepare coordination drawings of involved trades in a scale of not less than 1/4 inch = 1 foot or

larger for integration of different construction elements. Show sequences and relationships of




separate components to avoid conflicts in use of space. Any Work installed prior to review of coordination drawings will be at the Contractor’s risk and subsequent relocation require to avoid interference shall be made at no additional cost to the Airports Authority.

B. Key Personnel Names: At the pre-construction meeting, submit a list of Contractor's key

personnel assignments. Key personnel shall include but not necessarily be limited to Project Manager, Project Superintendent, Safety Manager, Safety Engineer, Quality Control Manager, Project Scheduler, Soil Excavation Engineers, and other personnel in attendance at Project site along with alternates. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep the list current at all times.

3.3 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents,

prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor’s Superintendent or other designated representative

acceptable to the COTR. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor’s accepted representative will be returned with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the

following: 1. Contract Name 2. Contract Number 3. Date 4. Name of Contractor 5. Name of COTR 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially 7. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate 8. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate 9. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate 10. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the

Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 11. Contractor's signature 12. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, color photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. 13. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions, thicknesses,

structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments.

C. Hard-Copy RFIs: Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.

D. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as

indicated above.




E. COTR’s Action: COTR will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow seven calendar days for COTR's response for each RFI.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.

2. COTR's action may include a request for additional information, in which case COTR's time for response will start again.

3. COTR's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal.

4. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify COTR in writing within tendays of receipt of the RFI response.

F. On receipt of COTR’s action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to

affected parties. Review response and notify COTR within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit

log weekly prior to progress meeting for inclusion in progress meeting minutes. Include the following:

1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name of COTR. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date COTR’s response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Proposal Request, as appropriate. 9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as

appropriate.

3.4 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL A. General: In addition to the Project Superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory

personnel as required for proper performance of the Work. 1. Contractor's understanding of the Contract Documents, cost and pricing data, contractual

requirements, and Contractor's capabilities, financial standing, and past experience prior to award.

3.5 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. Pre-award conference. 1. General: At the request of the Contracting Officer, A pre-award conference with Contractor

may be held before actual award of the Cotnract. The meeting will review Contractor's understanding of the Contract Documents, cost and pricing data, contractual requirements, and Contractor's capabilities, financial standing, and past experience prior to award.

a. Minutes: CO will record and distribute meeting minutes to all attendees and all relevant




parties. 2. Attendees: Contracting Officer, COTR, Authority Design Project Manager, Architect/Engineer,

Contractor and its key personnel nominated for assignment to the Contract, and major subcontractors if so requested by the Contracting Officer. Concerned parties shall each be represented by persons thoroughly familiar with and authorized to conclude matters relating to the work described in the Contract Documents. The Contracting Officer will chair the pre-award meeting.

3. Agenda: Significant discussion items that could affect award include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Provision and acceptability of payment and performance bonds. b. LDBE/MBE/WBE/DBE participation. c. Qualifications of key individuals. d. Quality-control experience. e. Percentage of work performed by own forces. f. Contractor's experience with similar work, including previous Authority contracts. g. Scheduling capabilities of Contractor. h. Financial standing of Contractor. i. Mobilization plan. j. Understanding of work described in the Contract Documents and the physical constraints

associated with work at the Airport. k. Equipment and manpower availability. l. Cost and pricing data.

4. Representations and commitments made by Contractor or its subcontractors shall be construed as binding to the Contract.

B. Pre-construction Conference:

1. General: COTR will schedule pre-construction conference and organizational meeting with Contractor after the Contracting Officer issues a notice of intent to award, or actually awards the Contract. The meeting will review the parties' responsibilities and personnel assignments.

a. Minutes: COTR will record and distribute meeting minutes to all attendees and relevant parties.

2. Attendees: Contracting Officer, COTR, Architect/Engineer, and their sub-consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Airport security. b. LBDE/MBE/WBE/DBE participation and certifications. c. Authority-controlled wrap-up insurance program. d. Airport Operations coordination. e. Preliminary construction schedule. f. Phasing. g. Critical work sequencing. h. Designation of key personnel. i. Procedures for processing field decisions and Contract Modifications. j. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. k. Distribution of the Contract Documents. l. Authority Construction guidelines. m. Submittal procedures.




n. Preparation of Record Documents. o. Use of the premises. p. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. q. Parking availability. r. Office, work, and storage areas. s. Equipment deliveries and priorities. t. Safety procedures. u. Quality-control requirements. v. First aid. w. Progress cleaning. x. Working hours. y. Authority Building Code requirements/permits.

4. Refer to Contract Provision "Pre-construction Requirements" for required submittals due at the pre-construction conference.

C. Schedule Update Meetings:

1. Conduct schedule udpate meetings before submittal of trhe Contractor's Application for Payment. Determine where each activity is, in relation to Contractor's CPM Schedule. Submit narrative and all information specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" if applicable.

2. Attendees: COTR, Contractor's Project Manager or Superintendent, The Contractor's Project Scheduler and the Airports Authoirt's Representative.

3. Submit the updated schedule, as bilaterally agreed on, along with the Application for Payment. 4. Present delay claims for discussion and, when possible, resolution.

D. Project Closeout Conference: COTR will schedule and conduct a Project Closeout Conference no

later than calendar 90 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion or other date as determined by COTR.

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout. 2. Attendees: Contracting Officer, COTR, Authority Design Project Manager, Architect/Engineer,

Contractor and its key personnel; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following:

a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection

for acceptance. c. Submittal of written warranties. d. Requirements for preparing sustainable design documentation. e. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. f. Requirements for demonstration and training. g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final

payment. i. Submittal procedures. j. Coordination of separate contracts. k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. l. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment.




m. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls. 4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

E. Weekly Progress Meetings:

1. General: COTR will conduct progress meetings weekly at regularly scheduled times convenient for all parties involved. Progress meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as coordination and special pre-installation meetings. Additionally, discussions will address administrative and technical issues of concern, determining resolutions, and development of deadlines for resolution within allowable time frames.

2. Minutes: COTR will record and distribute meeting minutes. 3. Attendees: As may be required by COTR, in addition to representatives of the Airports Authority

and Contractor, each subcontractor, supplier, Contractor’s Project Scheduler, and other entities concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

4. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Safety and Security. 2) Interface requirements. 3) Time. 4) Sequence of operations. 5) Status of submittals. 6) Deliveries. 7) Off-site fabrication. 8) Storage Areas 9) Access. 10) Site utilization. 11) Requests for information. 12) Submittals. 13) Noncompliance notices. 14) Temporary facilities and controls. 15) Work hours. 16) Resource allocation. 17) Hazards and risks. 18) Progress cleaning. 19) Quality and work standards. 20) Contract Modifications. 21) Documentation of information for payment requests. 22) Preparation of Record Documents.

5. Submit look-ahead schedules and project schedules in accordance with Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation".




PART 4 - MEASUREMENT (Not Used) PART 5 - PAYMENT All costs incurred by the Contractor to acceptably implement the requirements of this Section shall be performed at no additional cost to the Airports Authority and are part of this Contract. END OF SECTION 013100



SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 1

SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting construction progress with Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedules and Reports including the following:

A. Preliminary Construction Schedule and related narrative, including monthly updates until approval of Baseline Schedule by the Authority.

B. Construction Progress Baseline Schedule: Provide initial schedule in CPM format with cost and

resource loading, and related narrative and cash flow projection curves.

C. Short Interval Schedule: Four-week look ahead schedule, updated weekly.

D. Recovery Schedule: Submitted when directed by the Authority.

E. Monthly Updates of the Schedules: Submit in formats established for Preliminary and Baseline Schedules with cost and resource loading and related narrative and cash flow projection curves.

F. Submittals Schedule.

G. Schedule of Tests and Inspections.

H. Record, As-Built CPM Schedule.

I. Construction schedule updating reports.

J. Daily construction reports.

K. Site condition reports.

L. Cost loading and cash flow schedule.

M. Manpower histogram.

N. Material status report.

O. Construction equipment report.

P. Special reports.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

MWAA Construction Manual, Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and other Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.3 RELATED DIVISIONS:




A. Division 01 10 00 - “Summary” for products ordered in advance and Authority-Furnished products.

B. Division 01 29 00 - “Applications for Payment” for Schedule of Values and for costs associated

with preparing and updating Preliminary and Baseline Project Schedules and Reports.

C. Division 01 31 00 - “Project Management and Coordination” for Project meetings and minutes.

D. Division 01 33 00 - "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.

E. Division 01 40 00 - "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections and for Material Location Reports.

F. Division 01 60 00 - “Product Requirements” for Product List.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: The fundamental unit of work in a project plan and schedule. Each activity has defined

geographical boundaries and a detailed estimate of resources required to construct the task. Each is assigned a unique description, activity number, activity codes, and dollar values.

1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early

start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. Activity Duration: The number of days required to complete an activity.

C. Calendars: The allowable and non-allowable days of work during a calendar year for a specific

activity.

D. Cost Loading: The allocation of the Schedule of Values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities shall equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise approved by COTR.

E. Contract Baseline Construction Schedule: A cost- and resource-loaded CPM schedule covering

the entire project period of performance specified by the Contract.

F. Critical Path: The critical path is the longest connected chain of interdependent activities in a CPM network that determines completion of the Project.

G. Critical Path Method (CPM): A method of planning and scheduling a construction project where

activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities are optimally performed to maintain the critical path of Project.

H. CPM Network: The structure of the schedule. The network is the representation that defines the

construction logic in terms of all the activities with their logical dependencies.

I. CPM Schedule: A cost-loaded CPM schedule covering the entire Time of Performance from




Notice to Proceed through Substantial Completion. Also referred to as Baseline Schedule.

J. Excusable Delay: Delays caused by conditions that are reasonably unforeseen and not within the contractor’s control.

K. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.

L. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

M. Free Float: The amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early

start of the successor activity.

N. Total Float: The amount of time an activity can be delayed from its earliest start date without delaying the end of Project. Total Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Authority or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.

O. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for

greater detail. Primarily used to indicate changes to the construction plan.

P. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element.

Q. Milestone: Events in time, or the sequence of work that have been identified as being important

reference points. May indicate contract requirements.

R. Mitigation: The recovery of lost time due to external or internal issues, regardless of fault.

S. Network Diagram: A graphic diagram of a network schedule, showing activities and activity relationships.

T. Period of Performance: The total time allotted in a contract to achieve Final Completion.

U. Preliminary Construction Schedule: A CPM schedule covering every activity involved in the

contractual scope of work to be started or completed within the first 90 days of the Construction Work Package.

V. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of

an activity as scheduled.

W. Recovery: Mitigation of project delay, caused by the Contractor, that returns milestone completion dates in compliance with the contract.

X. Recovery CPM Schedule: Proposed means to bring Project schedule back into compliance in the

event Work fails to meet contractual milestones.

Y. Schedule Narrative: A written report that includes all pertinent information regarding the development, update, status, and changes of the schedule update.




Z. Time Impact Analysis: A scheduling technique used to assess and quantify the effects of an unplanned event.

AA. Work: The activities the Contractor is required to undertake and complete under the scope of

the contract. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPUTER SCHEDULING SOFTWARE

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, use Primavera P6 Professional Project Management for Windows or equivalent scheduling program as directed by COTR. Use latest version unless earlier version required by Authority.

B. System shall be capable of producing computer generated reports with following minimum

information:

a. Activity identification code keyed to Summary Schedule activities. b. Activity number and activity description. c. From date of report, remaining working days left until early finish of each activity. d. Activity percent complete. e. Activity duration. f. Early start/finish and late start/finish. g. Actual start date/finish date. h. Total float. i. Free float. j. Predecessor and successor activities for each individual activity including precedence logic

relationships. k. Comparison between current update and original baseline schedule. l. Critical Item List of activities with 15 days or less total float. m. Scheduled and actual labor for each activity. n. Scheduled and actual progress payment for each activity.

C. Software shall be capable of compiling total dollar value of complete and partially complete

activities.

D. Software shall be capable of accepting revised completion dates, as modified by approved time extensions, and re-computing activity dates and float accordingly.

E. The Contractor shall apply at a minimum the following default settings:

1. Projects shall contain only project level activity codes and calendars. 2. Duration types shall be set to “Fixed Duration & Units” for all activities. 3. Percent Complete Types for all activities shall be set to “Physical”. 4. Time Period Performances shall be set to the following:

a. Hours/Day = 8 b. Hours/Week = 40 c. Hours/Month = 172 d. Hours/Year = 2000

5. Critical activities are to be defined as “Longest Path”




6. Schedule option shall be set to “Retained Logic” 7. Technique for computing performance percent complete shall be set to “Activity % Complete” 8. Compute total float as setting shall be set to “Finish Float = Late Finish – Early Finish” 9. Calculation of multiple float paths shall be done using “Free Float”

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Time of beginning, rate of progress, and date of completion of Work are of essence of this Contract. Work shall be executed with such progress as required to prevent delay to other contractors working on other contracts at Site, if any, Contract milestones, or general completion of Contract.

B. Responsibility for completion: Clearly state requirements in Preliminary Construction Schedule,

Short Interval Schedule, Contractor’s Construction Schedule (CPM), Recovery Schedule when applicable, and related data and Reports items listed in this Section.

1. Should anticipated completion of any milestone appear to extend beyond 30 days of contractual obligation, identify steps necessary to recover progress at no additional cost to Authority including, but not limited to:

a. Reschedule sequence of activities to achieve maximum practical concurrent accomplishment of Work activities.

b. Increase number of working hours per shift, shifts per working day, working days per week, or amount of construction equipment, or any combination of foregoing, sufficiently to substantially eliminate lag in scheduled progress.

2. COTR may require Contractor to submit for COTR's review, at no additional cost to Authority, such supplementary progress schedules as may be deemed necessary to demonstrate manner in which progress schedule will be regained.

C. Failure to include any element of Work required for performance of Contract shall not excuse

Contractor from completing Work in accordance with Contract Documents and within applicable completion times, notwithstanding COTR's review of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

D. Nothing in these requirements shall be deemed to negate or diminish Contractor's authority,

means and methods, and responsibilities to plan and schedule Work as required, subject to requirements of Contract Documents.

E. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work, such as

Notice to Proceed, to date of Final Completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early

completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order. 2. Schedule updates having early completion date shall show time between early completion date

and contractual milestones as Total Float. 3. Actions of the Authority causing Completion to occur after proposed early completion date but

not after contractual milestone date identified in Contract shall not grounds for adjustment of Contract Time or Contract Sum in accordance with CMR Contract.

F. Failure to comply with specified corrective measures shall be grounds for the COTR’s

determination that Contractor is not prosecuting Work with such diligence as necessary to




ensure completion within the time specified. Such determination may result in termination of Contractor's right to proceed with all Work, or any separable part thereof, in accordance with applicable provisions of General Conditions.

G. Revisions: CPM Schedules shall not be revised or include changes from the previously approved

Schedule updates, other than recording actual elements of Project progress as approved by COTR. Submit written notification and explanation of proposed changes to COTR. Submit separately revised CPM Schedules, reports, and supporting documentation for the proposed changes to the Schedule, including the addition of Fragnets for COTR review. COTR may direct the Contractor to make changes to the CPM Schedule.

H. Activity Calendars will be defined and applied to each activity based on the specific

characteristics for the defined work. At a minimum, the following calendars will be defined and applied to the appropriate activities:

1. Indoor Calendar - A calendar consisting of normal work days that are not affected by adverse weather. Non-working days include weekends and applicable holidays.

2. Weather Calendar – A calendar consisting of normal work days that can be affected by adverse weather. Non-working days include weekends, applicable holidays, and anticipated adverse weather days (3.8.E.1) assigned randomly to work days per month.

3. 7-Day Calendar – A calendar that is used to define working days equal to calendar days. This is applied to activities that are not affected by non-working days and progress seven days a week.

4. The application of calendars into the schedule must be coordinated with activity durations, logic, and Contract Time.

I. Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) – The WBS for the project shall include at a minimum the

following first and second levels, if applicable to the Contract Scope: 1. Executive Summary

a. Milestones – Include all contractual milestones as well as any project milestone needed to properly track the start and completion of the project.

b. Summary – Level of Effort activities that track the start and completion of major work phases.

c. Not Applicable 2. Administrative

a. Submittals and Approvals – Include sufficient activities that delineate the transfer of responsibility from Contractor to Owner.

b. Not Applicable c. Not Applicable

3. Construction – Include sufficient detail within the WBS that accurately describes the division of work Phases/Areas .

4. Closeout – Include sufficient activities to progress the completion of the project from substantial completion to final completion, including all necessary actions from third-party entities that are required to deliver the project to Final Completion. These activities may include:

a. Commissioning b. Testing and Inspection c. Administrative Documents / Manuals d. Final Completion

J. Activities: Treat each separate construction task as a separate numbered activity for each main




element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 14 working days, unless

specifically allowed by COTR. Use "One Workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time.

2. Activity Description: Shall define the work to be performed and its physical location. The activity description for each activity shall be designed with the purpose of clearly showing a single responsibility for the execution of the activity from beginning to end. This description shall have the following form:

a. VERB - SUBJECT – LOCATION Example: Install Drywall Panels – North Wall – Room 203

3. Material Procurement Activities: Include the material procurement process as separate activities in the schedule for long lead items and major construction materials that will take 60 calendar days or more to acquire. Material procurement activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

4. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300 "Submittals" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with submittal schedule.

5. Activity Coding: Coordinate with the COTR to establish minimum requirements for structure and values for the first 5 code fields. Activities in the schedule shall be sorted or grouped by project specific activity codes to reflect information related to an activity, such as Responsibility, Phase/Stage, and Area/Location. At a minimum the project schedule shall contain the following activity code categories:

a. Single Responsibility b. Area of Work c. Modification Number d. Bid Item / SOV Item e. Phase of Work

Activity code categories are not limited to the mandatory codes and may contain additional codes as needed. 6. Activity ID Design: The activity IDs shall consist of unique alpha-numeric characters specifically

designed to differentiate the type, location and categorization of the activity: Example: SNH-CIII-F0010

7. Activity Notebook: The activity notebook may be used to record activity information. However, any impact or change to the activity and/or project must be handled in accordance to the other items in this section to include notification requirements.

8. User Defined Fields: The usage of user defined fields is acceptable with prior permission and approval of COTR.

9. Not Applicable a. Not Applicable b. Not Applicable c. Not Applicable d. Not Applicable e. Not Applicable f. Not Applicable

10. Not Applicable

a. Not Applicable b. Not Applicable c. Not Applicable




d. Not Applicable e. Not Applicable f. Not Applicable

11. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 calendar days for startup and testing. 12. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial

Completion and allow time for COTR's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

13. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than calendar 60 days for completion of punch list items and final completion or as required by the Contract.

K. Activity Logic Limitations: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract

Documents and as follows in the schedule and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase including interdependence of phases

and related scheduling requirements. Adhere to the contractual sequence of work based on phased scope requirements if applicable.

2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 3. Work by Authority: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by

Authority. 4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery

date indicated in Section 011000 "Project and General Information." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.

5. Authority-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 011000 "Project and General Information." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.

6. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control.

7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work,

including, but not limited to, the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. l. Cleaning.




m. Startup and placement into final use and operation.

8. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:

a. Structural completion. b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning. c. Permanent space enclosure. d. Completion of mechanical installation. e. Completion of electrical installation. f. Substantial Completion.

9. Restricted Logic/Activity Characteristics: The following are not to be used within the CPM

schedule: a. Negative predecessor or successor lags. b. Start-to-Finish logic ties. c. Mandatory activity and project constraints. Only use “or after” or “or before” constraints.

L. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but

not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion. All milestones are to be linked as part of, and in line with, the applicable construction sequence.

M. CPM Schedule Reports: Concurrent with Preliminary and Contractor’s Baseline Construction

Schedules and including updates, submit each of the following reports. Format reports to include Gantt Chart and tabular data for each activity. Reports shall contain activity ID number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float, and as requested by COTR. The following are CPM Schedule exhibits that are produced from the P6 software:

1. Activity Report: List of every activity, sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.

2. Critical Paths Report: For each contractual milestone, graphically indicate the critical path(s) driving its completion. Milestones appearing on the same path may be jointly reported. Add WBS to report for reference.

3. Comparison to Baseline Report: In addition to items mentioned above submit Activities Report showing variance to Baseline finish dates and displaying baseline activity bars on Gantt chart.

4. Comparison to Last Update Report: When submitting Updates, in addition to items mentioned above submit Activities Report showing variance to finish dates shown on previous approved Update and displaying corresponding baseline activity bars on Gantt chart.

5. Not Applicable 6. Progress Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates.

a. In first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. In second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as of list date.

b. Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with progress meetings. In both value summary lists, tabulate "actual percent complete" and "cumulative value completed" with total at bottom. Submit value summary printouts with Applications for Payment.




N. Monthly Progress Report: Monthly Progress Reports shall be submitted as attachments to the Contractor’s monthly Application for Payment. Describes, at a minimum, the Contractor’s plan of operation for meeting the project milestones and the Final Completion date, a critical path analysis, a discussion of problems encountered, and proposed solution thereof, work calendars, constraints, delays experienced, and any pending Time Impact Analysis (TIA), float consumption as a result of either the Authority or the Contractor, documentation of and logic changes, duration changes, resource changes or other relevant changes. Reports shall include:

1. Description of overall progress for the preceding month 2. Critical path analysis 3. Discussion of problems encountered and proposed solution thereof 4. Delays experienced and proposed recovery measures 5. Monthly reconciliation of weather impact 6. Status and impact of contract modifications 7. Documentation of logic changes 8. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or

commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: a. Unresolved issues. b. Unanswered Requests for Information. c. Rejected or unreturned submittals. d. Notations on returned submittals. e. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.

9. Other changes made to the schedule since the previous monthly update. 10. Not Applicable 11. Not Applicable 12. Not Applicable

3.2 PRELIMINARY CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Not Applicable

B. No Work shall be performed prior to submittal of preliminary project schedule, including

manpower and cost reports. Submittal of preliminary project schedule, including manpower and cost reports and other appropriate reports and network diagrams subsequently specified in article titled “Contractor’s Construction Schedule” as required by COTR, is a condition precedent to issuance and payment of initial Application for Payment.

C. Update schedule monthly during the Startup period, as part of payment application process.

D. Show work tasks in Preliminary Construction Schedule that will or may affect completion dates

including, but not limited to: 1. Planning – Include activities required for the implementation of all work necessary for the first

ninety (90) days, including design, preparator meetings, walk-throughs, etc. 2. Mobilization – Include all elements of mobilization for the entire project, with added detail for

the first ninety (90) days 3. Procurement / Fabrication – Include critical long lead items as well as material and resources

needed for construction for the first ninety (90) days. 4. Submittals – Include all critical submittals needed for the first ninety (90) days of construction,

as well as those that will be submitted within the first (90) days.




5. Construction – Include all activities that cover the entire first ninety (90) days of scope. These activities shall transfer to the Contract Baseline Progress Schedule with little or no modification of duration or logic.

E. Include the order, sequence, and interdependence of all significant work items including

mobilization, demobilization, testing and commissioning, construction, procurement, fabrication, and delivery of critical or special materials and equipment; utility interruption coordination; submittals and approvals of critical Samples, Shop Drawings, procedures, or other reasonable requirements.

F. Submit a narrative describing the Contractor’s approach to mobilization, procurement, and

construction during the first 90 days shall accompany the Preliminary CPM Schedule. The narrative shall elaborate on the basis for durations, production rates, major equipment to be used, and shall identify all major assumptions used to develop the 90-day schedule.

G. Not Applicable

H. Not Applicable

I. Submit revised Preliminary Construction Schedule within seven (7) days after meeting for COTR’s

information.

J. Not Applicable

K. Actualized data from the Preliminary Construction Schedule updates must be identical to the actualized data from the first update of the Final Contractor’s Baseline Construction Schedule.

3.3 CONTRACTOR'S BASELINE CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)

A. Contractor’s CPM Construction Schedule (Baseline Schedule) will establish scheduling for the

Project through Completion. The CPM Schedule shall be prepared to include the data for the total Contract Requirements/Scope of Work and the critical path activities shall be identified, including critical paths for interim completion milestones. Scheduled start or completion dates imposed on the schedule by the Contractor shall be consistent with the contract milestone dates and milestone dates established for the Contract Requirements/Scope of Work.

B. Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a cost- and resource-loaded, time-scaled CPM

network analysis diagram for the Work.

C. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 45 days after date established for the Notice to Proceed.

D. The phasing, sequence, and interdependence of all significant work items as detailed in the

Construction Documents including mobilization, demobilization, testing of materials and equipment, commissioning of systems, construction, procurement, fabrication, delivery and installation, any long-lead time orders for major or significant materials and equipment, utility interruption coordination, submittals and approvals of critical Samples, Shop Drawings, procedures, or other reasonable requirements that may be required shall be included.




E. Ensure that actual number of activities in the CPM Schedule is sufficient to assure adequate planning of the Work and to permit monitoring and evaluation of progress and the analysis of time impacts.

F. Ensure activities are included that cover work by the Authority, or utility agencies, and other

third parties that may affect or be affected by the Contractor’s activities.

G. Include adequate activities that reference all work items to identify Subcontractors or other performing parties.

H. The CPM Schedule shall comprise of a well-organized Work Breakdown Structure (WBS), the

development of which is based on deliverable-oriented methodology that captures all the project activities.

I. The contractor must include a narrative that explains the basis for the Contractor’s

determination of construction logic, estimated durations, cost and resource allocations, estimated quantities and production rates, hours per shift, workdays per week, and types, numbers, and capacities of major construction equipment to be used.

J. Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excuse

Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of COTR's approval of the schedule.

3.4 SCHEDULE PROGRESS UPDATE

A. Submission of the Schedule Progress Update shall include a schedule narrative that includes all

items listed under CPM Schedule Reports & Monthly Progress Reports.

B. The CPM Schedule shall accurately show all as-built activities completed from the issuance of the Notice to Proceed up to the submittal of the current schedule.

C. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedules and for reporting progress.

Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key personnel, including subcontractor’s personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information.

D. If deemed necessary, the COTR can direct the submission of weekly schedule updates up to the

satisfactory recovery of delay at no extra cost to the Authority.

E. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

F. Not Applicable

G. Not Applicable

H. Not Applicable

I. Not Applicable




J. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same

locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.

3.5 SHORT INTERVAL SCHEDULE (4 WEEK LOOK AHEAD)

Not Applicable

1. Not Applicable 2. Not Applicable 3. Not Applicable 4. Not Applicable

3.6 RECOVERY SCHEDULE

A. When periodic updates indicate the Work is 30 or more calendar days behind the current

approved CPM schedule, or 30 or more calendar days behind critical milestones inclusive of executed contract modifications and extensions, or if the schedule contains more than 30 calendar days of negative float, the Contractor shall submit, within 7 days of request by the Authority, a separate recovery CPM schedule indicating practical means by which the Contractor intends to regain compliance with the CPM schedule to achieve time of Substantial Completion of the Work in accordance with Contract Time.

B. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required for

achieving compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished, subject to COTR approval.

C. Cost of creating Recovery CPM Schedule, and costs for regaining compliance with the CPM

schedule including additional personnel, overtime, and other means agreed to by COTR shall be provided by Contractor at no additional cost to the Authority.

D. The Authority may withhold progress payments subsequent to the reporting month until such

Recovery CPM Schedule is submitted by Contractor and approved by COTR.

3.7 CONTRACT MODIFICATIONS, DELAYS AND REQUESTS FOR EXTENSION OF TIME

A. Time Impact Analysis (TIA) – For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis (TIA) using a network fragnet to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall Project schedule. The TIA should be submitted as soon as possible, but no later than three (3) working days after the inception of the issue.

B. The allowable method for conducting a TIA will be a forward-looking, prospective method of

analysis. This method adds a modeled event, or Fragnet, to an unimpacted schedule to determine the effect on the critical path and the project completion. The TIA shall be submitted as backup for, but not limited to contract modifications, potential change orders, notifications of unforeseen site conditions, and potential delaying issues.

C. TIAs shall include all available backup information for each assertion expressed by the TIA. TIAs

shall also include a narrative in accordance with narrative and report clauses within this section.




D. The COTR may direct the Contractor to submit a retrospective or forensic TIA at the COTR’s

discretion.

E. If the Contractor seeks an extension of time it must, among other things, prepare a TIA showing the impact to critical path activities on the CPM network at the time of the delay.

1. Provide a time-impact analysis that illustrates the impact during the update period in which the event occurred, that the event has been mitigated to the greatest possible extent, and that the event still impacts overall completion of the applicable Construction Work Package.

2. Time Impact Analyses shall be submitted to the Authority in accordance with these specifications. An electronic copy and two (2) hard copies of each TIA Report together with electronic files in both PDF and XER file formats using the latest version of Primavera P6 Professional Project Management scheduling software or as otherwise directed by COTR.

3. Upon approval, a copy of the TIA signed by the Authority will be returned to the Contractor and incorporated in to the next CPM Schedule Update. A TIA related to an Authority directed change shall be incorporated into and attached to the corresponding Contract Modification.

3.8 ANTICIPATED ADVERSE WEATHER

A. Adverse weather days and holidays incorporated into the schedule shall not constitute Excusable

Delay or otherwise entitle the Contractor to an extension of time or any other relief. A day shall not be considered an adverse weather day unless adverse weather prevents the Contractor from progressing critical path activities for 50 percent or more of the workday.

B. The following number of days of adverse weather are anticipated for each month of each

calendar year as follows: 1. January - 7. 2. February - 5. 3. March - 6. 4. April - 6. 5. May - 8. 6. June - 6. 7. July - 6. 8. August - 7. 9. September - 5. 10. October - 5. 11. November - 5. 12. December - 6.

C. In preparing the CPM Schedule, the Contractor shall reflect the above anticipated adverse

weather days on all weather-dependent activities. Weather-caused delays shall not result in any additional compensation to the Contractor.

D. The number of actual adverse weather days shall be calculated chronologically from the first to

the last day in each month.

E. On days where adverse weather is encountered, the Contractor shall list all critical activities under progress and shall indicate the impact adverse weather had, if any, on the progress of such activities. This information shall be presented at the end of the adverse weather day to the COTR




or its authorized representative for its review and approval.

F. If the Contractor is found eligible for an extension of time for a Construction Work Package, the Contracting Officer will issue a modification reflecting such extension. The extension of time will be made on a calendar day basis.

3.9 RECORD AS-BUILT CPM SCHEDULE

A. Upon completion of each Construction Work Package and as a condition of final payment for that

Construction Work Package, the Contractor shall submit an electronic copy and two (2) hard copies of a Record As-Built CPM Schedule showing actual start and finish dates for all work activities and milestones, based on the accepted monthly updates.

B. As a condition precedent to release of retention, last update to Contractor’s Construction

Schedule shall be identified as “Record/As Built Schedule” and shall reflect exact manner in which project was actually constructed, including start and completion dates, activities, sequences, and logic.

C. Record/As built schedule shall be signed and certified by Contractor and construction scheduler

as being true reflection of manner in which Project was actually constructed.

D. These schedule submittals shall be in tabular and in time-scaled PDM plot formats.

3.10 Not Applicable

A. Not Applicable Not Applicable

1. Not Applicable 2. Not Applicable 3. Not Applicable 4. Not Applicable 5. Not Applicable 6. Not Applicable 7. Not Applicable 8. Not Applicable 9. Not Applicable 10. Not Applicable 11. Not Applicable

B. Material Location Reports:

At monthly intervals, prepare a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at the site. The list shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with the list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for all materials or items of equipment being fabricated or stored away from the building site. Submit copies of the list to the COTR monthly as an attachment to the Application for Payment. See Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for additional requirements.

C. Manpower Histogram Report: With initial detailed project schedule and each update, submit histogram depicting total project craft manpower and craft manpower for own forces and forces of each subcontractor for each month.




1. Histogram shall be based on and be in substantive agreement with number of shifts and crew sizes by craft in Contractor’s Construction Schedule.

2. Show actual manpower for each month during construction period to date and required manpower for both base scope and Change Order Work each month necessary to complete remaining activities, including Change Order Work, to ensure timely project completion.

D. Construction Equipment Report:

With initial Contractor’s Construction Schedule and each update, submit tabular report listing each major piece of construction equipment for each subcontractor for each month.

1. Describe each major piece of equipment separately, identified and numbered in report. 2. Tabular report shall be based upon, and be in substantive agreement with, number of shifts and

crew sizes by craft in Contractor’s Construction Schedule. 3. Updates shall show actual construction equipment for each month during construction period

to date and required construction equipment for each month necessary to complete remaining activities, including Change Order Work, on early finish date.

3.11 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related

directly to the Work, prepare and submit a Special Report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information.

B. Submit special reports directly to COTR within 24 hours of an occurrence. Distribute copies of

report to parties affected by the occurrence.

C. Notify COTR in advance when Special Events are known or predictable. PART 4 - QUALITY ASSURANCE

4.1 Not Applicable

A. Not Applicable

B. Within 5 days after Notice to Proceed provide statement to COTR indicating following: 1. Identification, qualifications, and experience of construction scheduler and other members of

Contractor's scheduling staff. 2. References for not less than 3 previous projects on which construction scheduler has utilized

scheduling means similar to that required for this project with scheduling requirements equal to or exceeding scheduling requirements specified for this Project.

3. Description of scheduling system to be utilized.

C. Project Scheduler shall be classified as one of Contractor’s key personnel for construction services.

D. Construction Scheduler shall be on Site as required for purpose of continuously monitoring,

modifying, or updating the approved CPM Schedule.

E. The Project Scheduler shall be an active participant at all meetings related to progress, alleged




delays, and time impacts.

F. Construction Scheduler shall attend meetings pertaining to scheduling, progress of Work, and alleged delays and time impacts.

4.2 PRECONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE KICKOFF MEETING

A. COTR will schedule pre-construction conference and organizational meeting with Contractor

after the Contracting Officer issues a notice of intent to award, or actually awards the Contract. The meeting will review the parties' responsibilities and personnel assignments.

B. COTR will conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100

"Project Management and Coordination". Scheduling Requirements will be discussed at the Preconstruction Conference to review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's CPM schedule, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss constraints, including phasing, work stages, area separations, interim milestones, and

partial Authority occupancy. 4. Review delivery dates for Authority-furnished products. 5. Review schedule for work of Authority's separate contracts. 6. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies. 9. Review time required for Project closeout and Authority startup procedures, including

commissioning activities. 10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule.

PART 5 - PAYMENT Approval of the Contractor’s monthly Application for Payment shall be contingent, among other factors, on the submittal of a satisfactory monthly schedule update. Application for Payment shall follow the requirements set forth in Division 012900. END OF SECTION 013200







SECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC AND VIDEO RECORDING DOCUMENTATION 1

SECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC AND VIDEO RECORDING DOCUMENTATION PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Preconstruction photographs and video recordings. 2. Photographic and video recordings of key construction activities. 3. Daily and monthly construction photographs and video recordings. 4. Video recording of Demonstration and Training 5. Final Completion construction photographs.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section 01 "Submittals" for submitting construction photographs. 2. Division 01 Section 01 “Quality Requirements” for photographic and video-recording of daily

site activities and key construction activities. 3. Division 01 Section 01 "Execution and Closeout Requirements" for submitting photographic

documentation as Project Record Documents at Project closeout. 4. Not Used.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: Submit the name, position, qualifications, and sample photos and videos

taken by individuals proposed to be assigned responsibility for photographic and video recording documentation.

B. Quality Control Plan: Include the processes, procedures and requirements for photographic and

video recording documentation in the Quality Control Plan.

C. File Naming Convention: Submit the proposed file naming convention for photographs and video recordings.

D. File Delivery and Storage Format: Submit the proposed file delivery and storage format and

method for photographs and video recordings. The photographic and video recording storage format is to be capable of sorting or searching based on: date of the photograph or recording; the location of the work; and the work activity.

E. Key Plan: Submit a key plan including a description of each work area with notation for location

and direction of photographs and video recordings. Indicate elevation or story of construction.

F. Digital Photographs 1. Submit all digital photographic image files within five (5) calendar days of taking photographs

via Unifier, or other delivery and storage format as approved by the COTR. 2. Monthly Submittal: Each month, submit all photographic documentation for the month and a




copy of the updated tracking log for photographs. 3. Required photographic documentation: The minimum requirements for photographic

documentation is: a. Pre-construction conditions for each work area b. Key construction activities c. Daily progress of the work with focus on critical activities d. Conditions at the time of final completion or portion thereof.

G. Video Recordings

1. Submit all video recording documentation within five (5) calendar days of taking video recordings via two (2) portable storage devices or other storage format as approved by the COTR.

2. Monthly Submittal: Each month, submit an updated log documenting all video recordings, to include: the date of the video recording; the location; the work activity; the video recorder’s name; and the Contractor’s name and contract number.

3. Required video recording documentation: The minimum requirements for video recording documentation is:

a. Pre-construction conditions for each work area b. Key construction activities c. Weekly progress of the work with focus on critical activities d. Demonstration and training provided for the Airports Authority operations and maintenance

personnel e. Conditions at the time of final completion for each Construction task order or portion

thereof.

H. Consolidated File of Photographic and Video Recordings at Final Completion: The Contractor shall catalog and provide a complete set of all photographs and video recordings upon final completion.

1.4 USAGE RIGHTS

Transfer copyright usage rights from the photographers and video recorders to the Airports Authority for unlimited reproduction of photographic and video recording documentation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC AND VIDEO RECORDING DOCUMENTATION

A. Digital Images 1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of eight (8) megapixels. 2. Format: Provide color images in JPG format with minimum 3200 by 2400 pixels, in unaltered

original files, with same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped. 3. Date and Time Stamp: Each photographic is to be date and time stamped to show when the

photograph was created. 4. File Name: Each photograph file is to be named with reference to:

a. Date the photograph was created b. Location c. Work area and activity d. Name of the photographer e. Name of the Contractor and contract number.




5. Tracking log: Develop and maintain a tracking log for all photographs.

B. Video Recordings 1. Provide high-resolution, color, digital video recordings on a portable storage device, or other

delivery and storage format as approved by the COTR. 2. Narrative: Provide verbal, narrative description to accompany the video recording. 3. Organization and Identification: On each portable storage device, provide a label printed

directly on the portable storage device with the following information: a. Date video recording was recorded b. Location c. Work activity d. Duration of the recording in minutes and seconds e. Name of the video recorder f. Name of the Contractor and contract number

4. Tracking log: Develop and maintain a tracking log for all video recordings, to include: the date of the video recording; the location; work activity; the video recorder’s name; and the Contractor’s name and contract number.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. The Quality Control Manager shall be responsible for the provision of the required photographic and video recording documentation. The processes, procedures and requirements for photographic and video recording documentation shall be detailed in the Quality Control Plan. The requirements, status and work planning for provision of the required photographic and video recording documentation shall be provided to the Airports Authority during the regularly scheduled Quality Control briefings. Key construction activities that require photographic and or video recording are to be identified and reviewed at the Quality Control briefings with the Airports Authority.

B. Key Construction Activities: Key construction activities to be documented using photographs and

or video recording include, but are not limited to activities such as: foundations; structural steel; concrete placement; plumbing; electrical wiring and equipment; glass and curtain-walls; roofing and waterproofing; maintenance of traffic; temporary facilities; and other activities of major significance.

3.2 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCMUMENTATION

A. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without

alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.

B. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting mobilization, demolition or construction, take color photographs of each work area and surrounding properties from a variety of vantage points.

1. Provide a minimum of twenty (20) photographs to show existing conditions at each work area before starting the work.

2. Provide a minimum of twenty (20) photographs of existing buildings and facilities adjacent to the work area to accurately record the physical conditions before starting work.




C. Photographs of Key Construction Activities: Provide a minimum of twenty (20) photographs for each key construction activity showing all aspects of the work.

D. Daily Site Photographs: Provide a minimum of ten (10) site photographs daily to illustrate the

status and progress of work activities with focus on critical activities.

E. Monthly Construction Photographs: Provide a minimum of twenty (20) site photographs to illustrate the overall status and progress of the work.

F. Final Completion Construction Photographs

1. Provide a minimum of twenty (20) photographs upon Final Completion or portion thereof to show final conditions.

2. Provide a minimum of twenty (20) photographs of existing buildings and facilities adjacent to the work area to accurately record the physical conditions upon completion of the work.

3.3 VIDEO RECORDINGS - GENERAL

A. Recording: Use a tripod-mounted and or a handheld video recorder to document site conditions,

progress, status of work, key construction activities, and demonstration and training. Display continuous running time, and date and time stamp each recording. At the start of each video recording, record the date, time, the location, the work activity, the person performing the video recording, the name of the Contractor, the contract number, and the weather conditions to include the temperature reading at the jobsite.

B. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by audio narration as the video recording is

recorded. Include a description of items being viewed, recent events, and planned activities. Describe the vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction.

3.4 VIDEO RECORDINGS

A. Preconstruction Video Recording: Before starting mobilization, demolition or construction record

video for each work site and surrounding facilities from a variety of vantage points. 1. Show existing conditions adjacent to the work site before starting the work. 2. Show existing buildings either on or adjoining the jobsite to accurately record the physical

conditions prior to the start of demolition and construction.

B. Video Recording of Key Construction Activities: Provide a video recording for each key construction activity showing all aspects of the work.

C. Weekly Video Recording: Provide a weekly video recording to illustrate the status and progress of

work activities with focus on critical activities.

D. Video Recording for Demonstration and Training: Provide video recording of the demonstration and training of the Airports Authority’s operations and maintenance personnel as required by Specification Section 017900.

E. Final Completion Video Recording: Provide a video recording upon Final Completion or portion

thereof to show final conditions of the completed work, the adjacent buildings and facilities, and




any adjacent work that is in progress. PART 4 - MEASUREMENT (Not Used) PART 5 - PAYMENT (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013233







SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTALS 1

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTALS PART 1 - GENERAL


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 01 Section “Application for Payment” 2. Division 01 Section “Construction Progress Documentation” 3. Division 01 Section “Photographic Documentation” 4. Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” 5. Division 01 Section "Project Closeout" for submitting warranties. 6. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record

Specifications, and Record Product Data 7. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires the COTR's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require the COTR's approval.

Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

C. Oracle Primavera Unifier: Oracle Primavera Unifier is a Web-based software service that the Airports Authority requires the Contractor and the Architect-Engineer use on this contract. Oracle Primavera Unifier is to be used for Submittals, to include the transmittal, distribution, log, and management of the submittals process.

1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General: The COTR will arrange for delivery of an electronic copy of the Contract requirements

CADD drawing files to the Contractor at the Pre-Construction Conference for use in preparing submittals.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of

construction activities as follows: 1. Coordinate each submittal with coordination drawings, purchasing, fabrication, testing,

delivery, other submittals, and related activities. 2. Coordinate and package submittals together for related parts of the work so processing will not

be delayed where submittals must be reviewed concurrently. 3. The Airports Authority reserves the right to withhold action on any submittal that requires

coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. Withholding action in




this manner shall not warrant a claim by the Contractor for additional time or cost.

C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for the submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities.

D. Contractor Responsibilities: The Contractor is responsible for the scheduling and submission of all

submittals to the COTR as follows: 1. Utilize the Program Management Software system designated by the COTR. 2. A submittal response from the COTR should not result in a change to the Contract; however, if

the Contractor believes a submittal response warrants an increase or decrease in the Contractor’s cost of, or the time required for, the performance of any part of the work under the Contract, the Contractor shall notify the Contracting Officer in writing, with a copy to the COTR, within seven (7) calendar days stating (1) the date, circumstances, and source of the order and (2) that the Contractor regards the order as a change order. Direction from the Contracting Officer is required before proceeding with any work that involves a change to the Contract scope, price, time, terms or conditions.

E. Processing Time: The Contractor is to allow adequate time for submittal review, including time

for re-submittals, as listed below. Time for review shall commence on the date submitted in the Oracle Primavera Unifier system by the Contractor. Late transmittal of submittals shall not warrant a claim by the Contractor for additional time or cost.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 calendar days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. The COTR will advise the Contractor when a submittal must be delayed for coordination. Allow an additional 45 calendar days for submittals related to fire-detection systems and fire-protection systems.

2. Re-submittal Review: Allow 15 calendar days for review of each re-submittal. 3. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by the COTR, or other parties is

indicated, allow 21 calendar days for the initial review of each submittal. 4. Processing of incomplete or unacceptable submissions by the COTR shall not reduce the

number of calendar days specified above for the COTR's review. Resubmissions shall be treated the same as initial submissions relative to review time.

F. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.

1. Indicate the name of the firm or entity that prepared each submittal on the label or the title block.

2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on the label or beside the title block to record the Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by the COTR and the Architect-Engineer.

3. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken: a. Contract Name and Number b. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier. c. Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a dash and then a

sequential number (e.g., 061000-001 or 070150.19-001). Re-submittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another dash (e.g., 061000-001-A or 070150.19-001-A).

d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section e. Date f. Transmittal number g. Building Permit number




h. Name and address of the Contractor i. Name and address of subcontractor, if applicable j. Name and address of supplier, if applicable k. Name of manufacturer, if applicable l. Name and address of Architect/Engineer m. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate n. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate o. Contractor statement that the submittal does not involve an increase or decrease in the

Contractor’s cost of, or the time required for, the performance of any part of the work under the Contract.

G. Resubmissions: The re-submittal procedure shall follow the same procedures and same number

as the initial submittal with the following exceptions: 1. The transmittal shall contain the same information as the first transmittal and the submission

number shall indicate second, third, etc., submission. The drawing number/description shall be identical to the initial submission and the date shall be the revised date for that submission.

2. No new material shall be included on the same transmittal for a resubmission. 3. COTR rejection shall not warrant a claim by the Contractor for additional time or cost.

H. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the contract

requirements on submittals. Where significant deviations from the contract requirements exist, follow the guidelines set forth in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for substitutions.

I. Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each

submittal from the Contractor to the COTR using the Oracle Primavera Unifier Web services. The Contractor must use the Airports Authority provided web-based Oracle Primavera Unifier project management system (Unifier) to transmit each submittal to the COTR. Response of the COTR’s submittal review and action will be transmitted to the Contractor through Unifier. The COTR will return submittals, without review, when received from sources other than the Contractor.

J. Transmittal Form: Use transmittal forms and follow other submittal procedures according to

information contained in the Program Manual and Management Plans.

K. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, and authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

L. Bear all costs incurred for such reproduction and distribution. Prints of all reviewed Shop

Drawings may be made from transparencies that carry the appropriate review stamps.

M. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating “Reviewed – No Exceptions Taken” by COTR in connection with construction.

1.5 SUBMITTAL LOG

A. Prepare a log that contains a complete listing of all submittals required by Contract. Submit the

log at the preconstruction meeting along with the Contractor's Preliminary Construction Schedule specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." Organize the submittal log by Specification Section number. Assign each submittal a sequential number for




identification and tracking purposes.

B. Coordinate the submittal log with Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation." The submittal log shall be submitted for the COTR's review and information. Include the following information: a. Contract Name and Number b. Contractor Name c. Submittal unique identifier d. Title of submittal/description. e. Scheduled date of the initial submission for each submittal. f. Required Date for Approval for each Submittal. g. Submittal Status h. Review / Response Code i. Drawing number reference, if applicable. j. Subcontractor/vendor reference.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections 1. Certification by the Quality Control Manager: The Quality Control Manager is to certify each

action submittal verifying that the submittal complies with the contract requirements. 2. Number of Copies: Submit using the Program Management software, unless otherwise directed

by the COTR.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Standard color charts. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. g. Printed performance curves. h. Operational range diagrams. i. Mill reports. j. Standard product operating and maintenance manuals. k. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. l. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. m. Application of testing agency labels and seals. n. Notation of coordination requirements.

4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 5. Number of Copies: Submit all Product Data submittals electronically using the Oracle Primavera

Unifier system. In addition, provide three copies for submittals related to fire-detection systems




and fire-protection systems. 6. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract requirements

has been confirmed.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare contract-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract requirements or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable: a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring.

Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. f. Shop-work manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Design calculations. j. Compliance with specified standards. k. Notation of coordination requirements. l. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. m. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches.

3. Number of Copies: Submit all Shop Drawing submittals electronically using the Program Management Software system. In addition, submit one reproducible transparency and two black-line prints for each Shop Drawing submittal. The COTR will return the marked up reproducible transparency for the Contractor’s distribution.

4. Both the reproducible transparency and the prints shall bear the Contractor's approval stamp on each sheet.

D. Coordination Drawings:

1. Coordination Drawings are Shop Drawings prepared by the Contractor that detail the relationship and integration of different construction elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation. Preparation of Coordination Drawings is specified in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

2. Submit Coordination Drawings for integration of different construction elements. Show sequences and relationships of separate components to avoid conflicts in use of space.

E. Samples: Submit samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these

characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. All sample submittals must be electronically documented with a photograph accompanying the electronic submittal.

1. Deliver all Samples to the COTR. Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories are to be submitted in one package.

2. Identification: Attach a label on the unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Contract Name and Number b. Sample Submittal Unique Identifier c. Generic description of Sample / Product name and name of manufacturer.




d. Date and Transmittal Number e. Name and Address of the Contractor f. Name and Address of Subcontractor or Supplier, as applicable g. Drawing number and detail references, as applicable h. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as applicable

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved samples at the project site, available for quality-control

comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples that may be incorporated into the work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

b. Samples not incorporated into the work, or otherwise designated as the Airports Authority’s property, are the property of the Contractor.

4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. The COTR will return submittal with options selected.

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of samples. The COTR will retain two sample sets; and the remainder will be returned to the Contractor.

b. Submit a single sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

c. If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

F. Products Schedule: For all Products, as detailed in individual Specification Sections, prepare a

written summary identifying the specified products required for the work, their intended location, and the estimated quantity required. Submit the product schedule via the Oracle Primavera Unifier system. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Contract Name and Number 2. Contractor Name 3. Specification Section Reference and cross-reference to the submittal log 4. Specified Product 5. Location(s) for installation or use 6. Estimated Quantity Required

G. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress

Documentation."

H. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Application for Payment."




I. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Application for Payment."

J. Contractor Warranty Letter: Comply with requirements in Contract Provision "Warranty of

Construction." Provide the dates of warranty coverage and provide point of contact information for warranty service.

K. Special Warranty Letters: Provide dates of warranty coverage and provide point of contact

information for warranty service for special warranties required in Division 02 through 33 Sections.

2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.

1. Certification by the Quality Control Manager: The Quality Control Manager is to certify each informational submittal verifying that the submittal complies with the contract requirements.

2. Number of Copies: Submit using the Oracle Primavera Unifier software, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section

"Construction Progress Documentation."

C. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of

firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of Architects and Owners, and other information specified.

E. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

product complies with requirements.

F. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

G. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that

Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific project.

H. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.




I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements.

J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's

standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements.

K. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements.

L. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing

agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

M. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's

standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements.

N. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by

manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

O. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence from a model code organization

acceptable to the Airports Authority that product complies with USBC. Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.

P. Operations and Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for

operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data." Additional copies submitted for Operations and Maintenance manuals will be marked with action taken and will be returned.

Q. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but are not limited to,

performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

R. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents




manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Preparation of substrates. 2. Required substrate tolerances. 3. Sequence of installation or erection. 4. Required installation tolerances. 5. Required adjustments. 6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.

S. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized

service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making

report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at the project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements

and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 6. Statement on whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

T. Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of the coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any and term of coverage.

U. Manufacturers' warranties.

V. Construction Photographs and Video-recordings: Comply with requirements in Division 01

Section "Photographic Documentation."

W. Material Safety Data Sheets: Submit information directly to COTR.

2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract requirements, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to COTR.

B. Delegated-Design Schedule: For all Delegated-Design requirements, as detailed in individual

Specification Sections, prepare a written summary identifying the specified delegated-design required for the work. Submit the delegated-design schedule via the Oracle Primavera Unifier system. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Contract Name and Number 2. Contractor Name 3. Specification Section Reference and cross-reference to the submittal log 4. Specified Delegated-Design requirement




C. Delegated-Design Submittal: Submit all delegated-design documentation, including calculations,

data, reports and drawings signed and sealed by the responsible design professional licensed in Virginia. Submit delegate-design submittals electronically via the Oracle Primavera Unifier system, and provide three (3) hard copies. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract requirements. Include a list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR’S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract requirements. Note corrections and field dimensions. The Contractor is to mark each submittal with an approval stamp before submitting to the COTR.

B. In checking Shop Drawings and Product Data, verify all dimensions and field conditions and check

and coordinate Shop Drawings and Product Data of any Section or trade with the requirements of other sections or trades as related thereto, as required for proper and complete installation of the work.

C. Approval: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include contract name and

number, location, submittal number, section title and number, name of reviewer, date of the Contractor's approval, and a statement certifying that the submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract requirements, which shall include dimensions, clearances, compatibility, and coordination with Shop Drawings and Product Data submitted for other work. The Quality Control Manager is to verify that each submittal complies with the contract requirements.

D. If the Contractor has not checked the submittals carefully, even though stamped as checked and

approved, submittals shall be returned to the Contractor for proper checking before further processing or review by the COTR regardless of any urgency claimed by the Contractor. In such a situation, the Contractor will be responsible for any resulting delays. Furthermore, the Contracting Officer may hold the Contractor responsible for increased Airports Authority costs resulting from the Contractor's failure to comply with the requirements set forth herein.

3.2 COTR’S ACTION

A. General: The COTR will not review submittals that do not bear the Contractor's approval stamp

and will return them without action.

B. COTR Responsibilities: The review of Shop Drawings and other submittals by the COTR will be for general conformance with the Contract only, and the review shall not be interpreted as a checking of detailed dimensions, quantities, or approval of deviations from the Contract requirements. The COTR review shall not relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for accuracy of Shop Drawings nor for the furnishing and installation of materials or equipment according to the Contract requirements.

C. Approval of Shop Drawings or other submittals is not to be interpreted as approval of a




substitute material. Approval of substitutions will be accomplished according to requirements set forth in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements."

D. Action Submittals: The COTR will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or

modifications required, and return the submittal to the Contractor. The COTR will annotate each submittal with the action taken, as listed below. Do not permit submittals marked "Revise and Resubmit" or "Rejected" to be used at the Jobsite, or elsewhere where work is in progress.

1. “Reviewed – No Exceptions Taken”: Means no corrections or resubmissions are required and fabrication/installation may be undertaken. This action does not authorize changes to the Contract time or price or relieve the contractor from complying with Contract Requirements.

2. “Reviewed – Make Corrections Noted”: Same as "Reviewed – No Exceptions Taken," providing Contractor complies with corrections noted on submittal. If for any reason the Contractor cannot comply with the noted corrections, fabrication shall not be undertaken and Contractor shall resubmit, following procedures outlined hereinbefore.

3. “Revise and Resubmit”: Fabrication and/or installation shall not be undertaken. Make appropriate revisions and resubmit, limiting corrections to items marked.

4. “Rejected”: Submittal does not comply with requirements. Fabrication and/or installation shall not be undertaken. Prepare a new submittal according to requirements and submit without delay.

5. “For Record Only”: Submittal has been received and will be retained for record keeping purposes.

E. Informational Submittals: The COTR will annotate informational submittals with “No Action

Taken”, or “Rejected” if deviations from contract requirements are noted.

F. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered non-responsive, and will be returned without review.

G. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed.

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT (Not Used) PART 5 - PAYMENT (Not Used) END OF SECTION 013300







SECTION 013543 - ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES 1

SECTION 013543 - ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, and other Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY The articles and paragraphs of this Section represent supplements or additions to the Contract Provisions or the Special Provisions. The requirements of this section are the sole responsibility of the Contractor. No additional payment will be made to the Contractor to fulfill these requirements. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION

A. Comply with all Federal, state and local laws and regulations controlling pollution of the environment. Take necessary precautions to prevent pollution of streams, rivers, lakes, ponds, and reservoirs with fuels, oils, bitumen, chemicals, or other harmful materials and to prevent pollution of the atmosphere from particulate and gaseous matter.

B. Notify COTR immediately in the event that abnormalities, discolorations, odors, oil, or other signs

of potential contamination by hazardous materials are encountered during excavation or other construction activities. Follow with written notice within 24 hours, indicating date, time, and location of potential contaminants encountered. The COTR will provide further direction to Contractor regarding disposition of materials encountered.

3.2 DEICING AND PETROLEUM IMPACTED SOIL AND WATER

A. Aircraft deicing fluids will be encountered in the water (including utility manholes) and in the

soils. Concentrations of aircraft deicing fluids in water and soils will range from non-detect to saturation. Aircraft deicing fluids are propylene based Type I and Type IV fluids. The fluids emit an unpleasant odor when the breakdown (biodegradation) is occurring. Follow OSHA requirements while working in aircraft deicing impacted areas. Coordinate with the COTR for obtaining Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for aircraft deicing fluids.

B. Petroleum contaminated soils and water may be encountered during the construction of this project. Petroleum impacted soils range from saturated to 1.0 ppm. Petroleum impacted water ranges from free product to “non - detect.” Maintain the necessary health and safety requirements for all personnel in accordance with OSHA regulations.

3.3 HAZARDOUS BUILDING MATERIALS MANAGEMENT

A. LEAD-CONTAINING SURFACE COATINGS:




All painted surfaces are assumed to contain lead-based paint. The Contractor shall maintain the necessary health and safety requirements for all personnel in accordance with OSHA regulations to work in these conditions. The Contractor shall conduct work activities in a manner which complies with OSHA Title 29, Section 1926.62, Lead in Construction, 1910.1025, Lead Exposure, and 1910.134, Respiratory Protection. The Contractor is responsible for conformance with all applicable worker protection regulations including but not limited to respiratory protection, air monitoring and medical surveillance. Any de-leading activities, such as stripping and wet scraping, as currently defined by the Commonwealth of Virginia, must be performed by Commonwealth of Virginia licensed lead abatement workers with a minimum of 32 hours of training in accordance with EPA regulations. In addition, at least one Commonwealth of Virginia licensed lead abatement supervisor must be on-site at all times during lead abatement activities and have a minimum of 40 hours of training in accordance with EPA regulations. All other work activities impacting lead-containing surface coatings, such as manual demolition, shall be performed by workers with a minimum of two-hour lead awareness training in accordance with OSHA Standard 29 CFR 1926.62, Lead in Construction. The removal and disposal of lead-based paint is part of this contract. The contractor shall provide proof of training upon request of the COTR.

B. ASBESTOS-CONTAINING MATERIALS:

1. The Contractor shall be responsible for preparing and submitting all pre-demolition notifications including but not limited to the EPA NESHAP and Virginia Department of Labor and Industry notifications.

2. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing, storing, hauling and disposing of all asbestos containing materials prior to starting demolition activities. The asbestos abatement Contractor shall have a valid Virginia Asbestos Contractors License and all asbestos workers and supervisors shall have valid Virginia Asbestos worker and Supervisor Licenses.

3. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing air monitoring services for the duration of this work to include pre-work/background, personal, area and final air clearance sampling. The air monitoring firm shall be licensed as a Virginia Class A Contractor, and a Virginia Asbestos Analytical Laboratory.

4. The Contractor shall prepare and submit an Asbestos Abatement Plan (AAP) prior to starting

abatement activities. The AAP shall be approved by the COTR prior to starting work. At a minimum, the AAP shall include:

a. Contractor and Subcontractors Qualifications b. A copy all Contractor’s and worker’s Virginia licenses c. Asbestos Removal work plan d. Air monitoring plan e. Waste hauler information f. Disposal facility information g. Respiratory protection plan

C. MOLD:




The Contractor shall assume that mold is present within the buildings scheduled for demolition. The Contractor shall maintain the necessary health and safety requirements for all personnel in accordance with OSHA and EPA regulations to work in these conditions. Mold remediation may be required in conjunction with the asbestos abatement work.

3.4 CONTAMINATED SOIL COLLECTION AND DISPOSAL

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for characterizing, hauling, stockpiling, and disposing of all excess suitable and unsuitable soils. All excess soil and unsuitable soils is assumed to be contaminated and shall be properly disposed of at a recycling/treatment facility specifically permitted to accept and treat contaminated soil. Disposal of soil at a landfill or reclamation site is prohibited.

B. All soils to be removed shall be characterized for offsite treatment/recycling. At a minimum, the

Contractor shall characterize all excess soil and unsuitable soil material for Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons (DRO and GRO), BTEX, VOCs, PCBs, and TCLP Metals. However, the Contractor shall be responsible for the cost and for coordinating with the selected treatment/recycling facility for all additional testing that may be required by the facility for acceptance of the material. Soil

characterization is not required for soils to be reused onsite unless it will be used as backfill around new piping or utilities. At a minimum, the Contractor shall sample the unsuitable and excess soil at a rate of one composite sample per every 100 cubic yards.

C. The recycling/treatment disposal facility shall be approved by the COTR prior to the start of land-

disturbing activities. The characterization, hauling, stockpiling, treatment and disposal of all soil shall be in accordance with the Contractors approved Soil Management Plan. The Contractor shall not haul any soil off Airport property until the Contractor has characterized the soil in accordance with their Soils Management Plan.

D. The Contractor shall submit a Soils Management Plan (SMP). The Contractor’s Soil Management

Plan must be approved by the COTR prior to the start of land-disturbing activities. At a minimum, the Contractor’s Soil Management Plan shall include:

1. Offsite disposal/treatment facility information 2. Dust suppression and monitoring 3. Soil excavation and stockpile management procedures. Stockpiling Plan to include onsite reuse

of soils, deleterious materials, and off-site disposal soils. 4. Soils characterization/sampling Plan 5. Record keeping/manifesting procedures

E. Do not use petroleum-contaminated soils as backfill around new piping or utilities. Transport

petroleum contaminated soils to a location identified by the COTR. Place the contaminated soils on two layers of reinforced 6 mil plastic sheeting, install and maintain sediment and erosion controls, and adequately cover the stockpile to prevent water infiltration.

3.5 DEWATERING




A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit a dewatering plan for COTR approval prior to starting land disturbing activities. At a minimum, the dewatering plan shall include: the proposed effluent discharge locations, treatment system layout and location, dewatering/treatment schematic, flow diagrams, system maintenance requirements, operator information and qualifications, copy of the discharge permit and listed of permit requirements, minimum and maximum flow rates, cold weather protection plan, effluent sampling plan, and effluent testing frequency, etc.

B. Alternatively, the Contractor could elect to pump, store, test, and either recycle at an approved recycling facility or discharge onsite if the test indicates the water is clean. The contractor is responsible for all sampling and analysis related to waste characterization. In addition, the contractor shall provide all required auxiliary equipment including, but not limited to, frac tanks, pumps and appurtenances.

3.6 UNIVERSAL AND SPECIAL WASTE

A. The Contractor is responsible for removing, storing, transporting, and recycling of all fluorescent

light tubes, high intensity discharge (HID), neon, ultraviolet (UV), mercury vapor, high pressure sodium, and metal halide lamps scheduled for removal as part of this project. Recycled lamps are regulated as Universal Waste Lamps. All Universal Waste lamps are to be handled and stored in a manner to prevent breakage. The lamps (unbroken) must be placed into containers or packages that are structurally sound and are adequate to prevent leakage. The containers and packages must be labeled with the words “Universal Waste Lamps” and shall include the generation date. While accumulating lamps, the containers and/or packages must be stored in a satellite accumulation area designated with a sign as a “Satellite Accumulation Area for Universal Waste Lamps.” The satellite Accumulation Area shall be approved by the COTR. All Universal waste shall be properly recycled within 90days of the generation date listed on the drum.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for visually inspecting all light ballasts for the presence of

PCBs. The ballasts shall assume to contain PCBs unless they are labeled “No PCBs”. All PCB-containing light ballasts shall be stored and labeled in accordance with 40 CFR 761. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing and storing and disposing (by incineration) the PCB-Containing Light Ballasts. The Contractor shall provide the Authority with the Certificate of Recycling/Incineration within 45 days of recycling.

C. The Contractor shall submit a Universal and Special Waste Management Plan (USWMP) prior to

starting demolition activities. The USWMP shall include but not limited to: 1. The identification of wastes associated with the work. 2. Estimated quantities of waste for recycling 3. Recycling facility information for each waste stream 4. Hauler information including licenses and permits 5. Storage and labeling plan 6. Proposed storage location 7. Training information.

D. Ozone Depleting Substances: The contractor is responsible for recovery and recycling of Ozone

Depleting Substances in accordance with applicable federal, state and local regulations. The contractor must provide information including quantity, type, reclamation certificates, and




recovery method for refrigerants associated with heating, ventilation, and air conditioning equipment removed or altered.

3.7 PROJECT GENERATED WASTES

A. All PGW must be disposed of in accordance with federal, state and local regulations. All waste

disposal facilities must be approved and meet must meet the following criteria:

B. The disposal facilities must be properly permitted and licensed pursuant to environmental law to accept the waste material by Federal, state, commonwealth, municipal or other local government agencies or bodies with applicable jurisdiction to license and permit disposal facilities.

C. Wastes should be sufficiently characterized to ensure they are compatible with the disposal

facilities used. Wastes should only be sent to facilities compatible with and licensed and permitted to receive the characterized wastes.

D. Waste disposal facilities that have been identified on the United States EPA (CERCLA) National

Priorities List or pursuant to any functional equivalent of that list made by Federal, state, commonwealth, municipal or other local government agency or body with applicable jurisdiction pursuant to environmental law will not be used.

E. Waste disposal facilities that are operated by an owner/operator in bankruptcy shall not be used.

3.8 ANNUAL STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. The Contractor shall conduct land disturbing activities in accordance with applicable federal,

state and local regulations and MWAA documents including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control (E&SC) Laws and Regulations, 2. Virginia Stormwater Management (SWM) Laws and Regulations, 3. Latest version of MWAA Annual Standards and Specifications for SWM and ESC, 4. Approved SWM Plan, 5. Approved ESC Plan, and 6. MWAA Stormwater Compliance Manual for Contractors.

B. Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP): Contractor must develop a SWPPP in accordance with Specification Section 312514.

C. Certified Erosion and Sediment Control Inspector

1. The Contractor shall provide a Virginia Certified Project Inspector for Erosion and Sediment

Control (E&SC) for the Project. This certification is defined in 9VAC25-580-40 as The person responsible for inspecting erosion and sediment control practices to ensure compliance with the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Law and Regulations. The Certified Inspector must have attended the Virginia DEQ 2-day Erosion and Sediment Control Inspector class, and passed the certification exam. The proposed E&SC Inspector’s qualifications and Certification number shall be submitted for approval prior to starting land-disturbing activities.




2. The approved E&SC Inspector shall be responsible for conducting periodic inspections as

follows: a. during or immediately following the installation of erosion and sediment controls, b. at least once in every two-week period, c. within 48 hours following any runoff producing event (i.e. >.25 “), d. and at completion of the project, prior to the Contractor submitting the Notice of

Termination Forms.

3. This inspector shall be independent of the Contractor and will act solely on behalf of the Airports Authority. Their duties cannot include Contractor required SWPPP and E&SC Inspections. The Contractor is still required to provide their own Qualified SWPPP inspector to perform their weekly, and rainfall event inspections in accordance with the conditions of the VSMP permit and their SWPPP. Specific responsibilities include:

a. Conducting regular inspections of active construction sites to ensure proper construction, function, and maintenance of erosion and sediment control measures as identified on the approved E&SC Plan and in accordance with the most recent revision of the MWAA Annual Standards and Specifications (AS&S) for Stormwater Management (SWM) and E&SC.

b. Documenting inspections and providing compliance recommendations, photographs, etc. c. Coordinate with the MWAA E&SC Program Administrator for initiating enforcement action

when needed. d. Ensuring compliance for correcting deficiencies or violations. e. The Inspector shall provide copies of all inspection reports and findings to MWAA E&SC

Program Administrator. Any issues identified during the inspections that require major revisions to the Project E&SC Plan or SWPPP shall be coordinated with the MWAA E&SC Program Administrator in accordance the most recent revision of the MWAA AS&S.




SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 1

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes Administrative and procedural requirements for Contractor to provide and maintain an effective Quality-Control Program that complies with this Section and with requirements of the "Contract Provisions," Section VII, "Inspection of Construction and Final Inspection and Acceptance."


A. Drawings and Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and other

Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 00 Section 007300 “Supplementary Conditions”. 2. Division 01 Section 013100 “Project Management and Coordination”. 3. Division 01 Section 013200 “Construction Progress Documentation” for developing a schedule

of required tests and inspections. 4. Division 01 Section 013300 “Submittals” for process required to submit the Contractor’s Quality

Control Plan. 5. Division 01 Section 017300 “Execution”. 6. Not Used. 7. Division 01 Section 017700 “Project Closeout”. 8. Not Used. 9. Division 01 Section 017839 “Project Record Documentation”. 10. Not Used. 11. Divisions 02 through 34 Technical Specification Sections and Federal Aviation Administration

(FAA) Specifications.

1.3 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only.

1. AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM) a. ASTM C 1077: Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in

Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation latest edition. b. ASTM D 3666: Minimum Requirements for Agencies Testing and Inspecting Road and Paving

Materials latest edition.

c. ASTM D 3740: Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction latest edition.

d. ASTM E 329: Agencies engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in

Construction latest edition.




e. ASTM E 543: Agencies performing Nondestructive Testing latest edition.

2. METROPOLITAN WASHINGTON AIRPORT AUTHORITY Construction Safety Manual, most current

edition

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality: Conformance to the requirements established by the contract specifications and drawings.

B. Control: To guide and have influence over.

C. Contractor Quality Control (CQC): The construction contractor’s system to establish, manage,

control, and document their own, their supplier’s, and their subcontractor’s activities to ensure Quality compliance with the contract requirements and the QC Plan.

D. Contracting Officers Technical Representative (COTR). Primary on-site representative of the

Contracting Officer for technical matters. Duties and responsibilities of the COTR will be transmitted to the contractor via letter from the Contracting Officer.

E. Definable Feature of Work or Element of Work: A definable feature of work (DFOW) or Element

of Work is a task that is separate and distinct from other tasks and has control requirements and work crews unique to that task.

F. QC Management System: The management and implementation of processes, procedures, and

requirements that establish quality as identified in the QC Plan and mandated in the contract specifications. The Three Phases of Control are the core of the contractor’s Construction Quality Management System.

G. Mockups: If required by the contract, shall be full-size, physical example assemblies that are

constructed on site to illustrate finishes, materials, assemblies, etc. Mockups are used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects or details and, where indicated, qualities of materials, execution, to review construction, coordination, testing, inspection, or operation; they are not Samples. Mockups establish the Initial Standard of Control by which the work shall be judged and accepted for that Definable Feature or Element of Work. Mockups supersede samples in the approval and acceptance of the Work. Construct mockups away from the work site or in a location designated by the COTR. Do not use mockups as part of the work unless specifically approved by the COTR.

H. Experienced: When used with an entity, “experienced” means having successfully completed a

minimum of ten (10) projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Specific experience requirements enumerated in these specifications supersede this requirement.





A. Establish a QC Program that consists of the following:

1. QC Organization. 2. QC Plan Meeting. 3. QC Plan. 4. Coordination and Meeting of Mutual Understanding. 5. QC meetings. 6. Phases of Control. 7. Submittal preparation, review, and approval. 8. Operation & Maintenance data and Warranty receipt verification prior to product delivery. 9. Material verification at delivery and material location reports as outlined in a formal Material

Receiving Inspection Program. 10. Inspection Program utilizing an Inspection Log and Sign-off Sheets. 11. Testing and Inspections, completion inspections, QC certifications, accreditations,

documentation, training, and requirements necessary to provide materials, equipment, workmanship, fabrication, construction, and operations that comply with the requirements of this Contract.

B. Special Inspections

Contractor is not responsible for Special Inspections according to requirements of the current Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code (VUSBC). The Airports Authority’s agent shall provide these Special Inspection services. However, the Contractor is responsible for establishing a Special Inspection schedule. This schedule shall be discussed at COTR’s weekly Progress Meetings and Contractor’s QC Meetings. The Contractor shall be responsible for all coordination and notification of requests for Code and Special Inspections with The Airports Authority. Special Inspections are required as identified by the Engineer of Record.

C. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that require those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

D. Schedule of Values: Contractor shall include all test and inspection activities in its CPM and

establish a Schedule of Values for all required QC documentation, all tests and inspection activities, reports, and procedures required in the Contract on a Section-by-Section basis. Additionally, Contractor shall include a pay line item specifically for Quality activities and QC Organizational personnel required by the General Conditions. Quality activities shall be reported per Division 01 Section "Applications for Payment."

E. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control

procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

F. The provisions of this Section shall not limit requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by the Airports Authority or other agencies having jurisdiction.

G. The QC Plan does not repeat or summarize contract requirements. It describes the methods,

processes, and procedures by which the Contractor will ensure Quality construction and compliance with the contract documents.

H. Omissions in the QC Plan or the contractor’s Quality Control Program does not relieve the




contractor of the responsibilities to provide work in accordance with the contract documents, applicable codes, regulations, and governing authorities.

I. Approval of the QC Plan by the Airports Authority does not guarantee Quality Control or Quality

Production by the Contractor. These QC processes, procedures and programs are controlled and managed by the Contractor.

3.2 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

General: If compliance with two (2) or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to the COTR for a decision before proceeding. This paragraph refers to industry and government standards. In cases of a difference between drawings and the specifications, the specifications shall govern.

3.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the Quality Control (QC) Plan in accordance with Division 01 Section, "Submittals."

B. Submit a QC Plan for review and approval within twenty (20) calendar days after receipt of Notice to Proceed and at most 10 days before beginning any Work.. The QC Plan shall include a preliminary submittal registry of all required submittals in the contract which shall be submitted in the first ninety (90) calendar days of construction.

C. Once final submittal registry, accounting for all submittals, is approved by the COTR, insert

registry into the QC Plan. Submit at this time résumés of key personnel to be assigned to this contract and the limits of their authority. Show how this project management structure fits into the Contractor’s corporate management structure.

D. Any approval by the COTR of the QC Plan shall be treated as “accepted, dependent upon

successful implementation of a Quality Program as outlined in the QC Plan and Contract Specifications.” Omissions in the QC Plan do not relieve the contractor of the responsibilities to comply with the contract requirements. Immediately stop work if the QC Plan becomes disapproved or Quality as defined in the contractor’s Quality Program cannot be produced. The exception is the work authorized in the paragraph entitled "Preliminary Work Authorized Prior to Approval," shall stop.

E. Coordinate the submittal requirement dates with the submittal dates in Division 01 Section

“Construction Progress Documentation”.

3.4 INFORMATION FOR THE CONTRACTING OFFICER

A. Provide sample copies, for approval, of all report forms, as identified below, to the COTR during the Pre-Construction Conference. The report forms shall consist of the Quality Control Daily Report, Superintendent Daily Report, Material Receiving Inspection Report, Preparatory Phase Report, Initial Phase Report, Inspection Log and Sign-off Sheet, Deficiency Log, Testing Log and Monthly Quality Control Summary Report. Other reports referenced below, once approved, may be in formats customarily used by the Contractor, and shall contain the information required by the contract specifications for Testing Laboratories and Inspection Reports, Material Location




Reports, Specialist Reports, etc.

B. Deliver the following listed items to the COTR via the Airports Authority Document Control and Program Management Software system at the times specified below:

1. Quality Control Daily Report: one (1) original electronic copy, delivered the next calendar day after work is performed.

2. Superintendent’s Daily Report: one (1) original electronic copy, delivered the next calendar day after work is performed. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

3. Material Receiving Inspection Report: one (1) original electronic copy, delivered the next calendar day after work is performed. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

4. Preparatory Phase Report: one (1) original electronic copy, delivered the next calendar day after work is performed. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

5. Initial Phase Report: one (1) original electronic copy, delivered by the next calendar day after work is performed. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

6. Field or Laboratory Test and Inspection Reports: one (1) original electronic copy, delivered within two (2) workdays after the inspection and/or test is performed. A certified technician performing all field tests and inspections shall sign all inspection and test reports. A certified testing laboratory manager performing all laboratory tests shall sign all test results. All reports will be reviewed, signed, and certified by a Professional Engineer, registered in the Commonwealth of Virginia, certifying compliance with the contract specifications. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

7. Inspection Log and Signoff Sheets for all Definable Features or Elements of Work: one (1) original electronic copy, delivered within one (1) workday of the inspection or Signed-off activity. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

8. Special Inspection Control Log: (If Special Inspections are required), one (1) original electronic and hard copy, delivered within two (2) workdays of the end of the month.

9. Testing Log: upon COTR’s request, deliver one (1) original electronic copy of a current up-to-date test log, documenting all performed tests, results, etc. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

10. Deficiency Log: one (1) original electronic copy, delivered to the COTR at the Progress Meeting. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

11. QC Meeting Minutes: one (1) original electronic copy, delivered within two (2) workdays after the meeting. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report.

12. QC Certifications, Qualifications, and Accreditations: as required by contract specifications. 13. Monthly Quality Control Summary Report: one (1) original electronic or hard copy, delivered

within two (2) workdays of the end of the month. Do not attach to a Quality Control Daily Report. This Executive Brief shall contain these items:

a. Status of the Schedule (Monthly Progress Report) impact to schedule due to change notices, modifications, problems encountered, weather, and any other changes or items affecting the schedule since the previous month.

b. Status of Submittals. c. Status of Testing and Inspections activities performed that particular month. d. Status of Special Inspections (if required) performed that particular month. e. Status of Preparatory meetings and Initial meetings performed that particular month. f. Status of Deficiencies/Rework items and corrective actions. g. Status of Non-compliances issued by COTR and corrective actions. h. Status of Record Drawings. i. Status or Identification of items affecting Quality. j. Status of Training, Operation, Maintenance, and Warranty items.




k. Status of Safety and related events. l. Other items as directed by the COTR.

14. QC Specialist Reports: one (1) original electronic or hard copy, delivered the next calendar day after work is performed. Do not attach to the Quality Control Daily Report

PART 4 - MEASUREMENT (Not Used) PART 5 - PAYMENT Review for acceptability monthly and withhold a minimum of 5% for non-compliance or the value of the work in non-compliance (whichever is greater). Add an additional 5% each subsequent month for further non-compliance or the value of the work in non-compliance (whichever is greater) END OF SECTION 014000



SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES 1

SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section defines many of the terms used elsewhere in the Construction Documents and lists complete names and telephone numbers for many of the associations and agencies identified elsewhere in the Construction Documents by their acronym.

B. Abbreviations, where not defined in the Contract Documents, will be interpreted by the

Contracting Officer to mean the normal construction industry terminology.

C. Plural words will be interpreted as singular and singular words will be interpreted as plural where applicable for context of the Contract Documents.



1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in Sections I and II of the Airports Authority Solicitation Offer and Award. Certain terms used in the Contract Documents are defined generally in this Article. Definitions and explanations contained in this Section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for the Work to the extent that they may not be stated more explicitly in another element of the Contract Documents.

B. Approve: The term "approved," where used in regard to COTR's action on Contractor's

submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to COTR's duties and responsibilities as delegated by the Contracting Officer in the Contract and Special Provisions.

C. Architect/Engineer: For the purpose of this Project, the "Design Professional of Record." To

distinguish from the Contracting Officer and Contracting Officer's Technical Representative (COTR).

D. Authority: Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority

E. Award: The acceptance, by the Airports Authority, of the successful offeror's proposal.

F. Award Date: The date on which the Airports Authority gives notice of acceptance to the

successful offeror.

G. AOA (or A.O.A.): Air Operations Area. The area of the Airport used or intended to be used for landing, taking off, surface maneuvering, loading, unloading, or servicing aircraft. This security area requires security badging. Workers in this area are required to obtain and display an AOA photo I.D. credential. Drivers in this area are required to obtain an Airport Vehicle Operator's Permit for the Air Operations Area.




H. Beneficial Use: Use by the Airports Authority prior to 100 percent completion and final acceptance.

I. Contract Documents: Documents containing requirements of the Work. These include all

Contract provisions and attachments made thereto or referenced therein.

J. Contract Provisions: The administrative and procedural requirements starting at Award Date and ending at Final Acceptance, as provided for in Section VII, "Contract Provisions."

K. Contract Time or Duration (Time Limit): The number of calendar days established in Section III,

"Schedule," indicating the time allowed for the completion of all physical and administrative work contemplated in the Contract, including any authorized extensions thereto.

L. Contracting Officer's Technical Representative (COTR): The Contracting Officer's designated

representative, as defined in Section VII, "Contract Provisions."

M. Contractor: Individual, partnership, corporation or joint venture under Contract to the Airports Authority for performance of prescribed Work.

N. Drawings: Erection/installation/construction plans, or any other supplementary plans or similar

graphic data, illustrating work to be performed that are provided to Contractor as part of the Contract Documents.

O. Directed: A command or instruction by the Airports Authority. Other terms including

"requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

P. Final Acceptance: Refer to Division 01 Section "Project Closeout."

Q. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on drawings,

in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

R. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having

jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

S. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,

installation, and similar operations.

T. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

U. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

V. "Installer": Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor,

or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply




that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to trades people of the corresponding generic name.

W. "Experienced": When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a

minimum of ten previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

X. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is

indicated.

Y. Punch list Work: Minor corrective actions required to achieve "Final Acceptance." Occurs after "Substantial Completion" of the Work in strict compliance with quality-control requirements.

Z. Roadway: General term denoting a public way for purposes of vehicular travel, including the

entire area within the right-of-way.

AA. Special Provisions: For the purpose of this Contract, the directions and requirements provided for in Section VI of the Contract Documents.

BB. Shop Drawings: Refer to Division 01 Section "Submittals."

CC. Specifications: General term comprising all directions, provisions and requirements contained

herein, together with any other contractual requirements such as may be added or adopted as the Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, or Supplementary Conditions, all of which are necessary for the proper performance of the Contract.

DD. Substantial Completion: Refer to Division 01 Section "Project Closeout."

EE. Factory-Authorized Service Representative: An authorized representative of a manufacturer who

is trained and approved by the manufacturer to inspect and approve the installation of manufacturer’s products and that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and who is authorized by the manufacturer to confirm the issuance of appropriate warranties.

1.4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements,

applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless

otherwise indicated.

C. Conflicting Requirements: Refer to Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for additional information regarding conflicting requirements.




D. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to COTR for a decision before proceeding.

E. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project shall be familiar with

industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source and make them available on request.

F. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms

are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov (800) 872-2253 (202) 272-0080 CFR Code of Federal Regulations Available from Government Printing Office www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr (888) 293-6498 (202) 512-1530 CRD Handbook for Concrete and Cement Available from Army Corps of Engineers Waterways Experiment Station www.wes.army.mil (601) 634-2355 DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point www.dodssp.daps.mil (215) 697-6257 DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS)




FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point. www.dodssp.daps.mil (215) 697-6257 FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. www.icc-es.org (800) 423-6587 MILSPEC, MIL, MS MIL Military Specification and Standards Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point (215) 697-6257 MUTCD Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices Federal Highway Administration (See FHA. Located in Paragraph Federal Government Agencies") UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards www.access-board.gov (800) 872-2253 (202) 272-0080

1.5 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other

Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

AA - Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) www.aluminum.org (202) 862-5100 AAADM - American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers www.aaadm.com (216) 241-7333 AABC - Associated Air Balance Council www.aabchq.com




(202) 737-0202 AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664 AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials http://www.transportation.org (202) 624-5800 AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) www.aatcc.org (919) 549-8141 ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association www.abma-dc.org (202) 367-1155 ACI ACI International (American Concrete Institute) www.aci-int.org (248) 848-3700 ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association http://www.concrete-pipe.org (972) 506-7216 AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) www.aeic.org (205) 257-2530 AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association www.afandpa.org (800) 878-8878 (202) 463-2700 AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AGC




Associated General Contractors of America (The) www.agc.org (703) 548-3118 AHA American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA) AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers www.aham.org (202) 872-5955 AI Asphalt Institute www.asphaltinstitute.org (859) 288-4960 AIA American Institute of Architects (The) www.aia.org (800) 242-3837 (202) 626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction www.aisc.org (800) 644-2400 (312) 670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute www.steel.org (202) 452-7100 AITC American Institute of Timber Construction http://www.aitc-glulam.org (303) 792-9559 ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America www.alca.org (800) 395-2522 (703) 736-9666 ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated www.alsc.org




(301) 972-1700 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. www.amca.org (847) 394-0150 ANSI American National Standards Institute www.ansi.org (202) 293-8020 AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts www.aosaseed.com (505) 522-1437 APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association www.apawood.org (253) 565-6600 APA Architectural Precast Association http://www.archprecast.org (239) 454-6989 API American Petroleum Institute www.api.org (202) 682-8000 ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute www.ari.org (703) 524-8800 ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association www.asphaltroofing.org (202) 207-0917 ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers www.asce.org (800) 548-2723 (703) 295-6300 ASHRAE




American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers www.ashrae.org (800) 527-4723 (404) 636-8400 ASME International The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International www.asme.org (800) 843-2763 (212) 591-7722 ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering www.asse-plumbing.org (708) 995-3019 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials International www.astm.org (610) 832-9585 AWCI Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International www.awci.org (703) 534-8300 AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (See WCSC) AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute www.awinet.org (800) 449-8811 (703) 733-0600 AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association www.awpa.com (334) 874-9800 AWS American Welding Society www.aws.org (800) 443-9353 (305) 443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Association




www.awwa.org (800) 926-7337 (303) 794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association www.buildershardware.com (212) 297-2122 BIA Brick Industry Association (The) www.bia.org (703) 620-0010 BICSI Building Industry Consulting Service International, Inc. www.bicsi.org (800) 242-7405 (813) 979-1991 BIFMA BIFMA International Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International www.bifma.com (616) 285-3963 BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee www.bissc.com (773) 761-4100 CCC Carpet Cushion Council http://www.carpetcushion.org (484) 687-5170 CCFSS Center for Cold-Formed Steel Structures [email protected] CDA Copper Development Association Inc. www.copper.org (800) 232-3282 (212) 251-7200 CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com/




(216) 241-7333 CGA Compressed Gas Association www.cganet.com (703) 788-2700 CGSB Canadian General Standards Board www.tpsgc-pwgsc.gc.ca/ongc-cgsb/index-eng.html CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association www.cellulose.org/ (888) 881-2462 CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association www.cisca.org (630) 584-1919 CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute www.cispi.org (423) 892-0137 CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute www.chainlinkinfo.org (301) 596-2583 CPA Composite Panel Association www.compositepanel.org (703) 724-1128 CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association www.cppa-info.org (800) 510-2772 CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) http://www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute www.crsi.org




(847) 517-1200 CSA CSA International (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) www.csagroup.org (800) 463-6727 CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) www.csinet.org (800) 689-2900 CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau www.cedarbureau.org (604) 820-7700 CTI Cooling Technology Institute (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org (281) 583-4087 DHI Door and Hardware Institute www.dhi.org (703) 222-2010 EIA Electronic Industries Alliance www.eia.org (703) 907-7500 EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association http://www.eima.com/ (800) 294-3462 EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee www.asce.org (800) 548-2723 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. www.ejma.org (914) 332-0040




ESD ESD Association www.esda.org (315) 339-6937 FCI Fluid Controls Institute www.fluidcontrolsinstitute.org (216) 241-7333 FGI Fabricated Geomembrane Institute www.fabricatedgeomembrane.com (217) 333-3929 FMG FM Global (Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) (401) 275-3000 FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc. www.floridaroof.com (407) 671-3772 FSA Fluid Sealing Association www.fluidsealing.com (610) 971-4850 FSC Forest Stewardship Council https://us.fsc.org/en-us (612) 353-4511 GA Gypsum Association www.gypsum.org (202) 289-5440 GAMA Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association www.gamanet.org (703) 525-7060 GANA Glass Association of North America www.glasswebsite.com (785) 271-0208




GS Green Seal www.greenseal.org (202) 872-6400 GSI Geosynthetic Institute www.geosynthetic-institute.org (610) 522-8440 HI Hydraulic Institute www.pumps.org (908) 464-8200 HI Hydronics Institute (See GAMA) HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (See NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association www.hpva.org (703) 435-2900 HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. www.hpwhite.com (410) 838-6550 IAS International Approval Services (See CSA) ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. www.icea.net (770) 830-0369 ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. www.icri.org (847) 827-0830 IEC




International Electrotechnical Commission www.iec.ch 41 22 919 02 11 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) www.ieee.org (212) 419-7900 IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America www.iesna.org (212) 248-5000 IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council www.igcc.org (315) 646-2234 IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (The) www.igmaonline.org (613) 233-1510 ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. www.iliai.com (812) 275-4426 ISO International Organization for Standardization www.iso.ch 41 22 749 01 11 ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association www.issfa.net (702) 567-8150 ITS Intertek www.intertek.com (800) 967-5352 ITU International Telecommunication Union www.itu.int/home 41 22 730 51 11




KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association www.kcma.org (703) 264-1690 LMA Laminating Materials Association www.lma.org (201) 664-2700 LPI Lightning Protection Institute www.lightning.org (800) 488-6864 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association www.mbma.com (216) 241-7333 MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association www.maplefloor.org (847) 480-9138 MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association www.metalframingmfg.org (312) 644-6610 MHIA, MH Material Handling Industry of America www.mhia.org (800) 345-1815 MIA Marble Institute of America www.marble-institute.com (440) 250-9222 MPI Master Painters Institute www.paintinfo.com (888) 674-8937 MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.com (703) 281-6613




NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers www.naamm.org (312) 332-0405 NACE International National Association of Corrosion Engineers International www.nace.org (281) 228-6200 NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association www.nadca.com (202) 737-2926 NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (The) www.naima.org (703) 684-0084 NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. www.nbgqa.com (800) 557-2848 NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association www.ncma.org (703) 713-1900 NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute www.ncpi.org (262) 248-9094 NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association www.ncta.com (202) 775-3550 NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau www.nebb.org (301) 977-3698 NECA National Electrical Contractors Association www.necanet.org




(301) 657-3110 NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association www.nelma.org (207) 829-6901 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association www.nema.org (703) 841-3200 NETA International Electrical Testing Association www.netaworld.org (303) 697-8441 NFPA National Fire Protection Association www.nfpa.org (800) 344-3555 NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council www.nfrc.org (301) 589-1776 NGA National Glass Association www.glass.org (703) 442-4890 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association www.natlhardwood.org (800) 933-0318 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority www.nlga.org (604) 524-2393 NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association www.nofma.org (901) 526-5016 NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association




www.nrca.net (202) 546-7584 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association www.nrmca.org (240) 485-1153 NSF International National Sanitation Foundation International www.nsf.org (734) 769-8010 NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. www.ntma.com (800) 323-9736 NTRMA National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association (See RTI) NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (See WDMA) OPL Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (see ITS) PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute www.pci.org (312) 786-0300 PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America www.pdca.com (800) 332-7322 PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute www.pdionline.org (800) 589-8956




PTI Post-Tensioning Institute www.post-tensioning.org (248) 848-3180 RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections www.boltcouncil.org (800) 644-2400 RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute www.rfci.com (301) 340-8580 RIS Redwood Inspection Service calredwood.org (888) 225-7339 SAE SAE International www.sae.org (724) 776-4841 SDI Steel Deck Institute www.sdi.org (847) 462-1930 SDI Steel Door Institute www.steeldoor.org (440) 899-0010 SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association www.sefalabs.com (516) 294-5424 SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council www.sgcc.org (315) 646-2234 SIA Security Industry Association (301) 804-4700




SJI Steel Joist Institute www.steeljoist.org (843) 407-4091 SMA Screen Manufacturers Association www.smainfo.org (773) 636-0672 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association www.smacna.org (703) 803-2980 SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) www.sprayfoam.org (800) 523-6154 SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) www.spib.org (850) 434-2611 SPRI Single Ply Roofing Institute www.spri.org (781) 647-7026 SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630 SSPC The Society for Protective Coatings www.sspc.org (877) 281-7772 STI Steel Tank Institute www.steeltank.com (847) 438-8265 SWI Steel Window Institute




www.steelwindows.com (216) 241-7333 SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute www.swrionline.org (816) 472-7974 TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. www.tileusa.com (864) 646-8453 TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance www.tiaonline.org (703) 907-7700 TMS The Masonry Society www.masonrysociety.org (303) 939-9700 TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. www.tpinst.org (703)683-1010 TPI Turfgrass Producers International www.turfgrasssod.org (800) 405-8873 TRI Tile Roofing Institute (Formerly: NTRMA - National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association) www.tileroofing.org (206) 209-5300 UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. www.ul.com (847) 272-8800 UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association www.uni-bell.org (972) 243-3902




USGBC U.S. Green Building Council www.usgbc.org (202) 828-7422 WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association www.environmentalistseveryday.org (202) 244-4700 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651 WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers) www.windowcoverings.org (212) 297-2100 WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association) www.wdma.com (312) 367-1157 WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591

B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials www.iapmo.org (909) 472-4100 ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (See ICC) ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc. (See ICC-ES)




ICC International Code Council (Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials) www.iccsafe.org (703) 931-4533 ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. www.icc-es.org (800) 423-6587

C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

CE Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission www.cpsc.gov (800) 638-2772 DOC Department of Commerce www.doc.gov (202) 482-2000 EPA Environmental Protection Agency www.epa.gov (202) 260-2090 FAA Federal Aviation Administration www.faa.gov (202) 366-4000 FCC Federal Communications Commission www.fcc.gov (202) 225-5322 FDA Food and Drug Administration www.fda.gov




(888) 463-6332 FHA Federal Highway Administration www.fhwa.dot.gov (410) 962-0093 GSA General Services Administration www.gsa.gov (202) 708-5082 HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development www.hud.gov (202) 708-1112 LBL Lawrence Berkeley Laboratory National Laboratory www.lbl.gov (510) 486-4000 NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology www.nist.gov (301) 975-6478 OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999 PBS Public Building Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science phs.os.dhhs.gov (202) 690 7694 TRB Transportation Research Board www.nas.edu/trb (202) 334-2934 TSA Transportation Security Administration www.tsa.gov/public/index.jsp




1(866)289-9673 USDA Department of Agriculture www.usda.gov (202) 720-2791 USPS United States Postal Service www.usps.com (202) 268-2000

D. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

DCR Virginia Department of Conservation and Recreation http://www.dcr.state.va.us (804) 786-1712 VDH Virginia Department of Health Culpepper District www.vdh.state.va.us (540) 829-7340 USBC The Virginia Statewide Building Code (USBC) The Commonwealth of Virginia – Uniform Statewide Building Code (804) 371- 7160 VDHCD Virginia Department of Housing and Community Development (804) 371-7000 VDOT Virginia Department of Transportation www.virginiadot.org (703) 383-8368 VDEQ Virginia Department of Environmental Quality www.deq.state.va.us 1(800)592-5482

1.6 GOVERNING REGULATIONS/AUTHORITIES




A. Contact authorities having jurisdiction directly for information and decisions having a bearing on the work. Names and addresses are subject to change; they are believed to be but are not assured to be accurate and up to date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

B. Codes: The contractor shall adhere to all applicable portions of code standards and specifications

in the construction of the work. Unless otherwise noted (reference Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements”), the Airports Authority will review the Contractor’s submittals and construction of the work for code compliance. The Airports Authority’s acceptance of completed construction does not relieve the Contractor from strict compliance with all applicable regulations and codes.

1. Definition: The Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority has a “building department” recognized by the Commonwealth of Virginia. This department is charged with enforcing the Virginia Uniform Statewide Building Code (VUSBC). Where the words “code official”, “department having jurisdiction” or “agency having jurisdiction” is referenced in any code, including the VUSBC or its adopted model codes (ICC), those terms shall mean the Airports Authority Building Official and/or his designated representative.

2. Standards that influence the construction of the project include, but are not limited to, all applicable federal and Commonwealth laws, all applicable codes, rules, regulations and standards applicable to this project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) PART 4 - MEASUREMENT (Not Used) PART 5 - PAYMENT (Not Used) END OF SECTION 014200







SECTION 014500 - QUALITY CONTROL PLAN 1

SECTION 014500 - QUALITY CONTROL PLAN PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY Contractor must implement a Quality Control Program to ensure that all work is performed in accordance with the Contract Documents and that substantiating documentation is provided.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit Quality Control Plan in accordance with Section 014000.

B. Submit detailed Project Quality Control Plan for each Construction Contract.

C. Submit the Contractor’s Quality Control Plan and Quality Control Project Plans to the Contracting Officers Technical Representative (COTR) in Microsoft Word.


3.1 GENERAL Implement a Quality Control Program including review and approval of shop and/or working drawings, inspection of materials and workmanship, and coordinating testing by the Owner’s Materials Testing Agency.

3.2 COTR’S ROLE The COTR will approve the Contractor's Quality Control Program and monitor the activities of the Contractor to ensure its effectiveness and compliance with the stipulations within this Section. The COTR review does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for development and implementation of a Quality Control Program or for full compliance with the provisions of the Contract Documents.

3.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE The COTR will perform periodic reviews and observations of the implementation of the Contractor's Quality Control Program. The Owner’s testing and inspection efforts are conducted for the sole purpose of facilitating the Owner’s acceptance of the constructed Work. Contractor retains total responsibility for Work.

3.4 QUALITY CONTROL PLAN

A. Submit the Quality Control Program to the COTR for review and approval within twenty (20) calendar days after receipt of Notice to Proceed and at most 10 days before beginning any Work. The Plan shall be neatly organized, typed, and shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. The Contractor’s Quality Control Program objectives and stated policy. 2. Organization and delegation of Quality Control authority to various Contractors’

representatives. 3. Documentation and records required for implementing the Quality Control Program. 4. Reports and forms to be submitted. 5. Inspections requirements, arrangements, coordination, control and reporting. 6. Testing requirements by the Contractor and required coordination with the Owner’s Materials

Testing Agency.




7. Internal audits to ensure the personnel of the Contractor and subcontractors are completing tasks per Quality Control Program.

8. Procedures for indoctrination and training of employees. 9. Procedures for receiving and storage of permanent materials for the Quality Control Program.

B. Submit Project Quality Control Plan for each construction Project. The Project Quality Control

Plan is to describe: 1. Identify the Quality Control Supervisor to be assigned to the project 2. Identify the Quality Control Technicians to be assigned to the project. 3. Organization and delegation of Quality Control authority to various Contractors’

representatives. 4. Tabulation of all tests and inspections anticipated for the Project, and the anticipated schedule

for these tests. 5. Specific documentation and records that are required for implementing the Quality Control

Plan for the Project.

C. Organization: 1. Designate one individual as the Quality Control Manager (QCM). The QCM will have

responsibility for the implementation of the Quality Control Program for the Contractor on all construction contracts.

The QCM shall have full authority to represent the company with respect to quality of the work and the Quality Control Program and shall have no duties assigned other than quality control activities. Quality Program Manager shall be a full-time employee and be totally dedicated to quality control.

2. Provide a QCM with a minimum of five (5) years of extensive experience in administrating Quality Control Programs on projects of a similar size and nature. Experience and qualifications will be evaluated on a case-by- case basis to determine acceptability of individuals. The Quality Control supervisor is responsible for the implementation of the Quality Control Program for a specific Project or construction contract.

3. Provide sufficient personnel to inspect the work and perform other Quality Control Program duties as necessary to oversee all Work, including shifts, quantity and location. Provide Quality Control Program personnel with applicable qualifications and experience. Submit the qualifications and work experience of all QC personnel to the COTR for review and approval. Similar documented experience in Quality Control for a contractor and for similar projects constitutes applicable experience.

D. Approval:

1. The COTR will review the submission and respond within seven calendar days of receipt. Approval will be based upon qualifications, structure, understanding and experience. If approval is conditional, the Contractor will comply with the direction of the COTR.

2. Once approved, the Quality Control Program personnel may not be replaced, nor any changes made without prior written consent from the COTR.

E. Activities:

1. Provide personnel to perform the following duties: a. Field Activities:

1) Inspect all field work in progress for compliance with the Contract Documents. Inform the Contractor and the COTR of any work that is in non-compliance as promptly as possible.

2) Document all work activities by completing a Daily Construction Report for every




contract day, in a format to be provided by the COTR. Provide written reference to the Work that was in non- compliance.

3) Arrange for all necessary testing and retesting of work with the owner’s material Testing Agency or the Contractors Testing Laboratory. Witness and review the tests and reports for conformance with the Contract Documents.

4) Formulate work lists for items requiring completion for any interim or substantial completion.

5) Approve all concrete placements using approved concrete placement cards. 6) Note any deficiency discovered, maintain records of all deficiencies and corrective action

on an electronic format approved by the COTR. Provide prompt notification of any deficiency to the COTR and provide an updated file of the log at the weekly construction update meeting. Enter all deficiency information into the Owner approved Program Management software application.

7) Participate in all final inspections when construction has been completed and formulate and maintain work lists.

8) Participate in all meetings with the COTR as required for implementing an effective Quality Control Program.

b. Office Activities: 1) Review all submittals for compliance with the Contract Documents. Maintain record of all

submittals using the Owner approved Program Management software application. 2) Review as-built conditions on the Contract Documents as per requirements of Section

017839, Project Record Documents. 3) Provide all documentation of the Quality Control Program activities to the COTR. 4) Review Contractor's pay requests and maintain appropriate documentation for quality

and acceptance of work being claimed.

3.5 FAILURE TO PROVIDE QUALITY MANAGEMENT SERVICES Repeated failures to comply with the requirements herein may result in the COTR implementing their own Quality Control Program. Such action will be at the sole discretion of the COTR. Cost for implementing the Quality Control Program will be deducted from the Contract Price. PART 4 - MEASUREMENT (Not Used) PART 5 - PAYMENT COTR will review plan for acceptability monthly and withhold a minimum of 5% for non-compliance or the value of the work in non-compliance (whichever is greater). COTR may add an additional 5% each subsequent month for further non-compliance or the value of the work in non-compliance (whichever is greater). END OF SECTION 014500







SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, security, and protection facilities for Contractor staging area.

1.2 RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, and other Division 01 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

1. Division 01 Section "01 33 00 "Submittals" 2. Not Used. 3. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements

for products used in those Sections. 4. Not Used. 5. Not Used 6. Not Used. 7. Not Used. 8. Not Used.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by COTR, permanent or temporary roofing is complete,

insulated, and weather tight; exterior walls are insulated and weather tight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.

B. Samples for Verification: For protective wall treatment for temporary partitions as follows:

1. Protective Wall Covering: 24 inches square, mounted on gypsum wallboard with moldings and butt joints. Include 12-inch-long samples of inside and outside corner moldings.

2. Bumper Guards: 12 inches long including fastening devices and showing end treatment. 3. Corner Guards: 8 inches long, in full-size profile of each type.


A. Regulations: Comply with industry standards and applicable laws and regulations of authorities

having jurisdiction, that include but are not limited to, the following: 1. Building Code requirements. 2. Health and safety regulations. 3. Police and Fire Department regulations. 4. Environmental protection regulations. 5. ADA Compliance: All temporary facilities shall be ADA compliant.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241.

1. Trade Jurisdictions: Assigned responsibilities for installation and operation of temporary utilities are not intended to interfere with trade regulations and union jurisdictions.




2. Electrical Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electrical service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

C. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for the Airports Authority's Building Codes/Environmental

Department to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Coordinate with the Airports Authority’s Building Codes/Environmental Department for requirements for certifications, permits, and inspections. Obtain permits from the Airports Authority's Building Codes/Environmental Department for temporary construction and temporary utilities.

D. Fire-retardant and Flame Spread Requirements: Unless otherwise noted, fire – retardant treat all

wood and wood composition products utilized in the Project and preservative treat all wood utilized on the exterior of any building. Preservative treat all wood utilized on other items indicated or specified with preservative treatment. Provide lumber and plywood with an Underwriters’ Laboratory (UL) stamp certifying a value of 25 or less flame spread and a value of 200 or less smoke development. Fire retardant lumber shall not be ripped or milled.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used if approved by COTR. Provide materials suitable for use intended.

B. Pavement: Comply with Division 32

C. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry

D. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch thick by 48 inches wide by maximum available lengths;

regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36.

E. Insulation: Un-faced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively.

F. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 Sections "Exterior Painting." and "Interior

Painting"

G. Tarpaulins: Fire-resistive labeled with flame-spread index of 15 or less.

H. Water: Potable.

I. Temporary Fuel Tanks: For requirements for temporary fuel tanks see Division 31 Section “Storm Water Pollution Protection Plan.” Comply with applicable safety and environmental regulations for temporary surface fuel tanks. Location and installation of tanks will be subject to review and approval of COTR and the Airports Authority's Fire Marshal.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. General: Provide new equipment suitable for use intended. If acceptable to COTR, undamaged,

previously used equipment in serviceable condition may be used.




B. Field Offices: with lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes; heated and air

conditioned; on foundations adequate for normal loading and provided with proper tie-downs.

C. Self-Contained Toilet Units: Single-occupant units of chemical, aerated re-circulation or combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiber-reinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material.

D. Drinking-Water Fixtures: including paper cup supply. Where power is accessible, provide electric

water coolers to maintain dispensed water temperature at 45 to 55 deg F.

E. Heating Equipment: Unless COTR authorizes use of permanent heating system, provide temporary heating units with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use for type of fuel being consumed.

F. Electrical Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets that will prevent insertion of 110v

or 120v plugs into higher-voltage outlets, and equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters with reset button.

G. Power Distribution System Circuits: Where permitted, overhead, and visible wiring circuits, not

exceeding 125-V ac, 20-A rating, and lighting circuits may be nonmetallic-sheathed cable.

H. Electrical Power Cords: Provide grounded extension cords; use hard-service as defined by NFPA 70, Article 400, where exposed to abrasion and traffic. If single lengths of extension cords will not reach areas where construction activities are in progress provide waterproof connectors to connect separate lengths of electrical extension cords.

PART 3 - MEASUREMENT (Not Used) PART 4 - PAYMENT All costs incurred by the Contractor to acceptably implement the requirements of this Section shall be performed at no additional cost to the Airports Authority and are part of this Contract. END OF SECTION 015000







SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 1

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements: selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.

B. This Section includes requirements for item substitutions made for, or "as approved by the

Airports Authority".


1.3 RELATED SECTIONS 1. Not Used. 2. Not Used. 3. Division 01 Section 014200"References" for applicable industry standards for products

specified. 4. Division 01 Section 012500 “Substitution Procedures” 5. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and

installations specified to be warranted.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

B. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model

number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

C. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility

except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

D. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or

where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

E. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from

those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

F. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service




performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. The Airports Authority reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," COTR will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is

COTR's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish

"salient characteristics" of products. 7. "Or as approved by the Airports Authority": Note that products submitted under an "or as

approved by the Airports Authority” provision are considered to be substitutions. Substitutions shall follow the requirements of Paragraph VII-42 of Contract Provisions and provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.

C. Product Selection Procedures for Open Proprietary Specifications with controlled substitutions

1. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.

2. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.

D. Product Selection Procedures for nonrestrictive specifications

1. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part - 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

2. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part - 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

3. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified




product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.

4. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers.

5. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches COTR's sample. COTR's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product.

6. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, and textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements.

a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, COTR will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.

b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, COTR will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

See Division 012500 “Substitution Procedures” PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SUBMITTALS See Division 013300 “Submittal Procedures”

3.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

3.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery and Handling: 1. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed

container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

2. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

3. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.




B. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weather tight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Comply with product manufacturers written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation,

and weather-protection requirements for storage. 5. Store foam plastic away from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment. 6. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 7. Protect stored products from damage. 8. Replace products and materials damaged by the elements due to improper storage at no

additional cost to the Airports Authority. This damage can be, but not limited to, oxidization, mold, mildew, warping, and rust.

3.4 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other

warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Authority.

2. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.

a. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

b. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed.

c. Refer to Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

B. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Closeout."




SECTION 017100 - SUBSURFACE EXAMINATION AND PREPARTION 1

SECTION 017100 - SUBSURFACE EXAMINATION AND PREPARTION PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY Section includes requirements for the Contractor's examination of subsurface site conditions prior to construction.


1.3 RELATED SECTIONS Division 01 Section 017300 "Execution" for procedural requirements governing execution of the Work

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Report: Submit a written report and survey listing conditions detrimental to performance of the

Work is required by other Sections, include the following: 1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)) PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. The Contractor is responsible for determining the type and location of underground utilities, regardless of whether such utilities are indicated or not on contract documents, so as to avoid damage thereto.

B. Within 60 calendar days of Notice to Proceed, submit to the COTR a survey of all subsurface

utility engineering results, indicating the horizontal and vertical location, coordinates and elevation of all utilities. No land disturbance shall be performed until the utility survey is approved.

C. Report any utilities in locations other than on contract documents to the COTR immediately.

Advise if the variance in location has any impact on the project and generate RFIs as necessary.

D. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

E. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of

connections before equipment and fixture installation.




F. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

3.2 EXISTING CONDITIONS AND UTILITIES

The existence and location of site improvements underground construction, and other utilities, indicated as existing are not guaranteed.

1. Before beginning site, work investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work, including points of connection of utility for all site utility systems.

2. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical and communication services.

3.3 MARKING UTILITY SERVICES

A. The Contractor is responsible for following the requirements of the Virginia Underground Utility

Damage Prevention Act. (Calling Miss Utility-VA811).

B. Employ a Subsurface Utility Engineering company to locate and mark the horizontal and vertical location of all utility lines in accordance with, ASCE C-I 38-02, Standard Guidelines for the Collection and Depiction of Existing Subsurface Utility Data, Quality level-A. Utilities that might be impacted by construction activities, including but not limited to the following:

1. Electric power lines. 2. Natural gas lines. 3. Sanitary Sewers. 4. Storm Sewers. 5. FAA communications, power, signal, and security lines. 6. Airfield series lighting lines 7. Water supply piping. 8. 530 KHz AM radio line - Parking Lot Availability Notification System -buried cable parallel to the

Airport access road. The system utilizes antennas on the Airport thus there are no buried cables for this system within the fenced portion of the Airport property.

9. Fuel Lines. 10. Telephone lines. 11. Data lines. 12. Underground Storage Tanks. 13. High Temperature Hot Water (HTHW) and chilled water lines.

C. Submit to the COTR the name of the independent Subsurface Utility Engineering (SUE) Company

to be used. Individuals assigned by the SUE provider to carry out the work should be well-trained, experienced, and capable. Those in responsible charge of the work and responsible for certifying

D. Coordinate with the COTR, for access to and utilization of, Airport GIS information, MWAA

Excavation & Trenching Check List, and notification procedures for the Utilities Locate Group.




E. Quality level A locating involves the use of nondestructive digging equipment at critical points to determine the precise horizontal and vertical position of underground utilities, as well as the type, size, condition, material, and other characteristics.

F. Contact the Airport Communications System (ACS) Help Desk at (703) 417-8300 a minimum of 72

hours prior to starting activities that include but are not limited to location and marking of horizontal locations of telephone and telecommunications lines belonging to the Airports Authority as part of the Airport Communication System. Contact the Airport Communications System (ACS) Help Desk a minimum of 72 hours prior to beginning operations, that include but are not limited to excavating, boring, pile-driving, digging or planting. Note the ACS does not locate utilities. Location is the responsibility of the Contractor’s underground utilities location subcontractor. The Airport Communications System (ACS) is merely notified as indicated previously.

G. Report any unmarked utilities encountered during construction to the COTR immediately

H. Repair any damage to utility lines due to construction operations at no expense to the Airports

Authority.

I. deliverables should be engineers, geologists, and land surveyors employed by the SUE provider in accordance with state professional registration requirements.

3.4 PREPARATION

A. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be

installed.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

C. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck

measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

D. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown

diagrammatically

3.5 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify COTR promptly.

B. General: Engage a Registered Surveyor to layout the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish Benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction




and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required

dimensions. 3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every Definable Feature and Element of Work as the

work progresses. 5. Notify COTR when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 6. Conduct closed site surveys with an error of closure equal to or greater accuracy than 1 part in

10,000; 3rd Order Class 1 accuracy, (e.g. 1:10,000) and (10”), where “n” equals the number of angles in the closed traverse.

7. Perform field survey work with sufficient precision to ensure the required accuracy of the specifications is achieved. The computed coordinate position of each horizontal control point used in compiling the plan shall be correct within the limits of 3rd Order Class 1 accuracy (that is, the horizontal error of closure shall not exceed 10 seconds times the square root of the number of instrument motions in the traverse, all before adjustment. The vertical error of closure of the control level circuit for the control Benchmarks shall not exceed plus or minus 12 millimeters times the square root of the length of the circuit in kilometers, before adjustment.). Both the horizontal and vertical measurements shall be expressed to the nearest millimeter.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and

topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and

levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by COTR.

3.6 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Identification: Existing Horizontal Control points and Benchmarks are as identified on the

Contract Documents.

B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent Benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent Benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

1. Do not change or relocate existing Benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of COTR. Report lost or destroyed permanent Benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent Benchmarks or control points to COTR before proceeding.

2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent Benchmarks and control points promptly with the approval of COTR. Base replacements on the original survey control points.

C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent Benchmarks on Project site,




referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with the Airports Authority for type and size of Benchmark.

1. Record Benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary

reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to

its original condition.

D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, including utilities, prepare a certified survey showing coordinates, dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and site work. Coordinates shall be VA State Plane North Zone (NAD 83) and elevations shall be (NAVD 88).

3.7 ACCEPTANCE OF CONDITIONS

A. Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a

request for information (RFI) to COTR. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

B. Furnish information to COTR that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility

structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction.








SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION 1

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. General installation of products. 3. Coordination of Authority-installed products. 4. Starting and adjusting. 5. Protection of installed construction. 6. Correction of the Work.



1.3 RELATED SECTIONS Division 01 Section -01 31 00 "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: Submit qualification data for land surveyors/professional engineer.

B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed and sealed by land surveyors/professional engineer certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.

C. Certified Surveys: Submit 2 copies signed and sealed by land surveyors/professional engineer.

D. Project Record Documents: Submit a record of Work performed (materials tests, inspections,

acceptance tests, etc.) and record survey data as required under provisions in Division 01 Sections "Submittals" and "Project Closeout."


A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in

the Commonwealth of Virginia and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.

B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice

in the Commonwealth of Virginia experienced in the area for which he is utilized. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION




A. Inspection of Conditions: Require Installer of each major component to inspect both the

substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Proceed only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to COTR. Coordinate this requirement with Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

B. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and

elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and

ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet in in all spaces. 5. Roughing-in of utilities in areas with vaulted or domed roofs shall follow contour of roof lines.

C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in

applications indicated.

D. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

E. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or

loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produces harmful noise levels. For additional requirements see Section "Supplementary Conditions."

G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component

securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights

directed by COTR. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,

arrange joints as directed by COTR. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.2 AUTHORITY-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for the Airports Authority's construction forces.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by the

Airports Authority's construction forces. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform COTR of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for the

Airports Authority's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify COTR if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.




2. Pre-installation Conferences: Include the Airports Authority's construction forces at pre-installation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive the Airports Authority's work. Attend pre-installation conferences conducted by the Airports Authority's construction forces if portions of the Work depend on the Airports Authority's construction.

3.3 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Follow equipment manufacturer's startup procedures, unless otherwise directed by COTR.

B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove

malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

C. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation.

D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.

Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

3.4 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that installed Work is without

damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.5 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching."

B. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with

matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

C. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

D. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.

E. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components

that cannot be repaired.

F. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. PART 4 - MEASUREMENT (Not Used)




PART 5 - PAYMENT All costs incurred by the Contractor to acceptably implement the requirements of this Section shall be performed at no additional cost to the Airports Authority and are part of this Contract. END OF SECTION 017300



SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 1

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning.



1.3 RELATED SECTIONS 1. Division 01 Section 014000 “Quality Requirements” for final requirements of the Warranty

Manual. 2. Division 01 Section 013233 "Photographic Documentation" for submitting Final Acceptance

construction photographs and negatives. 3. Division 01 Section 017800 "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings,

Record Specifications, Record Product Data, and other Record Documents. 4. Not Used. 5. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for

products of those Sections.

1.4 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Substantial Completion is the stage in progress of Work when COTR recommends to the Contracting Officer that all the Work, or a designated portion thereof, is sufficiently complete and functional according to the Contract Documents such that the Airports Authority can occupy and/or utilize the Work for its intended beneficial use. Subsequent to Substantial Completion the only remaining physical Work shall be completion of punch list items prior to Final Acceptance. PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preliminary Procedures:

A. Before requesting Authority inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following; list items below that are incomplete in request:

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the contract value of items on the punch list, explanation why the Work is incomplete, and a schedule for completing punch list work according to Section III of the Contract.

2. Complete any previously delinquent technical submittals and/or Shop Drawings for approval and project as-builts records.

3. Advise COTR of any pending insurance changeover requirements, including status of OCIP-related claims.

4. Submit Warranties and Owners Manuals as required by Contract Documents, workmanship




bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 5. Submit Contractor Warranty Letter, for review and approval, a minimum of 60 calendar days

before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. After date of Substantial Completion has been determined revise the Contractor’s Warranty Letter(s) to include that date as start of Warranty period for each portion of the Work upon which Substantial Completion is achieved.

6. Obtain and submit Release of Liens permitting the Airports Authority unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar Releases.

7. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents (As-Builts) except Record Contract CPM Schedule; also prepare and submit Operation and Maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs in digital format, damage or settlement surveys, and similar final record information.

8. Prepare and submit written evidence that specified testing and code inspections have been performed, accepted and certified, including, but not limited to, structural work, sprinkler piping systems, fire alarm and Fire Protection System (FPS) systems, bacteriological testing of domestic lines, back-flow prevention, electrical system testing, and hydrostatic pressure testing of sanitary lines. Submit approvals of Health Department or the FDA as applicable.

9. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by COTR. Label with manufacturer's name and model number with manifest of deliverable.

10. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver original keys to COTR. Advise the Airports Authority Airport Operations and Locksmith, of changeover in security provisions.

11. Complete startup testing and commissioning of systems to demonstrate completion of Work. 12. Submit test/adjust/balance records as part of Quality documentation. 13. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction

tools, and similar elements; provide restoration to original conditions as directed by COTR. 14. Request transfer of utilities back to the Airports Authority. 15. Submit transfer of utilities and any temporary facilities changeover information related to the

Airports Authority's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 16. Provide demonstration and training to the Airports Authority's personnel in operation,

adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems, as required by Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training. Submit demonstration and training videos.

17. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting as directed by COTR. 18. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects

as directed by COTR.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, COTR will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. COTR will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion on behalf of the Contracting Officer after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by COTR, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

2. Punch list work must be completed within the duration specified in Section III, "Schedule." Failure to complete punch list work within the contract duration specified may result in Liquidated Damages; and may result in the Contracting Officer ordering the work to be completed by others at the cost to Contractor.




3.2 FINAL COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE

A. Definition: "Final Completion" is the stage in the Contract when the Contracting Officer determines that all Work has been 100 percent completed according to the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, including physical completion of Work, administrative requirements for closeout, and financial requirements for closeout. The date of Final Acceptance is the date of execution by the Contracting Officer of a Certificate of Final Acceptance.

B. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting Final Inspection for determining date of Final

Completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a Final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Application for

Payment." 2. Submit certified copy of Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or

corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by COTR. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Submit a Contractor/COTR joint statement evidencing that all Record Documents, Operation and Maintenance Manuals, warranties, and similar required submittals have been approved.

4. Complete demobilization and removal of temporary facilities from the site including construction equipment and facilities, mockups, and other similar elements. Restore areas to previously existing condition, if applicable.

5. Execute final Contract Modification and submit final Subcontractor Payment Form. 6. Return all AOA badging (if utilized) and all Authority IDs. 7. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance

requirements. 8. Submit Record Contract CPM Schedule. 9. Submit warranty book. 10. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty (if applicable).

C. Inspection: Submit a written request for Final Inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,

COTR will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. COTR will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of Work that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

3.3 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

Preparation: Prepare submittal of Punch List. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, areas disturbed by Contractor outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Contract name and number. b. Date. c. Name of COTR. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number.

3.4 WARRANTIES




A. Submittal Time: Submit one draft copy of proposed Warranty Manual Specified below within 90

calendar days of Notice to Proceed. 1. Provide Manufacturer’s Standard Warranties, made out to the Airports Authority, and

statement of willingness to provide any applicable Special Warranties required by the Contract Documents 14 calendar days prior to shipping of materials and equipment. Products and Equipment shall not be considered delivered (for payment purposes) until the approved warranties have been received.

2. All warranties commence on date of acceptance of Substantial Completion for designated portions of the Work.

B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 calendar days of completion

of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by the Airports Authority during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.

C. Warranty Manual: Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of

contents of the Contract Specifications. Warranty documents include Contractor and major subcontractors warranty letters, special warranty documents, and manufacturer's warranties.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents. Binders shall not be filled beyond 75 percent of their rated capacity. Binders shall also have boomerang plastic sheet lifters, metal backbone, concealed rivet construction, and three-trigger position locking mechanism (lock, unlock, open) on top and bottom. Binder color shall be black unless another color is selected by COTR.

a. Provide maximum 3-inch binder thickness. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "PROJECT WARRANTIES," Contract

number and name, and subject matter of contents. If identification cannot be attached to the front include it as the first page in the manual. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. The use of business labels is prohibited.

2. Dividers: Provide three-hole, heavyweight, plastic tabbed dividers, (, or as approved by the Airports Authority) for each separate section. Provide laser printed description for each tabbed section on the front and back of tabs. Tabs shall indicate the appropriate Specification Section. Provide a description of the warranty or heading for sub tabs using the same laser printed format on the dividers. Provide an index of the contents in each section on the first page behind each section divider. The index shall be generated using a word processor and printed on a laser printer. Include a matching master table of contents for each volume using the same indexing system. Install a colored sheet between each different warranty within a tabbed section.

3. Provide a digital version of the warranty manual to the PMIS. This version shall consist of a scanned Adobe® PDF file of each warranty document in the manual.

D. Provide additional copies of each warranty that shall be included in Operation and Maintenance

Manuals upon request of COTR.

3.5 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with Authority requirements, local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. General cleaning during construction is included in Division 01 Section




"Execution."

B. Cleaning Agents: For final cleaning, use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

C. Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or

unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of

Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: 1. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including

landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. 2. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign

deposits. 3. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. 4. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. 5. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. 6. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of

stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

7. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

8. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. 9. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible

soil or stains remain. 10. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing

compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

11. Remove labels that are not permanent. 12. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace

finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

13. Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. 14. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, [elevator equipment,] and similar

equipment. 15. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. 16. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. 17. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from

water exposure. 18. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of

diffusers, registers, and grills. 19. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction. 20. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace

burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and high intensity discharge fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.




21. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

E. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare and submit a report to COTR.

F. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or

excess materials on the Airports Authority's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.

G. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work have become the

Airports Authority's property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed by COTR. PART 4 - MEASUREMENT (Not Used) PART 5 - PAYMENT All costs incurred by the Contractor to acceptably implement the requirements of this Section shall be performed at no additional cost to the Airports Authority and are part of this Contract. END OF SECTION 017700



SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 1

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings, including CADD & GIS submittals. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Record Samples. 5. Record Schedule. 6. Miscellaneous Record Submittals.


Drawings, Contract Provisions, Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS 1. Section 013200 “Construction Progress Documentation" for construction schedules as basis for

Record Schedule. 2. Section 014000 “Quality Requirements” for ensuring the record drawings and specifications are

kept current on a daily basis and marked to show deviations which have been made from the original Contract documents

3. Section 017700 "Project Closeout " for general closeout procedures 4. Section 017800 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual

requirements. 5. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of

products in those Sections.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings 1. Record Prints: Comply with Paragraph 2.1.A below. 2. CADD Record Drawings. The Contractor shall submit copies of CADD Record Drawings as

follows: a. Initial Submittal: Submit one set of complete, full-sized, CADD Record Drawings. Additional

sets of drawings are not to be copied and submitted until after substantial completion to insure all changes are shown on the drawings. The COTR will facilitate review of drawings and indicate whether the CADD Record Drawings are acceptable. The COTR will return review comments indicating any corrections that need to be made to the drawings. The corrected CADD Record Drawings may then be reproduced, and organized into sets, printed, bound, and submitted as final submittal.

b. Final Submittal: After construction is complete and changes are recorded, submit six complete, full-sized, printed sets of CADD Record Drawings. Include each sheet, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. Submit one copy of the CADD Record drawings in the approved electronic format. In addition, submit the original set of




marked-up record drawings onto which the mark-ups were made.

B. Geographic Information Systems (GIS) Submittal. The Contractor shall submit copies of the GIS Submittal as follows:

1. Initial Submittal: Submit all GIS data in ESRI Geodatabase version 10.0 or higher. The GIS deliverable will be submitted for each required GIS layer/feature class. The COTR will facilitate review with the GIS Division of the GIS submittal and indicate whether the ESRI GIS deliverable is acceptable. The COTR will return review comments indicating any corrections that need to be made.

2. Final Submittal: After construction is complete and changes are recorded, submit one electronic copy of each of the following:

a. GIS deliverable inventory report; b. QA/QC Report; c. All approved ESRI datasets of CADD Record Drawings.

C. Record Specifications: Submit electronic copy of Project Specifications, including addenda and

contract modifications.

D. Record Product Data: Submit an electronic copy of each Product Data submittal unless directed otherwise by the COTR.

Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in the manual instead of submittal as Record Product Data.

E. Record Samples: Submit Record Samples as specified.

F. Record Schedule: Submit an electronic copy of Record Schedule.

G. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Submit miscellaneous Record Submittals as specified.

H. At the discretion of the COTR, the requirement for hard copy record submittals may be waived. The Contractor must request, in writing from the COTR, a waiver of the hard copy submittals. The COTR may waive all or part of the required hard copy submittals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: During construction, maintain one complete, full sized, set of blue- or black-line prints of the Drawings, applicable shop drawings, and coordination drawings for record purposes. These drawings shall be updated periodically, by the contractor, in CADD to replace the hand mark-ups. The mark-ups shall be preserved for the record. A complete set of [Conformed] Drawings in CADD will be provided to the Contractor for his use in maintaining the CADD Record Drawings. The CADD files will be provided in [Bentley MicroStation [v7] [v8]] [and] [or] [Autodesk AutoCAD <insert version used>]

1. Maintenance of Drawings: Maintain the drawings in a clean, dry, legible condition. Keep drawings available during normal working hours for inspection by the COTR.

2. Preparation: Weekly mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether




individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the mark-ups on the record set.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later especially underground structures.

b. Record information in an understandable drawing technique. Ensure mark-ups are legible and reproducible.

c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check markups before enclosing concealed installations.

3. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Notice and RFI. k. Changes made following COTR's written orders. l. Details not on the original Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

4. Mark the Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, insert them into drawing set and assign an appropriate sheet number (one that follows the number sequence of the contract drawings). Show cross-references to the new sheets on the Drawings. Update drawing index as needed to reflect new sheets.

5. Mark record drawings with red pen that will reproduce clearly. Use different colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.

6. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or not indicated on the original Drawings.

7. Note applicable Construction Change Notices, Requests for Information, Technical Support Requests, and similar identification numbers, where applicable. Copies of change documentation shall be inserted into the set for clarification but are not a substitute for mark-ups. If identification numbers for documentation are marked on the drawing when no change resulted, indicate "No Change".

B. Newly Prepared Project Record Drawing Sheets: The contractor may add new sheets with

supporting sketches and change documentation instead of marking original sheets when neither the original Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation or if the new sheets can show the changes more clearly or additional space is required for markup information.

1. Assign a number to each new sheet and cross-reference on the appropriate related sheets. 2. Consult with COTR for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the

actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. 3. Integrate newly prepared sheets into Record Drawing sets and update drawing index to reflect

new sheets.




C. Format:

1. Identify and date each Record Drawing. Include the designation “PROJECT RECORD DRAWING” in a prominent location on each sheet.

2. Cover Sheet shall have the designation “PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS”, Date, Name of Contractor, and signature.

3. Record CADD Drawings: a. CADD files provided by COTR and utilized for recording of record mark-ups shall maintain

the format of the files provided. Place electronic mark-ups in a newly created layer on each drawing.

b. CADD files created by Contractor: Organize CADD information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Record Drawing set. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each CADD file.

4. Include the following identification on newly prepared Project Record Drawing Sheets: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING." d. Name of Architect/Engineer (if applicable). e. Name of Contractor. f. Initials of person incorporating the change. g. Drawing identification number. (Ixx/Dxx)

5. Organization of Newly Prepared Project Record Drawing Prints: Organize newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Include any contract required coordination drawings and applicable shop drawings. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

D. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR RECORD DRAWINGS

1. When there are multiple copies of the same sheet with different mark-ups on each copy, the General Contractor is responsible for consolidating all mark-ups onto a single copy of each individual sheet.

2. The information from all RFI's, Change Notices, Design Clarifications, field adjustments, or any other changes, must be noted on the appropriate drawing. These mark-ups must include enough information to clearly show the actual constructed conditions resulting from the change. The information may be drawn onto the drawing, copied onto the drawing or copied onto a new full size sheet. Every change in construction must have RFI’s, Change Orders or similar supplementary documents; therefore they must be copied in original size and attached to the back of the preceding drawing or at the end of the drawing set, as an appendix, as a full size sheet, same in size as the drawing set. Multiple RFI’s, CN’s and other supplemental documents may be copied in each single sheet.

3. All changes made on the drawings shall reference the appropriate RFI, Change Notices, Design Clarification, or details from the contractor prepared shop drawings. If the mark-up is due to a field adjustment, it shall be indicated as such.

4. Additional Sheets such as shop drawings and sheets showing copies of applicable change documentation must be inserted into the set as necessary. Such sheets shall have a title

5. Notes and sketches printed by hand are acceptable but shall be neat, legible, and reproducible. Hand lettering shall be 3/8" high minimum.

6. All shop drawings showing information not on the construction drawings (with the exception of concrete embedded steel reinforcement bending drawings and steel reaction and fabrication




drawings) shall be marked up and included in the record drawing set. They shall be the same size (changes in scale noted) as all other drawings, include a title block, and clearly indicate that they are record shop drawings. When the shop drawings more accurately show locations and conditions, they may be marked in lieu of referenced on the original drawings. This does not relieve the contractor from the shop drawing inclusion requirements in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals that are a separate item

7. Include contract required coordination drawings in the record drawing set.

2.2 GIS Submittal

A. The contractor is required to provide a GIS submittal matching the CADD record drawings.

B. GIS deliverables shall follow the MWAA GIS standard template which will be provided to the contractor by the COTR upon request.

C. When providing a GIS submittal, the Contractor shall provide spatial data matching the features

as rendered in the CADD drawing model files (containing the physical facility or asset components; buildings, aprons, runways, roads, fences, etc.), in real-world coordinates.

1. All GIS data shall be submitted in Virginia State Plane feet coordinate system using North American Datum (NAD) 83 and Geographic Reference System (GRS) 80 ellipsoid. All vertical measurements in the GIS submittals should be recorded based on the [North American Vertical Datum (NAVD) 88.

D. All deliverables must have project files associated with them.

E. GIS layers, or feature classes, are analogous to overlays in manual drafting systems and to

layer/levels within a CADD drawing. Each GIS layer/feature class contains a logical grouping of features within a common feature type (e.g., buildings, roads, aprons, etc.).

F. The Authority GIS Database Dictionary and Metadata Specification and MWAA GIS Schema will

be provided to the Contractor upon contract award, and can be provided in advance of award upon request.

G. Each feature in each layer/level of the GIS submittal will contain a number of associated

attributes (stored in the ESRI File Geodatabase). The following attributes are required as part of each GIS submittal:

1. GIS Submittals organized using the Authority GIS Database Dictionary: For all GIS submittals accompanying record drawings at the end of the construction phase where no FAA submittal is required, each layer/feature class will include required attributes as per the Authority GIS Database Dictionary. The Authority GIS Database Dictionary indicates required attributes, optional attributes and in some cases valid attribute values.

2. GIS Submittals organized using the FAA Airport GIS Database Dictionary: For GIS submittals accompanying record drawings at the end of the construction phase, where FAA submittal is required, each layer/feature class will include required attributes as per the FAA Airports GIS Database Dictionary (included in the most current version of the FAA AC 150/5300-18) and a set of additional attributes from the Authority GIS Database Dictionary.

H. Each feature class shall have a metadata file that contains the contents defined in the Authority




metadata standard.

I. Final Data Dictionary shall be delivered in MS Excel format and include contents that are defined in MWAA GIS data dictionary template and new data not defined in the MWAA GIS data dictionary.

J. GIS Data Format: GIS Submittals shall be provided in the following formats:

1. ArcGIS 10.2 compatible File Geodatabase 2. ArcGIS map documents 3. MrSID and TIFF with projection files

K. GIS Data Content

1. Data content should include feature classes, attributes, and geometry information that are defined in existing MWAA GIS schema. Feature dataset structure should match with MWAA GIS schema. Deliverable will follow GIS standards in the latest Design Manual. Data that is not in the existing MWAA GIS schema should be included in a miscellaneous dataset if it is required for maintaining and managing the project area.

2. Map documents should be delivered for each feature dataset. Layer level Description/metadata should be included. Map Layer name must match with source file name.

2.3 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. Print marked specifications, addenda, and contract modifications on paper any color but white and ensure that black font is clearly legible on the color chosen. Use the same paper color throughout the project. Use black font for these changes.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the brand name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of the manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data where applicable.

2.4 RECORD PRODUCT DATA Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, Record Drawings, and Product Data where applicable. 4. Upon completion of mark‑up, submit a complete set of record Product Data to COTR for the

Airports Authority's records. 5. Where Record Product Data is required as part of maintenance manuals, submit marked‑up




product data as an insert in the manual.

2.5 RECORD SAMPLE SUBMITTAL Prior to date of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall meet the Airports Authority's personnel at the site to determine which of the samples maintained during the construction period shall be transmitted to the Airports Authority for record purposes. Comply with the COTR's instructions for packaging, identification marking, and delivery to the Airports Authority's sample storage space. Dispose of other samples in manner specified for disposal of surplus and waste materials.

2.6 RECORD SCHEDULE

A. Record Schedule Submittal: Immediately prior to date of inspection for Final Acceptance, submit a copy of the As-built Contract CPM Schedule (if applicable) to the COTR.

B. Mark the Contractor’s Construction Schedule to show actual start and finish dates for all work activities and milestones, based on the accepted monthly updates. This Record Schedule shall be in same format as Contractor’s Construction Schedule. This Record Schedule shall be in tabular and in time‑scaled PDM plot formats.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to COTR. Categories of requirements resulting in miscellaneous records include, but are not limited to the following:

a. Field records on excavations and foundations. b. Field records on underground construction and similar Work. c. Survey showing locations and elevations of underground lines. d. Invert elevations of drainage piping. e. Surveys establishing building lines and levels. f. Authorized measurements utilizing unit prices or allowances. g. Records of plant treatment. h. Ambient and substrate condition tests. i. Certifications received in lieu of labels on bulk products. j. Batch mixing and bulk delivery records. k. Testing and qualification of tradesmen. l. Documented qualification of installation firms. m. Load and performance testing. n. Inspections and certifications by governing authorities. o. Leakage and water‑penetration tests. p. Fire resistance and flame spread test results. q. Final inspection and correction procedures. r. Summary letter from Special Inspector indicating structural work was completed in

accordance with applicable standards. s. Report of potable water testing. t. Backflow prevention certificates. u. Final inspections of all trades. v. Certificates for piping for fire protection systems and FPS supervisory systems.




w. Approvals of Health Department or FDA as applicable. PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project

Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the

field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Repair or reproduce torn or dirty sheets. Provide access to Project Record Documents for COTR's reference during normal working hours.


METROPOLITAN WASHINGTON AIRPORTS AUTHORITY DTRE03

DULLES TOLL ROAD STREAM REHABILITATION September 14, 2020

GENERAL 190200 - 1

SECTION 190200 – GENERAL 190200.01 DESCRIPTION These specifications cover general sampling and testing requirements and procedures, certifications for aggregate acceptance, and certifications and responsibilities of technicians and batchers for asphalt and hydraulic cement concrete. 190200.2 CONFORMANCE WITH SPECIFICATIONS Materials shall conform to these specifications in accordance with Section 014000. Whenever a reference to a material is followed by a reference to a specification, the material shall conform to the referenced specification. Material that is required to conform to these specifications shall not be used until it has been approved by the COTR. Where maximum and minimum limits are given for a characteristic of a material, material whose specified characteristic approximates the mean value shall be furnished. The specified limits shall not be exceeded. When a material is fabricated of or treated with another material or when any combination of materials is assembled to form a product, the failure of any component to comply with the applicable specification shall be sufficient cause for rejection of the whole unless the combination of components will produce a product satisfactory to the COTR. If the Contractor desires to substitute another material for that specified, he shall submit proof that the substitute material is equal in all respects to the material specified. Proof shall be in the form of specifications for the proposed substitution that may be readily compared with the specifications for the original material. 190200.3 GENERAL SAMPLING AND TESTING PROCEDURES Materials shall be evaluated for compliance according to the requirements of standard AASHTO, ASTM, or federal test methods or methods devised by the Department as specified in the applicable specifications or as approved by the COTR. At the discretion of the COTR, the Contractor may furnish a certification of conformity from the manufacturer in lieu of testing. The COTR reserves the right to retest any material that has previously been tested or accepted on certification and reject that material if it is found to be defective. The Department has developed test methods for the evaluation of certain materials or their properties. These test methods are identified by the prefix VTM (Virginia Test Method) followed by a number that will identify the specific VTM to be used. Copies of the Department’s test methods may be obtained from the Department’s Materials Division.



GENERAL 190200 - 2

Sampling of materials shall be performed in accordance with the standard methods of the Department. When required, samples submitted to the Department’s laboratories shall be accompanied by an MSDS. Failure by the Contractor to submit an MSDS will be cause for rejection of the material. When a material is to be tested prior to delivery to the project, the Contractor shall furnish complete identification of the material and its specific intended use in the proposed construction, including references to the plans or specifications calling for the material. Material will be inspected at the original or intermediate source of supply whenever it is economically advantageous to the Department. This inspection does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility to furnish materials that conform to the specifications. The Department’s representative will be provided ready access to all parts of any processing plant furnishing material for a project. Access for sampling and inspecting materials or plant equipment shall include secure, sturdy platforms conforming to local, state, and federal safety regulations. The Department may discontinue the use of a plant laboratory for acceptance testing in the event of a mechanical malfunction of the laboratory equipment and in cases of emergency involving plant inspection personnel. In such event, acceptance testing will be performed at the district or central office laboratory until the malfunction or emergency has been satisfactorily corrected or resolved. 190200.4 ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURES FOR AGGREGATES Aggregates conforming to the requirements of Section 190207 (for Type I) and Section 190208 will be accepted under a quality assurance program that uses statistical concepts. Aggregate materials shall conform to such requirements prior to the addition of any admixtures. Acceptance procedures for other aggregates will be according to the requirements of an approved production control plan conforming to the policies of the Department with regard to sampling and testing. Shipments of aggregates accepted under such a production control plan shall be accompanied by the following certification:

Aggregate Certification

Aggregate shipped under this certification has been tested and conforms to VDOT’s requirements.

Signature and Title The certification may be printed or stamped on the delivery ticket or affixed by a gummed label thereto. The certification shall be signed by an authorized representative of the aggregate supplier and given to the COTR upon delivery of the aggregate. The No. 10 sieve shall be the dividing sieve for soils, select material, aggregate subbase material, and aggregate base material. The No. 8 sieve shall be the dividing sieve for asphalt concrete aggregates. That portion of the total aggregate retained on the sieves is defined as coarse aggregate, and that portion passing the sieves is defined as fine aggregate. Soundness tests will be performed according to the requirements of AASHTO T104 without regard to these definitions of fine and coarse aggregate. Fine and coarse aggregates for hydraulic cement concrete are distinguishable by their conformity to the series of grading requirements specified in Section 190202 and Section 190203, respectively.



GENERAL 190200 - 3

The term nonpolishing aggregate shall mean aggregate that the Department has determined will result in a surface of acceptable skid resistance when it is used and exposed as part of a roadway or bridge deck wearing surface. The Department reserves the right to evaluate and determine the acceptability of polishing characteristics of aggregate proposed for use in pavement and bridge deck surfaces. Crushed glass may be used for construction in drainage, embankment and backfilling applications, except for undercutting and foundation support for bridges, abutments, retaining walls and box culverts. The substitution of crushed glass is limited to applications using material of size 3/8 inch and smaller where allowed for use in the Specifications. 190200.5 HANDLING AND STORING AGGREGATES Stockpiles of aggregate shall be constructed on areas that are hard, well drained, and denuded of vegetation. The different sizes and kinds of aggregates shall be kept separate during handling and storage and until batched. Care shall be taken to prevent segregation of coarse and fine particles during handling and storing. Aggregates placed directly on the ground shall not be removed from the stockpiles within 1 foot of the ground until final cleanup. The COTR will only permit the use of clean aggregates removed from within 1 foot of the ground. 190200.6 TECHNICIAN AND BATCHER CERTIFICATION Certification for technicians and batchers will be awarded by the Department upon a candidate’s satisfactory completion of an examination.

(a) Central Mix Aggregate Technician: A Central Mix Aggregate Technician designs and makes necessary adjustments in job mixtures at the aggregate plant based on an analysis of the specified material. The technician also samples materials and conducts any tests necessary to put the aggregate plant into operation and produce a mixture in accordance with the applicable Specifications.

(b) Asphalt Plant Level I Technician: An Asphalt Plant Level I Technician samples materials

to be used in asphalt production. (c) Asphalt Plant Level II Technician: An Asphalt Plant Level II Technician samples

material to be used in asphalt production and is capable of conducting any tests necessary to put the asphalt plant into operation.

(d) Concrete Plant Technician: A Concrete Plant Technician performs necessary adjustments

in the proportioning of material used to produce the specified concrete mixtures. (e) Concrete Batcher: A Concrete Batcher performs the batching operation of materials used

to produce the specified concrete mixtures. The batcher implements adjustments only at the direction of a certified Concrete Plant Technician unless the batcher’s certification authorizes otherwise.



GENERAL 190200 - 4

(f) Asphalt Field Level I Technician: An Asphalt Field Level I Technician provides quality control of the placement operations of Asphalt Concrete.

(g) Asphalt Field Level II Technician: An Asphalt Field Level II Technician inspects asphalt

concrete placement to ensure and verify conformance with applicable requirements. (h) Concrete Field Technician: A Concrete Field Technician provides quality control of

placement operations for hydraulic cement concrete in accordance with applicable requirements.

(i) Asphalt Mix Design Technician: An Asphalt Mix Design Technician is responsible for

designing and adjusting asphalt mixes as needed, reviewing and approving all test results, having direct communication with the asphalt plant for making recommended adjustments and is capable of conducting any tests necessary to put the asphalt plant into operation.

(j) Aggregate Properties Technician: An Aggregate Properties Technician conducts all

aggregate tests on aggregate used in asphalt concrete and verify conformance to applicable requirements.

(k) Slurry Surfacing Technician: A Slurry Surfacing Technician inspects the placement of

emulsified asphalt slurry seal and latex modified emulsion treatment (Micro-surfacing) and verify conformance with applicable requirements.

(l) Surface Treatment Technician: A Surface Treatment Technician inspects the placement

of single seal and modified (blotted) seal coats to ensure and verify conformance to applicable requirements.




MINERAL FILLER 190201 - 1

SECTION 190201 – MINERAL FILLER 190201.01 – DESCRIPTION These specifications cover inorganic material such as lime or fly ash, usually of very fine grading, added to soil or asphalt to produce a desired effect. 190201.02 – DETAIL REQUIREMENTS Mineral filler shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M17. Tests to verify conformance will be performed in accordance with AASHTO T37.




MINERAL FILLER 190201 - 2




FINE AGGREGATE 190202 - 1

SECTION 190202 – FINE AGGREGATE 190202.01 DESCRIPTION These specifications cover material for use as fine aggregate in the production of hydraulic cement concrete, mortar, asphalt concrete, and asphalt surface treatments. 190202.02 MATERIALS Fine aggregate is classified herein in according to its natural occurrence or method of manufacture as natural sand or stone sand. Natural sand shall consist of grains of hard, sound material, predominantly quartz, occurring in natural deposits or in loosely bound deposits, such as sandstone conglomerate. Stone sand shall consist of sound crushed particles of approved Grade A stone, essentially free from flat or elongated pieces, with sharp edges and corners removed. Fine aggregates for use in hydraulic cement concrete that are obtained from more than one source shall not be used alternately or mixed without the COTR’s approval. 190202.3 DETAIL REQUIREMENTS

(a) Grading: Grading shall conform to the requirements of Table II-1. Tests to verify conformity shall be performed according to the requirements of AASHTO T27.

(b) Soundness: Soundness shall conform to the requirements of Table II-2. Tests to verify

conformity shall be performed according to the requirements of AASHTO T103 or T104. (c) Organic Impurities: When fine aggregate is to be used in hydraulic cement concrete, the

percentage of organic impurities shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO T21; however, material producing a darker color than that specified in AASHTO T21 may be accepted in accordance with AASHTO M6.

(d) Void Content: Void content shall be tested to verify conformity according to the

requirements of VTM-5. (e) Deleterious Material: The amount of deleterious material in sands shall be not more than

the following:

Material % by Weight AASHTO Test Method

Clay lumps 0.25 T112 Shale, mica, coated grains, soft or flaky particles 1.0 T113 Organic material 0 T21 Total material passing No. 200 sieve by washing1 T11 and T27 For use in concrete subject to abrasion 3 For other concrete 5

1In the case of stone sand, if the material passing the No. 200 sieve is dust of fracture, essentially free from clay and shale, the percentages shown for use in concrete subject to abrasion and in other concrete may be increased to 5.0 percent and 7.0 percent, respectively.



FINE AGGREGATE 190202 - 2

TABLE II-1 Fine Aggregate

Amounts Finer Than Each Laboratory Sieve (Square Opening) (% by Weight)

Grading 3/8 in. No. 4 No. 8 No. 16 No. 30 No. 50 No. 100 No. 200 A Min. 100 95-100 80-100 50-85 25-60 5-30 Max. 10 B Min. 100 94-100 Max. 10 C Min. 100 94-100 Max. 25

TABLE II-2 Soundness

Max. Soundness Loss (%)

Use Magnesium Sulphate

(5 Cycles) Freeze and Thaw

(100 Cycles) Hydraulic cement concrete 18 8 Asphalt concrete surfaces and surface treatments 25 15 Asphalt concrete bases 30 15




COARSE AGGREGATE 190203 - 1

SECTION 190203 – COARSE AGGREGATE 190203.01 DESCRIPTION These specifications cover material used as coarse aggregate in the production of hydraulic cement concrete, asphalt concrete, asphalt surface treatments, and in drainage. 190203.02 MATERIALS Coarse aggregate shall consist of crushed stone, crushed slag, crushed or uncrushed gravel with clean, hard, tough, and durable pieces free from adherent coatings and deleterious amounts of friable, thin, elongated, or laminated pieces; soluble salts; or organic materials.

(a) Crushed hydraulic cement concrete will be permitted for use as a coarse aggregate provided it conforms to the physical requirements specified herein and shows no adverse chemical reaction. Crushed hydraulic cement concrete will not be permitted in the following: (1) reinforced cement concrete, (2) in combination with other materials in contact with geotextile fabric when such fabric is used as a drainage item, and (3) in backfill or bedding for perforated pipe.

(b) Crushed gravel shall consist of particles of which at least 80 percent by weight shall have

at least one face fractured by artificial crushing. Tests to verify conformance shall be performed in accordance with VTM-15.

(c) Blast furnace slag shall be relatively free from foreign minerals and glassy or spongy

pieces. It shall weigh at least 70 pounds per cubic foot, dry rodded, for size No. 68 and smaller and at least 65 pounds per cubic foot, dry rodded, for larger sizes. Tests to verify conformance shall be performed in accordance with AASHTO T19. When used in asphalt surface treatments, blast furnace slag shall contain not more than 10 percent nonporous material and shall have an absorption of at least 3 percent. Tests to verify conformance will be performed in accordance with AASHTO T85.

(d) Crushed glass shall consist of particles of curbside-collected or waste glass. It shall be

free from sources of glass that include automotive glass, lead crystal, TV monitors, lighting fixtures and electronics applications. Non-glassy material associated with curbside collection (paper, capping materials, etc.), excluding fragments of broken ceramics and pottery, shall be limited to 5 percent by weight using a gravimetric determination, and including loss on ignition performed in accordance with ASTM D2974. One hundred percent (100%) of the crushed glass shall pass the 9.5 mm (3/8 inch) sieve with less than 5 percent passing the No. 200 sieve. Crushed glass shall not be used in hydraulic cement concrete, asphalt, base/subbase, or exposed shoulder applications.

190203.3 DETAIL REQUIREMENTS

(a) Grading: Open-graded aggregates shall conform to the requirements of Table II-3. Tests to verify conformance shall be performed in accordance with AASHTO T27.




(b) Soundness: Soundness shall conform to the requirements of Table II-4. Tests to verify conformance shall be performed in accordance with AASHTO T103 or T104. The requirement for soundness test for crushed glass is waived due to its preclusion from the applications shown in Table II-4.











ASPHALT MATERIALS 190210 - 1

SECTION 190210 – ASPHALT MATERIALS 190210.01 DESCRIPTION These specifications cover the manufacturing and material requirements for asphalt material consisting of asphalt, asphalt cement, asphalt cutback, or asphalt emulsion as defined in ASTM D8. 190210.02 MATERIALS Asphalt material shall be homogeneous and shall conform to the following:

(a) Rapid curing and medium curing liquid asphalts used as surface treatments shall contain a heat-stable additive conforming to Section 190211.

(b) Liquid asphalt material will be tested for coating ability in accordance with AASHTO

T182, with the following modifications: 1. Material that can coat 95 percent of a shady dolomite will be classified Type I. 2. Material that can coat 95 percent of a siliceous gravel wetted with 2 percent

water by weight will be classified Type II.

(c) Rapid curing cutback asphalts shall conform to AASHTO M81. (d) Medium curing cutback asphalts shall conform to AASHTO M82. (e) Cements shall be viscosity graded and shall conform to AASHTO M226, Table 2, except

that the loss on heating shall be not greater than 1.0 for AC-5, 0.8 for AC-20, and 0.5 for all other grades.

(f) Emulsions shall conform to AASHTO M208 and shall be Type I as specified herein

except that CRS-2 shall be Type II as specified herein. CRS-1h shall conform to AASHTO M208 for CRS-1 except that the penetration shall be 40 to 110. Emulsions will be sampled and tested in accordance with AASHTO T59 except that viscosity will be tested in accordance with VTM-64.

(g) Polymer Modified Cationic Emulsified Asphalt shall conform to AASHTO M316. (h) Non-tracking tack will be tested in accordance with Section 190210.07.

190210.3 VIRGINIA ASPHALT ACCEPTANCE PROGRAM (VAAP) Acceptance into the VAAP

(a) Asphalt materials will be accepted under the Virginia Asphalt Acceptance Program (VAAP). Acceptance involves sampling, testing, documentation, and certification of the product by the manufacturer in combination with a Department monitoring effort.




Performance Graded Binder suppliers shall conform to AASHTO R-26, and Emulsion suppliers shall conform to AASHTO PP-71 to be added to the VAAP, with provisions listed below.

(b) To have a new facility added to the VAAP, producers shall submit a split sample of each

material to be approved to Materials Division for testing. (c) Approved shipping facilities from the VAAP that need to add a material to the Materials

Division Approved Products List shall submit a split sample of the material to be approved to Materials Division for testing.

190210.4 VDOT ASPHALT ACCEPTANCE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS AND

COMPLIANCE The Contractor shall ensure the following are preformed:

(a) Sample and test asphaltic materials in accordance with the specified methods in Section 190210.07 at a minimum frequency of once a month and whenever additional or different components materials are added to existing materials, and tested in accordance with the specified methods in Section 190210.07. If the manufacturer is supplying to multiple VDOT jobs, they shall only be required to submit one sample per month per type/grade.

(b) Maintain a file or certified test reports representing the asphaltic material. (c) Provide a copy of the certified test report to the Materials Division within 30 days of

sampling. Failure to comply with this requirement may result in removal from the VAAP and the Materials Division Approved Products List.

(d) Supply the Materials Division a summary sheet of quantities shipped to state work

annually in January of the following year. This summary sheet shall show the number of gallons of each type/grade of material shipped to Virginia addresses.

(e) Submit a detailed plan of action describing the procedures to be taken to ensure tracking

of sample test results and the material represented by these results to the Department. 190210.05 SAMPLING

(a) Samples shall be taken in the presence of VDOT personnel or a VDOT representative. (b) Samples taken for testing of asphaltic materials are to be not less than one quart (one

liter) of materials, (0.5 gallons (2 liters) for asphalt emulsions). (c) Care is to be taken to ensure that the samples are not contaminated and the sample

containers are perfectly clean and dry before filling. (d) Immediately after filling, sample containers are to be tightly closed, and properly marked

for identification on the container itself.




190210.06 TESTING

(a) The Contractor shall ensure the standard control tests on asphaltic materials, as detailed in Section 190210.07, are conducted.

(b) The Contractor shall require all testing for certified test reports to be performed by the

Manufacturer’s personnel in the Manufacturer’s VDOT approved laboratory or by a VDOT approved commercial testing facility.

(c) The Department will conduct acceptance testing at a frequency of a minimum of 1 test

per month per type/grade of asphaltic material that has been supplied to VDOT projects during the previous month at the Materials Division during the construction season. The frequency will be less during the remainder of the year.

(d) Laboratories conducting quality control must be certified by VDOT as meeting the

following requirements:

1. All Binder Laboratories shall hold AASHTO Accreditation and provide VDOT with a copy of accreditation.

2. All Emulsion Laboratories shall be AASHTO Accredited, and shall provide

VDOT with a copy of their accreditation. 3. Test Reports

a. The Contractor shall ensure the manufacturer maintains a file of certified

test reports for all asphaltic materials ultimately shipped to them. b. Test Reports shall indicate that the material shipped meets the

requirements for that type/grade of asphaltic material and shall show the test results that were obtained to determine compliance with the applicable specifications.

c. The Contractor shall ensure records are maintained for at least 12 months

by the manufacturer, and available for verification by VDOT personnel upon request.

d. Copies of certified test results shall also be sent to the Materials

Division. e. Certified Test Reports shall be a company’s standard form containing the

following information:

(1) Manufacturer’s name and address (2) Type and grade of asphaltic material (3) Testing performed (AASHTO or Virginia Test Method

designation)




(4) Test results and date obtained (5) Quantity represented (6) Tank Number (7) Unique Report Identifier (8) Statement indicating that the manufacturer “certified that these

are the test results obtained on the material tested under the VAAP program”.

190210.07 TESTS

(a) PG Asphalt Binders:

1. Certified Test Reports for PG Asphalt Binders shall be based upon the results of tests performed in accordance with AASHTO M332, Table 1. The manufacturer is not required to perform the Direct Tension Test, AASHTO T314.

2. Certified test results for Superpave PG Asphalt Binders are to be based upon the

results of tests performed in accordance with AASHTO R 29, as specified below:




3. For asphalt binders tested in accordance with AASHTO T 350, indication of elastic response shall be determined using Figure X1.1 Nonrecoverable Creep Compliance Versus Percent Recovery in AASHTO M 332.

(b) Cutback Asphalts:

1. Certified Test Reports for Cutback Asphalts shall be based upon the results of

tests per formed in accordance with AASHTO M81 and M82. The manufacturer is not required to perform the Flash Point, Ductility, and Solubility tests unless the COTR directs the Contactor to require it. VDOT will perform Ductility and Solubility tests on all acceptance samples. Flash Point tests will be performed by VDOT periodically. When performed by VDOT, failure of either sample on Flash Point, Ductility, and Solubility will be considered sufficient reason for the COTR to direct the Contractor to require the manufacturer to perform this testing. If the manufacturer elects to conduct these tests to better control production, the results shall be included on the certified test report.

2. When used in surface treatments, the Coating Ability test shall be conducted

subject to the specifications listed in Section 190210.02.

(c) Emulsified Asphalts:

1. Certified Test Reports for Emulsified Asphalts shall be based upon the results of tests performed in accordance with AASHTO M208 or AASHTO M316, as specified below:

a. CationicEmulsions-Table1(fromAASHTOM208orM316, as applicable),

specifically

(1) Tests on Emulsions:

• Saybolt Furol Viscosity • Sieve Test (if necessary) • Demulsibility or Classification test • Particle Charge Test • Residue by Distillation

(2) Tests on residue from distillation:

• Penetration

b. CSS-1h (Quick Set) shall be tested the same as Cationic Emulsions, with

the addition of “Quick set Emulsified Asphalt Setting Time (VTM-89).”

c. Latex Modified Cationic Emulsions (Quick Set)

(1) CQS-1h Latex Modified (CQS-1hLM)




(a) Tests on Emulsions • Saybolt Furol Viscosity • Sieve Test (if necessary) • Particle Charge Test • Residue by Evaporation (VTM-78)

(b) Tests on residue

• Penetration • Ring and Ball Softening Point

(2) CRS-2 Latex

(a) Tests on Emulsions

• Saybolt Furol Viscosity • Sieve Test (if necessary) • Particle Charge Test • Residue by Distillation

(b) Tests on residue by Distillation

• Penetration • Ring and Ball Softening Point • Elastic Recovery

2. The manufacturer is not required to perform the Flash Point, Ductility, and

Solubility tests unless the COTR directs the Contractor to require it. VDOT will perform Ductility and Solubility tests on all independent assurance (monitor) and Q.A. samples. Flash Point tests will be performed by VDOT periodically. When performed by VDOT, failure of either sample on Flash Point, Ductility, and Solubility will be considered sufficient reason to require the manufacturer to perform this testing. If the manufacturer elects to conduct these tests to better control production, the results shall be included on the certified test report.

(d) Non-Tracking Tack:

Certified Test Reports for Non-Tracking Tack shall be based upon the results of tests performed, as specified below:

1. Tests on Non-Tracking Tack:

• Saybolt Furol Viscosity • Residue by Distillation

2. Tests on residue by distillation:

• Ring and Ball Softening Point




190210.8 STORING AND SHIPPING

(a) Shipping:

1. Shipments of asphalt material shall be made in transporting media that are free from contamination. Tank trucks or trailers shall be equipped with a COTR approved sampling device. The device shall have an inside diameter of 1/2 to 1 inch and a gate valve or petcock. The device shall be built into the tank or the recirculating or discharge line so that a sample can be drawn during circulation or discharge.

2. All shipping documents shall contain sufficient information such that at any

point, the material may be traceable back to the original test results. If the material is mixed with other approved material for storage, the record system will be such as to assure the traceability of all the material which is being mixed.

3. All shipping documents shall be accompanied by a statement similar to “We

certify that all material being shipped on this invoice/bill of lading has been tested and approved under the Virginia Asphalt Acceptance Program and that the material has been loaded under the supervision of our representative into carriers that are suitable for shipment of this material.”

4. All shipping documents shall be kept by the recipient of the material for at least

12 months from the date of receipt, and are available for verification by VDOT personnel.

5. Only material tested and certified in accordance with the VAAP shall be mixed

and shipped to VDOT projects.

(b) Storing: Asphalt material shall be placed in storage tanks that are free from contamination.

190210.9 PAYMENT ADJUSTMENT SYSTEM If the asphalt material represented by any one sample does not conform to the requirements herein and the material is a pay item, the COTR will reduce the Contract unit price for the item by 4 percent for each property that does not conform to the Specifications for the quantity represented by the sample that was used on the project. The COTR will reject any unused material represented by the failing sample. The COTR will consider any failed sampled asphalt material that is not a pay item unacceptable and subject to the provisions of Section 014000.








ASPHALT CONCRETE 190211 - 1

SECTION 190211 – ASPHALT CONCRETE 190211.01 DESCRIPTION Asphalt concrete shall consist of a combination of mineral aggregate and asphalt material mixed mechanically in a plant specifically designed for such purpose. An equivalent single-axle load (ESAL) will be established by the COTR, and SUPERPAVE mix types may be specified as one of the types listed as follows:

Asphalt concrete shall conform to the requirements for the mix type designated on the plans or elsewhere in the Contract for use. At the Contractor’s option, an approved Warm Mix Asphalt (WMA) additive or process may be used to produce the asphalt concrete (AC) mix type designated. 190211.02 MATERIALS

(a) Asphalt materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 190210 except asphalt cement materials shall be performance graded (PG) in accordance with AASHTO M332.




In addition, asphalt mixtures with the E designation shall meet the asphalt cement requirements in Section 190211.04(e)1.

(b) Coarse aggregate shall be Grade A or B conforming to the requirements, except for

grading, of Section 190203 for quality. In addition, the coarse aggregate sizes retained on and above the No. 4 sieve shall comply with the coarse aggregate requirements in Table II-12A. Flat and elongated (F&E) particles shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D 4791, and coarse aggregate angularity (CAA) shall only be tested on crushed gravel in accordance with ASTM D 5821.

(c) Fine aggregate shall conform to the requirements, except for grading, of Section 190202

for quality and the fine aggregate requirements in Table II-12A. Fine aggregate angularity (FAA) shall be tested in accordance with AASHTO T 304 (Method A) and the sand equivalent (SE) shall be tested in accordance with AASHTO T 176.

(d) After a gradation test is performed:

1. If 10 percent or more of the material is retained on the No. 4 sieve, that portion

shall be tested in accordance with the requirements for coarse aggregate. 2. If 10 percent or more of the material passes the No. 4 sieve, that portion shall be

tested for SE. 3. If 10 percent or more of the material passes the No. 8 sieve, that portion shall be

tested for FAA. (e) Fine or coarse aggregates that tend to polish under traffic will not be permitted in any

final surface exposed to traffic except in areas where the two-way average daily traffic is less than 750 vehicles per day and as permitted elsewhere in these Specifications.

(f) Mineral filler shall conform to the requirements of Section 190201. (g) Aggregate for asphalt concrete shall be provided in sufficient sizes and amounts to

produce a uniform mixture. The Contractor shall indicate on the proposed job-mix formula the separate approximate sizes of aggregate to be used.

Where segregation or nonuniformity is evident in the finished pavement, the COTR reserves the right to require the Contractor to discontinue the use of crusher run or aggregate blends and to furnish separate sizes of open-graded aggregate material.




(h) An antistripping additive shall be used in all asphalt mixes. It may be hydrated lime or a chemical additive from the Materials Division Approved Products List No. 7 or a combination of both. The approved chemical additive shall be added at a rate of not less than 0.30 percent by weight of the total asphalt content of the mixture.

The mixture shall produce a tensile strength ratio (TSR) of not less than 0.80 for the design and production tests. The TSR shall be determined in accordance with AASHTO T283, including a freeze-thaw cycle (4-inch specimens compacted with a Marshall Hammer or 3.5 by 6-inch specimens when compacted with a gyratory compactor); except that the 16-hour curing time requirement and the 72 to 96-hour storage period will not be enforced.by the Department. Design tests shall use the same materials that are to be used in the production mix and shall be conducted in a laboratory approved by the Department.

When a chemical additive is used, it shall be added to the asphalt cement prior to the introduction of the cement into the mix. Any chemical additive or particular concentration of chemical additive found to be harmful to the asphalt material or that changes the original asphalt binder performance grade (PG) shall not be used.

(i) Hydrated lime shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C977. Hydrated lime shall be

added at a rate of not less than 1 percent by weight of the total dry aggregate.




A separate bin or tank and feeder system shall be provided to store and accurately proportion the dry or slurried lime into the aggregate. The lime and aggregate shall be mixed by pugmill or other Department approved means to achieve a uniform lime coating of the aggregate prior to entering the drier. If lime is added in dry form, the aggregate shall contain at least 3 percent free moisture. The Department will not permit the stockpiling of lime treated aggregate.

The feeder system shall be controlled by a proportioning device, which shall be accurate to within ±10 percent of the specified amount. The proportioning device shall have a convenient and accurate means of calibration. A flow indicator or sensor shall be provided with the proportioning device and interlocked with the plant controls, aggregate feed or weigh system, such that production of the mixture shall be consistently maintained and, if there is a stoppage of the lime feed, interrupted.

The method of introducing and mixing the lime and aggregate shall be subject to approval by the COTR prior to beginning production.

(j) Reclaimed Asphalt Pavement (RAP) material may be used as a component material of

asphalt mixtures in conformance with the following:

1. Asphalt surface, intermediate and base mixtures containing RAP (but without RAS) should use the performance grade (PG) of asphalt cement as indicated in Table II-I4A, however, the choice of PG to use in the mix shall be the responsibility of the Contractor in order to meet the requirements of Section 190211.01.

2. The final asphalt mixture shall conform to the requirements for the type

specified. 3. During the production process, RAP material shall not be allowed to contact

open flame. 4. RAP material shall be handled, hauled, and stored in a manner that will minimize

contamination. Further, the material shall be stockpiled and used in such manner that variable asphalt contents and asphalt penetration values will not adversely affect the consistency of the mixture.

5. RAP shall be processed in such a manner as to ensure that the maximum top size

particle of material introduced into the mix shall be 2 inches. The COTR may require smaller sized particles to be introduced into the mix if the reclaimed particles are not broken down or uniformly distributed throughout the mixture during heating and mixing.

(k) Reclaimed Asphalt Shingles (RAS) – Tear-off RAS Materials in Asphalt Concrete

1. Asphalt surface, intermediate, and base mixtures containing Tear-off RAS

Materials shall meet the requirements of Section 190211.01 and 190211.03.




2. Tear-off RAS Materials shall be discarded shingle scrap from the re-roofing of domestic buildings. These tear-offs shall have been produced by the manufacturing process for roofing shingles.

Tear-off RAS materials shall contain less than 3.0 percent foreign materials such as paper, roofing nails, wood, or metal flashing. Materials shall be shredded prior to being incorporated in the AC mixture so that at least 99 percent of the shredded pieces pass the 1/2 inch (12.5 mm) sieve and at least 80 percent pass the #4 (4.75 mm) sieve.

Tear-off RAS materials shall not have asbestos containing material (ACM) as defined by the National Emission Standards for Hazardous Air Pollutants (NESHAP), which is less than 1 percent asbestos. The Contractor shall furnish a certification obtained from the recycler tat Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) tests were performed on random samples of RAS at the rate of 1 test per 100 tons or if operating under a Virginia DEQ permit the rate will be the 1 test per 750 tons. The test results shall reveal no detectable level of ACM. Copies of the test results from the recycler shall be available upon request.

3. Asphalt Binder of the asphalt concrete mixture shall be Performance Grade (PG)

of asphalt conforming to the requirements specified in Section 190211. 4. RAS tear-offs in asphalt concrete shall be mixed mechanically in a plant

specifically designed for asphalt concrete production. 5. Contractors shall store tear-off RAS materials by stockpiling either whole or as

partial shingles which have not been shredded or shredded shingles that meet the maximum size requirements. Stockpiled RAS shall not be contaminated by dirt or other objectionable foreign materials. Blending of the shingles with fine aggregate may be necessary to prevent conglomeration of shingle particles. When fine aggregate is used for this purpose, this material shall be accounted for in the mix design.

(l) Reclaimed Asphalt Shingles (RAS) – Tabs RAS Materials in Asphalt Concrete

1. Asphalt surface, intermediate, and base mixtures containing Tabs RAS Materials

shall meet the requirements of Section 190211.01 and 190211.03. 2. Tabs RAS Materials shall be produced by the manufacturing process for

domestic roofing shingles. Blending or mixing of Tabs and Tear-offs shall not be permitted.

Tabs RAS Materials shall be shredded prior to being incorporated into the asphalt concrete mixture so that one hundred percent of the shredded pieces are less than ½ inches (12.5mm) in any dimension. Tabs RAS Materials shall not contain asbestos fibers. The Contractor shall furnish the Department a certification from the manufacturer of the shingles stating that the shingles are free of asbestos. If a certification cannot be obtained then the Contractor shall furnish test results of RAS sample analysis for Polarized




Light Microscopy (PLM) on the shingles which certify the material to be used is free of asbestos. Testing is required at the specified rate of 1 per manufacturer per type of RAS prior to processing and results shall be submitted prior to or during the stockpile approval process.

3. Asphalt Binder of the asphalt concrete mixture shall be Performance Grade (PG)

of asphalt conforming to the requirements specified in Section 190211. 4. Tabs RAS Materials in asphalt concrete shall be mixed mechanically in a plant

specifically designed for asphalt concrete production. 5. Contractors shall store Tabs RAS materials by stockpiling either whole or as

partial shingles which have not been shredded or shredded shingles that meet the maximum size requirements. Stockpiled RAS shall not be contaminated by dirt or other objectionable foreign materials. Blending of the shingles with fine aggregate may be necessary to prevent conglomeration of shingle particles. When fine aggregate is used for this purpose, this material shall be accounted for in the mix design.

(m) Warm Mix Asphalt (WMA) additives or processes shall be approved by the Department

prior to use and shall be obtained from the Department’s approved list which is included in the Materials Division’s Manual of Instructions.

190211.3 JOB-MIX FORMULA The Contractor shall submit a job-mix formula for each mixture planned for use on the project for the Department’s evaluation and approval through the “Producer Lab Analysis and Information Details” (PLAID) website. Paper copies of the job mix formula along with supporting documentation shall also be submitted to the Department. The job-mix formula shall be within the design range specified. The job-mix formula shall establish a single percentage of aggregate passing each required sieve, a single percentage of asphalt material to be added to the aggregate, a temperature at which the mixture is to be produced, and a temperature at which the mixture is to be compacted for SUPERPAVE testing in accordance with AASHTO R35. Each approved job-mix formula shall remain in effect provided the results of tests performed on material currently being produced consistently comply with the requirements of the job-mix formula for grading, asphalt content, temperature, and SUPERPAVE compaction results and the requirements of Section 190315.

(a) SUPERPAVE mixes shall be designed and controlled in accordance with AASHTO R35 and as specified herein. The Contractor shall have available all of the equipment outlined in AASHTO T312 (Section 4-6) and a Department-certified Asphalt Mix Design Technician. The SUPERPAVE mixture shall be compacted in a gyratory compactor with an internal angle of 1.16 + 0.02 degrees. The internal angle shall be measured and calibrated using a cold (non-mix) device. The SUPERPAVE Gyratory Compactor (SGC) shall be one from the Department’s approved list of devices found in the Materials Division’s Manual of Instructions.

The SUPERPAVE mixes shall conform to the requirements of Table II-13 and Table II-14. Section 7.1.2 of AASHTO R30 shall be modified such that the compaction temperature is as specified in (d) 6 herein.




(b) In conjunction with the submittal of a job-mix formula, the Contractor shall submit

complete SUPERPAVE design test data, ignition furnace calibration data in accordance with VTM-102 prepared by an approved testing laboratory, and viscosity data or supplier temperature recommendations for the asphalt cement if different from (d) 6 herein.

(c) Three trial blends for gradation shall be run at one asphalt content. (d) The SUPERPAVE design test data shall include, but not be limited to, the following

information: 1. Grading data for each aggregate component of three trial blends shall be

submitted to the Department. The data for the mixture shall show percent passing for the following sieves: 2 inch, 1 1/2 inch, 1 inch, 3/4 inch, 1/2 inch, 3/8 inch, No. 4, No. 8, No. 16, No. 30, No. 50, No. 100, and No. 200. The grading shall be reported to the nearest 1.0 percent except the No. 200 sieve shall be reported to the nearest 0.1 percent.

2. The test data shall include, but not be limited to, the percentage of each aggregate

component as compared to the total aggregate in the asphalt mixture. The specific gravity and aggregate properties for coarse and fine aggregates defined in Section 190211.02 (b) and (c), including flat and elongated properties, for each aggregate component or for the total aggregates used in the mixture shall be reported. Aggregate properties, except sand equivalent, shall be reported for RAP portions of a mixture. The aggregate specific gravity of RAP shall be the effective aggregate specific gravity calculated from the results of tests conducted in accordance with AASHTO T 209 and VTM-102.







3. The aggregate grading in the asphalt mixture shall be determined by igniting or

extracting the asphalt from a laboratory-prepared sample. The laboratory sample shall be batched on the basis of component percentages as indicated in (d) 2. herein and at the proposed job-mix asphalt content. The aggregate shall be obtained in accordance with VTM-102 or VTM-36, when approved. Sieves specified in (d) 1. herein shall be reported, beginning with the top size for the mix.

4. The following volumetric properties of the compacted mixture, calculated on the

basis of the mixture’s maximum specific gravity determined in accordance with AASHTO T-209, shall be reported to the COTR. The mixture shall be aged in accordance with AASHTO R30 and the bulk specific gravity of the specimens determined in accordance with AASHTO T-166, Method A, for each asphalt content tested. Properties shall be determined and reported in accordance with AASHTO R35.

a. Voids in total mix (VTM)




b. Voids in mineral aggregate (VMA) c. Voids filled with Asphalt (VFA) d. Fines/Asphalt ratio (F/A)

5. The value of the maximum specific gravity of the asphalt mixture used in (c) 4.

herein shall be reported to three decimal places.

6. The mixing and compaction temperature for testing shall be as follows:

a. For mixes designation A, the mix temperature shall be 300 degrees F to 310 degrees F and the compaction temperature shall be 285 degrees F to 290 degrees F.

b. For mixes designation D, the mix temperature shall be 310 degrees F to

320 degrees F and the compaction temperature shall be 295 degrees F to 300 degrees F.

c. In cases involving PG 64E-22 or modified binders, the temperatures shall

be based on documented supplier’s recommendations.

7. The field correction factor as determined by subtracting the bulk specific gravity of the aggregate from the effective specific gravity of the aggregate at the design asphalt content.

8. For surface mixes, permeability test data shall be submitted in accordance with

VTM 120 using either single point verification or the regression method for each surface mix having a different gradation. If the average of the permeability results from the single point verification method exceeds 150 x 10-5 cm/sec, or if the regression method predicts a permeability exceeding 150 x 10-5 cm/sec at 7.5% voids, the Contractor shall redesign the mixture to produce a permeability number less than 150 x 10-5 cm/sec.

(e) The SUPERPAVE design binder content test data shall be plotted on graphs as described

in AASHTO R 35 and shall show that the proposed job-mix formula conforms to the requirements of the designated mix type.

(f) A determination will be made to verify if any asphalt concrete mixture being produced

conforms to the job-mix formula approved by the Department. The Department and Contractor will test the mixture using samples removed from production. The following tests will be conducted to determine the properties listed:




For Warm Mix Asphalt (WMA), SUPERPAVE properties for mixing and compaction temperatures will be determined by the Department and Contractor based on the mix designations in Section 190211.03(d)6. The Department will perform rut testing in accordance with the procedures detailed in VTM- 110. If the results of the rut testing do not conform to the following requirements, the COTR reserves the right to require adjustments to the job-mix formula:

After calibration of the gyratory compactor is completed, the COTR may require the Contractor to make adjustments to the job-mix formula.




If the Department determines that the mixture being produced does not conform to the approved job-mix formula and volumetric properties specified in Table II-14 based on the Department’s or Contractor’s test results, the Contractor shall immediately make corrections to bring the mixture into conformance with the approved job-mix formula or cease paving with that mixture. Subsequent paving operations using either a revised or another job-mix formula that has not been verified as described herein shall be limited to a test run of 100 to 300 tons of mixture if such material is to be placed in Department project work. No further paving for the Department using that specific mixture shall occur until the acceptability of the mixture being produced has been verified using the 100 to 300 ton constraint. Based on rut testing performed by the Department and/or field performance of the job mix, the COTR reserves the right to require the Contractor to make adjustments to the job-mix formula.

(g) When using RAS Materials (Tear-off or Tabs), the Contractor shall submit material

samples to include the RAS stockpiled tear-off shingles, reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) and PG Binder.

The amount of RAS material used in the recycled mixture shall be no more than five percent of the total mixture weight. However, the combined percentages of RAS and RAP shall not contribute more than 30 percent (by weight) of the total asphalt content of the mixture, according to the following equation:

Where: % RASmix = Percent RAS in the Job Mix Formula % ACRAS = Average Percent AC in the RAS % RAPmix = Percent RAP in the Job Mix Formula % ACRAP = Average Percent AC in the RAP % ACJMF = Design AC content of the JMF

The Contractor shall determine the asphalt content of the RAS using AASHTO T-164, Method B, or VTM-102 and report the average results to the nearest 0.1 percent. When the ignition furnace is used, a correction factor shall be applied for the non-asphalt combustible materials in the RAS. Unless the actual correction factor is determined by comparing the test results on paired samples from AASHTO T-164 Method B and VTM-102, the estimated correction factor for the RAS shall be 5 percent. Used separately or with RAP, RAS can be used to stiffen the asphalt concrete mixture binder to meet the requirements in Section 190211. Asphalt surface, intermediate, and base mixtures containing RAS in order to meet the asphalt concrete mixture stiffness of PG 64H-16 should use PG 64S-22 asphalt cement. Further, mixes using RAS shall not




exceed the 30 percent (by weight) and are required to use the maximum binder replacement criteria noted here:

• 5% RAS and 0% RAP • 4% RAS and 5% RAP minimum • 3% RAS and 10% RAP minimum • 2% RAS and 20% RAP minimum

Interpolation shall be used to determine combinations between the whole number RAS/RAP usage figures shown herein, subject to review and approval by the COTR.

190211.4 ASPHALT CONCRETE MIXTURES Asphalt concrete mixtures shall conform to the requirements of Table II-14 and the following:

(a) Types SM-9.0A, SM-9.0D, SM-9.0E, SM-9.5A, SM-9.5D, SM-9.5E, SM-12.5A, SM-12.5D, and SM-12.5E asphalt concrete shall consist of crushed stone, crushed slag, or crushed gravel and fine aggregate, slag or stone screenings, or a combination thereof combined with asphalt cement.

NOTE: For all surface mixes, except where otherwise noted, no more than 5 percent of the aggregate retained on the No. 4 sieve and no more than 20 percent of the total aggregate may be polish susceptible. At the discretion of the COTR, SM-9.5AL or SM-12.5AL may be specified and polish susceptible aggregates may be used (without percentage limits). NOTE: Unless Type C (curb mix) is specified by the COTR in the Contract, SM9.0, SM-9.5, and SM-12.5 mix types are acceptable for use in the construction of asphalt curbing.

(b) Types IM-19.0A, IM-19.0D, and IM-19.0E asphalt concrete shall consist of crushed

stone, crushed slag, or crushed gravel and fine aggregate, slag or stone screenings, or a combination thereof combined with asphalt cement.

NOTE: At the discretion of the COTR, an intermediate mix may be designated as either SM-19.0A, SM-19.0D or SM-19.0E. When designated as such, no more than 5 percent of the aggregate retained on the No. 4 sieve may be polish susceptible. All material passing the No. 4 sieve may be polish susceptible.

(c) Types BM-25.0A and BM-25.0D asphalt concrete shall consist of crushed stone, crushed

slag, or crushed gravel and fine aggregate, slag or stone screenings, or a combination thereof combined with asphalt cement.

(d) Type C (curb mix) asphalt concrete shall consist of a blend of No. 78 or No. 8 crushed

aggregate, No. 10 crushed aggregate, fine aggregate, mineral filler, and a stabilizing additive from the Department’s approved list found in the Materials Division’s Manual of Instructions combined with 6.0 to 9.0 percent of PG 64S-22. This mix does not require a volumetric mix design or volumetric testing under the SUPERPAVE system.




(e) Type SM-9.5, SM-12.5, IM-19.0 and BM-25.0 asphalt concrete may be designated E (polymer modified), or stabilized (S). Asphalt concrete mixtures with the E designation may not be stabilized.

1. Type E asphalt mixtures shall consist of mixes incorporating a neat asphalt

material with polymer modification complying with the requirements of PG 64E-22 and have a rolling thin film oven test residue elastic recovery at 77 degrees F of a minimum of 70 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D 6084 procedure A. E designated mixtures shall not contain more than 15 percent reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) material (by weight) or 3 percent recycled asphalt shingles (RAS) (by weight).

2. Type (S) asphalt mixtures shall consist of mixes incorporating a stabilizing

additive from the Department’s approved list found in the Materials Division’s Manual of Instructions. These mixes shall be designated with an (S) following the standard mix designation. The minimum required additive shall be as specified on the Department’s approved list found in the Materials Division’s Manual of Instructions.

3. Type L asphalt mixtures will be allowed to contain a 100 percent polishing

course and fine aggregate. These mixes shall be designated with a L following the standard mix designation.

190211.05 TESTING The Contractor shall provide the quality control and quality assurance necessary for the Department to determine conformance with the required grading, asphalt content, and temperature properties for asphalt concrete. The Contractor shall have a Department-certified Asphalt Mix Design Technician for designing and adjusting mixes as necessary. The Asphalt Mix Design Technician or Asphalt Plant Level II Technician may perform testing of asphalt mixes. The Asphalt Mix Design Technician shall be responsible for reviewing and approving the results of all testing. The Asphalt Mix Design Technician shall be available and have direct communication with the plant for making necessary adjustments in the asphalt concrete mixes at the mixing plant. The Asphalt Mix Design Technician and Asphalt Plant Level II Technician shall each be capable of conducting any tests necessary to put the plant into operation; however, the Asphalt Mix Design Technician shall be responsible for producing a mixture that complies with the requirements of these Specifications. The Department will award certification. The Contractor shall maintain all records and test results associated with the material production and shall maintain appropriate current quality control charts. Test results and control charts shall be available for review by the COTR. The Contractor shall execute a quality control plan of process inspections and tests, including the determination of SUPERPAVE properties. The results of the SUPERPAVE tests shall be used, along with the results of other quality control efforts, to achieve and maintain the quality of the mixture being produced.




The Contractor shall perform at least one field SUPERPAVE test per day per mix or per 1,000 tons per mix if more than 1,000 tons of a mix is produced per day. Aging as described in AASHTO R30 shall not be performed. If less than 300 tons of asphalt mixture is produced under a single job-mix formula in a day, field SUPERPAVE testing will not be required on that day. That day’s tonnage shall be added to subsequent production. When the accumulated tonnage exceeds 300 tons, minimum testing frequency shall apply. Field SUPERPAVE test results shall be plotted and displayed in control chart form in the plant immediately following the completion of each individual test. The tests shall determine asphalt content in percentages to the nearest 0.01. The tests shall determine VTM, VMA, VFA, and F/A in percentages to the nearest 0.1 percent. The Department will conduct on-site inspections so the Contractor’s Asphalt Mix Design Technician can demonstrate knowledge of the SUPERPAVE mix design and production requirements on Department-supplied mixtures. Aggregate specific gravity and aggregate property tests shall be conducted by a Department-certified Aggregate Properties Technician or Asphalt Mix Design Technician on each aggregate component (including RAP) or total aggregate mixture once at mix design stage and once prior to beginning production in each calendar year. Sand equivalent shall not be determined on RAP. In addition, for each 50,000 tons of each aggregate size used at each plant, aggregate specific gravity and the results of aggregate property tests shall be reported for each aggregate component or the total aggregate mixture. Otherwise, if the total blend (cold feed) is used to determine aggregate specific gravity and aggregate properties, these tests shall be run for each 50,000 tons of the total blend. Field SUPERPAVE tests shall be performed to Ndesign gyrations as specified in Table II-14. For surface mixes, permeability test data shall be submitted in accordance with VTM 120 using either single point verification or the regression method for each surface mix having a different gradation. A minimum of one permeability samples will be taken and test run in the first lot, and every other lot thereafter, and results submitted to the District Materials Engineer. 190211.06 TESTS The Department may sample materials entering into the composition of the asphalt concrete, the mixture, or the completed pavement. The Contractor shall cooperate with the COTR in obtaining these samples. When samples are obtained from the pavement by coring, the resulting voids shall be filled and refinished by the Contractor without additional compensation. Abson recovery samples shall be PG graded according to the requirements of AASHTO M 322-14. Samples meeting the required grades specified in Section 190211.01 shall be acceptable. When the Department performs PG grading on the asphalt in a Contractor’s liquid asphalt storage tank, the COTR will notify the asphalt concrete producer and binder supplier if tests indicate that the binder properties of the asphalt material differ from those of the approved job-mix. The asphalt concrete producer and binder supplier shall determine what corrective action must be taken with the approval of the COTR. 190211.07 PLANT INSPECTION The Department will accept the preparation of asphalt concrete mixtures under a quality assurance plan. The Contractor shall provide a laboratory as specified in Section 014000.




In addition, the Contractor shall have all laboratory scales and gyratory compactors calibrated once a year by an independent source. The Contractor shall maintain the calibration records for 3 years from the date of the last calibration. 190211.08 ACCEPTANCE Acceptance will be made under the Department’s quality assurance program, which includes the testing of production samples by the Contractor and of monitor samples by the Department. Sampling and testing for the determination of grading, asphalt cement content, and temperature shall be performed by the Contractor, and the Department will perform independent monitor checks at a laboratory of its choosing. The Contractor shall input such test results within 24 hours of sampling to the Department through the “Producer Lab Analysis and Information Details” (PLAID) website https://plaid.vdot.virginia.gov, unless otherwise approved by the appropriate District Materials Engineer. Where the Contractor’s test results indicate that the mixture conforms to the gradation, asphalt cement content, and mix temperature requirements of the Specifications, the mixture will be acceptable for these properties; however, nothing herein shall be construed as waiving the requirements of Section 014000, Section 190200.02, Section 190200.03, and Section 190315 or relieving the Contractor of the contractual obligation to furnish and install a finished functional product that conforms to the requirements of the Contract. If a statistical comparative analysis of the Contractor’s test results and the Department’s monitor tests indicate a statistically significant difference in the results and either of the results indicates that the material does not conform to the grading and asphalt cement content requirements of the Specifications, the Department and the Contractor will make an investigation to determine the reason for the difference. If it is determined from the investigation that the material does not conform to the requirements of the Contract, price adjustments will be made in accordance with Section 190211.09. Acceptance for gradation and asphalt cement content will be based on the mean of results of eight tests performed on samples taken in a stratified random manner from each 4,000-ton lot (8,000-ton lots may be used when the normal daily production of the source from which the material is being obtained is in excess of 4,000 tons). The Contractor shall take samples from the approximate center of the truckload of material unless otherwise approved by the COTR. Any statistically acceptable method of randomization may be used to determine when to take the stratified random sample; however, the Department shall be advised of the method to be used prior to the beginning of production. A lot will be considered to be acceptable for gradation and asphalt content if the mean of the test results obtained is within the tolerance allowed for the job-mix formula as specified in Table II-15. The temperature of the mixture at the plant shall be controlled to provide load-to-load uniformity during changing weather conditions and surface temperatures. The maximum temperature of mix designations A and D and base mixes shall not exceed 350 degrees F unless otherwise directed by the COTR. The maximum temperature as recommended by the supplier shall not be exceeded for a mix designated E or (S). If the job-mix formula is modified within a lot, the mean test results of the samples taken will be compared to the applicable process tolerance shown in Table II-15. Asphalt content will be measured as extractable asphalt or weight after ignition.




Field SUPERPAVE tests will be performed by the Department in accordance with AASHTO R35 during the production of the approved job mixes designed by the SUPERPAVE method. Aging, as described in AASHTO R30, will not be performed. Should any field SUPERPAVE test fail with regard to the limits specified in Table II-14, the Department may require that production be stopped until necessary corrective action is taken by the Contractor. The COTR will investigate and determine the acceptability of material placed and represented by failing field SUPERPAVE test results. Should visual examination by the COTR reveal that the material in any load or portion of the paved roadway is obviously contaminated or segregated, that load or portion of the paved roadway will be rejected without additional sampling or testing of the lot. If it is necessary to determine the gradation or asphalt content of the material in any load or portion of the paved roadway, samples will be taken and tested and the results will be compared to the requirements of the approved job-mix formula. The results obtained in the testing will apply only to the material in question. 190211.9 ADJUSTMENT SYSTEM If a lot of material does not conform to the acceptance requirements of Section 190211.08, the Department will determine adjustment points as follows:




One adjustment point will be applied for each 0.1 percent that the material is out of the process tolerance for asphalt content. If the total adjustment for a lot is greater than 25 points, the Contractor shall remove the failing material from the road. If the total adjustment is 25 points or less and the Contractor does not elect to remove and replace the material, the unit price for the material will be reduced 1 percent of the unit price bid for each adjustment point the material is outside of the process tolerance. The COTR will apply this adjustment to the tonnage represented by the sample(s). If the COTR applies adjustment points against two successive lots, the Contractor shall ensure plant adjustment is made prior to continuing production. The Contractor shall control the variability of the Contractor’s product in order to furnish a consistently uniform mix. When the quantity of any one type of material furnished to a project exceeds 4,000 tons, the variability of the total quantity furnished will be determined on the basis of the standard deviation for each sieve size and the asphalt content. If the standard deviation is within the ranges specified in Table II-16, the COTR will adjust the unit bid price for the material as indicated herein. The COTR will not make




adjustments for standard deviation computations on more than two job mixes for the same type of material. The COTR will reduce the unit bid price by 0.5 percent for each adjustment point applied for standard deviation. 190211.10 REFEREE SYSTEM

(a) If the test results obtained from one of the eight samples taken to evaluate a particular lot appear to be questionable, the Contractor may request in writing that the results of the questionable sample be disregarded, whereupon the Contractor shall have either an AASHTO-accredited lab or a Department lab perform tests on five additional samples taken from randomly selected locations in the roadway where the lot was placed.

If the COTR determines that one of the 8 test results appears to be questionable, the Department will perform tests on five additional samples taken from the randomly selected locations in the roadway where the lot was placed. The test results of the seven original, i.e. unquestioned, samples will be averaged with the test results of the five road samples, and the mean of the test values obtained for the twelve samples will be compared to the requirements for the mean of twelve tests as specified in Table II-15.

(b) If the Contractor questions the mean of the eight original test results obtained for a

particular lot, the Contractor may request in writing approval to have either an AASHTO-accredited lab or a Department lab perform additional testing of that lot.

If the COTR determines that the mean of the eight original test results are questionable, the Department will perform additional testing of that lot. The test results of the eight samples will be averaged with the test results of four additional samples taken from randomly selected locations in the roadway where the lot was placed, and the mean of the test values obtained from the twelve samples will be compare to the requirements for the mean of twelve tests as specified in Table II-15. If the Contractor requests additional tests, as described in (a) or (b) herein, the Contractor shall sample the material and have either an AASHTO-accredited lab or Department lab test the material in accordance with Department-approved procedures. The COTR may observe the sampling and testing. If the mean of the test values obtained for the twelve samples conforms to the requirements for the mean of twelve tests, the material will be considered acceptable. If the mean of the test values obtained for the twelve samples does not conform to the requirements for the mean result of twelve tests, the lot will be adjusted in accordance with the adjustment rate specified in Section 190211.09. Samples of the size shown herein shall be saw cut by the Contractor for testing without the use of liquids:




190211.11 HANDLING AND STORING AGGREGATES Aggregates shall be handled, hauled, and stored in a manner that will minimize segregation and avoid contamination. Aggregates shall be stockpiled in the vicinity of the plant and on ground that is denuded of vegetation, hard, well drained, or otherwise prepared to protect the aggregate from contamination. Placing aggregate directly from the crusher bins into the cold feed may be permitted provided the material is consistent in gradation. When different size aggregates are stockpiled, the stockpiles shall be separated to prevent commingling of the aggregates. 190211.12 ASPHALT CONCRETE MIXING PLANT Plants used for the preparation of asphalt concrete mixtures shall conform to the following requirements:

(a) Certification for Plant Operation and Sampling: A Certified Asphalt Plant Level I Technician or a Certified Asphalt Plant Level II Technician shall sample material at the plant.

(b) Plant Scales: Scales shall be approved in accordance with Section 012210. (c) Drier: The plant shall include a drier(s) that continuously agitates the aggregate during

the heating and drying process. The aggregate shall be dried to a point at which the moisture content of the completed mixture does not exceed 1 percent as determined from samples taken at the point of discharge from the mixing operation.

(d) Feeder for Drier: The plant shall be equipped with accurate mechanical means for

uniformly feeding the aggregate into the drier so that a consistent production and temperature are reached and maintained. Where different size aggregates are required to comply with grading specifications, they shall be proportioned by feeding into the cold elevator through a multiple compartment feeder bin, one bin for each size used, equipped with positive action gates that can be securely locked to maintain desired proportioning.

(e) Bins: When bins are used, adequate and convenient facilities shall be provided to make

possible the sampling of representative aggregate material from each bin. Each compartment shall be provided with an overflow pipe of such size and location to prevent contamination of the aggregate in adjacent compartments. Bins shall be provided with individual outlet gates that, when closed, will allow no leakage.

(f) Thermometric Equipment: The plant shall be equipped with a thermometric instrument so

placed at the discharge chute of the drier as to register automatically or indicate the




temperature of the heated aggregate or the completed mix if a drier drum mixing plant is used.

A thermometric device shall be fixed in the asphalt feed line at a suitable location near the charging valve at the mixer unit. Thermometric devices shall be maintained in good working condition and shall be subject to checking against the laboratory thermometer. Any thermometric devices that do not operate or accurately register temperatures shall be removed and repaired or replaced.

(g) Pollution Control: Pollution control shall conform to the requirements of Section 011000. (h) Equipment for Preparation of Asphalt Material: Tanks for the storage of asphalt material

shall be equipped with a heating system capable of heating and holding the material at the required temperatures. A separate storage tank or a storage tank having separate compartments shall be available for each grade of asphalt cement being used on the project. The heating system shall be designed to heat the contents of the tank by means of steam, electricity, or other approved means so that no flame is in direct contact with the heating surface of the tank. The circulating system for the asphalt material shall be designed to assure proper and continuous circulation during the operating period and to minimize oxidation. Pipelines shall be steam jacketed or insulated to prevent undue loss of heat. Storage facilities for asphalt material shall be sufficient capacity for at least one day’s operation or an equivalent means of supply shall be provided that will ensure continuous operation. Provisions shall be made for measuring and sampling asphalt within storage tanks. When asphalt material is proportioned by volume, the temperature of the asphalt material in storage shall be uniformly maintained at ±20 degrees F during operation of the plant by means of an automatic temperature control device. A sampling valve shall be provided for sampling of each asphalt storage tank used in production of the mix. If there are multiple storage tanks, a dedicated valve for each tank shall be provided.

(i) Asphalt Control: Asphalt material shall be accurately proportioned by volume or weight.

When volumetric methods are used, measurements shall be made by means of meters or pumps, calibrated for accuracy. The section of the asphalt line between the charging valve and the spray bar shall be provided with an outlet valve for checking the meter.

When proportioned by weight, the asphalt material shall be weighed on approved scales. Dial scales shall have a capacity of not more than 15 percent of the capacity of the mixer. The value of the minimum graduation shall not be greater than 2 pounds. Except when a drier-drum mixing plant is used, the asphalt material bucket and its valves and spray bar shall be steam jacketed or heated by other Department approved means. The bucket shall have a capacity of at least 115 percent of the weight of the asphalt material required in any mixture and shall be supported by fulcrums.

The asphalt shall be delivered to the mixer in multiple uniform streams for the full width of the mixer.




(j) Proportioning Aggregates: Mineral filler and any bag house fines the Contractor uses shall be metered or introduced by means of an approved device for uniform proportioning by weight or by volume.

The weigh hopper shall be of sufficient size to hold the maximum required weight of aggregate for one batch without hand raking or running over. Sufficient clearance between the weigh hopper and supporting devices shall be provided to prevent accumulation of foreign materials. The discharge gate of the weigh hopper shall be situated in such a manner that the aggregates will not segregate when dumped into the mixer. Gates on the bins and weigh hopper shall be constructed to prevent leakage when closed.

(k) Drum Mixer: The aggregate shall be proportioned by a positive weight control at the cold

aggregate feed by use of a belt scale that will automatically regulate the supply of material being fed and permit instant correction of variations in load. The cold feed flow shall be automatically coupled with the asphalt flow to maintain the required proportions.

(l) Batch Mixer: The batch mixer shall be of a twin pugmill or other approved type, steam

jacketed or heated by other approved means, and capable of producing uniform mixtures within the specified tolerances. It shall be equipped with a sufficient number of paddles or blades operating at such speeds as to produce a properly and uniformly mixed batch. The number and arrangement of the mixer paddles shall be subject to the COTR’s approval. Worn or defective blades shall not be used in mixing operations.

The mixer shall be provided with an approved time lock that will lock the discharge gate after the aggregates and asphalt have been placed in the mixer and will not release the gate until the specified time for mixing has elapsed. Batch-type mixing plants used to produce asphalt concrete shall be equipped with approved automatic proportioning devices. Such devices shall include equipment for accurately proportioning batches of the various components of the mixture by weight or volume in the proper sequence and for controlling the sequence and timing of mixing operations. The automated system shall be designed to interrupt and stop the batching operation at any time batch quantities are not satisfied for each of the materials going into the mix. A means shall be provided for observing the weight of each material during the batching operation. The aggregate may be proportioned by cold feed controls in lieu of plant screens provided the cold aggregate feed conforms to the requirements specified in (j) herein. Should the automatic proportioning devices become inoperative, the plant may be allowed to batch and mix asphalt materials for a period of not more than 48 hours from the time the breakdown occurs provided alternate proportioning facilities are verbally approved by the Engineer. Written permission of the COTR will be required for operation without automatic proportioning facilities for periods longer than 48 hours.

(m) Continuous Mixing Plant: A continuous mixing plant shall include a means for accurately

proportioning each size of aggregate either by weighing or volumetric measurement. When gradation control is by volume, the unit shall include a feeder mounted under the




compartment bins. Each bin shall have an accurately controlled individual gate to form an orifice for volumetrically measuring the material drawn from each respective bin compartment. The orifice shall be rectangular, with one dimension adjustable by positive mechanical means, and shall be provided with a lock. Indicators shall be provided to show the individual gate opening in inches. The plant shall be equipped with a satisfactory revolution counter.

The plant shall include a means for calibrating gate openings by weight. The materials fed out of the bins through individual orifices shall be bypassed to a suitable test box, with each component material confined in a separate section. The plant shall be equipped to conveniently handle test samples weighing up to 200 pounds per bin with accurate platform scales provided for this purpose. Positive interlocking control shall be provided between the flow of aggregate from the bins and the flow of asphalt material from the meter or other proportioning device. This shall be accomplished by approved interlocking devices or other approved positive means. Accurate control of the asphalt material shall be obtained by weighing, metering, or volumetric measurement. The aggregate may be proportioned by cold feed controls in lieu of plant screens provided the cold aggregate feed conforms to the requirements specified in (j) herein. The plant shall include a continuous mixer of an approved type that is steam jacketed or heated by other approved means. The paddles shall be of any adjustable type for angular position on the shafts and reversible to retard the flow of the mixture. Interlock cutoff circuits shall be included to interrupt and to stop the proportioning and mixing operations when the aggregate level in the plant or the asphalt material in storage falls below that necessary to produce the specified mixture.

(n) Trucks, Truck Scales, and Automatic Printer System: These shall conform to the

requirements of Section 012210. 190211.13 PREPARATION OF MIXTURE The asphalt and aggregate shall be introduced into the mixer at a temperature that will produce a mixture that conforms to the requirements of the job-mix formula. After the required amounts of aggregate and asphalt material have been introduced into the mixer, the materials shall be mixed until a uniform coating of asphalt and a thorough distribution of the aggregate throughout the mixture are secured that comply with the requirements of the Ross count procedure in AASHTO T195. The wet mixing time, based on the procedures in AASHTO T195, shall be determined by the Contractor at the beginning of production and will be approved by the COTR for each individual plant or mixer and for each type of aggregate used; however, in no case shall the wet mixing time be less than 20 seconds. The wet mixing time is the interval of time between the start of introduction of the asphalt material into




the mixer and the opening of the discharge gate. A wet mixing time that results in fully coating a minimum of 95 percent of the coarse particles, based on the average of the three samples is acceptable, provided that none of the three sample results has a coating less than 92 percent of the coarse particles shall be the minimum wet mixing time requirement. A dry mixing time of up to 15 seconds may be required by the COTR to accomplish the degree of aggregate distribution necessary to obtain complete and uniform coating of the aggregate with asphalt. 190211.14 STORAGE SYSTEM If the Contractor elects to use a storage system, the system shall be capable of conveying the mix from the plant to the storage bins and storing the mix without a loss in temperature or segregation or oxidation of the mix. Storage time shall be limited by the ability of the bins to maintain the mix within the quality requirements specified herein with a maximum time limit not to exceed 10 days. Material may be stored in bins for no more than 24 hours without a Department approved heating system. The conveyor system may be a continuous or skip bucket type. Continuous type conveyors shall be enclosed so that the mix temperature is maintained. The storage bins shall be designed in a manner to prevent segregation of the mix during discharge from the conveyor into the bins and shall be equipped with discharge gates that will not cause segregation of the mix while the mix is being loaded into the trucks. Approval for the use of storage bins may be withdrawn by the COTR if the amount of heat loss, segregation, or oxidation of the mix is excessive. 190211.15 INITIAL PRODUCTION

(a) Warm Mix Asphalt (WMA): At the start of production, the Contractor shall place no more than 500 tons or up to one day’s production as directed by the COTR at an approved site, which may be the project site, so the COTR can examine the process control of the mixing plant, the Contractor’s placement procedures, surface appearance of the mix, compaction patterns of the Contractor’s roller(s), and correlation of the nuclear density device.

(b) Hot Mix Asphalt (HMA): At the start of production of a mix not previously used on a

state roadway, the Contractor shall place 100 to 300 tons or up to one day’s production as directed by the COTR at an approved site, which may be the project site, so the COTR can examine the process control of the mixing plant, the Contractor’s placement procedures, surface appearance of the mix, compaction patterns of the Contractor’s roller(s), and correlation of the nuclear density device.

The material shall be placed at the specified application rate. The COTR will determine the disposition of material that was not successfully produced and/or placed due to negligence in planning, production, or placement by the Contractor.




HYDRAULIC CEMENT CONCRETE 190217 - 1

SECTION 190217 – HYDRAULIC CEMENT CONCRETE 190217.01 DESCRIPTION These specifications cover materials, design criteria, mixing, and testing procedures for hydraulic cement concrete. 190217.02 MATERIALS Hydraulic cement concrete shall consist of hydraulic cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water, and admixture(s) mixed in the approved proportions for the various classes of concrete by one of the methods designated hereinafter. The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality control and condition of materials during handling, blending, and mixing operations and for the initial determination and necessary adjustments in the proportioning of materials used to produce the concrete.

(a) Cementitious materials shall be a blend of mineral admixtures and portland cement. In overlay concretes, expansive hydraulic cement is permitted in lieu of portland cement. Portland cement (Types I, II, III), blended cements or expansive cement (Type K) shall comply with Section 190214. Blended and Type K cements shall be used only as approved by the COTR unless otherwise specified. Fly ash, ground granulated iron blast-furnace slag (GGBFS), silica fume or metakaolin shall conform to Section 190215. The table below lists the minimum percentage of specific mineral admixtures, required by mass, as a portion of the cementitious material depending on the alkali content of the cement. Any other mineral admixture or any other amount or combination of mineral admixtures may be used if approved by the COTR. The fly ash content shall not exceed 30 percent for Class F, the ground granulated blast-furnace slag content shall not exceed 50 percent and the silica fume content shall not exceed 10 percent as a portion of the cementitious material unless approved by the COTR. Class C Fly ash or other mineral admixtures may be used provided the Contractor demonstrates that the percent usage of Class C Fly ash or other mineral admixtures have a maximum expansion of 0.15% at 56 days according to ASTM C227 using borosilicate glass as aggregate.

Minimum percent mineral admixtures required by mass of cementitious material as a portion of the total cementitious materials and is based upon the alkali content of the cement in accordance with the following:




(b) Formulated latex modifier shall be a nontoxic, film-forming, polymeric emulsion of which 90 percent of the nonvolatiles are styrene butadiene polymers. It shall be homogeneous and uniform in composition and free from chlorides. Latex modifier shall conform to the chemical and physical properties specified hereinafter when tested in accordance with FHWA’s Report RD-78-35. Initial approval of the modifier by the Department will be based on an analysis of the results of tests performed by an independent laboratory. After initial acceptance, material will be accepted upon certification subject to periodic testing by the Department. A copy of the initial test report shall be submitted to the Department and shall show the following chemical and physical properties:

Values for viscosity and density spectrographs of the solid portion and volatile portion shall be provided in the report. Type I, Type II, Type III or Type K cement shall be used without mineral admixtures for latex-modified concrete.

(c) Fine aggregate shall conform to Section 190202 for Grading A.




(d) Coarse aggregate shall conform to Section 190203 for the class of concrete being produced.

(e) Water shall conform to Section 190216. (f) Admixtures shall conform to Section 190215. (g) White Portland cement concrete shall conform to the requirements herein except as

follows:

1. Cement shall be white portland cement conforming to Section 190214 for Type I portland cement except that it shall contain not more than 0.55 percent by weight of Fe2O3.

2. Fine aggregate shall consist of clean, hard, durable, uncoated particles of quartz

composed of at least 95 percent silica; shall be free from lumps of clay, soft or flaky material, loam, organic material, or other deleterious material; and shall conform to Section 190202. It shall contain not more than 3 percent inorganic silt by actual dry weight when tested in accordance with AASHTO T11. Stone sands that produce an acceptable white concrete may also be used.

3. Coarse aggregate shall be crushed stone or crushed or uncrushed gravel

conforming to Section 190203.

(h) Fly ash shall conform to Section 190241. (i) Granulated iron blast-furnace slag shall conform to Section 190215. (j) Concrete to which a high-range water reducer is to be added shall conform to Table II-17.

Concrete shall be mixed 70 to 100 revolutions at mixing speed. (k) Silica fume shall conform to Section 190215. (l) Concrete Repair Materials shall be from the Materials Division Approved List 31 and

shall be in accordance with VTM 132. 190217.3 HANDLING AND STORING MATERIALS

(a) Aggregate shall be kept separated by size until batched. Aggregates shall be clean and shall be maintained in at least a saturated, surface-dry condition.

Fine aggregate that has been washed shall not be used within 24 hours after being placed in the stockpile or until surplus water has disappeared and the material has a consistent free moisture content. Stockpiles shall be located and constructed so that surplus water will drain from stockpiles and the batcher.

(b) Cement that is reclaimed or that shows evidence of hydration, such as lumps or cakes,

shall not be used.




Loose cement shall be transported to the mixer either in tight compartments for each batch or between the fine and coarse aggregate. Cement in original shipping packages may be transported on top of the aggregates, with each batch containing the number of bags required.

(c) Latex modifier shall be kept in enclosures that will protect it from exposure to

temperatures below 40 degrees F or above 85 degrees F. Containers of latex modifier shall be protected from direct sunlight.

(d) Admixtures shall be stored and handled so that contamination and deterioration will be

prevented. Liquid admixtures shall be thoroughly agitated before use. Admixtures that are frozen or partially frozen shall not be used.

(e) Aluminum forms, chutes, buckets, pump lines, and other conveying devices shall not be

used if the aluminum comes in contact with concrete. 190217.4 MEASUREMENT OF MATERIALS Measuring devices shall be subject to the approval of the COTR.

(a) Stationary Production Plant:

1. Cement shall be measured by weight. Cement in standard packages of 94 pounds net per bag need not be weighed, but bulk cement and fractional packages shall be weighed within an accuracy of 1 percent.

2. Mixing water shall be measured by volume or weight. The water-measuring

device shall be readily adjustable and capable of accurately delivering the required amount. The device shall have an accuracy of within 1 percent of the quantity of water required for the batch under all operating conditions.

3. Aggregates shall be measured by weight within an accuracy of 2 percent. Fine

and coarse aggregate shall be weighed separately. Prior to mixing concrete, the moisture content of aggregates shall be determined and proper allowance made for the water content. The moisture content shall be determined prior to the start of mixing and thereafter as changes occur in the condition of aggregates. The Contractor shall perform moisture determinations and tests for slump and air content and provide necessary testing equipment.

4. Admixtures shall be dispensed and used according to the manufacturer’s

recommendations or instructions. Admixtures shall be added within a limit of accuracy of 3 percent by means of an approved, graduated, transparent, measuring device before they are introduced into the mixer. If more than one admixture is used, they shall be released in sequence rather than in the same instant. The sequence of dispensing admixtures shall not be altered once established. However, when the amount of admixture required to achieve the specified results deviates appreciably from the manufacturer’s recommended dosage, use of the material shall be discontinued and the COTR shall be notified of the change.




(b) Mobile Production Plant: Aggregates, cement, and water shall be measured by weight or volume. If ingredients are measured by volume, the Contractor shall furnish, at his expense, approved scales and containers suitable for checking the calibration of the equipment’s measuring system. The manufacturer’s recommendations shall be followed in operating the equipment and calibrating the gages and gate openings. Mixing water shall be measured by a calibrated flow meter. The introduction of mixing water to the mixer shall be properly coordinated with the introduction of cement and aggregates. Ingredients shall be proportioned within the following tolerances, which are based on the volume/weight relationship established by calibration of the measuring devices:

Tolerances will be applied to Department approved mixture design quantities.

Means shall be provided whereby samples of the various ingredients can be taken from the feed prior to blending and mixing to test the calibration of the equipment.

190217.05 EQUIPMENT Equipment and tools necessary for handling materials and performing all parts of the work will be approved by the COTR before use and must be in accordance with one of the following procedures:

1. having a current National Ready Mix Concrete Association Plant and Truck Certification,

or 2. having a Department approved self-certification program in-place prior to the production

of concrete for the Department. Failure to comply with one or the other of these procedures will result in the Department not approving the concrete and the work requiring concrete will not be allowed to proceed.

(a) Batching Equipment: Bins with separate compartments for fine aggregate and for each required size of coarse aggregate shall be provided in the batching plant. Bins for bulk cement shall be arranged so that cement is weighed on a scale separate from those used for other materials and in a hopper free and independent of hoppers used for weighing aggregates. The weighing hopper shall be properly sealed and vented to preclude dusting during operation. Each compartment shall be designed to discharge aggregate efficiently and freely into the weighing hopper. A means of control shall be provided so that material may be added slowly and shut off with precision. A port or other opening shall be provided to remove any overrun of any of the several materials from the weighing hopper. Weighing hoppers shall be constructed to prevent accumulation of materials and to discharge fully.




Scales used for weighing aggregates and cement shall be approved and sealed in accordance with Section 012210. When beam scales are used, provision shall be made for indicating to the operator that the required load in the weighing hopper is being approached. The indicator shall indicate at least the last 200 pounds of load. Weighing and indicating devices shall be in full view of the operator while the hopper is charged, and the operator shall have convenient access to all controls.

(b) Mixers and Agitators: Mixers may be stationary or truck mixers. Agitators may be truck mixers or truck agitators. Each mixer and agitator shall have a metal plate(s) attached in a prominent place by the manufacturer on which the following are marked: the various uses for which the equipment is designed, capacity of the drum or container in terms of the volume of mixed concrete, and speed of rotation of the mixing drum or blades. Each stationary mixer shall be equipped with an approved timing device that will not permit the batch to be discharged until the specified mixing time has elapsed. Each truck mixer shall be equipped with an approved counter by which the number of revolutions of the drum or blades may be readily verified. The mixer shall be capable of combining ingredients of concrete into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass and of discharging concrete with a satisfactory degree of uniformity. The agitator shall be capable of maintaining mixed concrete in a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass and of discharging concrete within a satisfactory degree of uniformity. Mechanical details of the mixer or agitator, such as the water measuring and discharge apparatus, condition of the blades, speed of rotation of the drum, general mechanical condition of the unit, and cleanliness of the drum, shall be checked by the Contractor and operator before use of the unit is permitted by the COTR. Consistency tests of individual samples at approximately the beginning, midpoint, and end of the load shall be conducted upon request by the COTR. If consistency measurements vary by more than 2 inches for slump between high and low values, the mixer or agitator shall not be used until the inconsistency is corrected.

(c) Mobile Production Plants: The Contractor may produce Class A3 general use hydraulic cement concrete for incidental construction items from a mobile production plant. The Engineer will not allow the use of mobile production plants to produce concrete used in bridges, except overlays; box culverts; pavements, except patching; or retaining walls. If the Contractor elects to use a mobile production plant as permitted, the equipment requirements specified hereinbefore will not apply and the concrete shall be mixed at the point of delivery by a combination materials transport and mixer unit conforming to the following:

1. The unit shall be capable of carrying ingredients needed for concrete production

in separate compartments and of mixing ingredients at the point of delivery. The unit shall be equipped with calibrated proportioning devices to vary mixture proportions of dry ingredients and water. The unit shall be capable of changing the slump at any interval of continuous discharge of concrete.

2. The mixing mechanism shall be a part of the transportation unit carrying dry

ingredients. The mixer may be any type capable of combining ingredients for




concrete production into a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass and of discharging concrete with a satisfactory degree of uniformity within the specified time of mixing.

3. Each unit shall have a metal plate(s) attached in a prominent place by the

manufacturer on which the following are plainly marked: the gross volume of the transportation unit in terms of mixed concrete, discharge speed, and weight-calibrated constant of the machine in terms of an indicator revolution counter.

4. During discharge, the consistency, determined by the slump cone method (ASTM

C143), of representative samples taken from the discharge of the mixer at random intervals shall not vary by more than 1 inch.

(d) High Performance Volumetric Mixers (HPVMs): The Contractor may produce the

specified class of hydraulic cement concrete in Table II-17 in accordance with Section 190217.02(a) provided that the manufacturer’s equipment meets the tolerance requirements of Section 190217.04(a) and has a stamped plate from the Volumetric Mixers Manufacturers Bureau stating that the equipment conforms to ASTM C685.

This combination materials transport and mixer unit shall conform to the following:

1. The unit shall be equipped with calibrated proportioning devices for each

ingredient added to the concrete mix. The unit shall be equipped with a working recording meter that is visible at all times and that furnishes a ticket printout with the calibrated measurement of the mix being produced. If the mixer fails to discharge a uniform mix at any time, production of concrete shall halt until any problems are corrected.

2. Each unit shall have a metal plate(s) attached in a prominent place by the

manufacturer on which the following are plainly marked: the gross volume of the transportation unit in terms of mixed concrete, the discharge speed and the mass calibrated constant of the machine in terms of volume.

3. HPVMs shall be calibrated by a Department approved testing agency in

accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations at an interval of every 6 months or a maximum production of 2500 cubic yards, whichever occurs first. The yield shall be maintained within a tolerance of ±1 percent and verified using a minimum 2 cubic feet container every 500 cubic yards or a minimum once per week.

4. The three cubic feet initially discharged from the truck shall be discarded and not

used for concrete placement. Acceptance of the specified class of concrete shall comply with Section 190217.08 except that the sample secured for acceptance testing will be taken after four cubic feet is discharged from the delivery vehicle. During discharge, the consistency as determined by ASTM C143 on representative samples taken from the mixer discharge at random intervals shall not vary more than 1 inch. Acceptance tests shall be performed on each load. If test data demonstrates that consistent concrete properties are being achieved, the COTR may reduce testing requirements.




5. The HPVM shall be operated by a person who is a certified operator by the HPVM manufacturer. Any equipment adjustments made during the on-site production of concrete shall be done under the direct on-site supervision of the producer’s VDOT Concrete Plant and Field Certified Technician.

Each load of HPVM produced concrete shall be accompanied by a Form TL-28 signed by the producer’s VDOT Certified Concrete Plant Technician or a designated company representative working under the direct on-site supervision of the producer’s VDOT Certified Concrete Plant Technician. The form shall be delivered to the Inspector at the site of the work. Loads that do not carry such information or do not arrive in satisfactory condition shall not be used.

190217.6 CLASSIFICATION OF CONCRETE MIXTURES Classes and uses of concrete are specified in Table II-17.




190217.7 PROPORTIONING CONCRETE MIXTURES The Contractor is responsible for having a VDOT Certified Concrete Plant Technician available during batching operations, and a VDOT Certified Concrete Field Technician present during placing operations. A VDOT Certified Concrete Plant Technician is that person who is capable of performing adjustments to the proportioning of materials used to produce the specified concrete should adjustments become necessary. A VDOT Certified Concrete Field Technician is the person employed by the Contractor responsible for quality control of concrete work at the project site. The Contractor shall have at least one VDOT Certified Concrete Field Technician on the project for single or multiple incidental concrete placements. The Contractor shall have at least one VDOT Certified Concrete Field Technician present at each site during the placement of pavements, bridge decks, bridge piers and abutments, box culverts, and any placement of 50 or more cubic yards. The VDOT Certified Concrete Field Technician shall provide control over methods used for discharging, conveying, spreading, consolidating, screeding, finishing, texturing, curing, and protecting the concrete. Deficiencies in conformance to specification requirements and good concreting practices shall be corrected by or under the direction of the VDOT Certified Concrete Field Technician as soon as they begin to occur.




The concrete producer shall plan batching operations so that delays do not occur because of the absence of certified personnel. Concrete shall be proportioned to secure the strength and durability required for the pavement or the part of the structure in which it is to be used. The Contractor shall submit, or shall have his supplier submit, concrete mixture design(s) conforming to the specifications for the class of concrete specified for the COTR’s approval prior to the start of concrete mixing operations. The Contractor shall furnish and incorporate a Department approved water-reducing and retarding admixture in bridge deck concrete and in other concrete when conditions are such that the initial set may occur prior to completion of approved finishing operations. The Contractor shall supply and incorporate only an approved water-reducing admixture in lieu of both the water-reducing and retarding admixtures normally required in the bridge deck concrete to provide the required slump without exceeding the maximum water/cement ratio when the COTR elects not to enforce the requirement for both admixtures. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the COTR that use of the admixture will not cause segregation. The two admixtures shall not be used together in the same concrete batch unless tests indicate the admixtures are compatible in accordance with Section 190215.02(b). Costs for admixture(s) shall be included in the Contract unit price for the respective concrete item. Concrete shall be air entrained. The air content shall conform to Table II-17. Except for latex hydraulic cement concrete, concrete mixtures shall be developed and/or verified by any one of the following three options listed below. The mix design(s) as determined by the respective option below shall be valid provided there is no change in sources of aggregate, chemical admixtures, mineral admixtures, or hydraulic cement. All concrete mixtures shall contain the minimum amount of mineral admixtures or combination thereof expressed as a percent of the total cementitious materials in accordance with Section 190217.02(a). All quantities of materials shall be weighed in accordance with tolerances specified in Section 190217.04. The quantities of coarse and fine aggregates used in concrete production shall not deviate by more than ±5% by weight from the batch weights of the approved mix design. When low permeability concrete is specified, two 4 X 8 inch specimens shall be molded from concrete representing the proposed mix design and tested in accordance with VTM 112 to validate conformance. For trial batches, the tested permeability value shall be considered satisfactory provided it is 500 coulombs less than the specified maximum value for the class of concrete specified.

Option 1 Prescriptive Method:

Mix proportions for normal, heavy weight, and lightweight concrete shall be established by the methods described in ACI 211, on an absolute volume basis, for the respective aggregate size and meeting all Table II-17 requirements for the class of concrete indicated. Aggregate properties obtained from the aggregate producer shall be used for design purposes. Once the proposed mix design has been established, the Contractor or their concrete supplier shall produce one 3-cubic yard production verification batch using the same type of equipment intended for use in supplying concrete to the Department. The proposed mix design will be considered acceptable provided that the plastic properties of the concrete are within the Department’s specification limits for the given class of concrete.




Strength tests of the verification batch must equal or exceed f ’c for the intended class of concrete.

Option 2 Trial Batch Mix Design Method:

The minimum cementitious content requirement in Table II-17 shall be waived provided that the maximum water-cementitious ratio requirement of Table II-17 is met for the respective class of concrete. The required grading for fine and coarse aggregate shall be waived provided the coarse aggregate meets the nominal maximum size as required in Table II-17 for the respective class of concrete. The Contractor or their concrete supplier shall prepare a minimum of 3 trial concrete batches with differing cementitious materials contents over a range anticipated to encompass the design strength, f ’c, plus overdesign, and water-cementitious ratios encompassing the range permitted for the classes of concrete being evaluated. Trial batches may be produced in either:

Option 2A: Small scale laboratory batches, or

Option 2B: Truck batches with a minimum batch volume of 3 cubic yards each.

The plastic properties of the trial concrete batches shall meet the requirements for consistency and air content in Table II-17 and meet the additional requirements listed below:

• The concrete temperature of the trial batches, as batched and sampled, shall be a

minimum of 68 degrees F. • Air content of the trial batches shall within a range of -1.0 to + 1.5 percentage

points of the median design air content for the classes of concrete being evaluated.

• Slump of the trial batches shall be within ± 1 inch of the maximum slump

permitted for the class of concrete.

Three 4 X 8 inch test specimens shall be molded from each batch, cured in accordance with ASTM C 31 for acceptance specimens, and then compression tested at an age of 28 days. The strength results of these tests shall be plotted on a graph to establish the relationship between the water-cementitious ratio and the compressive strength. Alternately, the relationship can be established between the cementitious content and the compressive strength. The design water-cementitious ratio, or design cementitious content, can then be derived from the graph to satisfy the required design strength plus an appropriate overdesign to be designated as f ’cr. The required cementitious materials content determined from these tests can be interpolated from the established graph. If desired, the design water-cementitious ratio or cementitious content can be determined from a polynomial regression analysis of the plotted strength data. Test results from prior trial concrete batches are acceptable for use provided that they represent the same material sources proposed for the Department work, meet the requirements for trial concrete batches as stated above and are less than 18 months old.




The required cementitious content to satisfy the strength requirement for the respective class of concrete shall be determined in accordance with either of the two following procedures:

1. When the concrete production facility has sufficient data to establish a

production standard deviation (s), as described in Documentation of Previous Field Experience or Production Standard Deviation(s). The cementitious content required to meet the design strength requirement, f ’cr, then the f ’cr shall be based upon the following equation:

f ’cr = f ’c + 3s

2. When the concrete production facility does not have a production standard deviation established the cementitious content required to meet the design strength requirement, f ’cr, then the f ’cr shall be based upon the following equation:

f ’cr = f ’c + 1700 psi.

Once the proposed mix design has been established, the Contractor or their concrete supplier shall produce one 3-cubic yard production verification batch using the same type of equipment intended for use in supplying concrete to the Department. The proposed mix design will be considered acceptable provided that the plastic properties of the concrete are within the Department’s specification limits for the given class of concrete. Strength tests of the verification batch must equal or exceed f ’c for the intended class of concrete. The requirement for a production verification batch shall be waived when the trial batching is performed by Option 2B -Truck batches.

Option 3 Documented Field Experience Method:

The minimum cementitious content requirement in Table II-17 shall be waived provided that the maximum water-cementitious ratio requirement of Table II-17 is met for the respective class of concrete. The required grading for fine and coarse aggregate shall be waived provided the coarse aggregate meets the nominal maximum size as required in Table II-17 for the respective class of concrete. An existing concrete mixture shall be considered acceptable for use provided that the Contractor or their concrete supplier has a satisfactory test record of pervious field experience as described in: Documentation of Previous Field Experience or Production Standard Deviation(s), and that the proposed concrete mixture meets the following requirements:

1. The water cementitious ratio of the proposed concrete mixture is less than or

equal to the maximum water cementitious ratio specified for the respective class of concrete.

2. The documented average strength, f ’cr, equals or exceeds the design compressive strength f ’c for the respective class of concrete in accordance with the following equation: f ’cr = f ’c + 3s.




3. The proposed concrete mixture contains the same aggregate sources, supplementary cementitious materials type, and admixture type as those used to establish the previous field experience test record.

4. The consistency (slump) and air content are within the specification limits for the respective class of concrete.

Documentation of Previous Field Experience or Production Standard Deviation(s)

An acceptable test record to document previous field experience and/or to establish a production facility standard deviation shall represent a minimum of 30 consecutive compressive strength tests results, encompass a production period of at least 45 days and test data not more than 18 months old. A test record of less than 30 tests, but not less than 15 tests, shall be permitted provided a modification factor is applied to the production facility sample standard deviation as shown below:

The test record does not necessarily have to be based on Department projects provided that documentation of the source(s) of concrete strength test results accompanies the submittal.

For latex hydraulic cement content, the dry weight ratio of cement/fine aggregate/coarse aggregate shall be 1:2.5:2. With the COTR’s approval a maximum adjustment of 10 percent may be made in aggregate weights to compensate for grading changes and variable specific gravity. The Contractor shall adjust batch quantities during the course of the work to compensate for changes in workability caused by differences in the characteristics of aggregates and cements permitted within the specification requirements. Such adjustments shall be made only by the Contractor and shall not change the yield. If concrete cannot be obtained with the required workability or consistency or within the maximum design water content with the materials furnished, the Contractor shall make changes to secure the desired properties subject to the limiting requirements specified in Table II-17 and the COTR’s approval. The Contractor shall use a fine aggregate having a void content of less than 50.5 percent when the void content of the fine aggregate is more than 50.5 percent and the concrete does not have the desired properties. In lieu of changing the fine aggregate, the Contractor may take one or more of the following actions:

(a) Use a Department approved water-reducing admixture. (b) Increase the cement content. (c) Change the source of coarse aggregate.




(d) In hot weather, add ice or otherwise reduce the temperature to increase the workability. (e) Submit other recommendations to the COTR for approval.

The Contractor shall make trial batches under the observation of the COTR to verify that concrete of the required workability and consistency is obtained within the specified water content when any of the actions is exercised. At least one trial batch shall be made with the concrete temperature at approximately 90 degrees F to verify that the concrete mixture has sufficient workability and consistency without exceeding the specified water content. The concrete mixture shall be redesigned when the fineness modulus of the fine aggregate changes more than 0.2 from the original design and the concrete does not have the desired properties. Costs incurred because of adjustments of concrete mixture design(s) and for trial batches shall be borne by the Contractor with no additional compensation being made. 190217.08 ACCEPTANCE

(a) Air Consistency Tests: Air and consistency tests will be performed by the Department prior to discharge of concrete into the forms to ensure that specification requirements are consistently being complied with for each class of concrete supplied. The sample secured for the tests shall be taken after at least two cubic feet of concrete has been discharged from the delivery vehicle. The two cubic feet discharged is not to be used as part of the test sample. The COTR must authorize any deviation from sampling and testing procedures. The Contractor shall provide a receptacle conforming to ASTM C31 for the Department’s use in obtaining the sample. If either determination yields a result that is outside of the allowable range for air content or consistency, the COTR will use the following procedure:

1. The COTR will immediately perform a recheck determination. If the results

confirm the original test results, the load will be rejected. 2. The Contractor’s representative will be immediately informed of the test results. 3. The Contractor’s representative shall notify the concrete producer of the test

results through a pre-established means of communication.

The COTR may perform any additional tests deemed necessary and reject all remaining material that fails the tests. Entrained air content will be determined in accordance with ASTM C231 or ASTM C173. Acceptance or rejection will be based on the results obtained from these tests. In general, a mixture that contains the minimum amount of water consistent with the required workability shall be used. Consistency will be determined in accordance with ASTM C143. The COTR will not allow adding cement to loads previously rejected for excessive water content or unsatisfactory consistency.

(b) Strength Tests: The 28-day compressive strengths (f ’c) specified in Table II-17 are the

strengths used in the design calculations. The COTR will verify design strengths by tests made during the progress of the work in accordance with ASTM C31 (Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field) and ASTM C39 (Standard




Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens) except that the fresh concrete sample used for testing is to be secured after at least two cubic feet has been discharged from the delivery vehicle. The two cubic feet discharged is not to be used as part of the test sample or in the work. The COTR must pre-authorize any deviation from sampling and testing procedures. The use of ASTM C42 (Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete) will be at the COTR’s discretion. If the 28-day design compressive strength (f ’c) test results do not conform to the strength requirements specified in Table II-17, the Contractor shall take immediate steps to adjust the mixture design. In addition, the COTR may require removal of or corrective measures be applied to any concrete that does not meet the requirements of Table II-17. If the concrete cylinder strength, f ’cyl, is less than the specified compressive strength found in Table II-17, the criteria in Table II-17A shall apply:

f’c is the 28-day design compressive strength requirement found in Table II-17. f’cyl is the actual average tested strength of the standard-cured concrete cylinder made and tested in accordance with ASTM C31 and ASTM C39. A = full payment B = pay reduction = [((f ’c f ’cyl)/f ’c) x Contract unit price for concrete per yd3 x number of yds3 the concrete represents] or $500, whichever is greater. C = pay reduction = [((f ’c f ’cyl)/f ’c) x 5 x Contractor’s invoice price for concrete per yd3 x number of yds3 the concrete represents] or $500, whichever is greater. D = The Contractor shall submit an investigative plan stamped by a Professional Engineer holding a valid license to practice engineering in the Commonwealth of Virginia outlining how the Contractor shall demonstrate that the in-place concrete meets the structural strength requirements for the design. The COTR will not permit any reduction in concrete strength below 0.9f ’c for barriers, parapets, railings, etc. The COTR will approve the investigative plan for all other applications prior to the execution of the investigation. All costs associated with this investigation shall be borne by the Contractor. After the investigation is completed, the Contractor shall submit a report to the COTR showing the results of the Professional Engineer’s analysis, testing and conclusions as well as any recommended actions proposed by the Contractor to be taken with the concrete that did not meet the strength requirements. The




Department retains all rights to determine if the action proposed with regard to the concrete in question is acceptable. If the Department concurs with the proposed action and the concrete meets the structural strength requirements of the design and remains in place, any price reduction will be taken by Method B if the concrete is a pay item or Method C if the concrete is not a pay item. If the concrete does not meet the structural requirements of the design, the concrete shall be removed and replaced at no cost to the Department. The maximum penalty assessed for low strength concrete left in place will be 10% as specified in Table II-17A, not including the cost of the investigation and any corrective measures taken by the Contractor. The Department will not assess a calculated penalty less than $500. The Contractor shall have the right to remove and replace concrete failing to meet specifications at the Contractor’s cost. Before concrete is placed, the Contractor shall provide a storage chamber at his expense for temporary storage of the Department’s concrete cylinders. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining the chamber so that the concrete test cylinders are kept in a continuously moist condition and within a temperature range of 60 degrees F to 80 degrees F. The chamber shall be equipped with a continuously recording thermometer accurate to ± 2 degrees F for the duration of concrete cylinder curing. The Contractor shall provide the data from the continuously recording thermometer within time frames as approved by the COTR. The chamber shall be located in an area where the test cylinders will not be subject to vibration and shall be of sufficient size or number to store, without crowding or wedging, the required number of test cylinders as determined by the Contractor based on his plan of operations. The COTR will approve the location of the chamber prior to its placement. When use of high-early-strength hydraulic cement concrete is required, it shall conform to Table II–17 except that the 28-day compressive strength requirement shall be obtained in 7 days. The Contractor may use up to 800 pounds per cubic yard of Type I, Type II or Type III cement to produce high-early-strength concrete.

(c) Concrete Temperature shall be measured in accordance with ASTM C1064. (d) Quality Assurance for Low Permeability Concrete:

General:

The Contractor shall prepare and cast test specimens on at least two trial batches using job materials, with permissible combination of cementitious materials, for testing by the Department for permeability and strength at least 5 weeks before the field application. The permeability samples shall be cylindrical specimens with a 4-inch diameter and at least 4-inches in length. Cylinders will be tested at 28 days in accordance with VTM 112. The test value shall be the result of the average values of tests on two specimens from each batch. Permeability values obtained from trial batches shall be 500 coulombs below the maximum values specified in Table II-17 to be acceptable.

Acceptance Tests: For each set of cylinders made for compressive strength tests, two additional cylinders shall be made for the permeability test. The Department will be responsible for making and testing all permeability test specimens.




If the average permeability test result is equal to or less than the value for the specified class of concrete in Table II-17, then full payment will be made for the lot the average permeability test result represents. However, if the average permeability test result exceeds the coulomb value in Table II-17, the percent reduction in payment for that lot of concrete shall be calculated by multiplying 0.005 by each coulomb above the coulomb value in Table II-17 by the concrete item Contract unit price times the number of cubic yards or cubic meters of concrete in the lot. The reduction in price will not exceed 5 percent of the concrete item Contract unit price. The COTR will reject any concrete with a coulomb value that exceeds the maximum required in Table II-17 by 1000 coulombs. However, bridge deck concrete with any coulomb value exceeding the maximum required value by over 1000 coulomb may be accepted by the COTR at 95 percent of the Contract unit price if the concrete in question has the required strength, meets the other specification requirements and the Contractor applies, at his own expense, an approved epoxy concrete overlay to the top of the entire deck. In such cases deck grooving will not be required. The COTR will not allow the placement of epoxy overlays over latex overlays. The Contractor shall make the adjustment to the roadway grade as required by the COTR at the Contractor’s expense. Similarly, concrete in abutments and pier caps with coulomb value exceeding the maximum required in Table II-17, by more than 1000 coulomb may be accepted at 95 percent of the Contract unit price if it has the required strength, meets the other specification requirements and the Contractor applies, at his own expense, one coat of epoxy Type EP 3B and one coat of epoxy EP 3T in conformance with Section 190243.02, on top of the pier caps or abutment seats.

(e) Bond Strength for Silica fume concrete, latex-modified concrete and very-early-strength

latex-modified concrete overlays:

Bond Strength, minimum at 7 days, VTM 92: 150 psi or failure in the substrate concrete at a depth > 0.5-in over > 50 percent of the test area. The Contractor shall perform the bond strength testing. Tests shall be performed one or more days after the overlay is placed and at a time when the lane can be closed to traffic with a minimum of inconvenience to the public. A minimum of one test result (based upon the average of three test specimen results) shall be conducted on each placement.

190217.09 MIXING The COTR must approve the Contractor’s method of mixing prior to the start of concrete work. The volume of concrete mixed per batch shall be at least 15 but not more than 110 percent of the mixer’s rated capacity. Concrete that becomes nonplastic, unworkable, or outside the limits of the slump specified shall not be used. Retempered concrete shall not be used. The Contractor shall regulate concrete delivery so that placement is at a continuous rate. Intervals between deliveries of batches shall not be so great as to allow concrete in place to begin its initial set.

(a) Mixing at Job Site: Concrete shall be mixed in a batch mixer designed to ensure a uniform distribution of materials throughout the mass. When bag cement is used, batches shall be proportioned on the basis of integral bags of cement.




Mixing shall be performed in accordance with the requirements herein. The mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned upon cessation of mixing for more than 30 minutes.

(b) Ready-Mixed Concrete: Ready-mixed concrete shall be delivered to the designated point

ready for use.

Each load of transit or shrink-mixed concrete shall be accompanied by Form TL-28 signed by the VDOT Certified Concrete Plant Technician or a designated company representative working under the direction of the VDOT Certified Concrete Plant Technician. The form shall be delivered to the Inspector at the site of the work. Additional TL-28’s shall be delivered as needed on the project such as when additional space is needed on the form or there is a change in mix design. The COTR will reject loads that do not carry such information or that do not arrive in satisfactory condition. The mixer shall be thoroughly cleaned upon cessation of mixing for more than 30 minutes. Each batch of concrete shall be delivered to the site of work and discharged within 90 minutes of the time the cement is introduced into the mixture unless the COTR approves otherwise. Mixing and delivery shall be in accordance with the following:

1. Transit mixing: Concrete shall be mixed in a truck mixer. Mixing shall begin

immediately after all ingredients are in the mixer and shall continue for at least 70 revolutions of the drum or blades at the rate of at least 14 but no more than 20 revolutions per minute. Additional rotations of the drum or blades shall be at the rated agitating speed. The mixer shall be operated within the capacity and speed of rotation designed by the manufacturer.

2. Shrink mixing: Materials, including water, shall be partially mixed in a stationary

mixer for at least 30 seconds. Mixing shall be completed in a truck mixer with at least 60 but not more than 100 revolutions of the drum or blades at the rated mixing speed. Additional rotations of the drum or blades shall be at the rated agitating speed. Mixers shall be operated within the capacity and speed of rotation designated by the manufacturer of the equipment.

3. Central mixing: Concrete shall be completely mixed in a stationary mixer and

transported in agitator equipment to the point of delivery. The COTR will approve the use of nonagitator equipment only when the plant is in the immediate vicinity of the project.

Mixing time for mixers having a capacity of 1 cubic yard or less shall be at least 60 seconds. Mixing time for mixers having a capacity of more than 1 but less than 10 cubic yards shall be at least 75 seconds. Mixing times for mixers having a capacity of more than 10 cubic yards shall be as determined by the COTR. Performance tests to verify mixing time shall be conducted in accordance with VTM-17 by an approved commercial laboratory at the Contractor’s expense. The




COTR will only approve shorter mixing times if the producer of the concrete is in conformance with VTM-17. In any event, mixing time shall be not less than 40 seconds. VTM-17 shall not be construed as a nullification of the requirements of Table II-17. If subsequent evaluation check tests indicate that the reduced mixing time is not satisfactory, the Contractor shall reestablish the necessary mixing time. The COTR will reject concrete mixed for less than the specified time. Mixing time starts when solid materials are in the mixing compartment and ends when any part of the concrete begins to discharge. The mixer shall be operated at the drum speed specified on the nameplate of the approved mixer. Bodies of nonagitating equipment used to transport concrete shall be smooth, mortar tight, non-aluminum metal containers capable of discharging concrete at a controlled rate without segregation. Upon discharge of concrete, the body of the equipment shall be free from concrete. Concrete shall be delivered to the work site in a thoroughly mixed and uniform mass. Upon the request of the COTR, consistency tests of individual samples at approximately the beginning, midpoint, and end of a load shall be conducted. If consistency measurements vary by more than 2 inches for slump between high and low values, mixer or agitator equipment shall be used in lieu of nonagitating equipment.

(c) Automatic Mobile Continuous Mixers: Mobile continuous mixers shall be calibrated to

proportion the mixture accurately and shall have been certified prior to their use on the project for the type of material specified. Certifications will be valid for 6 months or until the source of materials changes or the grading or moisture changes significantly so as to affect the consistency of the concrete mixture. Evaluation and certification of the mixer will be performed by the Department or an approved testing agency to verify that the true yield is within a tolerance of ±1.0 percent. A recording meter, visible at all times and equipped with a ticket printout, shall indicate the calibrated measurement.

(d) Hand Mixing: Hand mixing will be permitted only in case of emergency and with the

COTR’s permission. Batches shall be not more than 1/2 cubic yard and shall be mixed in a watertight container in a manner approved by the COTR. Ingredients shall be measured by placing them in any suitable, rigid container in the volumetric proportions of 1 part cement to 2 parts fine aggregate to 2 1/2 parts coarse aggregate. The container shall be filled and leveled with each ingredient to ensure the proportions specified are as near to their prescribed amounts as possible. Water shall then be added to produce a mixture having a slump of not more than 3 inches.

190217.10 PLACEMENT LIMITATIONS The Contractor shall be responsible for the quality of concrete placed in any weather or atmospheric condition. At the time of placement, concrete shall have a temperature in accordance with the following:

(a) Class A3 general use concrete used in the construction of incidental items specified in Division V, except retaining walls, shall have a temperature of at least 40 degrees F but not more than 95 degrees F.




(b) ClassA3 paving concrete placed by the slipform method and containing an approved water reducer shall have a temperature of at least 40 degrees F but not more than 95 degrees F.

(c) Concrete used in the construction of bridge decks shall have a temperature of at least 40

degrees F but not more than 85 degrees F. (d) Retaining walls and other concrete not specified in (a), (b), or (c) herein shall have a

temperature of at least 40 degrees F but not more than 90 degrees F. In cold weather, water and aggregates may be heated to not more than 150 degrees F to maintain concrete at the required temperature. The heating apparatus shall be such that materials will be heated uniformly and the possibility of the occurrence of overheated areas that might damage materials will be precluded. Steam shall not come in contact with aggregates. Cement shall not be heated. Heating equipment or methods that alter or prevent entrainment of the required amount of air in concrete shall not be used. Materials containing frost, lumps, crusts, or hardened material shall not be used to produce concrete. In hot weather, aggregates or the mixing water shall be cooled as necessary to maintain the temperature of the concrete within the specified maximum temperature. 190217.11 SELF CONSOLIDATING CONCRETE (SCC) When specified or designated on the plans, SCC shall be designed as the Class of Concrete specified in Table II-17 and conform to all the requirements herein except as outlined below. Combined aggregate grading and viscosity modifying admixture (VMA) may be used. The viscosity-modifying admixture shall conform to ASTM C494, Type S. Synthetic fibers from the Materials Division Approved Products List 35 may be added to control cracking. Shrinkage-reducing admixture may be added to control shrinkage with the approval of the COTR. The maximum size of aggregate shall be 3/4-inch. Further, the maximum size shall, not be larger than 1/5 the narrowest dimension between the sides of the forms, not be larger than 1/3 the slab depth and not be larger than 3/4 of the minimum clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or wires, bundles of bars, individual tendons, bundled tendons or ducts. The Contractor shall furnish the COTR a mix design for the SCC to be used in accordance with the following: Proportion the mixture according to the project specific criteria for compressive strength, air content, slump flow, VSI, J-Ring value, and segregation factor. The maximum water-cementitious materials ratio shall be 0.45 unless otherwise approved by the COTR. Use the same components in the trial batches as are to be used in the project including coarse and fine aggregates, water, source and type of cement, supplementary cementitious materials, and admixtures; including any site-added admixtures intended to be used. Laboratory and field testing of SCC shall conform to the following:

(a) Slump Flow:

The slump flow shall be measured in accordance with ASTM C 1611. The slump flow shall be 26 +/3 inches, and there shall be no visible segregation of the mix in the spread.




The slump flow shall be compared to the slump flow with the J-ring in accordance with ASTM C 1621.

(b) Visual Stability Index (VSI):

VSI Rating in accordance with ASTM C 1611 shall not exceed 1.

(c) J-Ring Flow:

The difference between slump flow and J-Ring flow as measured by ASTM C 1621 shall not be more than 2 inches.

(d) Stability (performed on trial batches):

The stability of the concrete shall be determined in the laboratory prior to approval of the SCC mixture using test method ASTM C 1610. Concrete mixtures shall have a maximum static segregation (segregation factor) of 15 percent.

(e) Strength and Permeability Test Specimens:

Test specimens for strength and permeability (if specified) shall be sampled in accordance with Section 190217.08(b) and fabricated in accordance with ASTM C 1758.

190217.12 LOW SHRINKAGE CLASS A4 MODIFIED CONCRETE Low shrinkage Class A4 modified concrete shall conform to either of the following:

(a) The cementitious materials content shall be < 600 pounds per cubic yard. High-early-strength hydraulic cement concrete as described in Section 190217.08 (b) shall not be used.

The 28 day drying shrinkage shall be < 0.035% (based on average of three specimens) when tested in accordance with ASTM C 157. Specimens shall be moist cured for 7 days prior to testing for drying shrinkage. A shrinkage reducing admixture shall be used unless the 28 day drying shrinkage is < 0.035% without the admixture. With appropriate documentation, a fixed amount of SRA dosage can be used without additional drying shrinkage testing if approved by the COTR.

The Contractor, at the Contractor’s expense, shall prepare a minimum 3 cubic yard trial batch of the mix at least 5 weeks prior to the proposed start date of production. The trial batch will be used to verify compliance with the shrinkage requirements listed herein and the minimum compressive strength, permeability, air void content, and slump listed in Table II-17. The Contractor shall prepare the trial batch with the same equipment to be used on the project. The Contractor shall obtain the services of a Department approved independent laboratory to perform the trial batch testing. Test results shall be furnished to the COTR for review and approval. The COTR will not authorize the Contractor to proceed with production of low shrinkage Class A4 modified concrete for the work required by the Contract until the test results verify conformance with the requirements stated herein.




(b) Use lightweight concrete with lightweight aggregates in conformance with AASHTO M195 (ASTM C330).

The maximum cementitious materials content shall be 650 pounds per cubic yard. All other requirements shall conform to those listed in Table II-17 for Low Shrinkage Class A4 Modified concrete. Maximum density of freshly mixed lightweight concrete, when tested according to ASTM C138, shall be 120 lbs./cu.yd., or as specified on the plans.

190217.13 LATEX-MODIFIED CONCRETE, VERY-EARLY-STRENGTH (LMCVE), FOR

BRIDGE DECK OVERLAYS LMCVE shall conform to the requirements herein, except as follows: Cement shall be approximately 1/3 calcium sulfoaluminate (C4A3S) and 2/3 dicalcium silicate (C2S) or other hydraulic cement that will provide a Latex-Modified Concrete that meets the physical requirements indicated in this section. The LMCVE shall contain a minimum 658 lbs per cubic yard of rapid hardening cement, 15% styrene butadiene latex by weight of cement, water not to exceed a water-cement ratio of 0.40, and aggregates as proposed by the Contractor for the mixture. The compressive strength minimum shall be 2500 psi at 3 hours and 3500 psi at 24 hours. Compressive strength specimens shall be cured in the molds in the same environment as the in-place LMCVE tested. Specimens shall remain undisturbed at the site for 2 hours and shall be transported to the testing lab for testing. Prior to placing overlay the Contractor shall calibrate the mobile concrete mixers. Once the mixers are calibrated, the mixtures shall be sampled and tested for slump and air content. The Contractor shall prepare and test specimens to demonstrate that the concrete mixture shall obtain a compressive strength of at least 2500 psi within 3 hours at the curing temperatures in which the overlay will be placed, and a compressive strength of at least 3500 psi at an age of 24 hours. All trial batching and prepatory work prior to placing LMCVE shall be at the Contractor’s expense. During the placement of the overlay the Contractor shall take samples for testing for compressive strength. Permeability, slump and air content measurements will not be required, but may be performed by the COTR. 190217.14 HIGH EARLY STRENGTH LATEX MODIFIED CONCRETE (HESLMC) FOR

BRIDGE DECK OVERLAYS High Early Strength Latex Modified Concrete (HESLMC) shall conform to the requirements herein and Table II-17, Latex hydraulic cement concrete overlay, except as follows: The compressive strength minimum shall be 3500 psi in 7 days. Prior to placing overlay the Contractor shall calibrate the mobile concrete mixers. Once the mixers are calibrated, the mixtures shall be sampled and tested for slump and air content. The Contractor shall prepare and test specimens to demonstrate that the concrete mixture will obtain a compressive strength of at least 3500 psi at an age of 7 days. All trial batching and preparatory work prior to placing HESLMC shall be at the Contractor’s expense. Permeability, slump and air content measurements will not be required, but may be performed by the COTR.




GUARDRAIL 190221 - 1

SECTION 190221 – GUARDRAIL 190221.01 DESCRIPTION These specifications cover material requirements for components of guardrail systems. 190221.2 DETAIL REQUIREMENTS Guardrail shall consist of rail or cable elements and fastenings fabricated to develop continuous beam or cable strength when installed.

(a) Steel beam shall conform to AASHTO M180, Class A, Type 1. Where guardrail is to be constructed on curves that have a radius of 150 feet or less, rail elements shall be shop curved to the proper radius, with the roadside of the rail either concave or convex as required.

(b) Wire rope (cable) shall conform to AASHTO M30, Type I, Class A. (c) Brackets, turnbuckles, compensating assemblies, and attachment hardware shall be of

sufficient design and section to develop the full strength of the cable guardrail and shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. The spring compensating device shall have a spring constant of 450 ± 50 pounds and shall permit a travel of 6 ± 1 inches.

(d) Concrete for precast reinforced concrete posts shall conform to Section 190217 for Class

A3, except that Type I cement and a smaller size of aggregate may be used. (e) Steel posts shall be galvanized in accordance with AASHTO M111.

1. Structural rolled shapes shall conform to ASTM A709, Grade 36. 2. Sheet steel for fabricated shapes shall conform to ASTM A1011, Grade 36. 3. Weld-fabricated shapes shall conform to ASTM A769.

(f) Wood posts shall conform to Section 190236 and shall be pressure treated. (g) Anchor bolts shall conform to Section 190226.02(c) for high-strength bolts. (h) Offset blocks shall conform to either of the following:

1. Shall be pressure treated wood conforming to Section 190236; or 2. Shall be made of plastic or rubber and contain a minimum of 40 percent recycled

postconsumer and post-industry waste. Block attachment shall be in accordance with the details and dimensions of the Standard Drawings for wooden posts, Standard GR-2, 2A W-Beam guardrail. The size tolerance in the direction of the bolt hole shall not be more than 1/4 inch. The blocks shall present a neat appearance and have planed surfaces.



GUARDRAIL 190221 - 2

The manufacturer of the recycled blocks shall provide independent test results showing that the material complies with the velocity, acceleration, and post-impact trajectory requirements of National Cooperative Highway Research Program (NCHRP) Report 350 or Manual for Assessing Safety Hardware (MASH). The manufacturer shall certify that the material components of the completed blocks are weather resistant and manufactured to prevent ultra-violet (UV) degradation. The manufacturer shall also certify that the material components of the completed blocks are resistant to the subterranean termites during its theoretical lifetime when tested according to ASTM D3345. The theoretical lifetime is considered to be at least 20 years. Any block that varies from the materials herein or from the dimensions and tolerances in the Road and Bridge Standards shall be submitted for approval.


METROPOLITAN WASHINGTON AIRPORTS AUTHORITY DTRE03 DULLES TOLL ROAD STREAM REHABILITATION September 14, 2020

GALVANIZING 190233 - 1

SECTION 190233 – GALVANIZING 190233.01 DESCRIPTION These specifications cover the use and repair of zinc coatings (galvanizing) on a variety of materials. 190233.2 DETAIL REQUIREMENTS Galvanizing of fabricated items shall be performed after fabrication. Galvanized items shall be stored off the ground in a manner that will allow free drainage of water from galvanized surfaces.

(a) Galvanizing of iron and steel hardware shall conform to ASTM A153 for the hot-dip process or ASTM B695, Class 50, for the mechanical process.

(b) Galvanizing of rolled, pressed, and forged steel shapes, plates, bars, and strips shall

conform to ASTM A123. 190233.3 REPAIR OF GALVANIZED SURFACES Galvanizing surfaces that have been damaged or have uncoated areas shall be repaired in accordance with ASTM A780 except that repair materials shall not contain lead or cadmium. END OF SECTION 190233


GALVANIZING 190233 - 2




RETROREFLECTORS 190235 - 1

SECTION 190235 – RETROREFLECTORS 190235.01 DESCRIPTION Retroreflectors shall consist of a housing/backing with a retroreflective surface on the front and back, if applicable. Retroreflectors for delineators and pavement markers, except temporary markers, shall be molded of methyl methacrylate plastic conforming to Federal Specification L-P-380, Type I, Class 3. Retroreflectors for temporary pavement markers shall have a surface consisting of reflective sheeting or a plastic prismatic element. The housing/backing for temporary pavement markers shall be constructed of methyl methacrylate plastic conforming to Federal Specification L-P-380, Type I, Class 3. Delineators and pavement markers shall be approved by reviewing performance data from one or both of the following test programs:

(a) AASHTO’s National Transportation Product Evaluation Program (AASHTO/NTPEP). Test data values used for approval may be based upon the data generated per the applicable NTPEP Work Plan.

(b) VDOT Test Facility – VDOT may elect to evaluate performance from their own test

facility. 190235.2 DETAIL REQUIREMENTS

(a) Steel castings for snowplowable pavement markers shall conform to ASTM A536, hardened to 52-54 RC, and shall weigh approximately 5 1/2 pounds. Keels shall be parallel, approximately 0.70 inch thick by 1.90 inches deep, and shall have notched edges. The forward and rear noses of the casting shall be shaped to deflect snowplow blades. Castings shall retain their hardness after removal of adhesives and other foreign residues or shall be capable of conforming to the specified hardness with additional heat treating to ensure the castings can be recycled.

(b) Plastic panels for delineators shall be at least 0.080 inch thick, have a minimum tensile

strength at yield of 5,000 pounds per square inch when tested in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D638. Plastic panels shall also have minimum impact strengths of 2.0 footpounds per inch of notch at –20 degrees F and 14.0 foot-pounds per inch of notch at 73 degrees F when tested in accordance with the requirements of ASTM D256, Method A. The panels shall be flexible and able to recoil to within 5 degrees of vertical after impact. Panels shall not deteriorate when exposed to UV rays, petroleum products, ozone, deicing salts, exhaust fumes, or herbicides.

(c) Aluminum panels for delineators shall be at least 0.064 inch thick conforming to ASTM

B-209, alloy 5052. (d) Delineators shall have the retroreflective surface and the housing/backing fused to form a

homogenous unit sealed against dust, water, and vapor. Retroreflectors shall show no



RETROREFLECTORS 190235 - 2

change in shape or color when subjected to 4 hours in a circulating air oven at 170 degrees F to 180 degrees F. The adhesion system shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Refer to VTM 70 for additional Delineator Testing Requirements.

The specific intensity shall be not less than the following values:

(e) Raised, recessed, and snowplowable raised pavement markers shall have a retroreflective surface area not less than 1.4 square inches, and the slope of the reflective surfaces shall not be less than 30 degrees or more than 33 degrees when measured from the pavement surface. The reflective surface shall be protected with a bonded glass face or coated with a clear acrylic compound that uses a UV inhibitor. Refer to VTM 71 for additional Pavement Marker Testing Requirements.

The specific intensity shall not be less than the following values when tested in accordance with VTM-71:

The crushing strength shall not be less than 4,000 pounds when tested in accordance with VTM-71.

Raised and recessed pavement markers shall be at least 4 inches and not more than 4.75 inches in width and not more than 0.55 inch in height.

Retroreflectors for snowplowable raised pavement markers shall be installed in steel castings conforming to (a) herein and shall have a nominal width of 4 inches excluding the castings.

(f) Temporary pavement markers shall have a retroreflective surface not less than 1.0 square

inch. The specific intensity shall not be less than the following values:




WOOD PRODUCTS 190236 - 1

SECTION 190236 – WOOD PRODUCTS 190236.01 DESCRIPTION These specifications cover the uses and requirements for structural timber and lumber, miscellaneous wood products, and preservative treatments for such wood products where specified. 190236.2 DETAIL REQUIREMENTS

(a) Structural timber and lumber shall conform to AASHTO M168. The species and grade of structural lumber shall be as shown on the plans. The COTR may approve the substitution of another species of equal or greater strength selected from the “Allowable Unit Stresses for Structural Lumber—Visually Graded” of AASHTO’s Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges or the supplement to National Design Specification for Stress-Grade Lumber and Its Fastenings of the National Forest Products Association.

Except as otherwise specified, the species and grade of structural lumber, timber, and posts for the following applications shall be as follows:

1. Bridges shall be at least 1,550 Fb and:

a. 5 inch by 5 inch and larger: Southern Pine, No. 1 Dense. b. 2 inch through 4 inch by 2 inch through 4 inch: Southern Pine, No. 2

Dense. c. 2 inch through 4 inch by 5 inch and through 6 inch: Southern Pine, No. 1. d. 2 inch through 4 inch by 8 inch only: Southern Pine, No. 1 Dense. e. 2 inch through 4 inch by 10 inch only: Southern Pine, Non-Dense Select

Structural. f. 2 inch through 4 inch by 12 inch only: Southern Pine, Non-Dense Select

Structural.

2. Signs shall be at least 1,100 Fb with material being dressed on all sides and:

a. 4 inches and less in the least dimension: Southern Pine, No. 2 Non-Dense.

b. Over 4 inches in the least dimension: Southern Pine, No. 1.

3. Guardrail shall be at least 1,250 Fb Southern Pine, No. 1 Dense. 4. Fence shall be Southern Pine, No. 2, for line, corner, and brace units. 5. Signalization and electrical service shall conform to ANSI Class 5.1.




Sawn material, both rough and dressed, shall be certified by the mill as to grade and shall be grade marked in accordance with the grading rules and basic provisions of the American Lumber Standards (PS-20-70) by a lumber grading or inspection bureau or agency approved by the Department. The grade mark shall be applied after dressing if the sawn material is dressed.

(b) Timber piles shall conform to ASTM D25. Piles shall be clean peeled and have a butt

circumference of at least 31 inches. The COTR will accept piles for fender systems or other non– load bearing uses under the following criteria provided the piles can be properly driven: A straight line from the center of the butt to the center of the tip may lie partly outside the body of the pile, but the distance between the line and pile shall be not more than 1/2 percent of the length of the pile or 3 inches, whichever is smaller.

Points for timber piles shall be steel or cast iron and of a shape that will allow a secure connection to the pile and withstand driving. Timber piles shall be branded prior to shipment with the supplier brand, year of treatment, species of timber and preservative treatment, retentions, class, and length. Brand symbols shall conform to AWPA M6.

(c) Timber preservatives shall be used according to their suitability for the condition of

exposure to which the timber will be subjected and shall not be used interchangeably. Treatments shall conform to the following limitations:

1. Waterborne preservatives shall be used for timber where a clean surface is

desirable. The moisture content of wood material shall be not more than 19 percent at the time of treatment.

2. Pentachlorophenol and creosote may be used for timber that is not to be painted.

Timbers treated with pentachlorophenol or creosote shall be free of excess preservative on the wood surface.

3. Preservatives shall conform to the requirements of the American Wood-

Preservers Association (AWPA). 4. Pressure treatment shall conform to the AWPA “Use Category System” as

follows:

• Lumber and timber for bridge structures including bridge decking, guardrail posts, and offset blocks shall be treated to conform to UC4B.

• Foundation piles shall be treated to conform to UC4C. • Wood composites shall be treated to conform to UC4A. • Sign posts, fence posts, and gates shall be treated to conform to UC4A. • All other sawn products and round posts less than 16 feet in length shall

be treated to conform to UC4A.




5. Marine applications where wood structures or products will be placed in or above salt water, brackish water, or tidal water shall be treated to conform to UC5B.

6. Wood used for highway construction, bicycle trails, pedestrian overlooks and

maintenance applications for sign posts, fence posts, wood posts, guardrail posts, bridge decking, gates, stair treads, and offset blocks shall be treated with a chromated copper arsenate (CCA) preservative. Wood used for highway construction, bicycle trails, pedestrian overlooks and maintenance applications for piles, timbers, and composites shall be treated with a CCA, pentachlorophenol, or creosote preservative.

7. Wood used for hand-contact surfaces such as handrails, playground equipment,

and picnic tables shall be treated with either ammoniacal copper quaternary (ACQ) salt or copper azole (CA) preservative. ACQ and CA wood treatments are highly corrosive to metal. Fasteners or connectors that will be in contact with wood using ACQ or CA wood preservative treatments shall be either 304 or 316 stainless steel or hot-dipped galvanized steel that conforms to ASTM A153 or ASTM A653, Class G185. The COTR will not permit the use of mechanically galvanized steel hardware or fasteners with ACQ and CA wood treated wood.







ROADSIDE DEVELOPMENT MATERIALS 190244 - 1

SECTION 190244 – ROADSIDE DEVELOPMENT MATERIALS 190244.01 DESCRIPTION These specifications cover the seed, topsoil and plant materials for use in the construction of the roadway embankment and landscaping. 190244.02 DETAIL REQUIREMENTS

(a) Not Used

(b) Topsoil: Topsoil may be naturally occurring or may be manufactured and shall be free of foreign objects such as refuse, woody vegetation, stumps, roots, brush, stone larger than 3/4 inches, and other material deleterious to plant growth. Maximum size of other foreign objects shall be 2 inches. Topsoil shall conform to the following:

Topsoil shall be of the following classifications:

1. Not Used.

2. Class B topsoil: Class B topsoil shall be topsoil furnished from sources outside the project limits and shall be the original top layer of a soil profile formed under natural conditions, technically defined as the “A” horizon or as defined by USDA–NRCS Soil Survey Division, or manufactured top soil. The Contractor shall provide to the COTR a source of materials for topsoil planned for use on the project prior to use.

Manufactured topsoil shall consist of a mineral component and amendments to meet the specified organic content, PH and other requirements as detailed herein. Organic material used in conjunction with amending or manufacturing of topsoil shall meet all regulatory requirements of the Virginia Department of Environmental Quality or the equivalent state regulatory agency from the state of origin and the United States Environmental Protection Agency Electronic Code of Federal Regulations (e-CFR, current edition) Title 40, Part 503—Standards For The Use Or Disposal Of Sewage Sludge, as applicable.

3. Testing and documentation: The Contractor shall submit the following test

reports to the COTR for Class A and Class B topsoil prior to use. Testing shall be completed by a DCR-approved soils testing laboratory.



a. Soil analysis of topsoil, including pH factor, mechanical analysis

(composition), salinity (soluble salts), percentage of organic content, and soil classification based thereon.

b. Recommendations on the types and quantities of additives required to

establish a satisfactory pH and bring the supply of nutrients to a level satisfactory for establishing and sustaining turf and/or for use as a soil mix for planting, if applicable.

(c) Seeds: Shall conform to 190603 and as follows: Kinds and varieties of seeds shall be

delivered to the project in separate sacks bearing a green seed label denoting that the seed was inspected and approved by the Virginia Crop Improvement Association. The COTR will reject any open bags. Seeds shall be mixed on the project or at other approved locations under the observation of the COTR. Seeds shall comply with applicable state and federal seed laws and the Contract requirements. The Engineer must approve seed selected for use on the project.

Seed shall be subject to inspection by Virginia State Seed Regulatory Inspectors of the Virginia Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services. Seed tests shall have been completed within the 9-month period prior to the beginning of the scheduled seeding period for the area to be seeded. Seed shall not be or have been stored in an enclosure where herbicides, kerosene, or other material detrimental to seed germination has been or is stored. Noxious weed seeds, as defined by the rules and regulations adopted for enforcement of the Virginia Seed Law will not be permitted except as stated herein. The number of restricted noxious weed seeds shall be not more than the number per ounce or per pound of noxious weed seeds specified in the rules and regulations of the Virginia Seed Law.

The green tag from each sack of seed shall be signed by the Contractor and delivered to the COTR after each sack is completely used.

(d) Not Used.

(e) Not Used.

(f) Not Used.

(g) Mulches for Erosion Control shall be according to the following based on functional

longevity, slope length, and slope gradient as detailed herein. 1. Dry Straw or Hay Dry straw or hay shall be used to facilitate vegetative establishment on

slopes of 4:1 or less gradient designed to be functional for up to thirty (30) days. The dry straw or hay shall be free from noxious weeds, reasonably bright in color, and not be musty, moldy, caked, decayed, or dusty. Straw or hay shall be applied by (1) tacking with a Hydraulic Erosion Control Product (HECP), Type 1, at the rate of 1000 pounds per acre



and applied as recommended by the manufacturer by (2) punching or disking into the soil or (3) by other COTR-approved methods.

2. Hydraulic Erosion Control Products (HECP) Hydraulic Erosion Control Products shall be dyed green or contain a green dye in the package

that will provide a color to facilitate visual inspection of the uniformly spread slurry. Mulch, including dye and tackifiers, shall not contain germination-inhibiting or growth-inhibiting factors. The mulch shall be manufactured and processed so that it will remain in uniform suspension in water under agitation and will blend with seed, fertilizer, and other additives to form a homogenous slurry. The mulch shall form a blotter-like ground cover on application having moisture absorption and percolation properties. It shall cover and hold grass seed in direct contact with the soil, promoting the germination and growth of grass seedlings.

The manufacturer shall provide certification that all components are pre-packaged by the

manufacturer to assure material performance and compliance with the minimum requirements of Table II-22A. Under no circumstances will field mixing of HECP additives or HECP components be allowed. Mulch shall be delivered in packages of uniform weight bearing the name of the manufacturer, the net weight, and an additional statement of the net dry weight content.

When polyacrylamide is used as part of a hydroseeding mix, only an anionic polymer formulation

with free acrylamide monomer residual content of less than 0.05% is allowed. Cationic polyacrylamide shall not be used in any concentration. The Contractor shall ensure polyacrylamide-containing mixtures are not sprayed onto pavement. Polyacrylamide-containing mixtures may include tackifiers, flocculants, or moisture-holding compounds.

In addition to making field performance determinations, the Department may sample and perform

such other tests on mulch as it deems warranted to ensure that the mulch conforms to these specifications. Only those materials that have been evaluated by MWAA, the MWAA Annual Standards and Specifications (AS&S) or are included in the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook and are deemed acceptable will appear on the Materials Division’s Approved Products List. Mulch types shall contain a tackifier or additive as detailed below that upon drying becomes insoluble and non-dispersible to eliminate direct raindrop impact on soil. Typically, all HECP products shall be applied when the soil is dry and rain is not expected within at least 48 hours after application.

HECP types are as follows: a. HECP, Type 1 shall be used to facilitate vegetative establishment on slopes of 1V:4H or

flatter gradient. Products shall be functional for up to 2 months after application and shall be composed of non-toxic fibers consisting of a minimum of 70% specially prepared wood fiber, paper fiber, or a mixture of shredded wood fiber and paper fiber.

b. HECP, Type 2 shall be used to facilitate vegetative establishment on slopes of 1V:3H or

flatter gradient. Products shall be functional for up to 3 months after application and shall consist of a hydraulically applied matrix composed of a minimum of 70% of non-toxic defibrated organic fibers with, at a minimum, one of the following non-toxic tackifiers or additives:



• Soil tackifiers, • Soil flocculants, • Soil polymers, • Cross-linked hydro-colloidal polymers, or • Cross-linked tackifiers. HECP, Type 2 products shall not contain materials composed of paper, cellulose fiber, or any

mixture containing paper or cellulose. c. HECP, Type 3 shall be used to facilitate vegetative establishment on slopes of 1V:2H or

flatter gradient. Products shall be functional for up to 6 months after application and shall consist of a hydraulically applied matrix composed of a minimum of 70% of non-toxic long-strand organic fibers heated to a minimum temperature of 212 degrees Fahrenheit for sterilization purposes with, at a minimum, one or more of the following non-toxic additives that, upon drying, become insoluble and non-dispersible to eliminate direct raindrop impact on soil:

• Soil tackifiers, • Soil flocculants, • Soil polymers, • Cross-linked hydro-colloidal polymers, or • Cross-linked tackifiers.



HECP, Type 3 products shall not contain materials composed of paper, cellulose fiber, or any

mixture containing paper or cellulose. d. HECP, Type 4 not used.. 3. Not Used.

(h) Not Used.



(i) Trees, Shrubs, Vines, and Other Plants: Shall conform to 190613 and as follows: The botanical and common name of plants shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the following reference works in order of priority: 1.) Hortus Third, prepared by L.H. Bailey, and 2.) Standardized Plant Names prepared by the Editorial Committee of the American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature in effect on the date of the Notice of Advertisement.

1. Quality and size: All plants supplied shall be first class representatives of their

normal species or varieties unless otherwise specified. Plants shall conform to the requirements of the current American Standard for Nursery Stock (ANSI Z-60.1) by the American Nursery and Landscape Association and these specifications.

All B&B (balled and burlapped) plants shall be nursery grown and dug within 30 days of planting, unless otherwise specifically permitted, and shall have been growing in USDA Plant Hardiness Zones 6 or 7 prior to award date of the Contract.

Shade and flowering trees are to be symmetrically balanced according to their normal habit of growth. Shade trees of standard variety shall have a single leader and shall be branched as indicated on the plans or Standard Drawings. Major branches shall not have V-shaped crotches capable of causing structural weakness. Trunks shall be free of unhealed branch removal wounds greater than a one-inch diameter. Evergreens shall be full foliage. Deciduous and evergreen shrubs shall be uniformly branched and have ample, well balanced root systems. All vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, and herbaceous plants shall have been growing for at least three months in the size of container specified and show full and substantial growth conforming to the industry standard size of the plant indicated.

All container grown plants shall be well-rooted, vigorous and established, with full and well-balanced tops, in the appropriate container size for the height or spread of the plant specified and shall not be root bound. Material arriving with broken or loose balls, insufficient protection of roots or top, shriveled dry or insufficiently developed roots, or are weak and thin, are damaged or defective or which do not comply with the specifications will be rejected. Plant material which shows evidence of containing any parts (seeds, rhizomes, roots) of Johnson Grass, Bull Thistle, or Canada Thistle will be rejected. Plants shall be grown in a state-approved, certified nursery. Plants shall comply with state and federal laws governing inspection for plant diseases and insect infestation and shall be free from insect pests, plant diseases, disfiguring knots, stubs, sunscald, bark abrasions, or any other form of damage or objectionable disfigurements. All tree pruning shall conform to the current edition of the National Arborist Association’s “Pruning Standards for Shade Trees”. When a minimum and maximum size or range is specified, an average size shall be furnished. Plants shall not be pruned before delivery or cut back from larger sizes to conform to the sizes specified. Sizes furnished shall be those specified at the time of delivery and before the usual pruning at the time of planting. Plants



from cold storage will not be accepted. Deciduous plants, except those grown in containers, shall be dormant when planted.

2. Digging and protection: Digging shall be in accordance with the current

American Standards for Nursery Stock and done in a manner that will avoid damage to or loss of roots. Roots that are cut shall be cleanly cut. Balled and burlapped plants shall be properly dug and protected to preserve the natural earth in contact with the roots. The COTR will not accept manufactured balled or processed balled stock. Balls shall be firmly wrapped and tied with approved materials. Balled plants will not be accepted if the ball is broken, cracked, or loose. After plants are dug, their roots shall be protected from damage. Roots of bare root plants shall be kept moist at all times. Bare root plants shall be further protected by wrapping in wet straw, moss, burlap, or other approved material.

3. Plantable pots: In lieu of using burlap with balled plants, plants may be dug as

specified herein and placed in plantable pots. Pots shall be constructed of organic, biodegradable material that will readily decompose in soil and shall not be smaller in any dimension than the size specified for balled and burlapped root systems. At the time of planting, the lip or rim of pots shall be broken away, and drainage holes shall be provided in the plantable pots as directed by the COTR. Plants with balls that have been grown in pots or plants with loose stems will be rejected.

4. Container-grown plants: In addition to the requirements of the American

National Standard for Nursery Stock, container-grown plants shall conform to the following:

a. The space between the rim or top of the container and the soil line within

the container shall not be more than 1½ inches for the 1-gallon and 2-gallon sizes, and not more than 2½ inches for the 5-gallon size.

b. Encircling roots shall not have grown in such a manner that they have or

will cause girdling of the trunk or stems.

c. Roots shall have been grown in the soil medium for a minimum of 6 months, extending to the limits of the container on all sides and from top to bottom.

5. Collected plants: Collected plants from wild or native stands shall not be used

without the written permission of the COTR unless specified on the plans. Wild or native plants shall be clean, sound stock and free from injury. The quality of the plants shall be similar to that specified for nursery-grown material. Stock shall have sufficient root systems to ensure successful transplanting and rejuvenation. Balls, when specified, shall be tight and well formed.

6. Clump and Multi-trunk Trees: Clump form and multi-trunk trees shall be

designated by the number of stems (trunks), height and caliper as appropriate to the species. Clump form shall refer to a plant with 3 or more stems (trunks) arising from the top of the root structure as independent stems (trunks). Multi-



trunk shall refer to a plant with 3 or more stems arising out of a single base (trunk) within 6 inches of the top of the root structure.

7. Specimen Quality: Trees or shrubs designated as “Specimen Quality” shall refer

to plants of exceptional quality for the species and size designated, being symmetrical in form and full in canopy and limb structure, usually grown for use as a focal point, but may be designated for use otherwise. Deciduous trees shall have the maximum canopy size for the caliper or height specified as per ANSI Z60.1. Evergreen trees shall have the maximum width to height ratio for the height specified as per ANSI Z60.1.

8. Street Tree: Trees designated as “Street Tree” form shall be cultivated for street

tree use having a straight, vertical trunk with a single dominant and central leader, nursery pruned for the development of a symmetrical canopy, an upward and outward growing branch pattern with strong branch unions and low aspect ratios of 1 to 3 or greater, shall be uniform in appearance without crossing branches or suckers. A specific height of branching (from the ground to the first branch) may be specified on the Planting Summary Sheet as appropriate for the specific site.

9. Specimen Street Tree: Where so designated, trees shall conform to the requirements of both “Specimen” and “Street Tree” as indicated above.

(j) Not Used.

(k) Not Used.

(l) Rolled Erosion Control Products:

Rolled Erosion Control Products shall conform to 190611. Rolled Erosion Products shall meet or exceed EC-2, Type 4 rolled erosion products and must conform to the latest version of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook or MWAA’s Annual Standards and Specifications. EC-2 Type 4 shall be a long-term erosion control blanket or open weave textile. EC-2, Type 4 blankets shall be one of the following materials: (1) an erosion control blanket composed of processed slow degrading natural or polymer fibers mechanically-bound together.



(m) Not Used.

(n) Not Used.

(o) Sediment Retention Rolls

A sediment retention roll is a manufactured 3-dimensional device of a specified filler material encapsulated within a flexible containment material utilized in sediment and flow control applications. Sediment retention rolls may be used to reduce runoff flow velocities on sloped surfaces as slope interrupters, as curb inlet protection, and as ditch check dams. Sediment Retention rolls may be one of the following products:

1. Compost Filter Sock is a three-dimensional tubular sediment control device that

consisting of a knitted material filled with compost. The compost shall be reasonably free (< 1% by dry weight) of man-made foreign matter and meet the product parameters listed in 244.02 (g) 3. Compost used in filter sock products shall be certified through the U.S. Composting Council’s (USCC) Seal of Testing



Assurance (STA) Program. Compost used for compost filter sock shall meet the following product size specification:

The knitted material for compost filter socks shall conform to the following:

NOTE: All material must be knitted. Extruded material will not be permitted. All material must be photo-degradable.

2. Sediment Tubes shall be composed of compacted geotextiles such as certified 100% weed free curled excelsior wood with 80% of the fiber materials being at least 4 inches in length, natural coconut fibers (bristle and mattress form obtained from freshwater cured coconut husk.), certified 100% weed free agricultural straw, certified 100% weed free hardwood mulch, or a mix of these materials or other MWAA-accepted materials enclosed by a flexible netting material. Sediment tubes shall be constructed of a tubular, flexible outer netting consisting of one of the following:

• Seamless, high-density, polyethylene, polyester, and/or ethyl vinyl

acetate, photodegradable materials treated with ultraviolet stabilizers. • Seamless, high-density, polyethylene, non-degradable materials. • Seamless, high-density, polypropylene, non-degradable materials.



• Coir netting or coir fastening twine.

Straw, curled excelsior wood, or natural coconut products that are rolled up to create a sediment tube without an outer netting will not be allowed. Natural pine needles, leaf mulch, and grass clipping-filled sediment tubes will not be permitted.







GEOSYNTHETICS AND LOW PERMEABILITY LINERS 190245 - 1

SECTION 190245 – GEOSYNTHETICS AND LOW PERMEABILITY LINERS 190245.01 DESCRIPTION These specifications cover artificial fiber textile products to be used in transportation construction work, and low permeability liners for stormwater management facilities. 190245.2 SHIPPING, HANDLING, AND STORAGE REQUIREMENTS Geosynthetic shall be permanently marked with a clearly legible print showing manufacturing plant or plant Identification Code number, located on the roll edge at least every 16 feet. Rolls shall be labeled at both ends of the outside of the roll outer wrapping and both ends of the inside of the geotextile roll core, and labels shall list the roll number, production date, AASHTO M288 class(es) the product meets, and the product name; if the permanent marking contains this information, the labels may be omitted. Each geosynthetic roll shall be wrapped or otherwise packaged in a manner that will protect the geosynthetic, including the ends of the roll, from damage due to shipment, water, sunlight, and contaminants. The protective wrapping shall be maintained during periods of shipment and storage. During storage, geosynthetics rolls shall be elevated off the ground and adequately covered to protect them from the following: site construction damage; precipitation; extended ultraviolet radiation including sunlight; strong acids or strong bases; flames including welding sparks; temperatures in excess of 160 degrees F; and other environmental conditions that may damage the physical property values of the geosynthetic. Geosynthetics that are not properly protected may be subject to rejection. 190245.3 TESTING AND DOCUMENTATION Each geosynthetic material provided to the project shall have a manufacture date within its current NTPEP product 3-year evaluation cycle. The manufacturer and any subsequent private labeler facility shall be listed as compliant by NTPEP within the current calendar year, or immediate past calendar year with an application for audit for the current calendar year. The Department may sample and test product from a facility or project at any time to verify compliance with specification requirements. Failure may result in the product being rejected or removed from the Approved List. Property values in these specifications represent minimum average roll values (MARV) in the weakest principal direction unless direction is otherwise specified; permittivity values specified are minimum; AOS and panel vertical strain values are maximum; or mass per unit area, UV degradation, and asphalt retention values are typical. Product acceptance is determined by comparing the manufacturer test data against these specifications and using independent assurance testing, verification sampling and testing, and facility audits.

(a) Geotextile Fabric for Use in Silt Fences: Geotextile shall be a woven fabric and function as a vertical, permeable interceptor designed to remove suspended soil from overland




water flow. Fabric shall filter and retain soil particles from sediment-laden water to prevent eroding soil from being transported off the construction site by water runoff.

In addition to these requirements, the geotextile shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO M288, Table 7, Temporary Silt Fence Property Requirements, for grab strength and ultraviolet stability.

(b) Geotextile for Use as Riprap Bedding Material: Geotextile shall comply with the

requirements of AASHTO M288, Table 3-Separation Geotextile Property Requirements, for apparent opening size and ultraviolet stability and Table 1-Geotextile Strength Property Requirements, Class 2, for grab strength and puncture strength.

(c) Geotextile Fabric for Use in Drainage Systems (Drainage Fabric): Drainage fabric shall

be nonwoven and clog resistant, suitable for subsurface application, and thermally and biologically stable.

Polypropylene material is acceptable in environments with pH values between 3 and 12 inclusive; polyester material between 3 and 9 inclusive.

In addition to these requirements, the geotextile shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO M288 Table 1-Geotextile Strength Property Requirements, Class 3, for grab strength.

(d) Geotextile for Use in Stabilization: These are geotextiles used in saturated and/or

unstable conditions to provide the functions of separation and reinforcement.

1. Subgrade Stabilization Fabric:




In addition to this requirement, the geotextile shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO M 288 Table 1-Geotextile Strength Property Requirements, Class 3, for grab strength, tear strength, and puncture strength.

2. Embankment Stabilization Fabric Up to 6 Feet High:

In addition to this requirement, the geotextile shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO M288 Table 1-Geotextile Strength Property Requirements, Class 1 for grab strength, tear strength, and puncture strength.

(e) Prefabricated Geocomposite Pavement Underdrain: Prefabricated geocomposite

pavement underdrain shall consist of a polymeric drainage core encased in a nonwoven filter fabric envelope having sufficient flexibility to withstand bending and handling without damage. Prefabricated geocomposite pavement underdrain shall conform to the following:

1. Core: The drainage core shall be made from an inert, polymeric material resistant

to commonly encountered chemicals and substances in the pavement environment and shall have a thickness of not less than 3/4 inch. Outer surfaces shall be smooth to prevent excessive wear of bonded filter fabric.

2. Filter Fabric: Geotextile shall be bonded to and tightly stretched over the core. Geotextile shall not sag or block the flow channels, shall have a life equivalent to that of the core material, and shall conform to the requirements of (c) herein.

(f) Geocomposite Wall Drains: Prefabricated geocomposite wall drain shall consist of a

polymeric drainage core encased in a nonwoven filter fabric envelope having sufficient flexibility to withstand bending and handling without damage. Geocomposite wall drains shall conform to the following:




1. Core: The drainage core shall be made from an inert, polymeric material resistant to commonly encountered chemicals and substances in the roadway. Outer surfaces shall be smooth to prevent excessive wear of bonded filter fabric.

2. Filter Fabric: Geotextile shall be bonded to and tightly stretched over both sides of the core. Geotextile shall not sag or block the flow channels, shall have a life equivalent to that of the core material, and shall conform to the requirements of (c) herein, except that grab strength requirement shall meet AASHTO M288 Table 1, Class 2.

(g) Geomembrane Moisture Barrier: Geomembrane moisture barrier shall be resistant to

biological attack. geomembrane shall be constructed of PVC and shall conform to the requirements of the PVC Geomembrane Institute 1104 material specification for PVC geomembrane (Revision #1 effective April 15, 2008) and shall meet the following additional or more stringent requirements:

(h) Dewatering Bag: A nonwoven geotextile sewn together to form a bag that can be used in lieu of a de-watering basin for the purpose of filtering out suspended soil particles. The bag shall be capable of accommodating the water flow from the pump without leaking at the spout and seams.




(i) Pavement Interlayer: Paving geosynthetics shall be used as an interlayer between pavement layers. Specific application of these paving interlayers shall be determined by the COTR.

1. Paving Fabric: The geotextile shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO

M288 Paving Fabric Property Requirements, Section 10.

2. Paving Mat: The paving mat shall meet the requirements of ASTM D7239 Geosynthetic Paving Mat, Type 1.

(j) Low Permeability Liners for Stormwater Management Facilities: SWM liner soil shall be

classified as CL, CH or MH in accordance with ASTM D2487 and shall have a maximum coefficient of permeability of 1 x 10-6 cm/sec in accordance with ASTM D5084, after compaction. The maximum particle size shall be three inches in its largest dimension. Natural soils, which do not meet these specifications, may be blended with bentonite to provide the specified permeability characteristics.

Geosynthetic Clay Liner shall have a maximum coefficient of permeability of 1 x 10-8 cm/sec in accordance with ASTM D5887.

This specification is not intended for dam embankment material or clay core cut-off trench material.








PAVEMENT MARKING 190246 - 1

SECTION 190246 – PAVEMENT MARKING 190246.01 DESCRIPTION These specifications cover material for use in various retroreflective pavement-marking applications. 190246.2 DETAIL REQUIREMENTS Materials that must be heated for application shall not exude fumes that are toxic or injurious to persons or property when heated to the application temperature. The marking material (including primers and adhesives) shall not be formulated with any compounds of the heavy metals listed in 40 CFR 261.24, Table 1, except that barium sulfate is allowed. Total heavy metal levels, with the exception of barium sulfate, shall not exceed 20 times the specified regulatory limits. The marking material (including primers and adhesives) shall meet the Virginia Department of Environmental Quality (VDEQ) regulations (9 VAC 5-45, Articles 5 and 6) for Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC). Materials shall withstand air and roadway temperature variations from 0 140 degrees F without deforming, bleeding, staining, or discoloring and shall maintain their original dimensions and placement without excessive chipping, spalling, cracking, or loss of adhesion. Material shall not deteriorate because of contact with snow and ice control materials or oil and gasoline drippings from vehicles. Pavement marking materials shall produce a retroreflective line, message, legend or symbol of specified thickness, width or design in accordance with the latest edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways and the Contract requirements. Pavement marking material shall have the pigment, glass beads, and filler well dispersed in the resin and shall be free from skins, dirt, and foreign objects. Glass Beads shall conform to Section 190234. The amount and type of yellow pigment and inert filler for yellow material shall be at the discretion of the manufacturer provided the material complies with this specification. All marking materials shall be suitable for use up to 1 year after the date of manufacture when stored in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Pavement marking and pavement marker materials shall conform to the specific requirements for the individual types as indicated hereinafter:

(a) Approval of Pavement Markings

The Department will evaluate and approve pavement markings by reviewing performance test data from one or both of the following testing programs:

• AASHTO’s National Transportation Product Evaluation Program

(AASHTO/NTPEP) Testing




Test data values used for approval will be based upon the data generated per the NTPEP, Pavement Marking Material Work Plan. Testing and evaluations shall be performed on a Northern Region test deck unless otherwise approved by the Materials Division.

• VDOT Test Facility – VDOT may evaluate pavement marking performance from

data generated at its own test facility. Test data values used for approval will be based upon the data generated by following the testing requirements in VTM-125, Evaluation of Pavement Markings on Road Surfaces.

When pavement markings are installed on the NTPEP test deck or the VDOT facility, the material’s thickness, beads/reflective optic types, and formulation shall be documented to ensure the equivalent thickness, beads/reflective optic types and formulation are installed on VDOT roadways following approval.

Approved pavement marking products later found not meeting the batch testing requirements will be removed from the Materials Division’s Approved Products List.

Black contrast pavement markings of paint, thermoplastic, epoxy, and polyurea shall be accepted based upon batch testing requirements listed herein (as applicable). Retroreflectivity, color, luminance(Y%), and road testing are not required for the black portion of the pavement markings. Black contrast tape requirements are listed in the applicable section below.

Initial Approval

Pavement marking products will be included on the Materials Division’s Approved Products List after the Department determines conformance to the specifications on both asphalt and hydraulic cement concrete roadway surfaces. Determination of conformance will include, but not be limited to, the evaluation of test data from AASHTO’s / NTPEP or other VDOT Test Facilities in accordance with the requirements for the respective pavement marking material types.

(b) Certifications

The pavement marking material manufacturer shall certify each batch or lot of material supplied and installed is the same product (thickness, reflective optic package and formulation) that was tested and approved on the AASHTO/NTPEP or VDOT test facility in accordance with the Materials Division, Manual of Instructions for Certification I and II Materials. The certification shall include the NTPEP test number from the Materials Division’s Approved Products List. The Contractor shall retain the manufacturer’s certifications.

(c) Warranty Requirements

Pavement marking products shall carry the warranties as supplied by the manufacturer of the individual marking types (classes) for the specific timeframes per type and class and the material requirements for reflectance, durability, color, and adhesion as referenced herein. Warranties shall be those commercially supplied or those unique to the Commonwealth in the case of certain products, such as Type B, Class VI preformed




pavement marking tape as detailed herein. Manufacturers’ warranties shall be obtained by the Contractor and assigned to the Department in writing prior to final acceptance. Warranty periods shall begin on the date of receipt at the project as verified by delivery tickets signed by the COTR.

Type B, Class VI pavement marking tape shall be warrantied for six years against failure resulting from material defects regardless of method of manufacturer’s prescribed application or pavement type. The material shall be warranted to retain its Retroreflectivity, Day and Nighttime Color and Luminance (Y%) and durability including adherence to the pavement and shall be free of other obvious defects or failures. All Type B Class VI pavement marking tape that has failed to meet the warranty conditions shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Department. The warranty shall cover all pavement striping materials (regardless of method of installation), labor, equipment, mobilization\demobilization, tools, incidentals required to remove (eradicate) and replace the pavement striping including maintenance of traffic during eradication and reinstallation operations

190246.3 PAVEMENT MARKING MATERIALS Pavement marking and pavement marker materials shall conform to the specific requirements for the individual types as indicated hereinafter:

(a) Paint Pavement Marking Material (Type A)

Paint material shall be a fast-drying, waterborne, nonleaded, acrylic or modified acrylic resin paint suitable for use on both asphalt and hydraulic cement concrete pavement surfaces and shall be selected from the Materials Division’s Approved Products List No. 20.

1. Initial Approval Maintained retroreflectivity, color (including luminance), and

durability shall conform to the following requirements after the material has been installed on the test deck for 1 year:

a. Maintained Retroreflectivity: The photometric quantity to be measured is

the coefficient of retroreflected luminance (RL) in accordance with ASTM E1710 for 30-meter geometry. RL shall be expressed in millicandelas per square foot per foot-candle when measured in the skipline or centerline areas:

b. Day and Nighttime Color and Luminance (Y%): Measured according to ASTM D6628




c. Durability: Paint shall have a durability rating of at least 6 when determined in the wheel path area when tested in accordance with the NTPEP Work Plan.

d. Skid Resistance: The initial skid resistance shall be at least 45 BPN when

tested according to ASTM E303, if available.

e. IR Scan from NTPEP, if available.

2. Batch Testing

Paint batch testing shall be performed by the Department on samples obtained from the point of manufacture or from the field in accordance with the Materials Division’s Manual of Instructions. The test results shall be compared against NTPEP lab test results and the Specifications. Testing shall be performed to determine the following physical requirements and properties:

a. Solids, (% weight) according to ASTM D2369: Acceptable range from

NTPEP results (+/2 %).

b. Pigment (% weight) according to ASTM D3723: Acceptable range from NTPEP results (+/2 %).

c. Density (wt/gal.) according to ASTM D1475: Acceptable range from

NTPEP results (+/-0.3 lbs/gal).

d. Viscosity (KU) according to ASTM D562: Acceptable range from NTPEP results (+/-5KU).

e. Contrast Ratio according to ASTM D2805 (2°,D 65): Paint shall show a

dry hiding quality that will give a contrast ratio of at least 0.96 at (15 mil) wet film thickness.

f. Day Color, Luminance (Y%) (without Drop-on Beads): Color testing

results shall conform to the chromaticity coordinate limits that follow. Color determination for paint materials will be made without drop-on beads at least 24 hours after application in accordance with ASTM D6628.

g. Settling properties: Settling shall be no less than a rating of 8 when tested in accordance with the NTPEP Work Plan.




h. Freeze-thaw and heat stability: Paint shall show no coagulation or change in viscosity greater than +/5 KU when tested in accordance with the NTPEP Work Plan.

i. Water resistance: Paint shall show no blistering, peeling, wrinkling,

softening, or loss of adhesion when tested in accordance with the NTPEP Work Plan.

j. VOC: The VOC content shall be no greater than 150 grams/liter when

tested in accordance with EPA Method 24.

k. Flash point: Paint shall have a flash point of at least 201 degrees F when tested in accordance with ASTM D93, Pensky-Martens Closed Cup.

l. No-track time: Paint shall have a 60-second maximum vehicle no-track

time when measured in accordance with the NTPEP Work Plan.

m. IR Scan: Should match IR scan from NTPEP.

(b) Thermoplastic Pavement Marking Material (Type B, Class I)

Thermoplastic material shall be suitable for use on asphalt and hydraulic cement concrete pavement surfaces and shall be selected from the Materials Division’s Approved Products List No. 43. The binder shall be either alkyd or hydrocarbon based. If an alkyd thermoplastic is used, the binder shall consist of synthetic resins, at least one of which is solid at room temperature, and high-boiling plasticizers. At least one-half of the binder composition shall be a maleic-modified glycerol ester of resin and shall be at least 10 percent by weight of the entire material formulation. Thermoplastic marking materials shall be capable of application at pavement surface temperatures of 50 degrees Fahrenheit and above on all asphalt and hydraulic cement concrete pavement surfaces. Thermoplastic material shall be capable of successfully fusing to itself and previously applied thermoplastic pavement markings.

1. Initial Approval Maintained retroreflectivity, color (including luminance, Y%),

and durability shall conform to the following requirements after the material has been installed on the test deck for 1 year:

a. Maintained Retroreflectivity: The photometric quantity to be measured is

the coefficient of retroreflected luminance (RL) in accordance with ASTM E1710 for 30-meter geometry when measured in the skip line or centerline areas.




b. Day and Nighttime Color and Luminance (Y%): According to ASTM D6628

c. Durability: Thermoplastic shall have a durability rating of at least 8 as

determined in the wheel path area when tested in accordance with the NTPEP Work Plan.


tested per ASTM E303, if available.

2. Batch Testing:

Thermoplastic batch testing will be performed by the Department on samples obtained from the point of manufacture or from the field in accordance with the Materials Division’s Manual of Instructions. The tests results will be compared against the following specifications and requirements: a. Pigment and Glass Bead (% Weight) according to ASTM D4451 82.0%

Max

b. Glass Bead Content (% Weight) according to AASHTO T250 and ASTM D4797 25.0% Min

c. TiO2 (%) according to ASTM D1394 or equivalent method 8.0%

Min

d. Binder (%) according to AASHTO T250/ASTM D4451 18.0% Min

e. Calcium Carbonate and Inert Fillers 49.0 % Max

f. Day Color, Luminance (Y%) (Without Drop-on Beads): Color testing results shall conform to the chromaticity coordinate limits that follow. Color determination for thermoplastic materials will be made without drop-on beads after cooling in accordance with AASHTO T250 and ASTM D6628.




g. Nighttime Yellow Color (with Drop-on Beads): The initial nighttime color of yellow thermoplastic pavement marking material shall conform to the following CIE chromaticity coordinate requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM D6628 and VTM-111:

h. Water absorption: Materials shall not have more than 0.5 percent

retained water by weight when tested in accordance with ASTM D570, Procedure A.

i. Softening point: Materials shall have a softening point of at least 194

degrees F as determined in accordance with ASTM E28.

j. Specific gravity: The specific gravity of the thermoplastic compound at 77 degrees F shall be from 1.7 to 2.2.

k. Impact resistance: The impact resistance shall be at least 10 inch-pounds

at 77 degrees F after the material has been heated for 4 hours at 400 degrees F and cast into bars of 1-inch cross-sectional area, 3 inches long, and placed with 1 inch extending above the vise in a cantilever beam, Izod-type tester conforming to ASTM D256 using the 25 inch-pound scale.

l. No-Track Time: Material shall set to bear traffic in not more than 2

minutes when the road temperature is 50 degrees F or above.

m. Intermixed Glass beads: Glass beads shall conform to Section 190234.

n. Flashpoint: The material flashpoint shall be no less than 500 degrees F when tested in accordance with ASTM D92.

(c) Preformed Thermoplastic Pavement Marking Material (Type B, Class II):




Preformed thermoplastic material shall be suitable for use on asphalt and hydraulic cement concrete pavement surfaces, and shall be selected from the Materials Division’s Approved Products List No. 73. Preformed thermoplastic shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. Upon cooling to normal pavement temperatures, these materials shall produce an adherent, retroreflective pavement marking capable of resisting deformation by traffic. Preformed thermoplastic shall be supplied at a minimum of 30% (by weight) of intermixed glass beads. During application (when molten) all preformed thermoplastic shall be flooded with additional glass beads. Additional retroreflective optics shall also be added to the surface in quantities and types that match what was used for initial approval of these individual products. Preformed thermoplastic material shall be supplied at 125 mils thickness. Reversible arrows shall have a minimum of 30% by weight intermixed beads only. During application, surface beads for reversible arrows shall be applied to the thermoplastic material when it is molten. Preformed thermoplastic may be either of the following types:

• Type A where the manufacturer requires preheating of the roadway surface to a

specified temperature prior to installation of the preformed thermoplastic material.

• Type B where the manufacturer requires preheating of the roadway surface prior

to installation of the preformed thermoplastic material to only remove moisture when necessary.



a. Retroreflectivity: Photometric quantity to be measured is coefficient of

retroreflected luminance (RL) in accordance with ASTM E1710. RL shall be expressed in millicandelas per square foot per foot per foot-candle and shall be at least the following values when measured in the skip line area.




b. Day and Nighttime Color and Luminance (Y%): According to ASTM D6628.

c. Thickness: 120-130 Mils

d. Durability Rating: The marking shall have a durability rating of at least 8

as determined in the wheel path area after 1 year when tested in accordance with NTPEP Work Plan.

e. Skid Resistance: The surface of the installed marking shall provide an

initial average skid resistance value of 45 BPN when tested according to of ASTM E303, if available.

f. No Track Time: When installed with glass beads or other reflective

media, the markings shall reach a no-track condition in less than 3 minutes.

2. Batch Testing:

Preformed thermoplastic batch testing will be performed by the Department on samples obtained from the point of manufacture or from the field in accordance with the Materials Division’s Manual of Instructions. Testing results shall be compared against the following specifications and requirements:

a. Day and Nighttime Color and Luminance (Y%): Refer to initial

requirements

b. Thickness: Refer to initial requirements

c. Nighttime Yellow Color (with Drop-on Beads): The initial night time color of yellow preformed thermoplastic pavement marking material shall conform to the following CIE chromaticity coordinate requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM D6628 and VTM-111:

(d) Epoxy-Resin Pavement Marking Material (Type B, Class III)

Epoxy-resin is a two-component pavement marking material, suitable for use on both asphalt and hydraulic cement concrete pavement surfaces and shall be selected from the Materials Division’s Approved Products List No. 75. The ratio of resin to hardner shall be 2:1 respectively.




1. Initial Approval Maintained retroreflectivity, color (including luminance), and durability shall conform to the following requirements after the material has been installed on the test deck for 1 year:

a. Retroreflectivity: The photometric quantity to be measured is the

coefficient of retroreflected luminance (RL) in accordance with ASTM E1710 for 30-meter geometry when measured in the skipline or centerline areas.

b. Day and Nighttime Color and Luminance (Y%): According to ASTM

D6628 c. Durability: Epoxy shall have a durability rating of at least 8 as

determined in the wheel path area. d. Skid Resistance: The initial skid resistance shall be at least 45 BPN, if

available.

2. Batch Testing:

Epoxy batch testing will be performed by the Department on samples obtained from the point of manufacture or from the field in accordance with the Materials Division’s Manual of Instructions. Tests results shall be compared against the following specifications and requirements:

a. Pigment (% Weight) according to ASTM D2371 23.0

% Min.

b. Epoxy Content according to ASTM D2371 White, 82.0% Max; Yellow, 77.0% Max

c. Contrast Ratio (Hiding Power) according to ASTM D2805 (at 15 Mils

wet):

Readings will be determined in accordance with ASTM E1349 using CIE 1931 (2 degrees standard observer and CIE standard Illuminant D65). 96 Min.

d. TiO2 (%), White conforming to ASTM D476, Type IV according to

ASTM D1394 or equivalent 18.0 Min.

e. Total Amine, Hardener (ASTM D 2074 ERF) shall be within +/50 of the value obtained when tested by NTPEP.




f. Day Color, Luminance (Y%) (Without Drop-on Beads)

Color testing results shall conform to the International Commission on Illumination (CIE) chromaticity coordinate limits that follow. Color determination for epoxy materials will be made without drop-on beads at least 24 hours after application in accordance with ASTM D6628.

g. Nighttime Yellow Color (with Drop-on Beads): The initial nighttime color of yellow epoxy pavement marking material shall conform to the following CIE chromaticity coordinate requirements when tested in accordance with ASTM D6628 and VTM-111:

h. Hardness: Hardness, Shore D determined in accordance with ASTM D2240 shall be 75 to 100.

i. Tensile strength: Tensile strength, determined in accordance with ASTM D638, shall be at least 6,000 pounds per square inch after the material has cured for 72 hours at 73 ± 4 degrees F.

j. Compressive strength: Compressive strength, determined in accordance

with ASTM D695, shall be at least 12,000 pounds per square inch after the material has cured for 72 hours at 73 ± 4 degrees F.

k. Adhesion to concrete: Adhesion of markings shall achieve at minimum, a

rating of Substrate Failure B when tested in accordance with ASTM D7234 after the material has cured for 72 hours at 73 ± 4 degrees F. Concrete used for the test shall have a tensile strength of at least 300 pounds per square inch.

l. No-Pick-Up: Epoxy marking materials when mixed in proper ratio and

applied at a wet film thickness of 15 +/1 mils with surface, ambient, and material temperatures being 73.5 +/3.0 degrees Fahrenheit, shall reach a




no-pick-up time in less than 10 minutes when tested in accordance with ASTM D711.

m. Weight per epoxy equivalent: The weight per epoxy equivalent of Part A

of the epoxy pavement marking material shall be within ±50 of the target value provided by the manufacturer when tested in accordance with ASTM D1652.

n. Abrasion resistance: The wear index shall be no greater than 80 gm/cycle

when tested in accordance with ASTM D4060.

(e) Polyurea Pavement Marking Material (Type B, Class VII): Polyurea is a two-component pavement marking material suitable for use on both asphalt and hydraulic cement concrete pavement surfaces. Polyurea pavement marking material shall be selected from the Materials Division’s Approved Products List No. 74. The components shall be formulated such that the complete cure occurs when they are mixed at the time of application.




coefficient of retroreflected luminance (RL) in accordance with ASTM E1710 for 30-meter geometry. RL shall be measured in the skipline or centerline areas.

b. Color and Luminance (Y%): According to ASTM D6628

c. Durability: Polyurea shall have a durability rating of at least 8 when determined in the wheel path area in accordance with NTPEP guidelines.

d. Skid Resistance: The initial skid resistance shall be at least 45 BPN, if

available.

2. Batch Testing:

Polyurea batch testing will be performed by the Department on samples obtained from the point of manufacture or from the field in accordance with the Materials Division’s Manual of Instructions. Tests results shall be compared against the following specifications and requirements:

a. TiO2 (%) White, ASTM D476, (Types II, III, IV) according to




ASTM D1394 or equivalent White = 18.0 % Min. / Yellow = 10.0% Min.

b. Hardness: Hardness, Shore D as determined in accordance with ASTM

D2240, shall be 75 to 100.

c. Adhesion to concrete: Adhesion, determined in accordance with ACI 503, shall be at 100 percent concrete failure after the material has cured for 72 hours at 73 ± 4 degrees F. Concrete used for the test shall have a tensile strength of at least 300 pounds per square inch and shall be 90 degrees F when the material is applied.

d. No-Track Time: Material shall dry to a “no-track” condition in the time

limit stated accordancing to the manufacturer’s specification.

e. Abrasion resistance: The wear index shall be no greater than 80 when abrasion resistance is tested in accordance with ASTM D4060.

f. Hiding (Contrast Ratio): The marking shall show a dry hiding quality

that will yield a contrast ratio of at least 0.96 with the Morest Black and White Power Chart, Form 03B (or equivalent), when drawn down at a 15-mil wet film thickness. Readings will be determined in accordance with ASTM E1349 using CIE 1931, 2 degrees standard observer and CIE standard Illuminant D65.

(f) Permanent, Plastic-Backed, Preformed Tapes (Type B, Class IV and Type B, Class VI)

Permanent tape shall be a durable, retro-reflective pliant material consisting of a mixture of polymeric materials, pigments, and glass beads (reflective optics) evenly distributed throughout its cross-sectional area and embedded into the surface. Permanent tapes shall be selected from the Materials Division’s Approved Products List No. 17. Tape shall be applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and the limitations set herein or on the Approved Products List. Flat Tape (Type B, Class IV) – Flat tape shall be capable of being surface applied to asphalt cement or hydraulic cement concrete pavement following paving operations on new, dense, or open graded asphalt concrete and shall be ready for traffic immediately after application Patterned Preformed Tape(Type B, Class VI) – Pattered preformed tape shall be capable of being surface applied to asphalt cement or hydraulic cement concrete surfaces following paving operations or inlaid during paving operations on new asphalt concrete, and shall be ready for traffic immediately after application. Contrast Tape – When specified, Contrast tape shall be a minimum of 3 inches wider than the width specified in the pay item. This additional tape width shall be black and non-reflective with 1 1/2 inches minimum on both sides of the white or yellow product. The black area of the contrast tape shall meet initial requirements of durability, skid resistance, thickness, and adhesion as noted below. Batch testing (sampled per the




Manual of Instructions) shall meet the requirements of thickness, width, length, and skid resistance as noted below.

1. Initial Approval Maintained retroreflectivity, color (including luminance),

durability, and adhesion shall conform to the following requirements after the material has been installed on the test deck for 1 year:


coefficient of retroreflected luminance (RL) in accordance with ASTM E1710 for 30-meter geometry when measured in the skip line or centerline areas.

b. Day and Nighttime Color and Luminance (Y%): According to ASTM

D6628. c. Durability: Permanent tape shall have a durability rating of at least 8 as

determined in the wheel path area when tested in accordance with the NTPEP Work Plan.


tested according to ASTM E303, if available.

e. Thickness (without adhesive):

Class IV 60 120 mils. Class VI Thinnest portion, 20 Mils Minimum; Thickest portion, 65 Mils Minimum

f. Adhesion: No line shall be displaced, torn or missing per NTPEP

Pavement Marking Work Plan.

2. Batch Testing:

Permanent tape batch testing will be performed by the Department on samples obtained from the point of manufacture or from the field in accordance with the Materials Division’s Manual of Instructions. Test results shall be compared against the following specifications and requirements:

a. Maintained Retroreflectivity (Refer to initial requirements).

Retroreflectivity will be measured in both directions on the roll. The lowest value being recorded.

b. Color (including Luminance, Y%): Refer to initial requirements




c. Thickness: Refer to initial requirements.

d. Width: The width shall be no less than the nominal width and no greater

than 1/8” of the nominal width.

e. Length: The length shall be no less than the length stated on the manufacturer’s packaging.

f. Skid Resistance: Refer to initial requirements

(g) Temporary Pavement Marking Materials: Construction (temporary) pavement markings

shall consist of Type D removable tape; Type E removable black, non-reflective tape; and Type F temporary pavement marking material. Determination of conformance will include, but not be limited to, the evaluation of test data from AASHTO’s NTPEP or other VDOT Test Facilities.

1. Removable Tape (Type D, Class II):

Removable tape shall be a durable, retro-reflective pliant material consisting of a mixture of polymeric materials, pigments and glass beads (reflective optics) evenly distributed throughout its cross-sectional area and embedded into the surface. Temporary removable tape shall be suitable for use on both asphalt and hydraulic cement concrete pavement surfaces and shall be selected from the Materials Division’s Approved Products List No. 17.

a. Initial Approval Maintained retroreflectivity, color (including luminance), and

adhesive bond rating shall conform to the following requirements after the material has been installed on the test deck for 90 days:

1) Maintained Retroreflectivity: The photometric quantity to be measured is

the coefficient of retroreflected luminance (RL) in accordance with ASTM E1710 for 30-meter geometry when measured in the skipline or centerline areas.

2) Day and Nighttime Color and Luminance (Y%): According to ASTM D6628.

3) Adhesive Bond Rating: The average adhesive bond rating (from transverse and longitudinal lines) shall be 3 or higher according to the NTPEP Work Plan.




4) Skid Resistance: The initial skid resistance shall be at least 45 BPN when tested according to ASTM E303, if available.

5) Thickness: Per the manufacture’s recommendation.

6) Adhesion: No line shall be displaced, be torn or missing.

b. Batch Testing

Removable tape batch testing will be performed by the Department on samples obtained from the point of manufacture or from the field in accordance with the Materials Division’s Manual of Instructions. Test results will be compared against the following specifications and requirements:

1) Maintained Retroreflectivity: Refer to initial requirements 2) Color (including Luminance): Refer to initial requirements 3) Thickness: Refer to initial requirements 4) Width: The width shall be no less than the nominal width and no greater

than 1/8” of the nominal width. 5) Length: The length shall be no less than the length stated on the

manufacturer’s packaging. 6) Skid Resistance: Refer to initial requirements

2. Wet Reflective, Removable Tape (Type D, Class III):

Wet reflective, removable tape shall be a durable, retro-reflective pliant material consisting of a mixture of polymeric materials, pigments, and glass beads (reflective optics) evenly distributed throughout its cross-sectional area and embedded into the surface. This tape shall be suitable for use on both asphalt and hydraulic cement concrete surfaces and shall be selected from the Materials Division’s Approved Products List No. 17.

a. Initial Approval Maintained retroreflectivity (dry and wet), color (including

luminance), and adhesive bond rating shall conform to the following requirements after the material has been installed on the test deck for 90 days:

1) Maintained Dry Retroreflectivity: The dry photometric quantity to be

measured is the coefficient of retroreflected luminance (RL) in accordance with ASTM E1710 for 30-meter geometry when measured in the skip line or centerline areas.




2) Maintained Wet Retroreflectivity: The wet photometric quantity to be measured is the coefficient of retroreflected luminance (RL) in accordance with VTM-124 (Visual Evaluation or ASTM E2177, Recovery Method) when measured in the skip line or centerline areas.


4) Adhesive Bond Rating: The average adhesive bond rating (from

transverse and longitudinal lines) shall be 3 or higher according the NTPEP Work Plan.


6) Thickness: Per the manufacturer’s recommendation.

7) Adhesion: No line shall be displaced, torn or missing.

b. Batch Testing:

Wet reflective, removable tape batch testing will be performed by the Department on samples obtained from the point of manufacture or from the field in accordance with the Materials Division’s Manual of Instructions. Test results shall be compared against the following specifications and requirements:

1) Retroreflectivity: Refer to initial requirements 2) Day and Night Color and Luminance: Refer to initial requirements 3) Thickness: Refer to initial requirements




4) Width: The width shall be no less than the nominal width and no greater than 1/8” of the nominal width.

5) Length: The length shall be no less than the length stated on the

manufacturer’s packaging. 6) Skid Resistance: Refer to initial requirements.

3. Removable Black, Non-Reflective Tape (Type E):

Removable black, non-reflective tape shall be a durable, pliant material consisting of a mixture of polymeric materials, pigments and a friction material evenly distributed throughout its cross-sectional area and embedded into the surface. Removable black, non-reflective tape shall be suitable for use on asphalt concrete pavement surfaces, and shall be selected from the Materials Division’s Approved Products List No. 17.

a. Initial Approval Maintained adhesive bond rating shall conform to the following

requirements after the material has been installed on the test deck for 90 days:

1) Adhesive Bond Rating: The average adhesive bond rating (from transverse and longitudinal lines) shall be 3 or higher according to the NTPEP Work Plan.

2) Skid Resistance: The initial skid resistance shall be at least 45 BPN when

tested according to ASTM E303, if available. 3) Thickness: Per the manufacturer’s recommendation. 4) Adhesion: No line shall be displaced, be torn or missing.

b. Batch Testing

Black removable, non-reflective tape batch testing will be performed by the Department on samples obtained from the point of manufacture or from the field in accordance with the Materials Division’s Manual of Instructions. Test results shall be compared against the following specifications:

1) Skid Resistance: Refer to initial requirements 2) Thickness: Refer to initial requirements 3) Width: The width shall be no less than the nominal width and no greater

than 1/8” of the nominal width. 4) Length: The length shall be no less than the length stated on the

manufacturer’s packaging.

4. Temporary Pavement Marking Material (Type F):




Temporary pavement marking material (waterborne paint) shall be suitable for use on both asphalt and hydraulic cement concrete pavement surfaces, and shall be selected from the Materials Division’s Approved Products List No. 48.

a. Initial Approval Maintained retroreflectivity, color (including luminance), and

durability shall conform to the following requirements after the material has been installed on the test deck for 90 days:

1) Maintained Retroreflectivity: The photometric quantity to be measured is

the coefficient of retroreflected luminance (RL) in accordance with ASTM E1710 for 30-meter geometry. RL shall be expressed in millicandelas per square foot per foot-candle when measured in the wheel path areas:


3) Durability: Material shall have a durability rating of at least 8 when determined in the wheel path area.


5) Thickness: Not to exceed 15 mils.

b. Batch Testing

Temporary pavement marking paint materials batch testing will be performed by the Department on samples obtained from the point of manufacture or from the field in accordance with the Materials Division’s Manual of Instructions. The batch tests and results are the same batch test parameters described in the section above for waterborne paint.








REFLECTIVE SHEETING 190247 - 1

SECTION 190247 – REFLECTIVE SHEETING 190247.01 DESCRIPTION This specification covers reflective sheeting used on traffic control devices to provide a retroreflective surface or message. The color of the reflective sheeting shall be as specified in the Contract. Reflective sheeting shall be certified in accordance with Section 014000. 190247.2 DETAIL REQUIREMENTS Reflective sheeting shall be selected from the Materials Division’s Approved Products List No. 46. Reflective sheeting products are included on the Approved Products List only after the Department determines conformance to the specification requirements listed herein. Determination of conformance will include, but not be limited to, the evaluation of test data from AASHTO’s National Transportation Product Evaluation Program (NTPEP), VDOT’s own testing facility, or other Department-approved facilities, except when outdoor testing is not a requirement as noted herein. NTPEP testing includes analysis of new and outdoor weathered sign sheeting. When tested after outdoor weathering, sign sheeting color (Chromaticity and Luminance Factor, Y%) and retroreflectivity must have been maintained within the Specifications limits for the duration of the test period noted. The sheeting and any applied coatings such as inks, overlay films, and other coatings shall be weather resistant according to ASTM D4956 after being tested by AASHTO, NTPEP, VDOT, or other Department approved facilities, except where outdoor testing is not required as noted herein. Reflective sheeting shall conform to the following for the applications listed:

(a) Type IX sheeting used for the following applications shall conform to the retroreflectivity and color requirements of ASTM D4956:

• Permanent signs, except those addressed in Sections 190247.02(b) • Construction signs (used during temporary construction, maintenance,

permit, utility, and incident management activities) • Object markers (including bridge end panel markers) • Guardrail end terminals • Permanent impact attenuators (except permanent sand barrels) • Delineators Standard ED-2, Standard ED-3, barrier, guardrail, and

permanent flexible post • Vertical panels (Group 2 channelizing devices) and directional indicator

barricades • Traffic gate arms • Automatic Flagger Assistance Device (AFAD) gate arms




• The “STOP” side of sign paddles (hand signaling devices) • The rear panel of truckand trailer-mounted attenuators • Permanent barricades

1. Fluorescent Yellow-Green Type IX reflective sheeting shall be used on

regulatory and warning signs, including supplemental plaques, related to school zones, pedestrians, and/or bicyclists unless otherwise specified on the plans.

2. Fluorescent Yellow Type IX reflective sheeting shall be used for the following

applications unless otherwise specified on the plans:

• Rear panel of truckand trailer-mounted attenuators • Yellow sheeting on object markers • All W1-series signs (warning signs for changes in horizontal alignment),

including all supplemental plaques beneath W1-series signs • Delineators (Standard ED-2, ED-3, Barrier, Guardrail, or permanent

flexible post) • Permanent impact attenuators (except sand barrels)

Retroreflectivity and Color requirements shall be maintained for the values listed in ASTM D4956 after 3 years on the outdoor weathering test rack.

(b) Type III Reflective sheeting used on permanent recreational and cultural interest area

guidance signs, on permanent educational pedestrian signal signs (R10-3 series signs), and on signs to be erected on bikeways physically separated from adjacent roads shall conform to the retroreflectivity and color requirements of ASTM D4956.

Retroreflectivity and Color requirements shall be maintained after 3 years on the outdoor

weathering test rack.

(c) Reflective sheeting used to delineate the back frame of trailer mounted traffic control devices including but not limited to Portable Changeable Message Signs (PCMSs), Automatic Flagger Assistance Devices (AFADs), arrow boards, Highway Advisory Radios, Speed Trailers, Camera Trailers, portable lights, etc. and traffic control devices equipped with a gate arm shall conform to the retroreflectivity requirements of 49 CFR 571.108 for a Grade DOT-C2 truck conspicuity marking.

Color shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D4956. Outdoor weathering testing is not required for sheeting used in these applications.




(d) White and Fluorescent Orange Type IX reflective sheeting used on construction signs (used for temporary construction, maintenance, permit, utility and incident management activities), on vertical panels, directional indicator barricades, temporary Type 3 Barricades, barrier panels temporarily installed on concrete traffic barrier service, on the rear panel of truck and trailer-mounted attenuators, on temporary impact attenuators (except temporary sand barrels), and the “SLOW” side of sign paddles (hand signaling device) shall conform to the retroreflectivity and color requirements of ASTM D4956.

The retroreflectivity of the sheeting after 1 year on the outdoor weathering test deck shall be at least 50 percent of the retroreflectivity values specified for new (non-weathered) sheeting. Color requirements shall be maintained after 1 year on the outdoor weathering test rack.

(e) Reflective sheeting used on tubular markers, drums, and temporary sand barrels shall

conform to the Supplementary Requirements (S2) of ASTM D4956 and the following:

Color shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D4956. The retroreflectivity of the sheeting after 1 year on the outdoor weathering test deck shall be at least 50 percent of the retroreflectivity values specified for new (non-weathered) sheeting. Color requirements shall be maintained after 1 year on the outdoor weathering test rack.

(f) Type III (High Intensity sheeting) White and Yellow reflective sheeting used on

permanent sand barrels and cones shall conform to ASTM D4956 including Supplementary Requirement S2. Note: Cones shall also conform to the following supplementary table:




Color shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D4956. The retroreflectivity of the sheeting used on permanent barrels after 1 year on the outdoor weathering test deck shall be at least 50 percent of the retroreflectivity values specified for new (non-weathered) sheeting. Color requirements for reflective sheeting used on permanent barrels shall be maintained after 1 year on the outdoor weathering test rack. Outdoor weathering testing is not required for reflective sheeting used on cones.

(g) Reflective sheeting used on Retroreflective Rollup Signs (used for temporary

construction, maintenance, permit, utility and incident management activities) shall conform to the following:

Color shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D4956. Outdoor weathering testing is not required for reflective sheeting used on rollup signs.

(h) Reflective sheeting used on Retroreflective Red Flag (hand signaling devices) and

Automatic Flagger Assistance Devices (AFADs) shall conform to the following:




190247.3 Reflective Sheeting Warranty Requirements Permanent Signs: 10-year warranty with 7 years being 100 percent full replacement covering all material and labor costs associated with fabrication and installation of the sign or device and the final 3 years being 100 percent sheeting replacement cost. Construction, Work Zone, Rollup, Reboundable Signs: 3-year full replacement covering all material and labor costs associated with fabrication of the sign or device. The minimum values of retroreflectivity maintained during the warranty period shall be the same as those required for the maintained coefficient of retroreflection values as indicated in ASTM D4956 for Outdoor Weathering Photometric Requirements for All Climates. Loss of colorfastness is considered to have occurred if the color of the sheeting is not within the color specification limits in ASTM D4956 during the full duration of the warranty period. Warranty periods shall begin on the date of delivery to the project and shall be documented as follows: Each permanent traffic control device (except permanent barrier delineators, guardrail delineators, or flexible post delineators) using reflective sheeting shall be marked on the reverse side in a location not to be obscured by sign supports or backing hardware, with labeling showing 1.) Month and year the sign or reflective sheeting application was fabricated, marked via punch-out numerals or as indicated below, 2.) Sheeting manufacturer’s name or logo and product designation or number, and 3.) Sign or device manufacturer’s name or logo. Labels shall be made of a durable, self-adhesive, permanent weather resistant material and shall be a minimum 4” by 4” in size. Labels may be made from permanent sign material provided the finished label meets all other aspects required for warranty documentation. Where the information required for the label is not furnished by punched-out numerals, etching, engraving, etc., it shall be supplied by other permanent means, such as sign ink, capable of resisting weathering so as to be legible for the full duration of the warranty period. Prior to applying the label, the area shall be thoroughly cleaned to ensure proper adhesion and retention.








CLEARING AND GRUBBING 190301 - 1

SECTION 190301 – CLEARING AND GRUBBING 190301.01 DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of clearing, grubbing, and activities to remove and dispose of vegetation, debris, fences and other objects unsuitable for construction located within the construction limits except for vegetation and objects that are designated to be preserved, protected, or removed in accordance with the Contract or other provisions of these Specifications. 190301.02 PROCEDURES If approved by the COTR, the Contractor may clear and grub to accommodate construction equipment within the right of way up to 5 feet beyond the construction limits at his own expense. The Contractor shall install erosion and siltation control devices prior to beginning clearing or grubbing operations. Such devices shall be functional before upland land-disturbing activities take place. The surface area of earthen material exposed by grubbing, stripping topsoil, or excavation shall be limited to that necessary to perform the next operation within a given area. The Contractor shall confine the grubbing of root mat and stumps to that area of land on which the Contractor shall perform excavation or other land disturbance activities within 14 days following grubbing operations. The Contractor shall remove stumps, roots, other perishable material, and nonperishable objects that will be less than 5 feet below the top of earthwork within the area directly beneath the roadway pavement and shoulders. Material and objects that will be 5 feet or more below the top of earthwork within the area directly beneath the roadway pavement and shoulders and all such material and objects beneath slopes of embankments shall be left in place unless removal is necessary for installation of a structure. The top of stumps left in place shall not be more than 6 inches above the surface of existing ground or low water level. Branches of trees that overhang the roadway, reduce sight distance, or are less than 20 feet above the elevation of the finished grade shall be trimmed using approved tree surgery practices in accordance with Section 190601.03(b). Vegetation, structures, or other items located outside the construction limits shall not be damaged. Trees and shrubs in ungraded areas shall not be cut or trimmed without the approval of the COTR. The Contractor shall dispose of combustible cleared and grubbed material in accordance with the following:

(a) Trees, limbs, and other timber having a diameter of 3 inches and greater shall be disposed of as saw logs, pulpwood, firewood, or other usable material; however, treated timber shall not be disposed of as firewood. The Contractor shall leave no more than 2 feet of trunk attached to grubbed stumps.

When specified in the Contract or directed by the COTR that trees or other timber is to be reserved for the property owner, such material shall be cut in the lengths specified and piled where designated, either within the limits of the right of way, or not more than 100 feet from the right-of-way line. When not reserved for the property owner, such material shall become the property of the Contractor.



CLEARING AND GRUBBING 190301 - 2

(b) Material less than 3 inches in diameter shall be used to form brush silt barriers when

located within 500 feet of the source of such material or used where directed by the COTR. The Contractor shall place material approximately 5 feet beyond the toe of fill in a strip approximately 10 feet wide to form a continuous barrier on the downhill side of fills. Where selective clearing has been done, material shall be piled, for stability, against trees in the proper location. On the uphill side of fills, brush shall be stacked against fills at approximately 100-foot intervals in piles approximately 5 feet high and 10 feet wide. Any such material not needed to form silt barriers shall be processed into wood chips having a thickness of not more than 3/8 inch and an area of not more than 6 square inches. Wood chips may be stockpiled out of sight of any public highway for use on the project as mulch in accordance with Section 190605.

(c) Stumps and material less than 3 inches in diameter that are not needed to form silt

barriers and that are not processed into wood chips shall be handled in accordance with Section 017300.

190301.3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Clearing and grubbing will be measured and paid for in accordance with one of the following methods, as specified in the Contract:

(a) Lump sum basis: The COTR will not make any measurement of the area to be cleared

and grubbed, but the price bid shall be for all clearing and grubbing in the Contract. (b) Acre basis: The work to be paid for will be the number of acres, computed to the nearest

1/10 of an acre, actually cleared and grubbed. Areas within the limits of any existing roadway or local material pit will not be measured for payment.

(c) Unit basis: The COTR will determine the work to be paid for according to the actual

count of trees, stumps, structures, or other obstructions removed as designated in the Contract.

These prices shall include properly and legally disposing of cleared and grubbed material. When clearing and grubbing is not a pay item, the cost thereof shall be included in the price for other appropriate pay items. The COTR will not authorize payment for clearing and grubbing borrow pits or other local material pits. Payment will be made under: Item No. Pay Item Pay Unit 190301-1 Clearing and Grubbing Lump Sum



EARTHWORK 190303 - 1

SECTION 190303 – EARTHWORK 190303.01 DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of constructing roadway earthwork in accordance with these specifications and in conformity with the specified tolerances for the lines, grades, typical sections, and cross sections shown on the plans or as established by the COTR. Earthwork shall include regular, borrow, undercut, and minor structure excavations; constructing embankments; disposing of surplus and unsuitable material; shaping; compaction; sloping; dressing; and installing and maintaining temporary erosion and siltation control work while performing these operations. 190303.02 MATERIALS

(a) Borrow excavation shall consist of approved material required for the construction of the roadway and shall be obtained from approved sources outside the project limits. Borrow excavation shall conform to AASHTO M57 and the requirements herein.

(b) Materials for temporary silt fences, geotextile fabric silt barriers, and filter barriers shall

conform to Sections 190242.02(c) and 190245.03(a). (c) Geotextile materials used for embankment stabilization shall conform to Section

190245.03(e). (d) Mulches for seeding and erosion control shall conform to Section 190244.02(g). (e) Seed shall conform to Section 190244.02(c) and 190603.

190303.3 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL AND STORMWATER POLLUTION

PREVENTION The Contractor shall control erosion, siltation, and stormwater pollution through the use of the temporary devices and methods specified herein or as is otherwise necessary. Devices and methods specified shall conform to the latest version of Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook or MWAA’s Annual Standards and Specifications. The COTR reserves the right to require other temporary measures not specifically described herein to correct an erosion, siltation or pollution condition. Erosion, siltation control, and pollution prevention devices and measures shall be maintained in a functional condition at all times. Temporary and permanent erosion and siltation control and pollution prevention measures shall be inspected in accordance with Sections 013543 and 312514. The Contractor shall make a daily review of the location of all erosion, siltation control and pollution prevention measures to ensure that they are properly located for effectiveness. Where deficiencies exist, corrections shall be made immediately as approved or directed by the COTR. When erosion and siltation control devices function by using wet storage, sediments shall be removed when the wet storage volume has been reduced by 50 percent. Sediments shall be removed from dewatering basins when the excavated volume has been reduced by 50 percent. Sediments shall be removed from all other erosion and siltation control devices when capacity, height, or depth has been reduced by 50 percent. Removed sediment shall be properly disposed of in accordance with Section



312514. Sediment deposits remaining in place after the device is no longer required shall be removed or dressed to conform to the existing grade, then prepared and seeded in accordance with Section 190603. Geotextile fabric that has decomposed or has become ineffective and is still needed shall be replaced. Temporary erosion and sediment control devices except brush silt barriers shall be removed within 30 days after final site stabilization or after the temporary devices are no longer needed as determined by the COTR.

(a) Earth Berms and Slope Drains: The top of earthwork shall be shaped to permit runoff of rainwater. Temporary earth berms shall be constructed and compacted along the top edges of embankments to intercept runoff water. Temporary Berms and temporary dikes are to be stabilized immediately following installation. Temporary slope drains shall be provided to intercept runoff and adequately secured to prevent movement. Slope drains may be flexible or rigid but shall be capable of being readily shortened or extended. A portable flume shall be provided at the entrance to temporary slope drains.

(b) Soil Stabilization: Soil stabilization shall be initiated on any portion of the project where

clearing, grading, excavation or other land disturbing activities have permanently ceased or where land disturbing activities have been temporarily suspended for an anticipated duration of greater than 14 days, or upon completion of grading operations for a specific area. Soil stabilization shall begin as soon as practicable, but not later than the next business day (Monday through Friday excluding State holidays) following the day when land disturbing activities temporarily or permanently ceased. Initiation of stabilization activities include, but is not limited to 1) prepping the soil for vegetative or non-vegetative stabilization, 2) applying mulches or other non-vegetative products to exposed soil, 3) seeding or planting the exposed area 4) starting any of the above activities on a portion of the area to be stabilized but not on the entire area or 5) finalizing arrangements to have the stabilization product fully installed within the time frame for completing stabilization. Temporary or permanent soil stabilization shall be completed within 7 days after initiation. Areas excluded from this requirement include areas within 100 feet of the limits of ordinary high water or a delineated wetland, which shall be continuously prosecuted until completed and stabilized immediately upon completion of the work in each impacted area. Soil stabilization includes: temporary and permanent seeding, riprap, aggregate, sod, mulching, and soil stabilization blankets and matting in conjunction with seeding. The applicable type of soil stabilization shall depend upon the location of areas requiring stabilization, time of year (season), weather conditions, and stage of construction operations.

Cut and fill slopes shall be shaped and topsoiled where specified. Seed and mulch shall be applied in accordance with Section 190603 as the work progresses in the following sequence:

1. Slopes whose vertical height is 20 feet or greater shall be seeded in three equal

increments of height. Slopes whose vertical height is more than 75 feet shall be seeded in 25-foot increments.

2. Slopes whose vertical height is less than 20 but more than 5 feet shall be seeded

in two equal increments. 3. Slopes whose vertical height is 5 feet or less may be seeded in one operation.



Areas that cannot be seeded because of seasonal or adverse weather conditions shall be mulched to provide some protection against erosion to the soil surface. Mulch shall be applied in accordance with Section 190603.03(e) and paid for in accordance with Section 190603.04. Organic mulch shall be used and the area then seeded as soon as weather or seasonal conditions permit in accordance with Section 190603.03. Organic mulches include: straw or hay, hydraulic erosion control products, and rolled erosion controlled products conforming to Section 190244.02(g) and (k).

(c) Check Dams: Not used.

(d) Baled Straw Silt Barriers: Not used. (e) Temporary Silt Fences, Geotextile Fabric Silt Barriers, and Filter Barriers:

1. Temporary silt fences: Silt fences will be specified by type and shall be erected at

locations shown on the plans or as determined by the COTR. Posts shall be driven no less than 24 inches into the ground uniformly installed with an inclination toward the potential silt load area of at least 2 degrees but not more than 20 degrees. Geotextile fabric used for silt fences shall be provided and erected at a height of 24 inches above original ground. The bottom of the fabric shall be entrenched in the ground 12 inches (6 inches vertically and 6 inches horizontally) in a minimum 6-inch by 6-inch trench. Silt fence may also be entrenched using a slicing method with a minimum of 8 inches sliced into the ground. A continuous roll of fabric cut to the length of the silt fence is preferred to avoid the use of joints. When joints are unavoidable, fabric shall be spliced together only at a support post, with a minimum 6-inch overlap, and securely sealed by double folding ends together. Attaching fabric to existing trees will not be permitted.

a. Type A silt fence usage is limited to a fill height of 20 feet or less. Posts

shall not be spaced more than 6 feet apart and shall have a finished height no less than 6 inches above the fabric. Fabric shall be firmly secured to the post. The top shall be installed with a 1-inch tuck or reinforced top end section.

b. Type B silt fence is required for fill heights greater than 20 feet. Posts

shall not be spaced more than 10 feet apart and shall have a finished height no less than 6 inches above the wire fence. In addition to geotextile fabric, wire fence used for silt fences shall be provided and erected at a height of 30 inches above original ground. Wire fence shall be fastened securely to the post with wire ties and embedded no less than 2 inches in the ground. Fabric shall be firmly secured to the post and wire fence. Attachments to the wire fence shall be made with ties spaced every 24 inches horizontally at both the top and vertical midpoint of the fabric.

Two rows of Type A silt fence erected parallel, three to five feet apart, may be used as an alternative to temporary Type B silt fence unless prohibited elsewhere in the Contract.



2. Geotextile fabric silt barriers: Existing fences or brush barriers used along the downhill side of the toe of fills shall have geotextile fabric attached at specified locations as shown on the plans. The bottom of the fabric shall be entrenched in the ground in a minimum 6-inch by 6-inch trench and the top shall be installed with a 1-inch tuck or reinforced top end section. Temporary fabric silt barriers may also be entrenched using a slicing method with a minimum of 8 inches sliced into the ground.

Brush barriers shall be installed prior to any major earth-disturbing activity and trimmed sufficiently to prevent tearing or puncturing fabric. Fabric shall be fastened securely to the brush barrier or existing fence. A 6-inch overlap of fabric for vertical and horizontal splicing shall be maintained and tightly sealed.

3. Temporary filter barriers: Barriers shall consist of geotextile fabric and shall be

securely fastened to wood or metal supports that are spaced at not more than 3-foot intervals and driven at least 12 inches into the ground. At least three supports shall be used. The bottom of the fabric shall be entrenched in the existing ground in a minimum 4-inch by 4-inch trench.

Temporary filter barriers may also be entrenched using a slicing method with a minimum of 6 inches sliced into the ground. The top of the fabric shall be installed with a 1-inch tuck or reinforced top end section. The height of the finished temporary filter barrier shall be a nominal 15 inches. Temporary filter barriers shall be installed at temporary locations where construction changes the earth contour and drainage runoff as directed or approved by the COTR. After removal and disposal of the temporary silt fence, geotextile fabric silt barrier, and temporary filter barrier, the area shall be dressed and stabilized with a permanent vegetative cover or other approved permanent stabilization practice approved by the COTR.

(f) Sediment Traps and Sediment Basins: Once a sediment trap or basin is constructed, the

dam and all outfall areas shall be immediately stabilized. (g) Erosion Control Mulch: This work shall consist of furnishing and applying mulch used as

slope protection (hydraulic mulch used for seeding or used as a temporary erosion control treatment) on slopes exposed to the elements but not at final grade during the period from December 1 to March 1 for periods of up to 30 days prior to final grading or to areas to receive stabilization or paved surfaces within 6 months in accordance with this provision and as directed by the COTR. Hydraulic mulch used for slope protection during such periods of seasonal or adverse weather shall be applied without seed.

Mulch shall be applied to exposed slopes requiring mulch or to areas to be stabilized or paved within 48 hours after performance of grading operations in accordance with Section 190603.03(f).

(h) Temporary Diversion Dike: This work shall consist of constructing temporary diversion

dikes at the locations designated on the plans and in accordance with the plan details and



the Specifications, stabilizing dikes with seed and mulch, maintaining, removing when no longer required, and restoration of the area.

Temporary diversion dikes shall be installed as a first step in land-disturbing activities and shall be functional prior to upslope land disturbance. The dike shall be constructed to prevent failure in accordance with Section 190303.04. Seeding and mulch shall be applied to the dike in accordance with Section 190603 immediately following its construction. The dikes should be located to minimize damages by construction operations and traffic. The Contractor shall inspect the temporary diversion dikes after every storm and make repairs to the dike, flow channel, outlet, or sediment trapping facility, as necessary. Once every two weeks, whether a storm event has occurred or not, the dikes shall be inspected and repairs made if needed. Damages to the dikes caused by construction traffic or other activity must be repaired before the end of the working day when the damage occurred.

(i) Turbidity Curtain: Not used.

(j) Maintenance of Stream Flow and Dewatering for Stream Restoration: This work shall

consist of maintaining the continuous flow of the existing and/or proposed Unnamed Tributary to Scott Run through and around the work area during all construction operations and the dewatering of all other work areas to control soil erosion and sedimentation so that work may be completed in the dry. All practices utilized shall conform to The Virginia Stream Restoration & Stabilization Best Management Practices Guide, 2004. The Contractor must plan the Maintenance of Stream Flow for Stream Restoration practices in such a manner to account for increases in stream flow due to storm events which may occur during construction. No separate payment will be made for Maintenance of Stream flow for Stream Restoration measures which are damaged due to increases in stream flow. In certain instances, weather events such as excessive rain and/or sudden increases in stream flow may cause the project site to become unsafe and the Contractor may be required to suspend work until water levels subside to a reasonable level. The Contractor may utilize any or all of these diversion practices described below to divert stream flow, dewater portions of the project site and cross the existing stream channel. The Contactor shall furnish a written plan for meeting the requirements of the stream flow diversion set forth in the Contract Documents. The Maintenance of Stream flow and Dewatering plan shall include information on the type of diversion or stream crossing practice to be utilized from station to station according to the baseline of the proposed stream channel, the type and size of all pipes, pumps, hoses, dikes, diversions, outlet and slope protection and any other equipment or materials relevant to the operation.

1. Pump-Around Diversion. Specifications and procedures shall conform to

PRACTICE 5.1: Pump-Around Diversion as described in the Virginia Stream Restoration & Stabilization Best Management Practices Guide, 2004.

2. Diversion Pipes. Specifications and procedures shall conform to Practice

5.3:Diversion Pipes as described in the Virginia Stream Restoration & Stabilization Best Management Practices Guide, 2004.

(k) Materials: All materials used shall conform to MWAA’s Annual Standards and

Specifications (AS&S) or The Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook. All



materials utilized for the Maintenance of Stream Flow and Dewatering for Stream Restoration shall meet or exceed the specifications in the Virginia Stream Restoration & Stabilization Best Management Practices Guide, 2004. In addition, materials listed below shall also conform to the following:

1. Pumps: Pumps shall be sized and furnished by the Contractor to adequately divert stream flow around and dewater the active work zone. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to determine the required pumping capacity to divert the stream flow and dewater the active work zone. The Contractor shall be responsible to select reliable equipment such as the proper size pump, hoses, couplings, intake screens or filters, etc. which are sufficient to divert the Stream flow. Back-up pumps and accessories with similar capacity should be on-site and readily available in the case of equipment failure.

2. Sandbags: Sandbags shall consist of materials which are resistant to

ultraviolet radiation, tearing and puncture, and woven tightly enough to prevent leakage of fill material (i.e., sand, fine gravel, etc.).

3. Impervious Sheeting: Impervious Sheeting of MIRIFI 1212 or equivalent

shall consist of polyethylene plastic, which is impervious and resistant to puncture and tearing to effectively isolate the active work area.

(l) Construction: Construction guidelines for the Maintenance of Stream Flow and

Dewatering for Stream Restoration shall conform to the Construction Recommendations in the Virginia Stream Restoration & Stabilization Best Management Practices Guide, 2004. In addition, the construction guidelines shall also conform to the following:

1. Pumped Water Bypass Systems: The practice shall be continuous during

construction activities. Unless otherwise directed by the Erosion and Sediment Control Inspector or the COTR, the diverted stream flow shall be placed back into the same channel from which the upstream diversion dike was constructed.

2. The pumped water bypass system shall be set-up and removed on daily

basis and will not be permitted to run overnight. The newly constructed channel shall be tied back into the existing channel at the end of each workday. The Contractor shall ensure that transitions areas between the newly constructed stream channel and existing stream are properly stabilized with riprap, erosion control matting or native streambed gravel.

3. Sediment Filter Bag: The Filter Bag is full when it no longer can

efficiently filter sediment or pass water at a reasonable rate. Flow rates will vary depending on the size of the filter bag, the type and amount of sediment discharged into the filter bag, the type of ground, rock or other substance under the bag. Use of excessive flow rates or overfilling filter bag with sediment will cause ruptures of the bags or failure of the hose attachment straps. Dispose Filter Bag as directed by the Designated Specialist or Erosion and Sediment Control Officer. If allowed, the filter



bag may be cut open and the contents seeded after removing visible fabric. If the filter bag is strong enough to be lifted with added straps if it must be hauled away (extra option). Off-site disposal may be facilitated by placing the filter bag in the back of a dump truck or flatbed prior to use and allowing the water to drain from the bag in place, thereby dismissing the need to lift the filter bag.

190303.04 PROCEDURES Loose rock 3 inches or larger shall be removed from the surface of cut slopes. When slides occur, the Contractor shall remove and dispose of material as directed by the COTR. Where required, surface ditches shall be placed at the top of cut slopes or at the foot of fill slopes and at such other points not necessarily confined to the right of way or shown on the plans and shall be of such dimensions and grades as directed by the COTR. Prior to the beginning of grading operations in an area, necessary clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 190301.02.

(a) Regular excavation shall consist of removing and disposing of material located within the project limits, including widening cuts and shaping slopes necessary for preparing the roadbed; removing root mat; stripping topsoil; cutting ditches, channels, waterways, and entrances; and performing other work incidental thereto. The COTR may require materials in existing pavement structures to be salvaged for use in traffic maintenance. Undrained areas shall not be left in the surface of the roadway. Grading operations shall be conducted so that material outside construction limits will not be disturbed. Where rock or boulders are encountered, the Contractor shall excavate and backfill in accordance with the plans and the Contract. When the presplitting method of excavation is specified for rock cuts, work shall be performed in a manner to produce a uniform plane of rupture in the rock and so that the resulting backslope face will be unaffected by subsequent blasting and excavation operations within the section. Rock shall be presplit along rock slopes at locations, lines, and inclinations shown on the plans or as determined by field conditions. A test section shall be provided to establish the spacing of drill holes and the proper blasting charge to be used in the presplitting operation. Drill holes shall be spaced not more than 3 feet apart and shall extend to the plan grade or in lifts of not more than 25 feet, whichever is less. If drilled in benches, an offset may accommodate the head of the drill, but no offset shall be more than 12 inches. Presplitting shall extend at least 20 feet ahead of the limits of fragmentation blasting within the section. Where the project has been designed and slopes have been staked on the assumption that solid rock will be encountered, and the Contractor fails to encounter solid rock at the depth indicated, he shall cease excavation in the area and immediately notify the COTR. If it is necessary to redesign and re-stake slopes, any additional excavation necessary will be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic yard. Topsoil stockpiled for later use in the work shall be stored within the right of way unless the working area is such that the presence of the material would interfere with orderly prosecution of the work. Stockpile areas outside the right of way shall be located by the



Contractor at his expense. Topsoil used in the work shall be removed first from stockpiles located on private property. Surplus topsoil remaining on private property after completion of topsoil operations shall be moved onto the right of way and stockpiled, shaped, and seeded as directed by the COTR. Stripping topsoil shall be confined to the area over which grading is to be actively prosecuted within 14 calendar days following the stripping operation. Grading operations shall be confined to the minimum area necessary to accommodate the Contractor’s equipment and work force engaged in the earth moving work.

(b) Borrow Excavation: (not used).

(c) Undercut Excavation: (not used). (d) Minor Structure Excavation: (not used). (e) Removing Unsuitable Material: (not used).

(f) Backfill for Replacing Undercut Excavation: (not used).

(g) Backfilling Openings Made for Structures: (not used).

(h) Embankments: Work shall consist of constructing roadway embankments; placing and

compacting approved material within roadway areas where unsuitable material has been removed; and placing and compacting approved material in holes, pits, utility trenches, basements, and other depressions within the roadway area.

Embankment shall be constructed with approved material and placed so as to be uniformly compacted throughout. Embankment shall be placed adjacent to structures in the same manner as for backfill as described in (g) herein. Embankment shall not contain muck, frozen material, roots, sod, or other deleterious material. Embankment shall not be placed on frozen ground or areas covered with ice or snow.

Unsuitable material used in widening embankments and flattening embankment slopes shall be placed in uniform layers not more than 18 inches in thickness before compaction. Each layer of material placed shall be compacted to the extent necessary to produce stable and reasonably even slopes. Wherever sufficient right of way exists, surplus materials shall be used to widen embankments and flatten slopes as directed by the COTR. When geotextile drainage fabric is required under rock fills, preparation shall be as specified in Section 190245.

The Contractor shall schedule excavation and embankment work in a manner that will minimize the quantity of unsuitable material for which more than one handling is required prior to final placement. Therefore, the provisions for additional payment for each re-handling of material specified in Section 190303.06(a) will not apply to placing unsuitable material for widening embankments and flattening embankment slopes.



Embankments to be placed over saturated areas that will not support the weight of hauling equipment may be constructed by end dumping successive loads in a uniformly distributed layer of a thickness capable of supporting the hauling equipment while subsequent layers are placed. The nose, or leading edge, of the embankment shall be maintained in a wedge shape to facilitate mud displacement in a manner that will prevent its entrapment in the embankment. The front slope of the embankment shall be maintained steeper than 2:1. The use of compacting equipment will not be required on the original course. However, the remainder of the embankment shall be constructed in layers and compacted in accordance with these specifications. When geotextile for embankment stabilization is required, it shall be placed as shown on the plans. Geotextile shall be spliced by sewing double-stitched seams with stitching spaced 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch apart or as shown on the plans. Once geotextile for embankment stabilization is placed, the initial lift of material to be placed atop shall be free draining and shall be end dumped onto the geotextile and spread to the thickness as shown on the plans. Free-draining material shall be any material of which 15 percent or less passes the No. 200 sieve. If the geotextile becomes punctured or torn, the Contractor shall repair the area with geotextile lapped at least 3 feet all around the damaged area. Existing slopes shall be continuously benched where embankments are constructed one-half width at a time; against slopes of existing embankments or hillsides; or across existing embankments, hillsides, and depressions at a skew angle of 30 degrees or more or the existing slopes are steeper than 4:1. For slopes steeper than 4:1 but not steeper than 1-1/2:1, the bench shall be at least 6 feet in width. For slopes steeper than 1-1/2:1 but less than 1/2:1, the bench shall be at least 4 feet in width. Benching shall consist of a series of horizontal cuts beginning at the intersection with the original ground and continuing at each vertical intersection of the previous cut. Material removed during benching operations shall be placed and compacted as embankment material. When excavated material consists predominantly of soil, embankment shall be placed in successive uniform layers not more than 8 inches in thickness before compaction over the entire roadbed area. Each layer shall be compacted within a tolerance of ±20 percent of optimum moisture content to a density of at least 95 percent of the theoretical maximum density. Material having a moisture content above optimum by more than 30 percent shall not be placed on a previously placed layer for drying unless it is shown that the layer will not become saturated by downward migration of moisture in the material. Field density determinations will be performed in accordance with AASHTO T310 and VTM10, modified to include material sizes used in the laboratory determination of density, with a portable nuclear field density testing device or by other approved methods. When a nuclear device is used, density determinations for embankment material will be related to the density of the same material tested in accordance with VTM-1 or VTM-12 and a control strip will not be required. As the compaction of each layer progresses, continuous leveling and manipulating shall be performed to ensure uniform density. Prior to placement of subsequent layers,



construction equipment shall be routed uniformly over the entire surface of each layer or the layer shall be scarified to its full depth in the area where the equipment is routed. When the excavated material consists predominantly of rock fragments of such size that the material cannot be placed in layers of the thickness prescribed without crushing, pulverizing, or further breaking down the pieces resulting from excavation methods, such material may be placed in the embankment in layers that are not thicker than the approximate average size of the larger rocks. Rock not more than 4 feet in its greatest dimension may be placed in an embankment to within 10 feet of the subgrade. The remainder of the embankment to within 2 feet of the subgrade shall not contain rock more than 2 feet in its greatest dimension. Each layer shall be constructed so that rock voids are filled with rock spalls, rock fines, and earth. Rock shall be placed, manipulated, and compacted in uniform layers; however, density requirements may be waived. Rock, rock spalls, rock fines, and earth shall be distributed throughout each embankment layer and manipulated as specified herein so that the voids are filled. Rock shall not be end dumped over the edges of the layer being constructed but shall be deposited on the layer and moved ahead so as to advance the layer with a mixture of rock, rock spalls, rock fines, and earth. The 2 feet of the embankment immediately below the subgrade shall be composed of material that can be placed in layers of not more than 8 inches before compaction and compacted as specified herein for embankments. Rock, broken concrete, or other solid materials shall not be placed in embankment areas where piling is to be placed or driven. The best material shall be reserved for finishing and dressing the surface of embankments. Work necessary to ensure the reservation of such material shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Section 190303.06(a) will not apply to subsequent handling of capping material. CBR values, stipulated for Embankment, shall apply to the uppermost three feet of fill below the top of earthwork, as defined in Section 190303. Embankment, installed below the top three feet, shall consist of suitable fill material available from regular excavation; borrow excavation, or embankment as defined, and be of a quality consistent with Contract requirements.

(i) Settlement Plates and Surcharge: (not used).

(j) Hydraulic Embankment: (not used).

(k) Surplus Material: Surplus material shall not be wasted or sold by the Contractor unless

authorized in writing by the COTR. When authorization has been given for surplus material to be wasted, it shall be disposed of in accordance with Section 017300.

Material shown on the plans as surplus material will not be considered for overhaul payment.

1. Disposal of surplus material within the right of way where the haul distance is

2,000 feet or less: Surplus material shall be used or disposed of where directed within a haul distance of 2,000 feet of its origin. Usage in this manner will not be considered a change in the character of the work.



2. Disposal of surplus material within the right of way where the haul distance is more than 2,000 feet: The COTR may require the Contractor to use surplus material instead of furnishing borrow, or as otherwise directed, where the haul distance from the origin of the material is more than 2,000 feet. Disposal of surplus material at locations requiring a haul of more than 2,000 feet will be considered a change in the character of work unless otherwise noted on the plans.

When material is declared surplus during construction and must be transported more than 2,000 feet from its origin, the Department will pay the Contractor $0.03 per station per cubic yard for overhaul. The quantity of surplus excavation will be determined by vehicle measurement in accordance with the provisions of Section 012210 or from cross-section measurements by the average end area method. The haul distance will be measured along a line parallel with the centerline of the roadway from the center of the excavated area to the center of the placement area. Overhaul will be the product of the quantity of surplus material in cubic yards and the haul distance in excess of 2,000 feet in 100-foot stations.

(l) No Plan (N) or Minimum Plan (M) Project Earthwork:

The Contractor shall perform all construction or reconstruction activities in accordance with the applicable requirements of the Specifications with the exception of the following:

1. All disturbed slopes shall be uniformly grooved or rough graded as directed by

the COTR. 2. The roadbed shall be shaped and worked until it is smooth and free from large

clods or other material unfit for use in the roadbed. Sharp breaks in the roadbed shall be eliminated and the final grade shall be compacted. The maximum gradient on all connections with intersecting roads, streets and entrances shall not exceed 10 percent, unless otherwise noted on plans or directed by the COTR. Ditchlines shall be graded to facilitate drainage and to prevent the impoundment of water.

3. Excess material from slides, ditches and channels, slopes or drainage easements,

and unsuitable material cut from below grade, which cannot be used to flatten fill slopes within the right of way or easements, shall be disposed of by the Contractor in accordance with Section 017300.

4. The construction or clean out of ditches or channels extending beyond the

roadway right of way, the removal and disposal of slide material, and the removal and disposal of unsuitable material required to be removed from below subgrade will be classified as extra excavation.

190303.05 TOLERANCES

(a) Not used. (b) Slopes shall be graded in the following manner:



1. Earth excavation slopes:

a. Slopes steeper than 2:1 shall be grooved in accordance with the standard

drawings and shall not deviate from the theoretical plane surface by more than 0.2 foot.

b. Slopes steeper than 3:1 up to and including 2:1 shall be rough graded in a

manner to provide horizontal ridges and grooves having no more than 0.2 foot deviation from the theoretical line of the typical cross section as accomplished by the normal operation of heavy grading equipment.

c. Slopes 3:1 or flatter shall be uniformly finished and shall not deviate

from the theoretical plane surface by more than 0.2 foot.

2. Earth embankment slopes:

a. Slopes steeper than 3:1 shall not deviate from the theoretical plane slope by more than 0.2 foot and shall be rough graded in a manner to provide horizontal ridges and grooves not more than 0.2 foot from the theoretical line of the typical cross section as accomplished by the normal operation of heavy grading equipment.

b. Slopes 3:1 and flatter shall be uniformly finished and shall not deviate

from the theoretical plane surface by more than 0.2 foot. 3. Rock slopes shall not deviate from a plane surface by more than 0.5 feet

and shall not deviate from their theoretical location by more than 0.5 feet measured along any line perpendicular to the theoretical slope line.

Finished excavation and embankment slopes shall not deviate from their theoretical location by more than 0.2 foot measured along any line perpendicular to the theoretical slope line.

190303.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

(a) Excavation: Excavation will be measured in cubic yards and will be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic yard unless otherwise specified.

Excavation requiring more than one handling prior to final placement will be paid for at the contract unit price for regular excavation for each handling approved by the COTR unless there is a pay item for the second handling, in which case work will be paid for at the contract price for such handling.

Quantities of regular or borrow excavation used to backfill pipe, pipe culverts, and box culverts will not be deducted from quantities due the Contractor for payment.

1. Regular excavation: When payment is specified on a cubic yard basis, regular

excavation will be measured in its original position by cross-sectioning the excavation area. This measurement will include overbreakage or slides not



attributable to the carelessness of the Contractor and authorized excavation of rock, muck, root mat, or other unsuitable material except material included in undercut excavation. Volumes will be computed from cross-section measurements by the average end area method.

When it is impractical to measure material by the cross-section method, other acceptable methods involving three-dimensional measurements may be used. Excavation for benching slopes to accommodate roadway embankments as specified in Section 190303.04(h) will not be measured for separate payment. The cost thereof shall be included in the price for the related excavation or embankment item. Excavation of existing roadways required to incorporate old roadway into new roadway or remove salvageable materials for use in traffic maintenance, other than those covered in Section 190508, will be measured as regular excavation. When “presplitting rock cuts” is shown on the plans, the work shall be considered incidental to the cost of excavation and will not be measured for separate payment. In cut sections, excavation of topsoil and root mat and material down to a point 1 foot below the elevation of the top of earthwork or to the depth specified on the plans will be measured as regular excavation. When areas of unsuitable material are shown on the plans, excavation down to a point 1 foot below the elevation of such material shown on the plans will be measured as regular excavation.

In fill sections, excavation of topsoil and root mat and material down to an elevation of 1 foot below the bottom of topsoil and root mat will be measured as regular excavation. When areas of unsuitable material are shown on the plans, excavation down to a point 1 foot below the elevation of such material shown on the plans will be measured as regular excavation. If slide material approved for measurement cannot be measured accurately, or if the removal of slide material will require different equipment than that being used in the regular excavation operations, payment therefor may be made on a force account basis when authorized by the COTR. Excavation of surface ditches specified on the plans or otherwise required by the COTR will be paid for as regular excavation except that when required after the slopes have been completed and the work cannot be performed with mechanical equipment, the excavation will be paid for as undercut excavation.

2. Borrow excavation: (not used). 3. Undercut excavation: (not used).

4. Minor structure excavation: (not used).



5. Earthwork: When a pay item, earthwork will be paid for at the contract lump sum price, wherein no measurement will be made. This price shall include regular excavation, minor structure excavation, and grading.

(b) Embankments:

1. If embankment is not a pay item, the cost of embankment construction will be

considered incidental to other items of excavation. 2. If embankment is a pay item and regular excavation is to be paid for on a plan

quantity basis, the quantity of embankment for which payment will be made will not be measured separately but will be computed in accordance with the following:

a. The regular excavation plan quantity will be adjusted in accordance with

(c) Plan Quantities herein.

b. The quantity of unsuitable material will be measured and subtracted from the adjusted regular excavation quantity determined in 2.a. herein. Quantities of unsuitable material removed from fill areas or below the subgrade in cut areas will be determined by using plan dimensions and may be adjusted for deviations based on actual measurement. Actual dimensions will be used to determine the quantity of any other unsuitable material.

c. The total quantity shown on the plans will be adjusted for quantities not

anticipated on the plans, such as changes in grade or undercut determined to be necessary during construction.

d. The quantity of suitable material determined in 2.b. herein will be

subtracted from the adjusted total fill quantity determined in 2.c. herein. The resultant quantity will be the embankment quantity for which payment will be made.

The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the effect of the shrinkage or swell factor of the material, and no adjustment will be made in pay quantities for this factor. Hydraulic embankment will not be used.

3. If embankment is a pay item and regular excavation is to be paid for on the basis

of measured quantities, the quantity of embankment will be measured in cubic yards computed by the average end area method from the dimensions of the embankment cross section.

Cross sections of the area to be covered by the embankment will be taken after the denuding or removal of unsuitable material and before any material is placed thereon. These cross sections shall extend laterally from the centerline to the toes of slopes as indicated on the typical cross section. The elevations as determined by these sections will be considered the original ground line. The pay quantity to



be measured will be the volume of material included in the section above the original ground and below the upper limits of the typical cross section.

When regular excavation is a pay item, the embankment area to be cross-sectioned will exclude that portion of the fill constructed from regular excavation. Material outside the limits of typical cross sections as shown on the plans will not be measured or paid for.

4. Extra embankment required for subsurface consolidation will not be used.

5. If geotextile drainage fabric is a pay item, measurement and payment will be in

accordance with Section 190504. 6. Geotextile for embankment stabilization will be measured in square yards,

complete-in-place. Overlaps and seams will not be measured for separate payment. The accepted quantity of geotextile will be paid for at the contract unit price per square yard. This price shall include furnishing, placing and lapping or seaming of material.

Embankment with a stipulated CBR value shall be measured and paid for as embankment with the CBR value as specified. Embankment without a stipulated CBR value shall be measured and paid for as embankment.

(c) Plan Quantities: The quantity of regular excavation for which payment will be made when plan quantities are specified will be that specified in the Contract. However, borrow excavation; excavation for entrances; unsuitable material below the top of earthwork; undercut excavation; slide excavation; rock excavation that changes the slopes or causes undercut; and side, inlet, and outlet ditches not covered by plan cross sections will be measured in their original position by cross sections and computed in cubic yards by the average end area method.

Where there are authorized deviations from the lines, grades, or cross sections, measurements will be made and the volume computed in cubic yards by the average end area method for these deviations. The plan quantity will then be adjusted to include these quantities for payment. When unauthorized deviations occur, allowances will not be made for overruns. However, if the deviation decreases the quantities specified in the Contract, only the actual yardage excavated will be allowed.

(d) Backfill: (not used).

(e) Erosion Control Items:

1. Limiting the scope of construction operations, shaping the top of earthwork, and

constructing temporary earth berms and brush silt barriers for temporary erosion and siltation control will not be measured for payment but shall be included in the price for other appropriate pay items.



2. Erosion control riprap will not be used. 3. Temporary protective covering will not be used. 4. Check dams will not be used.

5. Temporary silt fence type A will not be used. 6. Temporary silt fence type B will not be used.

7. Geotextile fabric for erosion control will not be used.

8. Temporary filter barriers will not be used.

9. Silt cleanout will not be used.

10. Seeding materials will be measured and paid for in accordance with Section

190603. 11. Temporary erosion and siltation measures required to correct conditions created

because of the Contractor’s negligence, carelessness, or failure to install permanent controls in accordance with the plans and sequence for performance of such work will not be measured for payment.

12. Slope drains will be measured in units of each, per location regardless of size or

length and will be paid for at the contract unit price per each. Raising slope drains and addition of pipe lengths will not be measured as a new location. This price shall include furnishing, installing, maintaining, and removing the drain and end section or portable flume.

13. Sediment traps and basins will not be used. 14. Storm water management basin excavation will not be used. 15. Temporary sediment basin excavation will not be used. 16. Inlet protection will not be used. 17. Dewatering basin will be measured and paid for at the contract unit price per

each. This price shall include furnishing, installing, maintaining, and when no longer required, removing the dewatering basin; backfill; and site restoration.

18. Erosion control mulch will be paid for per square yard or acre. This includes all

materials and equipment necessary for the application. 19. Temporary diversion dike will be measured in linear feet, complete-in-place, and

will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot. This price shall be full compensation for installing the diversion dike, stabilizing with seed and mulch, maintaining, removing when no longer required, and restoration of the area.



20. Turbidity curtain will not be used.

(f) No Plan (N) or Minimum Plan (M) Project Earthwork: Measurement and payment for No Plan (N) or Minimum Plan project items of work will be in accordance with the applicable requirements of the Specifications with the exception of the following: 1. Grading will be paid for at the contract lump sum price wherein no measurement

will be made by the COTR. This price shall be full compensation for mobilization when not specified as a separate bid item; the cost of clearing and grubbing; all regular excavation; construction of embankments, grading of unpaved shoulders and ditches and channels; allaying of dust when not specified as a separate bid item; removing and disposing of excess or unsuitable material above grade; and for removing and disposing of existing minor structures and roadway surface materials.

2. Extra excavation, when specified as a bid item, will be measured in cubic yards

in accordance with Section 012210 and will be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic yard. This price shall include performing the required excavation and disposing of material in accordance with Section 017300 or as directed by the COTR. When not specified as a contract bid item, extra excavation will be paid for as specified in the Contract.

(g) Maintenance of Streamflow and Dewatering for Stream Restoration:

Measurement and payment for Maintenance of Streamflow and Dewatering for Stream Restoration will paid for at the contract lump sum price wherein no measurement will made by the COTR. The payment will include the implementation of all maintenance of stream flow measures associated with stream construction activities as shown in the Contract Documents. The payment will also include designing and providing additional temporary diversion and conveyance systems regardless of the type required to satisfactorily maintain stable conveyance systems during all operations. Payment will include all excavation, dewatering of the active work zone(s), backfill, stream diversion barrier, resetting stream diversion barrier, sandbags for stream diversion barrier, sandbag dikes, steel sheeting for maintenance of stream flow, blocking flow to existing/proposed inlets and pipes, impervious polyethylene sheeting, culvert pipes (regardless of size and type), lining of temporary channels and ditches, riprap, pumps, hoses, connections, portable sediment tanks, filter bags, temporary rock for stabilization and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. The price will not be adjusted when consideration is given to an alternative conveyance/diversion system regardless of any changes in quantities shown in the Contract Documents.

Payment will be made under: Item No. Pay Item Pay Unit 190303-1 Regular Excavation Cubic Yard 190303-2 Maintenance of Streamflow Lump Sum






SUBGRADE AND SHOULDERS 190305 - 1

SECTION 190305 – SUBGRADE AND SHOULDERS 190305.01 DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of constructing the subgrade and shoulders to the cross section and grade shown on the plans and within the specified tolerances indicated on the plans and in these specifications. 190305.02 MATERIALS Materials may consist of material in place, treated material in place, or imported material. Imported material may be borrow material, select material, or other material as shown on the plans or specified in the Contract. Materials other than regular excavation or borrow material that are shown on the plans or specified in the Contract shall conform to the applicable requirements of these Specifications. Geotextile materials used for subgrade stabilization shall conform to Section 190245.03(d). 190305.03 PROCEDURES

(a) Shaping and Compacting Subgrade:

1. Subgrade consisting of material in place: The subgrade area shall be scarified to a depth of 6 inches for a distance of 2 feet beyond the proposed edges of the pavement on each side. If sandy or other soil is encountered that will not compact readily, clay or other suitable material shall be added or water applied in such quantity and within the allowable moisture content specified herein as will permit compaction of the subgrade. Subgrade material shall be compacted at optimum moisture, within ±20 percent of optimum. The density of the subgrade when compared to the theoretical maximum density as determined in accordance with VTM-1 shall conform to the following:

Percentages of material shall be reported to the nearest whole number.

The Contractor shall then shape and check the subgrade to ensure a typical cross section and uniform grade prior to placement of any subsequent courses. If the subgrade becomes eroded or distorted prior to placement of material for subsequent courses, the Contractor shall scarify, reshape, and recompact it in accordance with the original requirements.



At the time of placing material for subsequent courses, the Contractor shall compact the subgrade to the required density, free from mud and frost, and to a condition that will permit compaction of subsequent courses without distortion. The Contractor shall remove material from the unstable area and contaminated aggregate if the approved subgrade becomes unstable after placement of the subbase or base course and becomes mixed with the aggregate therein. The area shall then be backfilled and compacted, and the subsequent course thereon reconstructed.

2. Subgrade consisting of treated materials in place: Subgrade shall be treated in

accordance with the applicable provisions of Section 190306.03 and Section 190307.05 except that the tolerance for depth will be waived when lime or cement is being used to bridge or correct extremely weak areas.

The Contractor will not be required to perform additional mixing and compacting if lime can be satisfactorily manipulated during initial mixing, and the Contractor has satisfactorily bridged the weak area. Additional layers of fill may be placed without delay.

Field density determinations will be performed in accordance with AASHTO T310 and VTM-10, modified to include material sizes used in the laboratory determination of density; with a portable nuclear field density testing device; or by other approved methods. When a nuclear device is used, the nuclear density determination for treated in-place subgrade material will be related to the density of the same material tested in accordance with VTM-1 or VTM-12 and a control strip will not be required.

3. Subgrade consisting of imported material: The area to receive the material shall

be graded to a true crown and cross section.

Material shall be placed and compacted in accordance with the applicable specifications governing the type of material. When select material is used, material shall be placed and compacted in accordance with Section 190308.02 except that the provision for mixing will not be required. The Contractor shall compact the top 6 inches of the finished subgrade in accordance with the provisions of 1.herein.

The provisions of 1. herein that are not specifically amended shall apply. Imported material shall be placed in approximately equal layers not more than 8 inches for commercial material and 6 inches for local material, compacted measure. The COTR will test material after compaction for thickness and density. If material fails to conform to thickness requirements, the Contractor shall correct the material by scarifying, adding material if necessary, mixing, reshaping and recompacting, or removing and replacing. If the material fails to conform to density requirements, the COTR will require additional rolling until the required density is obtained provided the material is compacted at optimum moisture, within ±20 percent of optimum. If the moisture content is outside the



allowable tolerance, the COTR will require the layer to be scarified, brought to optimum moisture within the allowable tolerance, and recompacted to the specified density.

An aggregate spreader will not be required in the placement of select material and other imported materials used as subgrade and shoulder courses.

(b) Treatment of Unsuitable Subgrade: When solid rock occurs in cuts or the material is not

suitable for subgrade or finishing purposes, the roadbed shall be excavated below the grade shown on the plans in accordance with the Standard Drawings.

When solid rock or other unsuitable material has been removed, excavated areas shall be backfilled in accordance with the Standard drawings.

(c) Finishing Subgrade: The Contractor shall provide effective drainage for the subgrade and

maintain it in a satisfactory condition until the next course is placed.

When practicable, the subgrade shall be prepared at least 500 feet ahead of placement of any subbase, base, or surface course. Material for subsequent courses shall not be placed until the subgrade has been checked and approved. The finished subgrade elevation shall be within ±0.04 foot of the plan elevation unless otherwise specified. When imported material is used, acceptance of the course will be based on Section 190308.04.

(d) Geotextile (Subgrade Stabilization): When geotextile for subgrade stabilization is

required, it shall be placed as shown on the plans. Geotextile shall be spliced by an overlap of at least 2 feet or by sewing double-stitched seams with stitching spaced 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch apart or as shown on the plans.

(e) Shoulders: Aggregate shoulder material shall be placed in accordance with the applicable

specifications governing the type of material or construction being used and shall be compacted at optimum moisture, within ±2 percentage points of optimum. Except when aggregate material No. 18 is used, the density of the aggregate shoulder material, when compared to the theoretical maximum density as determined in accordance with VTM-1 or VTM-12, shall conform to the following:

Percentages of material will be reported to the nearest whole number. When aggregate material No. 18 is used, the density, when compared to the theoretical maximum density, shall be not less than 90 percent or more than 95 percent. Aggregate in the guardrail section of fills, 1 foot from the roadway side of the guardrail face to the outside of the shoulder, shall be compacted until a density of at least 90



percent of the theoretical maximum density has been obtained. The asphalt mixture in this area shall be sealed immediately after the hot mixture is spread. Rolling of the asphalt mixture shall continue until roller marks are eliminated and a density of at least 85 percent of the theoretical maximum density has been obtained. Stabilized and paved shoulders shall be constructed in accordance with the applicable specifications for pavement stabilization. If the aggregate shoulder material becomes overconsolidated prior to final finishing, it shall be scarified for the approximate depth, reshaped, and recompacted to conform to the specified grade and cross section. Shoulders shall be constructed simultaneously with nonrigid types of base or surface courses other than asphalt concrete or in advance of the base or surface course so as to prevent spreading of base or surface materials. The area of shoulders 12 inches adjacent to the pavement shall be rolled simultaneously with the course being deposited. Where base or surface courses are being constructed under traffic and are more than 1 inch in depth, shoulder material adjacent thereto shall be placed within 72 hours after placement of the base or surface course.

190305.4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT When material in place is used for the subgrade and shoulders, no measurement will be made by the COTR. Treated material in place will be measured in accordance with the method of measurement for the specified stabilizing material. When the ton unit is specified, the quantity will be determined in accordance with Section 012210. These prices shall include furnishing, hauling, placing, manipulating, and compacting material; clearing and grubbing local pits; material royalties; and access roads. Payment will be made under:

Item No. Pay Item

Pay Unit

190305-1 6 Inch Aggregate Base Material, Type 1, Size 21A with 4% Hydraulic Cement

TN

190305-2 3 Inch Stabilized Open Graded Drainage Layer SY




TACK COAT 190310 - 1

SECTION 190310 – TACK COAT 190310.01 DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of preparing and treating an existing asphalt or concrete surface with asphalt in accordance with these specifications and in conformity with the lines shown on the plans or as established by the COTR. 190310.02 MATERIALS

(a) Tack Coat asphalt tack coat shall be CRS-1, CRS-2, CRS-1h, or CSS-1h conforming to Section 190210. Asphalt emulsion CMS-2 conforming to Section 190210 may be used during the winter months. With the exception of CMS-2, asphalt emulsion for tack coat may be diluted with 50 percent water provided that the resulting material produces uniform tack application.

(b) Non-Tracking Tack Coat liquefied asphalt shall be selected from the Materials Division’s

Approved Products List 50.1A. The Contractor shall not dilute non-tracking tack coat materials with water.

190310.03 PROCEDURES The existing surface shall be patched, cleaned, and rendered free from irregularities to the extent necessary to provide a reasonably smooth and uniform surface. The Contractor shall remove and replace unstable corrugated areas with suitable patching materials. The Contractor shall clean the edges of existing pavements that are to be adjacent to new pavement to permit adhesion of asphalt. The Contractor shall uniformly apply tack coat or non-tracking tack coat material with a pressure distributor conforming to Section 190314.04(b). Hand spray equipment shall not be used except in areas inaccessible by a pressure distributor. Tack at joints, adjacent to curbs, gutters, or other appurtenances shall be applied with a hand wand or with spray bar at the rate of 0.2 gallon per square yard. At joints, the tack applied by the hand wand or a spray bar shall be 2 feet in width with 4 to 6 inches protruding beyond the joint for the first pass. Tack for the adjacent pass shall completely cover the vertical face of the pavement mat edge so that slight puddling of asphalt occurs at the joint, and extend a minimum of 1 foot into the lane to be paved. Care shall be taken to prevent splattering adjacent items during the application of tack coat. The distributor shall not be cleaned or discharged into ditches or borrow pits, onto shoulders, or along the right of way. When not in use, the Contractor shall ensure equipment is parked so that the spray bar or mechanism will not drip asphalt on the surface of the traveled way. The Contractor shall apply tack coat and non-tracking tack coat in accordance with the weather limitations that apply to the course being placed as well as the manufacturer’s recommendations. The COTR shall approve the quantity, rate of application, temperature, and areas to be treated prior to application.




The tack coat or non-tracking tack coat shall be applied in a manner to offer the least inconvenience to traffic and to permit one-way traffic without pick up or tracking of the asphalt onto adjacent non-treated areas. All traffic, including construction traffic, shall be excluded from tacked sections until the tack has cured. Tack shall not be required atop asphalt stabilized open-graded material drainage layers.

(a) Tack Coat

Equipment for heating and applying asphalt shall conform to Section 190314.04(b). The maximum application temperature of liquid asphalt shall conform to Table III-1. The Contractor shall apply undiluted asphalt at the rate of 0.05 to 0.10 gallons per square yard. Diluted asphalt shall be applied at the rate of 0.10 to 0.15 gallons per square yard. The Contractor shall not apply the tack coat immediately prior to the course being placed.

(b) Non-Tracking Tack Coat

The Contractor shall apply nontracking tack coat between May 1 and October 1. The Contractor may use tack coat as specified herein at other times. Equipment for heating and applying asphalt shall conform to Section 190314.04(b) or the non-tracking tack coat material’s manufacturer’s recommendations. The maximum application temperature of liquefied asphalt shall conform to the manufacturer’s requirements. The Contractor shall apply tack material at the rate recommended by the manufacturer. This rate is typically between 0.05 to 0.10 gallons per square yard. The asphalt tack shall be applied to the pavement surface in such a manner that it will bond the overlay and the underlying surfaces together.




Adjacent concrete or asphalt concrete surfaces shall show minimal visible evidence and white or yellow pavement markings shall show no visible evidence of the asphalt tack material tracking at the end of the production shift. Tracking of the tack material on pavement markings will require the Contractor to immediately restore the marking to their original pre-tack condition. The Contractor shall remove Build-up of the tacking material on existing pavement surfaces.

(c) Referee System

When a new asphalt course is placed on a milled or non-milled surface, the Contractor shall take steps to ensure an adequate bond is made between the new material and the existing surface. If the COTR suspects the Contractor is failing to apply good bond promoting procedures or adequately tacking the existing surface per the manufacturer’s recommendations, the COTR may core a minimum of 6 locations to determine the shear and tensile strength at the interface. The COTR will determine these locations by using a stratified random selection process. The Department will test cores in the Department’s laboratory in accordance with the procedures described in report VTRC 09-R21. For the surface to be acceptable, the average results for shear and tensile strength specified herein must be met. The Department will test a minimum of 3 cores for shear strength and at least 3 cores for tensile strength.

1. Milled surfaces: The average shear strength must meet or exceed 100 psi with no

single core having a shear strength less than 50 psi. The average tensile strength




of the remaining cores must meet or exceed 40 psi with no single core having a tensile strength less than 20 psi.

2. Un-milled surfaces: The average shear strength must meet or exceed 50 psi with

no single core having a shear strength less than 30 psi. The average tensile strength of the remaining cores must meet or exceed 30 psi with no single core having a tensile strength less than 20 psi.

The COTR will reduce the payment for the asphalt concrete tonnage placed in the area of dispute by 10 percent if the minimum shear or tensile strength requirements in that area are not met.

190310.4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT No measurement shall be made for tack coat or non-tracking tack coat and cost thereof shall be deemed to be included in the price for other appropriate pay items. 190310.5 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL

a) Submittals – Conform to all applicable provisions of Section 013300 “Submittals.” Items to be submitted would include (not limited to):

1. Tack coat conforming to requirements of Section 190210.

(b) Installation

1. Clean surface in accordance with Section 190310 “Procedures.” 2. Apply tack coat uniformly in accordance with Section 190310 and with a

pressure distributor conforming to Section 190310.

(c) Testing and Inspection – Verify that the tack coat has been applied in accordance with Section 190310.

(d) Final Acceptance – Conform to all applicable provisions of Section 014000 “Contractor

Quality Control Program.” END OF SECTION 190310



ROCK CROSS VANE STRUCTURE (RCVS) 190432 - 1

SECTION 190432 – ROCK CROSS VANE STRUCTURE (RCVS) 190611.01 DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of the construction of Rock Cross Vane Structures (RCVS) for the purpose of providing of reducing shear stress on proposed channel banks and providing long-term vertical grade control of the proposed streambed to maintain existing upstream and downstream channel morphology. 190611.02 MATERIALS

(a) Individual rocks or boulders used in the construction of RCVS shall have a minimum dry density of 165 pounds per cubic foot and shall conform to the following dimensions:

Specified Rock/Boulder Dimensions for Rock Cross Vane Structures

A Axis (ft) B Axis (ft) C Axis (ft)

Minimum Length 2.0 2.0 2.0 Maximum Length 4.0 4.0 3.0

(b) Rock shall consist of appropriate natural color (e.g., green/gray, brown/gray, dark gray and/or brown or tan in color) obtained from any approved source. Blue stone is not preferred. Limestone will not be acceptable. White stone will not be acceptable.

190611.03 PROCEDURES

(a) Construction

1. Install RCVS according to the Sequence of Construction and as provided on the Plans and Details. Material excavated from the construction of the RCVS shall be utilized to backfill the completed rock structures. Place all rocks in close rock to rock contact with no space between adjoining rocks and according to the elevation determined on the plan drawings, specifications and construction notes. Chink all voids between the rocks. Voids shall be chinked with small boulders, cobble or rock fragments. Chinking will be conducted such that no voids greater than four inches (4”) in size will be present. A completed in-stream structure has a smooth, continuous finish grade from the bankfull elevation to the streambed. The top elevation of the RCVS shall be flush with the proposed elevation of the streambed and floodplain and shall not protrude above the finished grade surface. The top elevations of the RCVS are provided on the Plans. The acceptable constructed elevation tolerance must be within 0.2 feet of the of the elevations provided on the Plans. Upon completion of the RCVS, place stabilizing vegetation as shown in the Landscape Plan and Specifications. Upon completion of the work, reshape the slopes and stream bottom to the specified elevations. All unsuitable materials will be removed from the site.



ROCK CROSS VANE STRUCTURE (RCVS) 190432 - 2

190611.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Rock Cross Vane Structures (RCVS) will be measured in linear feet of RCVS completed. Backfill for unsuitable material encountered during construction will not be measured or paid for but shall be incidental to the construction of the RCVS. Backfill and grading of the completed RCVS will not be measured but the cost will be incidental to the Contract price. The RCVS will be built using only those rocks that meet the size/weight specifications as set forth in this specification. The Contractor and COTR shall jointly monitor the rock dimensions and weights. The COTR reserves the right to reject rocks not meeting the minimum dimensions set forth in this specification. No payment will be made for unaccepted rock and any work required to obtain acceptance will not be measured but the cost will be incidental to the Contract price. The payment will be full compensation for all excavation, hauling, backfill and compaction, disposal of excess and unsuitable materials and for all materials, labor, equipment, tools and incidentals necessary to complete the work.

Payment will be made under: Item No. Pay Item Pay Unit 190432-1 Rock Cross Vane Structure Linear Foot END OF SECTION 190432



GRAVEL UNDERLAYMENT 190433 - 1

SECTION 190433 – GRAVEL UNDERLAYMENT 190433.01 DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of furnishing and placing rock material to be utilized as streambed materials to form a coarse channel substrate. This item shall also include salvaging of existing gravel material from within the existing UNT Scott Run channel within the approved LOD for re-use to choke in the surface void spaces of the imported rock materials as indicated on the Plans. 190433.02 MATERIALS

(a) The aggregate grading requirements of the imported rock materials shall conform to Class A1 Riprap as specified in Section 190414.

(b) The imported rock materials shall consist of appropriate natural color (e.g., green/gray, brown/gray, dark gray and/or brown or tan in color) obtained from any approved source. Blue stone is not preferred. Limestone will not be acceptable. White stone will not be acceptable. (c) Prior to ordering / delivering the imported rock materials the Contractor shall obtain a bucket sample of the material for visual inspection, review, and approval by the COTR. Any unapproved material brought to the project site shall be at the Contractor’s risk to remove and replace the material with an appropriate approved material.


(a) Salvaging Existing Gravel Material

1. The Contractor shall salvage existing gravel from the existing channel bed of the UNT to Scott Run for re-use in choking-in the void spaces of the imported rock materials. The salvaged gravel shall be sourced from the portion of the UNT Scott channel to be relocated prior to the actual channel realignment and stockpiled for future use.

2. The Contractor shall use the salvaged existing gravel material to fill in all void

spaces in the imported rock material. The salvaged existing gravel material should only be placed to fill void spaces within the proposed channel limits.

(b) Excavation and Placement of the Imported Rock Materials and Salvaged Gravel

1. Areas to receive Gravel Underlayment as shown of the Plans shall be excavated

an additional minimum depth of 12 inches to accept the imported rock materials and meet the finished streambed elevations as shown on the Plans. The Contractor shall exercise caution in areas near existing utilities as damage incurred to the utilities will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

2. While excavated down to the appropriate elevations, the Contractor shall place a

uniform layer of the imported rock materials to meet the required minimum thickness of the gravel underlayment.



GRAVEL UNDERLAYMENT 190433 - 2

3. After placing the layer of imported rock materials to the correct sub-grade

elevations, the Contractor shall place the salvaged existing gravel on the imported rock materials. Using the back of the excavator bucket or a motorized plate tamper, tamp the salvaged existing gravel firmly into place, filling all void spaces in the imported rock materials and meeting the streambed elevations specified on the Plans.

4. To form the dimensions of the proposed streambanks, the Contractor shall

replace the existing excavated soil on top of the completed gravel underlayment as specified on the Plans. The soil shall be compacted not to exceed 92 percent of the T 180 maximum dry density for grading operations to allow for the establishment of vegetation.

190433.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Gravel Underlayment will be measured in square yards of area covered and complete-in-place. This price shall include all material, over excavation to place the materials, hauling, salvaging and spreading of existing salvaged gravel, all necessary stockpiling operations, blending, spreading, tamping, equipment, tools, labor and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment will be made under: Item No. Pay Item Pay Unit 190433-1 Gravel Underlayment Square Yard END OF SECTION 190433



IN-CHANNEL LOG SILL 190434 - 1

SECTION 190434 – IN-CHANNEL LOG SILL 190434.01 DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of furnishing and placing logs for grade control within the proposed streambed of the UNT Scott Run channel as indicated on the Plans. 190434.02 MATERIALS

(a) Logs may be furnished from an off-site source from natural hardwood tree species.

(b) Logs for use as In-Channel Log Sills shall have a minimum diameter of 18 inches. The average length of the In-Channel Log Sills to be placed within the proposed UNT Scott Run channel shall be approximately 12 feet. (c) No tree species utilized as In-Channel Log Sills shall have a green specific gravity of less than 0.45. Pine, Fir and Poplar tree species are not acceptable. Make every attempt to use tree sections that are from the straightest and healthiest portion of the tree. Logs shall be trimmed smooth and free of branches and/or roots that may protrude above the proposed finished streambed.


(a) Placement of In-Channel Log Sills

1. Excavation for In-Channel Log Sills shall consist of digging a trench that is perpendicular to the flow of the channel which will accommodate the log to be placed. Lay the logs within the excavated trench with the top edge conforming to the lines and elevations specified on the Plans.

2. The In-Channel Log Sills shall extend a minimum of 3 feet beyond the proposed

channel dimensions on each side. 3. In-Channel Log Sills must be one log of continuous length. Two or more logs

placed end-to-end will not be accepted. 4. Once the log is in place and at the appropriate elevation, the surrounding

materials shall be compacted back into place around the log to secure the log in place.

5. The accepted final top elevation of the In-Channel Log Sills must be within 0.1

feet of the proposed elevations provided on the Plans.

190434.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT In-Channel Log Sill will be measured in linear feet of logs installed and complete-in-place. This price shall include all material, furnishing of logs, hauling, stockpiling, excavation, and removal of excess



IN-CHANNEL LOG SILL 190434 - 2

material, placement, tamping, equipment, tools, labor and all work incidentals necessary to complete the work.

Payment will be made under: Item No. Pay Item Pay Unit 190434-1 In-Channel Log Sill Linear Foot END OF SECTION 190434



ROCK/SOIL MIX 190435 - 1

SECTION 190435 – ROCK/SOIL MIX 190435.01 DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of furnishing and placing a suitable mixture of rock and soil to form the DTR roadway embankment and bankfull bench of the proposed UNT Scott Run channel. The rock and soil mix will serve to resist the tractive hydraulic forces of the UNT Scott Run channel during storm events and allow for planting and establishment of native vegetation. The Rock/Soil Mix shall be placed in the locations and to lines and grades as indicated on the Plans. 190435.02 MATERIALS

(a) The Rock/Soil Mix shall consist of approximately 60 percent rock and 40 percent soil.

(b) The aggregate grading requirements of the rock materials shall conform to VDOT Class I Riprap. The rock shall consist of appropriate natural color (e.g., green/gray, brown/gray, dark gray and/or brown or tan in color) obtained from any approved source. Blue stone is not preferred. Limestone will not be acceptable. White stone will not be acceptable.

(b) The soil used in the Rock/Soil Mix shall conform to Class B Topsoil as specified in

Section 190244.02 (b).

(d) The geotextile fabric used shall conform to Section 190245.3 (d). (e) Prior to ordering / delivering the imported rock materials the Contractor shall obtain a bucket sample of the material for visual inspection, review, and approval by the COTR. Any unapproved material brought to the project site shall be at the Contractor’s risk to remove and replace the material with an appropriate approved material.


(a) Mixing of the Rock/Soil Mix

1. The Contractor shall have the approved rock materials and Class B Topsoil mixed to the approved composition at an off-site location prior to delivery to the project site.

(b) Excavation and Placement of the Rock/Soil Mix

1. Areas to receive Rock/Soil Mix as shown of the Plans shall be excavated to the

elevations as shown on the Plans. The Contractor shall exercise caution in areas near existing utilities as damage incurred to the utilities will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.

2. While excavated down to the appropriate elevations, the Contractor shall place

geotextile fabric at the boundary interface between in situ soils and/or the DTR roadway sub-grade materials. The geotextile fabric shall conform to Section 190245.3 (d).



ROCK/SOIL MIX 190435 - 2

3. The Contractor shall place the Rock/Soil Mix to form the proposed lines and

grades as specified on the Plans. The placed Rock/Soil Mix shall be machine compacted to 95 percent as detailed in AASHTO specification T-99 or ASTM D698.

4. After the Rock/Soil Mix has been placed and compacted properly, the Contractor

shall apply seed conforming to Section 190603 and Soil Stabilization Matting conforming to Section 190611 within 24 hours. If rain is forecast prior to 24 hours, the Rock/Soil Mix must be seeded and covered with soil stabilization matting before the end of the workday.


(a) Seeding Materials: Will be measured and paid for in accordance with Section 190603.

(c) Soil Stabilization Matting (SSM): Will be measured and paid for in accordance with Section 190611.

(d) Rock/Soil Mix: Will be measured in cubic yards or materials, complete and in place. This price shall include all rock, topsoil, geotextile fabric and the blending of materials off-site. The price will also include any over excavation to place the materials, hauling, spreading, all necessary stockpiling operations, blending, compaction, equipment, tools, labor and all incidentals necessary to complete the work.

Payment will be made under: Item No. Pay Item Pay Unit 190435-1 Rock/Soil Mix Cubic Yard END OF SECTION 190435



GUARDRAIL AND W-BEAM MEDIAN BARRIERS 190505 - 1

SECTION 190505 – GUARDRAIL AND W-BEAM MEDIAN BARRIERS 190505.01 DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of furnishing and constructing new guardrail and steel median barriers, installing reusable guardrail in accordance with the plans and these specifications to the lines, grades, and tolerances shown on the plans or as designated by the COTR. 190505.02 MATERIALS

(a) Guardrail components shall conform to Section 190221. (b) W-beam median barriers and posts shall conform to the contract requirements for the

materials specified on the plans. Steel posts may be furnished with as many as six holes per flange so that posts for installation of standard guardrail and w-beam median barrier may be used interchangeably.

(c) Concrete shall be Class A3 conforming to Section 190217 except that the COTR will

allow mixing by hand for installing guardrail terminal anchors. (d) Reinforcing steel shall conform to Section 190223. (e) Delineators shall conform to Section 190235.02(d).

190505.03 PROCEDURES The COTR will not permit the use of more than one type of post on the installation of a continuous line of guardrail. The Contractor shall erect and align rail and elements in a manner that will result in a smooth, continuous, taut installation. Installation shall not result in the cross section of the rail or other elements being kinked or crimped. The COTR will reject damaged rail or other elements. The Contractor shall replace rail and elements damaged prior to project acceptance at no additional cost to the Department. Guardrail delineators shall be installed in accordance with Section 190702.03. The Contractor shall install spring cable end assemblies (compensating device) with a permanent match mark (hacksaw cut or file mark) on the bolt shaft or spring stop that shall be referenced to the outer assembly to denote the neutral position. Cable slack shall be eliminated by tightening the steel turnbuckle cable assembly at the end opposite the compensating device until the device is compressed 3-1/2 inches. Cables with a compensating device at each end shall be tightened such that neither end indicates less than the required tension. The assembly shall remain compressed for at least 2 weeks and then loosened, and each cable shall then be readjusted to the same required tension. The required tension shall be determined by tightening the turnbuckle at the end opposite the compensating device and displacing the match mark in accordance with the following:




Anchor assemblies shall be installed on firm earthen foundations, backfilled with suitable material in 4to 6-inch layers, and thoroughly compacted by tamping or rodding. Stress loads shall not be placed on anchor assemblies until concrete has cured at least 28 days or has attained a compressive strength of at least 3,000 pounds per square inch as determined from testing corresponding field control cylinders in accordance with Section 190404.03. Nuts on anchor bolts shall be tightened to a snug tight fit as defined in Section 190407.06 on beam guardrail anchors to ensure flush contact between the beam and concrete base throughout the length of the anchor assembly. Postholes, cracks, and voids in the shoulder resulting from driving posts or removing guardrail and unused or abandoned guardrail postholes shall be backfilled to the ground line with Department approved backfill material conforming to Section 190305 placed in layers not more than 4 inches in height before tamping. Postholes, cracks and voids in paved or surfaced treated shoulders shall also be sealed with a fine asphalt plant mix no larger than SM -9.5A conforming to Section 190211. Each layer shall be compacted by tamping. Wood posts shall be sawed to the dimensions shown on the plans within a tolerance of 2 percent for length and 1/4 inch scant. The Contractor may install posts by driving provided the equipment used is capable of installing posts without damaging them. The COTR will reject damaged posts. Posts that are damaged shall be replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Department. Posts shall be set plumb. Posts shall not be set with a variation of more than 1/8 inch per foot from vertical. If it is necessary to saw off the tops of wood posts to achieve a uniform and neat appearance, the amount sawed off shall be not more than 3 inches. Tops of sawed posts shall be brush coated with three heavy applications of the same type of preservative used in treating the posts. Each application of preservative shall be given sufficient time to penetrate the wood before the next application. Painting wood posts will not be required. Dirt and other foreign matter shall be removed after installation. Galvanized items shall be handled and stored in accordance with Section 190233. After erection, the threaded portion of fittings with fasteners and cut ends of bolts and galvanized surfaces that have been abraded or damaged shall be repaired according to Section 190233.03. The Contractor shall ensure that guardrail and barriers are kept clean during application of fertilizer, lime, tack coats, primer, or other material that cannot be readily cleaned from the guardrail or barrier after exposure.




The Contractor shall have a trained guardrail installer on the project during guardrail installation. For the purpose of this specification, a trained guardrail installer is a person who has a current certificate of training from a Department-approved guardrail installation training course. Posts shall be spaced in accordance with the Standard Drawings. The COTR will permit longitudinal deviation of 3/4 inch providing the bolt holes in the guardrail, offset blocks, and posts can be properly aligned without alteration or force. The height of the guardrail shall be as shown in the standard drawings. On guardrail, nuts on bolts shall be tightened to a snug tight fit as defined in Section 190407.06 to ensure full contact between the beam, offset block, and post. The Contractor shall submit two copies of the manufacturers’ recommended installation instructions and the FHWA NCHRP 350 or MASH approval letter to the COTR at least 2 weeks prior to the start of installing guardrail end terminals for the type of new or salvaged guardrail end treatments being installed on the project. All end terminals shall be from manufacturers on the VDOT Approved Products List No. 12. The Contractor shall field verify all materials and measurements required for installing Special Design Bridge Guardrail (BRGR) attachments prior to installation. The Contractor shall perform Special Design Bridge Guardrail work in accordance with the Standard Drawings for “Recommended Method for Attaching Guardrail to Bridge Rails” (BR-GR). If the Contractor needs to modify the method of attachment due to field conditions, the Contractor shall submit a request, with detailed sketches, to modify the method of attachment to the COTR for review and approval. The COTR must preapprove all locations requiring drilling holes in concrete bridge railings and concrete fixed objects. Concrete spalls created by attachment of fixed object attachments (FOAs) or holes left by the removal of FOAs shall be repaired or filled with materials conforming to Section 190218 to conform to the shape and dimensions of the existing design, to the satisfaction of the COTR. Concrete repair will not be measured for separate payment but the cost thereof shall be considered incidental to the work.

(a) Existing Guardrail: The Contractor shall request that the COTR have VDOT underground assets marked a minimum seven (7) workdays prior to beginning the work in addition to contacting Miss Utility in accordance with Section 011000.

The Contractor shall ensure all existing guardrail and end terminals to be left in place within the limits of construction are correctly installed, including verifying that all components are present, all bolts are properly torqued, all cables are taut and all end terminals are properly anchored according to the manufacturer’s instructions. This confirmation work will not be measured for separate payment but the cost thereof shall be considered incidental to the work. The Contractor shall replace all guardrail removed during the course of a work day that same work day, unless otherwise approved by the COTR in writing. The Contractor shall not leave incomplete guardrail sections exposed to traffic over weekends or holidays, unless otherwise approved by the COTR in writing. Fixed objects, including but not limited to, bridge parapet walls, piers, blunt ends, and sign structures, shall not be left unprotected overnight. The Contractor shall use NCHRP




350 or MASH approved temporary guardrail terminal or impact attenuator service from VDOTs Approved Products List to protect traffic from the fixed object. Providing overnight protection will not be measured for separate payment but the cost thereof shall be considered incidental to the work.

Damage to pavement markings and rumble strips as a result of the Contractors operations, including but not limited to shoulder restoration, removing, salvaging and installing guardrail, shall be replaced or repaired by the Contractor. Repair or replacement will not be measured for separate payment but the cost thereof shall be considered incidental to the work.

(b) Removing and salvaging existing guardrail: All guardrail removal and salvage operations

shall start at the run off end and proceed to the run on end terminal unless otherwise approved in writing by the COTR.

Guardrail and guardrail end treatments designated for salvage shall be carefully removed so as not to damage the guardrail and guardrail end treatment components. The Contractor shall submit his proposed method for salvaging the guardrail or guardrail end treatments to the Engineer for his review and acceptance at least 1 week in advance of starting salvage operations. Guardrail and guardrail terminal units designated for removal and disposal shall become the property of the Contractor. Removed materials not designated for salvage shall be disposed of at a licensed landfill, recycled, or be retained by the Contractor unless otherwise stated in the Contract. Disposal items shall include, but not be limited to, guardrail and guardrail end terminal, all hardware and unsuitable materials.

(c) Installing new or salvaged guardrail:

Guardrail installation shall start at the run on end terminal and proceed to the run off end, unless otherwise approved in writing by the COTR. The Contractor shall install salvaged guardrail and salvaged guardrail end terminal suitable for reuse in accordance with the plan details, the manufacturers’ installation instructions and the current Standard Drawings. If existing posts and offset blocks are not in compliance with current Standards or Specifications, the Contractor shall furnish and install new posts or offset blocks where required and these will be measured and paid for under the appropriate pay item. When the plans require an additional guardrail beam be nested to stiffen the guardrail, the additional guardrail beam will be measured and paid for as “Guardrail Beam” when new beam is used or “Install Salvaged Guardrail Beam” when a salvaged beam is used. The Contractor shall review the locations where the need for longer posts is identified in the plans or schedule with the COTR prior to installation. The Contractor notify the COTR of locations where standard length guardrail posts may not be sufficient to meet the Standard Drawings installation criteria and NCHRP functionality requirements and request review of such locations prior to proceeding with the work. Guardrail installed with longer posts outside of those sites listed in the plans or replacement schedule or without the COTR’s written concurrence will be paid for at the contract unit price for




standard guardrail. Upon written concurrence from the COTR, the guardrail will be paid for as “Guardrail (Standard) (length) post”.

When upgrading salvaged guardrail from GR-2 to GR-2A, additional posts and offset blocks necessary for the upgrade will be measured and paid for separately.

(d) Adjusting existing guardrail:

Adjusting existing guardrail beam shall consist of removing and disassembling the existing guardrail beam and offset blocks from the posts, drilling the post in accordance with the standard drawing, and reassembling the offset blocks and guardrail beam to the height required by current Standard Drawings or Specifications. Adjusting the existing guardrail beam shall be limited to 4 inches. Adjusting guardrail beam shall be limited to steel posts and shall be in accordance with the plan details and Road and Bridge Standards. Adjusting existing guardrail beam will not be permitted within the pay limits of end terminals. The terminal shall be completely removed and reinstalled or a new terminal installed in accordance with the Standard Drawings and the manufacturer’s instructions. Adjusting the height of the post will not be permitted unless the post is completely removed and the post hole backfilled and compacted as specified in 190505.03. Posts shall meet the current standard length and shall be installed in accordance with 190505.03 (c). If field conditions do not allow the Contractor to adjust existing posts and offset blocks cannot be adjusted to bring the guardrail into compliance with the Standard Drawings or Specifications requirements, the guardrail and posts shall be removed and replaced. This work will be measured and paid for under the appropriate pay item.

190505.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Guardrail will be measured in linear feet and will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot including hardware. Cable guardrail will be measured in linear feet from the point where the cable guardrail attaches to the run-on terminal treatment to the point where the cable guardrail attaches to the run-off terminal treatment, complete-in-place. Guardrail installed on a radius of 150 feet or less shall be shop-curved; will be measured in linear feet and will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot of radial steel beam guardrail or radial steel median barrier. W-beam median barriers will be measured in linear feet from center to center of end posts and will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot. Intermediate anchorage assemblies will be measured in units of each and will be paid for at the contract unit price per each. Terminal treatment for beam guardrail that terminates in back of the ditch line will be measured in linear feet along the regular guardrail section from center of end post (center of bolt group when guardrail is mounted flush to a structure) to the ditch line. The terminal section in back of the ditch line will be measured from the ditch line to center of end post.




Terminal treatment for beam guardrail, cable guardrail, and steel median barriers terminating on the roadway side of the ditch line will be measured in units of each and will be paid for at the contract unit price per each. Fixed object attachments for guardrail will be measured in units of each and will be paid for at the contract unit price per each. This price shall include furnishing and installing guardrail connectors, rubrail, and additional posts with offset blocks and providing holes to facilitate attachment. Special design guardrail bridge attachments, BR-GR (Type) will be measured in units of each, for the type specified per attachment location and will be paid for at the contract unit price per each for the type specified. This price shall include, but not be limited to, furnishing and installing guardrail attachment type, posts, offset blocks, rub rail if required, delineators, and all hardware. Guardrail beam bridge rail will be measured in linear feet for “x” dimension when guardrail is extended the length of structure as directed by the COTR or in accordance with the Special Design Guardrail Bridge Attachment, BR-GR, detail and will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot. Cable barricades will be measured in units of each and will be paid for at the contract unit price per each. This price shall include furnishing and installing posts, cable, signs, and padlocks. Guardrail beam will be measured in linear feet and will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot. This price shall include furnishing and installing new guardrail beam, delineators and all hardware. This price includes disassembling and reassembling guardrail designated for stiffening. Guardrail beam installed on a radius of 150 feet or less shall be shop-curved, will be measured in linear feet, and will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot of radial guardrail beam. Guardrail (Standard) (length) post will be measured in linear feet for the length of post for the guardrail standard specified and will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot. This price shall include furnishing and installing guardrail beam, posts, offset blocks and all hardware. Guardrail offset block, wood or composite will be measured in units of each and will be paid for at the contract unit price per each. This price shall include disconnecting existing offset block, furnishing and installing new offset block and all hardware to connect guardrail beam to posts. Guardrail post (length) will be measured in units of each for the length specified and will be paid for at the contract unit price per each. This price shall include furnishing and installing post and all hardware to guardrail beam and offset block. Remove existing guardrail will be measured in linear feet and will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot. This price shall include removing and disposing of existing beam or cable, posts, offset blocks, hardware, connectors, end terminals, and fixed object attachments; furnishing backfill material; backfilling postholes; and repairing damage to shoulders, curbing, curb backup material or concrete. Remove existing guardrail terminal will be measured in units of each and will be paid for at the contract price per each. This price shall include removing and disposing of existing guardrail terminals, including, but not limited to posts, offset blocks, hardware and the concrete anchor portion of terminals. This work shall also include furnishing backfill material, backfilling holes and repairing damage to shoulders, curbing, curb backup material or concrete and site restoration.




Salvage existing guardrail will be measured in linear feet and will be paid for at the contract unit price of linear foot. This price shall include carefully removing, salvaging, transporting and storing existing guardrail beam, post, offset blocks, fixed object attachments and end terminals; disposing of existing hardware; furnishing backfill material; backfilling existing postholes; and repairing damage to shoulders, curbing, curb backup material or concrete. Salvage existing guardrail terminal will be measured in units of linear feet or each for the standard and type specified and will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot or each. This price shall include removing guardrail beam, posts, offset blocks, connectors, and end terminals; temporary storage; furnishing backfill material and backfilling holes; and repairing damage to shoulders, curbing, curb backup material or concrete and site restoration. This price shall also include removing and disposing of hardware and the concrete anchor portion of the terminals. Thrie beam guardrail will be measured in linear feet and will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot. This price shall include furnishing and installing thrie beam, posts, offset blocks, transition section delineators and all hardware. Install salvaged guardrail will be measured in linear feet for the standard specified and will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot. This price shall include transporting and installing salvaged guardrail posts, offset blocks, guardrail beam, and fixed object attachments; and furnishing and installing new delineators and new hardware. Salvaged guardrail installed on a radius of 150 feet or less shall be shop-curved; will be measured in linear feet and will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot of install salvaged guardrail. Install salvaged guardrail terminal (Standard) will be measured in units of linear foot or each for the standard and type specified and will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot or each. This price shall include transporting salvaged guardrail beam, post, offset blocks, installing salvaged guardrail beam, guardrail post, end terminals and offset blocks; and furnishing and installing reflective sheeting, delineators, concrete, and all hardware. Install salvaged guardrail beam will be measured in linear feet and will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot. This price shall include disassembling and reassembling guardrail designated for stiffening, storing and transporting salvaged guardrail beam, furnishing and installing delineators and all hardware. Salvaged guardrail beam installed on a radius of 150 feet or less shall be shop-curved; will be measured in linear feet and will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot of installed salvaged guardrail beam. Adjust existing guardrail beam will be measured in linear feet and will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot. This price shall include disassembling and removing guardrail beam and offset block(s) from the existing posts; drilling the existing posts and offset blocks; and reinstalling the offset blocks, guardrail beam, end terminals and associated hardware to the required height. When specified as a separate bid item, rub rail will be measured in linear feet for the type specified and will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot. This price shall include furnishing and installing the type of the rub rail specified, rub rail offset blocks, and all hardware. When specified as a separate bid item, guardrail terminal site preparation will be measured in units of each per site and will be paid for at the contract unit price per each site.




The price for guardrail terminal site preparation shall also include clearing and grubbing; supplying, hauling, and placing fill material; benching existing slopes; and restoration of site including fertilizing and seeding. These prices shall also include excavating; backfilling holes; installing delineators; repairing damaged surfaces; furnishing, galvanizing, and erecting units; furnishing concrete anchor assemblies; and drilling or preboring. Bull nose barrier will be measured in units of each and will be paid for at the contract unit price per each. This price shall include furnishing and placing foundation soil tubes, concrete, polystyrene sheeting, welded wire fabric, posts, radial guardrail, offset blocks, hardware, and delineators. Payment will be made under: Item No. Pay Item Pay Unit 190505-1 Remove Existing Guardrail Linear Foot 190505-2 Guardrail Linear Foot END OF SECTION 190505



MAINTAINING TRAFFIC 190512 - 1

SECTION 190512 – MAINTAINING TRAFFIC 190512.01 DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of maintaining traffic and protecting workers through temporary work areas, maintaining public and private entrances and mailbox turnouts, constructing and obliterating temporary traffic Diversions, providing positive guidance to the traveling public within the limits of the work area and over approved traffic Detours. All work shall be in accordance with the Virginia Work Area Protection Manual (VWAPM), the Virginia Supplement to the MUTCD, the MUTCD, the Standard Drawings, and the Contract, as directed by the COTR. 190512.02 MATERIALS

(a) Materials salvaged from the roadway shall be used in the maintenance of traffic insofar as possible. Material shall conform to the applicable specifications for the intended work or use.

(b) Signalization, barricades, channelizing devices, safety devices, and pavement markings

shall conform to the applicable specification requirements in Division VII of the Specifications and the VWAPM except where otherwise indicated. Retroreflective surfaces shall conform to Sections 190235, 190238, 190247, and 190702 as applicable.

(c) Temporary pavement markers shall conform to Section 190235. (d) Flexible temporary pavement markers (FTPMs) shall consist of products from the

Materials Division Approved Products List 22. All FTPMs shall be new. FTPMs are suitable for use one year after the date of receipt when stored in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

(e) Temporary (Construction) pavement markings shall conform to Section 190246. (f) Temporary (Construction) signs for traffic control during construction, maintenance,

permits, utility, and incident management activities shall conform to Section 190247, Section 190701, and with the provisions herein.

Sign substrates for rigid temporary (construction) signs mounted on posts and temporary (construction) sign panels for overlays shall be either fabricated of aluminum at least 0.080inch thick, which shall be smooth, flat, and free of metal burrs and splinters; 0.4-inch-thick corrugated polypropylene; 0.4-inch-thick corrugated polyethylene plastic; or 0.079-inch-thick aluminum/plastic laminate. Sign substrate materials for signs mounted on drums, Type 3 barricades, and portable sign stands shall be as specified below and shall be the same material that was used when the device was tested and found to be in compliance with National Cooperative Highway Research Program (NCHRP) Report 350, Test Level 3, or of other materials allowed in the FHWA acceptance letter.




190512.03 PROCEDURES Traffic shall be maintained and protected in accordance with Section 017300. The Contractor shall schedule and perform the Work in a manner that provides minimum interference and maximum protection for public traffic. The Contractor’s personnel, equipment, machinery, tools, and supplies shall be kept outside the clear zone (VWAPM Appendix A) and clear of active traffic lanes and active pedestrian and bicycle facilities except as necessary for progressively prosecuting active work. The Contractor shall build stabilized construction entrances in work areas where there is a potential for work vehicles to track material from the work site onto a paved surface. Material that is spilled or tracked onto the traveled pavement during prosecution of the work shall be promptly removed. The Contractor shall maintain traffic control devices throughout construction requiring their use, which shall include but not be limited to, repositioning displaced devices including traffic barrier service, replacing due to inadequate structural integrity including traffic barrier service, replacing due to loss of reflectivity, repairing defaced sheeting and legend, replacing broken supports, repositioning leaning signs so they are plumb and the sign face is perpendicular to the pavement edge, cleaning dirty devices, replacing and repositioning due to weather related conditions, and replacing stolen, vandalized or damaged devices. Safety and protective devices furnished by the Contractor shall remain the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the project site upon completion of the work or as directed by the COTR. The Contractor shall inspect all temporary traffic control devices, barriers, and other safety devices daily and periodically throughout the day. Traffic switches/changes, repairs or adjustments to temporary traffic control devices shall be documented on the Work Zone Safety Checklist form. Nighttime reviews shall be conducted twice monthly on long-term stationary projects and documented on the Work Zone Safety Checklist form and a copy submitted to the COTR. Replacement and correction of ineffective work zone traffic control devices shall be accomplished in accordance with the American Traffic Safety Service Association’s (ATSSA) Quality Standards for Work Zone Traffic Control Devices with the following additions and exceptions:

1. Replacing and correcting temporary (construction) pavement markings and markers shall conform to the requirements herein.

2. The categories for “Arrow Board (Flashing Arrow and Double Arrow Mode)” are

replaced by the following:

Acceptable: No required lamps out in stem and arrow heads, and dimming properly.




Marginal: No more than 1 required lamp out in the stem, no lamps out in the heads, and dimming properly. Unacceptable: Any lamp out in the heads, more than 1 required lamp out in the stem, or arrow board not dimming properly.

3. “Arrow Board (Chevron Mode)” is replaced by the following:

EVALUATION GUIDE ARROW BOARD (Chevron Mode) Acceptable: No lamps out in any chevron segment and dimming properly. Marginal: Not more than 1 lamp out in a maximum of 1 chevron segment and dimming properly. Unacceptable: 2 or more lamps out in any one chevron segment or 1 lamp out on 2 or more chevron segments or not dimming properly.

4. “Arrow Board (Caution Mode Corners)” is replaced by the following:

EVALUATION GUIDE ARROW BOARD (CAUTION MODE CORNERS) Acceptable: No lamps out and dimming properly. Unacceptable: Any lamp out or arrow board not dimming properly.

Any operating lamp in an arrow board display that is misaligned and does not meet minimum visibility requirements will be considered nonfunctioning and out. The Contractor shall correct “Unacceptable” arrow board conditions immediately. The color of Automated Flagger Assistance Device trailers, arrow board trailers, portable traffic control signal trailers, ITS trailer equipment, and portable changeable message sign trailers and sign frames shall be either Virginia highway orange (DuPont Color No. LF74279 AT or color equivalent) or federal yellow. The back traffic facing trailer frame, where the signal and brake lights are located, shall be fully covered with 2 inch high retroreflective sheeting conforming to Section 190247.02(c). The sheeting shall have alternating 11 inch wide vertical red stripes and 7 inch wide vertical white stripes. Stationary Automated Flagger Assistance Devices, portable traffic control signal trailers, ITS equipment trailers, portable changeable message sign trailers and arrow board trailers located within the clear zone shall be delineated with a minimum of four (4) Group 2 Drums, installed in advance of the device and spaced appropriately for the posted speed limit. Four Group 1 Cones may be substituted for Group 2 Drums in advance of arrow board trailers in short-term stationary and short duration applications.

(a) Temporary (Construction) Signs: The Contractor shall furnish, install, remove, relocate, and maintain temporary (construction) signs and/or sign panels necessary for prosecution of the work which shall include but not be limited to, maintenance of traffic, off project detour signs and begin and end of road work for construction, maintenance, permit, utility, and incident management activities. The Contractor shall also furnish and install those signs not listed in the VWAPM, the Virginia Supplement to the MUTCD, the




MUTCD, or the Contract (such as “Turn Lane Open with arrow” and “Grooved Pavement Ahead”) that may be required by the COTR.

The Contractor shall fabricate or obtain signs which meet the design standards of the Virginia Supplement to the MUTCD, VWAPM, Virginia Standard Highway Sign book, the MUTCD, and the Standard Highway Signs and Markings book and it’s Supplement. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings for any regulatory or warning signs not found in these manuals to the COTR for approval prior fabrication or installation. The shop drawing shall include sign size, legend, font, legend dimensions, radius, border, margins, sheeting type, and colors. The Contractor shall relocate, cover, uncover, remove, and/or reinstall existing signs that conflict with the signs needed for maintenance of traffic. Covering existing signs shall be accomplished in accordance with Section 190701.03(d). The Contractor shall also ensure an unrestricted view of sign messages. The Contractor shall furnish and install flags for temporary (construction) signs, as directed by the COTR; however, flags will not be required for use on portable sign supports. Signs and their placement shall conform to the VWAPM, the Virginia Supplement to the MUTCD, the MUTCD, the Contract, and as directed by the COTR. When the sign layout is not provided in the plans, either by illustration or reference to a typical traffic control figure in the VWAPM, the Contractor shall submit a sketch of his proposed temporary (construction) sign layout to the COTR for approval before installation. The Contractor shall furnish sign supports, i.e., wood posts, square tube posts, or alternate posts, barrier and wall attachments, and hardware for use with the temporary (construction) signs. Signs shall be installed and attached to wooden supports or square tube sign post in accordance with Standard WSP-1 of the Standard Drawings with the exception of the top of the sign post, which may extend no more than two feet above the top of the sign. The size and number of supports shall be in accordance with the details in the Standards. Retroreflective rollup sign base materials conforming to Section 190247 may be used for both daytime and nighttime operations up to a maximum of three consecutive days (72 continuous hours). The Contractor shall furnish portable sign stands for mounting temporary (construction) signs in accordance with the following:

1. Portable sign stands for sign installations, their placement, and the allowed time

of use in lieu of post installation, shall conform to the VWAPM, the Virginia Supplement to the MUTCD, the MUTCD, the Contract, and as directed by the COTR.

2. Portable sign stands shall be used with signs having a substrate material of the

type required in Section 190512.02(f) and that were tested and found to be in compliance with NCHRP Report 350, Test Level 3, Manual for Assessing Hardware (MASH), or otherwise accepted in an FHWA acceptance letter for the specific sign stand.

Portable sign stands shall conform to NCHRP Report 350, Test Level 3, and/or MASH, and shall be selected from those shown on the VDOT NCHRP-350 Approved List. The




Contractor shall submit a certification letter stating the brands and models of portable sign stands to be used along with a copy of the FHWA acceptance letter indicating compliance with NCHRP Report 350, Test Level 3, or MASH. Portable sign stands shall be self-erecting and shall accommodate signs of the shape planned for use on the project. Portable sign stands shall support a 20 square foot sign in sustained winds of 50 miles per hour or wind gusts of passing vehicles without tipping over, walking, or rotating more than ±5 degrees about its vertical axis. Additional weight consisting of no more than one sandbag weighing approximately 25 pounds placed on each leg or no more than two drum collar weights positioned on the center of the sign stand and around the mast may be used to comply with this requirement. When used on uneven surfaces, the portable sign stand shall be capable of adjusting to such surfaces to allow the signs to be placed approximately plumb to their position ±15 degrees. Portable sign stands shall include decals, stenciling, or some other durable marking system that indicates the manufacturer and model number of the stands. Such marking shall be of sufficient size so it is clearly legible to a person in a standing position. When a portable sign stand is used to mount a temporary STOP (R1-1) sign, YIELD (R1-2) sign, EXIT OPEN (E5-2) sign, EXIT CLOSED (E5-2a) sign, EXIT (E5-V1) sign and TURN LANE (M4-V8L) sign, the sign shall be mounted at least 7 feet from the pavement surface to the bottom of the sign on intermediate-term, stationary operations or work operations of less work durations. For long term stationary projects, these signs shall be post mounted. The Contractor shall erect, maintain, move, and be responsible for the security of sign panels and shall ensure an unrestricted view of sign messages for the safety of traffic. The Contractor shall cover the entire sign face with opaque material approved by the Engineer when temporary (construction) signs are required to be covered to prevent the display of the sign message. Plywood shall only be used to cover post mounted temporary (construction) signs. Sign covering material attachment methods shall be a durable construction that will prevent the unintentional detachment of the material from the sign. At no time shall a temporary (construction) sign on post or portable sign support be rotated to prevent the display of the message. The Contractor shall mount two ED-3 Type II delineators vertically on the posts of covered signs below the signs at a height of 4 feet to the top of the uppermost delineator. The bottom delineator shall be mounted 6 inches below the top delineator. The color of the delineator shall match the color of the pavement marking edge line. If no edge lines exist, the delineator shall be white.

(b) Flagger Service: The Contractor shall provide flagger service in accordance with Section

017300. (c) Automatic Flagger Assistance Device (AFAD): An AFAD system consists of two or

more paired AFAD devices of the same make and model, allowing the paired system to be operated remotely by one or more operators. The trailers or carts and all mounted equipment shall be structurally adequate for unlimited normal operation in wind velocities up to 80 mph.

AFAD use shall conform to Sections 6E.04 and 6E.05 or 6E.06 of the VWAPM and this specification.




AFADs purchased prior to the effective date of these Specifications shall meet the requirements of the VWAPM. The Contractor shall submit proof of purchase and a letter certifying that their AFAD meets the requirements of the VWAPM. All operators shall exclusively operate their AFAD in the AFAD system. The operating remote shall be capable of working the STOP/SLOW Sign AFAD and its flashing beacons or the CIRCULAR RED/YELLOW Lens AFAD and their intrusion alarm. The minimum communication range between the AFADs shall be one mile. The AFAD unit shall be equipped with a manual override system in case the remote fails. The gate arm shall be made of a lightweight rigid material that deflects if an errant vehicle strikes the gate arm. The gate arm shall deflect and return to a functional position after the errant vehicle clears the gate arm. The height of the bottom of gate arm to the crown of the roadway shall be a minimum of 3.5 feet to a maximum of 4.5 feet. Transition between STOP and SLOW Conditions The gate arm shall begin descent to the down position no less than 2 seconds or more than 4 seconds after the AFAD unit displays the STOP face or Red Lens for approaching traffic to stop. The gate arm shall begin ascent to the upright position not less than 1 second or more than 2 seconds prior to display of the SLOW face or the Yellow Lens that allows stopped traffic to proceed.

STOP/SLOW AFAD Transition between STOP and SLOW Conditions:

Slow to Stop: The RED lens beacon shall enter a “flashing mode” at least 5 seconds before transitioning from the SLOW face to the STOP face. Immediately upon completion of the transition to display of the STOP face, the “flashing mode” of the RED lens beacon shall transition to a steadily illuminated condition. Stop to Slow: The gate arm shall begin its ascent to the upright position not less than 1 second prior to the initiation of the transition from the STOP face to the SLOW face. The RED lens beacon shall cease to illuminate and the flashing YELLOW lens beacon shall begin to illuminate immediately upon completion of the transition of the STOP face to the SLOW face and the ascent of the gate arm to its completed upright position.

RED/YELLOW lens AFAD Transition between RED and YELLOW Conditions:

Yellow to Red: A flashing CIRCULAR YELLOW lens shall enter a steady illumination phase for a minimum of 5 seconds prior to transitioning to the steady illuminated Circular RED indication. The gate arm shall remain in the upright position during the display of the illuminated CIRCULAR YELLOW change interval.

Red to Yellow: The gate arm shall complete its ascent to the upright position within 1 to 2 seconds prior to flashing Circular YELLOW lens illumination. The illuminated Circular RED lens shall transition to the flashing Circular YELLOW lens. A change interval shall not be provided between the display of the




CIRCULAR RED indication and the display of the flashing CIRCULAR YELLOW indication.

When approved by the COTR, AFADs that are not specified on the plans but are installed by the Contractor for the Contractor’s convenience to maintain traffic will be measured and paid for as Flagger Service and shall conform to the requirements above. AFADs shall not be used as Portable Temporary Signals.

(d) Pilot Vehicles: Where necessary and approved by the COTR, the Contractor shall provide

pilot vehicles in conjunction with flagger service to maintain two-way traffic. Each vehicle shall be equipped with at least one roof mounted vehicle warning light and shall display required signs conforming to Chapter 6F of the VWAPM while in service.

(e) Electronic Arrows: Electronic arrows shall be electronic flashing amber arrow or

sequential chevron amber arrow or flashing amber four corner caution having dimmer controls and shall be mounted on suitable trucks or trailers. The Contractor shall maintain, deploy, and move electronic arrows as needed for traffic control.

(f) Warning Lights:

1. Type A flashing lights shall be used for advance warning signs and may be

placed at hazardous locations on Group 2 channelizing devices according to FHWA acceptance letter WZ-54, and shall be in operation during hours of darkness and low visibility.

2. Type B flashing lights shall be used when specified on the plans for advanced

warning signs and extremely hazardous locations. A Type B flashing light shall be installed on traffic barrier service at the beginning of the barrier run and at the breakpoint where the barrier becomes parallel to the roadway. A Type B flashing light shall also be used to delineate the breakpoints of a pull-off area. On two-way roadways where one lane is closed to traffic with traffic barrier service, the Type B flashing lights shall face the barrier transition (flare rate) for both barrier breakpoint directions. Type B flashing lights shall be in operation at all times except when used by Contractors to notify motorists of increased fines in a work zone when workers are present.

3. Type C steady burn lights shall be used when specified on the plans for

channeling traffic and may be placed on Group 2 channelizing devices in accordance with FHWA acceptance letter WZ-54. Type C steady burn lights shall be placed at intervals of 80 feet along tangent sections and 40 feet along bridges, transitions, and curves greater than 6 degrees.

4. Type D 360 degree steady burn lights shall be used when specified on the plans

for channeling traffic and may be placed on Group 2 channelizing devices.

Type A, Type C and Type D warning lights shall be in operation from 30 minutes before sunset until 30 minutes after sunrise, on heavy overcast days, in fog, and during periods of darkness or low visibility, or as directed by the COTR.




When Type A or C warning lights are used on Group 2 channelizing devices, they shall comply with FHWA acceptance letter WZ-54. Otherwise, a FHWA issued acceptance letter indicating compliance with NCHRP Report 350, Test Level 3, or MASH as required in (f) herein shall be submitted to the COTR before being authorized for use on the project. When Type D warning lights are used on Group 2 channelizing devices, the channelizing devices shall have been crash tested with the warning light and a FHWA issued acceptance letter indicating compliance with NCHRP Report 350, Test Level 3, or MASH as required in (f) herein shall be submitted to the COTR being authorized for use on the project.

(g) Channelizing Devices: Channelizing devices shall conform to NCHRP Report 350, Test

Level 3, or MASH. All retroreflective sheeting for channelizing devices shall conform to Section 190247. The Contractor shall provide catalog cuts/brochures of each brand and model and a certification letter stating the brands and models of channelizing devices conform to the specification and comply with the following before their use on the project.

1. Channelizing devices except drums/cones with an auxiliary device attached and

portable vertical panel assemblies: The Contractor shall provide the COTR a copy of a letter from the manufacturer certifying that the specific channelizing device is crashworthy, i.e., that it will comply with the evaluation criteria specified in NCHRP Report 350 or MASH. This certification may be a one page affidavit signed by the manufacturer.

2. Drums/cones with an auxiliary device attached, and portable vertical panel

assemblies with or without an auxiliary device attached: The Contractor shall provide the COTR a copy of the FHWA acceptance letter indicating compliance with NCHRP Report 350, Test Level 3, and or MASH.

Spacing of all listed and non-listed channelizing devices shall be in accordance with the VWAPM.

a. Group 1 devices shall consist of tubular markers and cones ranging from

36 inches to 42 inches in height conforming to the VWAPM. They shall be used as temporary channelizing devices. Tubular markers and cones shall be provided with retroreflective collars or sleeves conforming to Section 190247 when used during hours of darkness.

b. Group 2 devices shall be drums, vertical panels, directional indicator

barriers, longitudinal channelizing devices or pedestrian channelizing devices.

1) Drums shall be round or partially round; made from plastic; have

a minimum height of 36 inches; have a cross-sectional width no less than 18 inches in any direction; have a closed top; and shall conform to the VWAPM. Drums shall be designed to allow for separation of ballast and drum upon vehicular impact but not from wind and vacuum created by passing vehicles. The base of




the unit height shall not exceed 5 inches. Two-piece drums may have a flared drum foundation, a collar not exceeding 5 inches in height and be of suitable shape and weight to provide stable support. One-piece drums that comply with these requirements may be used. Drum retroreflective sheeting shall be selected from the Materials Division’s Approved Products List 46 and conform to the VWAPM. Drums shall be used in all unmanned work zone locations and shall also be used to delineate the locations of all non-crashworthy trailer mounted devices such as but not limited to intelligent transportation systems (ITS), Portable Changeable Message Sign, Highway Advisory Radio, Speed Trailers, CB Wizards, ITS cameras, Portable Traffic Control Signals, AFAD units, etc. as well as light towers. Drums shall be used to delineate merging tapers on limited access highways during nighttime operations and the location of Electronic Arrow Boards. The Contractor shall furnish and install signs (Stop, Chevron, Keep Right, etc.) for drums as directed by the COTR. Signs used on drums shall be tested for conformance with NCHRP 350, Test Level 3, and/or MASH requirements and shall be made of the same material used in the test. The Contractor may use other materials allowed by the FHWA acceptance letter when approved by the COTR.

2) Vertical panels shall be selected from those shown on the VDOT

NCHRP 350 Approved List. 3) Direction indicator barricades shall consist of a One Direction

Large Arrow sign mounted above a diagonal striped, horizontally aligned, retroreflective rail. The One Direction Large Arrow shall be black on orange. The rail shall have alternating diagonal orange and white 4 inch stripes sloping downward at a 45 degree angle in the direction vehicular traffic is to pass. The sign and bottom rail shall have a length of 24 inches and a height of 12 inches.

4) Longitudinal channelizing devices shall be at least 36 inches in

height and interlocked. If used at night, longitudinal channelizing devices shall be supplemented with retroreflective material for delineation.

5) Pedestrian barricade devices shall be at least 36 inches in height.

Pedestrian barricade devices shall be interlocked and, if used at night, supplemented with retroreflective material or delineation. Pedestrian barricade devices shall have a continuous detectable




edge at least 6 inches above the walkway surface and be of a contrasting color to the walkway surface. A maximum 2 inch gap above the ground surface may be used to facilitate drainage.

All longitudinal channelizing and pedestrian barricade devices used to guide pedestrians shall be interlocked barricades without gaps that allow pedestrians to stray from the channelized path; be free of sharp, splintered or rough edges with all fasteners installed below the surface and capped.

(h) Traffic Barrier Service: Barrier service shall be of sufficient length to provide anchorage

and protection of traffic and personnel in work areas.

The Contractor shall begin continuous progressive prosecution of the work protected by the barrier once the barrier is in place until its completion. If the Contractor ceases to continuously prosecute such work, the COTR may cause the Contractor to discontinue operations in other areas on the project and concentrate work efforts behind the traffic barrier service until that work is completed. The Contractor shall remove the traffic barrier service when the COTR determines work is completed to the extent that traffic barrier service is no longer required. While performing work activities, workers and equipment shall remain behind the protection of the traffic barrier service except as approved by the COTR. Work outside traffic barrier service protection shall only proceed under the protection and direction of approved traffic control devices or flagger service to safeguard workers and traffic in advance of and at the point the traffic barrier service is opened for ingress or egress adjacent to the travel lane. The COTR will not permit any equipment extending into an open travel lane. Barrier openings for access to the work area may be provided only along tangent sections or along curved sections on the inside of traffic and shall be limited to the minimum length required for equipment access. The Contractor shall delineate and maintain normal pavement alignment at the barrier opening with Type D pavement marking. At ingress openings, the exposed end of the barrier service shall be provided with a temporary impact attenuator approved by the Engineer. At egress openings, the exposed end shall be transitioned at a rate that complies with the Virginia Work Area Protection Manual. For speeds below 30 miles per hour, the transition flare rate shall be the same as that indicated for 30 miles per hour. An impact attenuator will not be required at the exposed end of egress openings in barrier service provided the deflection angle between the pavement edge and ends of the barrier service openings is 20 degrees or more.

Repairs to traffic barrier service shall match existing barrier so that positive connections can be maintained. Delineators from the Materials Division’s Approved Products List 27 shall be designed and installed on traffic barrier service in accordance with the VWAPM. Barrier panels shall be installed on top of the concrete barrier service. Retroreflectorized sheeting shall comply with Section 190247 and be on the Materials Division’s Approved Products List 46. The Contractor shall maintain the structural integrity of the barrier and its alignment while it is in use and shall maintain any associated warning lights, barrier delineators, barrier panels, and other devices in functional, clean and visible conditions at all times.




1. Guardrail barrier service and terminal treatments shall be installed in accordance with Section 190505 except that the offset distance shall be as specified by the COTR. The Contractor may be permitted to reuse guardrail and/or its hardware used for traffic barrier service guardrail for permanent installation provided the guardrail material is acceptable to the COTR and conforms to Section 190505 and the Standard Drawings for such guardrail. Marred galvanized surfaces shall be repaired in accordance with Section 190233. Terminal treatments (St’d GR-7 and St’d GR-9) shall be permanently identified with a device specific Manufacturers’ identification number by stamping or marking with a durable weather resistant material in accordance with Section 33.274.1 of the Code.

2. Traffic barrier service shall be installed in accordance with the plans and standard

drawings or as directed by the COTR, who will design according to Appendix A of the VWAPM. When traffic barrier ends at guardrail, fixed object attachment methods for construction zone shall be used to connect the barrier to the guardrail. Installation shall include additional guardrail posts and attachments as required. The traffic barrier, at a minimum, shall be tapered with the end of the barrier located behind the adjacent guardrail post in accordance to the VWAPM. Barrier connections shall be snug to prevent motion between sections.

Traffic barrier service used as a parapet shall be anchored as shown on the plans. Anchor holes in bridge decks shall be drilled with a rotary impact drill or other approved equipment that will limit damage to the deck. Anchor holes shall be located to avoid cutting reinforcing steel. Upon removal of the parapet, anchor holes shall be cleaned and filled with Type EP-4 or EP-5 epoxy mortar conforming to Section 190243. The Department will not permit the use of concrete traffic barrier service for permanent installations on bridge structures. Traffic barrier service shall be selected from those shown on the VDOT NCHRP 350 Approved List or those approved by the COTR and shall be interlocking barrier of the same design or type. The Contractor shall visually inspect all traffic barrier service shipped to a project before placing it in use. Concrete barrier sections shall be structurally sound with no concrete missing along the top, bottom, sides, or end sections of the barrier; no through cracks; and no exposed rebar. The Contractor shall promptly remove any traffic barrier service found by the Contractor or COTR to be unacceptable due to inadequate structural integrity or functionality and replace the concrete barrier service at no cost to the Department. Concrete barrier service shall be cleaned or coated sufficiently to afford good visibility and uniformity of appearance. All metal traffic barrier service shall meet NCHRP 350 or MASH and be on the VDOT NCHRP 350 Approved List. The COTR will review and must approve the layout and anchorage method for job specific applications before the barrier is authorized for installation. Traffic barriers service not shown on the plans may be used at the request of the Contractor at the Contractor’s expense.




(i) Impact Attenuator Service: The Contractor shall install impact attenuator service at locations shown on the plans or designated by the COTR. An object marker for temporary impact attenuator shall be installed on the attenuator according to the details shown in the standard drawings. The object marker for impact attenuator service shall have reflective sheeting conforming to Section 190247 featuring alternating diagonal black and orange 3 inch stripes sloping downward at an angle of 45 degrees in the direction vehicular traffic is to pass. Reflective sheeting shall be on the Materials Division’s Approved Products List 46. Impact attenuators shall be permanently identified with a device specific Manufacturers’ identification number by stamping or marking with a durable weather resistant material in accordance with § 33.2-274.1 of the Code of Virginia.

Only Type 1 re-directive impact attenuators shall be used on Limited Access highways with posted speed limits greater than 50 mph. Impact Attenuator Service not shown on the plans may be used at the request of the Contractor for the Contractor’s convenience at the Contractor’s expense. All impact attenuator service shall be reviewed and approved by the Location and Design Division Standards/Special Design Section before installation.

(j) Traffic Signals: The Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain, relocate, and remove

existing, temporary, and/or proposed traffic signal equipment and all necessary hardware as needed and as many times as necessary throughout the duration of construction to maintain operations at traffic signals. The Contractor shall revise the signal equipment, signal phasing, signal sequencing and signal timing as many times as deemed necessary or as directed by the COTR.

Modify Signal or a Temporary Traffic Control Signal for maintenance of traffic shall be in accordance with the Contract or the Contractor’s approved modifications for maintenance of traffic. Modify Signal and Temporary Traffic Control Signal, when specified in the contract, shall be used as follows:

Modify Signal: The Contractor shall modify and maintain equipment and traffic operations at each existing traffic signal within the project limits, or a traffic signal at any other location specified in the contract, at all times or as specified in the contract. Existing signal equipment on the site, signal equipment brought to the site, revised signal equipment, proposed equipment, or any combination thereof shall be used.

Temporary Traffic Control Signal: The Contractor shall install a temporary traffic control signal at a location shown on the plans that is not currently signalized. The Contractor shall keep this temporary traffic signal operational at all times specified in the contract by using temporary signal equipment brought to the site.

A portable traffic control signal is a traffic control signal assembly, inclusive of signals and supports, which is designed to be easily transported and reused at different locations.




Typically, a portable trailer is used with Portable Traffic Control signals. When indicated in the contract or approved by the COTR, the Contractor may use a Portable Traffic Control Signal during signal modification or as a Temporary Traffic Control Signal.

Unless otherwise specified, when the Contractor is required to supply documentation and/or plans to the COTR as specified below, a copy of the required documentation and/or accepted plans shall be maintained in a watertight enclosure within the signal cabinet. The Contractor shall maintain communications with existing signals unless otherwise noted in the contract and provide communications to temporary traffic signals when noted in the contract so that the Department has online access to the signal controller and any other signal equipment specified in the contract.

1. Plans:

a. Signal layout plans: When the Contractor proposes an alternate traffic

control signal method or traffic control signal layout from that presented in the Contract, or when a Contractor prepared signal layout is specified in the Contract, the Contractor shall submit to the COTR a plan depicting the Contractor’s design for maintaining traffic flows.

This plan shall be submitted for approval at least 30 days before implementation. A separate plan shall be submitted before each construction phase change that necessitates revision to the location of any signal supports, signal heads, cabinets, and/or controllers as well as revisions to signal phasing or phase sequencing.

The Contractor’s design shall conform to the MUTCD, the Virginia Supplement to the MUTCD, the Virginia Work Area Protection Manual and Division VII. This plan shall depict: • Intersection configuration, including the locations of lanes,

curbs, sidewalks, pavement areas, stop line(s), and other geometric features

• The location of traffic signal supports, including trailers for portable traffic control signals

• Vehicular and/or pedestrian signal heads • Controllers and/or cabinets • Detection areas including type of detection • Signal phasing and phase sequencing

b. Signal timing plans: When specified in the Contract, the Contractor shall

submit a timing plan to the COTR for each location where signal modification and/or Temporary Traffic Control Signal is specified. The timing plan shall include the applicable timing data specified in the Contract. A timing plan shall be submitted for approval at least 30 days before activation of a signal modification or a temporary traffic control signal and before each construction phase change that necessitates




revisions to signal phasing, phase sequencing, removal/addition of lanes, intersection widths, and/or pedestrian crossing widths.

When the Contractor proposes to revise the clearance (yellow) and/or change (red) interval durations from the existing durations upon initiation of signal modification or those shown in the Contract, the Contractor shall submit the proposed modifications to the COTR for approval. All clearance (yellow) interval and change (red) interval calculations shall be determined in accordance with Traffic Engineering Memorandum 306.1 (or any document that supersedes Traffic Engineering Memorandum 306.1).

c. Professional Engineer signing and sealing: Signal layout plans and

Change and Clearance Interval calculations shall be prepared by or prepared directly under the supervision of a Professional Engineer licensed to practice engineering in the Commonwealth of Virginia.

2. Equipment: Existing traffic control signal equipment on the project site may be

used during signal modifications and/or for Temporary Traffic Control Signals.

New, salvaged, or refurbished traffic control signal equipment brought to the project site for use during existing signal modifications and/or at temporary traffic control signals shall conform to the Specifications for new installations except that the controller, accessory, auxiliary, and conflict monitoring equipment may conform to NEMA TS-1 (Functional Standards), or as approved by the COTR. The Contractor may use new signal equipment for existing signal modifications or for signal modifications that will remain in place upon completion of the work. Such signal equipment shall meet the Specifications for new traffic control devices at the time of testing and acceptance of the permanent signal installation. All Contractor supplied signal equipment or appurtenances that will remain the Contractor’s property shall be included in the contract Lump Sum price for these items. Furnishing and final installation of permanent signal equipment or appurtenances will not be paid for under this item. Relocation of any permanent signal equipment or appurtenances from the temporary location(s) to the permanent location shall be included in the cost of these items. Portable traffic control signals shall conform to the following:

a. phase sequencing, timings, and conflict monitoring complying with

NEMA TS-1 (Functional Standards). b. 5 programmable day programs within a 24 hour period.




c. 12 inch aluminum or polycarbonate traffic signal head sections with

backplates mounted in the vertical display arrangement. Aluminum backplates shall be used with aluminum signal heads. Plastic backplates shall be used with polycarbonate signal heads. Signal head sections may be mounted in the horizontal display arrangement when approved by the COTR. Signal head sections and backplates shall conform to Section 190238.

d. be equipped with vehicular detection that will detect all vehicles unless

otherwise indicated in the Contract. e. adequate safeguards to prevent unauthorized entry to the control

equipment. f. be a trailer mounted type with at least one of the two traffic signal heads

positioned over the travelway with a minimum 16 feet of clearance from the pavement to the lowest point of the signal head assembly.

g. operate from its own self-contained power supply with the capability of

connecting to an external 110 VAC electrical power supply. When operating from a self-contained solar power supply, the battery backup shall be capable of operating for 18 continuous days at 77 degrees F without solar array assistance.

h. be designed to comply in the operating mode with wind loading

conditions associated with wind gusts of 80 miles per hour as specified in AASHTO’s 1994 Standard Specifications for Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires, and Traffic Signals.

3. Procedures: The Contractor shall maintain existing traffic control signals in

accordance with the Contract or the approved Plans in accordance with Section 190512.03(i)1.

Installation of signal heads, span wire, tether wire, and rigging shall conform to Section 190703.03 as applicable unless otherwise approved by the COTR. Installation of cables, conduit, electrical service, grounding systems, and signal structures shall conform to Section 190700.04 unless otherwise approved by the COTR. Temporary and portable traffic control signals that are not specified on the plans but are installed by the Contractor to support his operations shall be installed at the Contractor’s expense and approved by the COTR prior to use.

a. Signal maintenance and operational responsibility:

The Contractor shall maintain and operate Temporary Traffic Control Signals from initial activation until the Temporary Traffic Control Signal is removed or until the permanent signal installed at the location of the




Temporary Traffic Control Signal is accepted by the Department in accordance with Section 190703. When an existing signalized intersection is used during construction, the existing intersection with all accepted modifications shall become the sole responsibility of the Department upon successful completion of the Local Intersection Acceptance Test in accordance with Section 190703. The Contractor shall maintain and operate existing traffic signals upon any signal modification until the signals are no longer required and are removed or the until permanent signal equipment installed at the location and/or final signal equipment modifications are accepted by the Department in accordance with Section 190703. Before modifying signals, the Contractor shall inspect the existing traffic signal installation and verify its working condition in the presence of the COTR. Upon completion of the inspection and verification that the signal is functioning properly, the COTR will provide the Contractor written notice that maintenance responsibility for the signal has been transferred to the Contractor. The Contractors’ responsibility for signal maintenance and operation shall begin at the date and time indicated on the written notice.

b. Traffic signal outages, malfunctions and emergencies: The Contractor

shall be responsible for responding to, assessing and correcting all traffic signal outages, malfunctions, and emergency situations identified by the COTR at locations for which the Contractor has assumed maintenance and operational responsibility. The Contractor shall furnish the COTR with the emergency contact information of the supervisory employee of his company who shall be responsible for repair calls during all hours, including weekends, holidays, and any other times the Contractor is not on site at the intersection. The emergency contact information shall include the employee’s name, phone number, email address and mobile number.

The following procedure shall be used when the Contractor is required to respond to an outage, malfunction, or other issue at a signal for which he has maintenance responsibility:

1) The COTR will notify the Contractor of the location of the

outage, malfunction, or other issue. Notifications may be by phone, email, or other communications methods.

2) The Contractor shall acknowledge receipt of the COTR’s

notification within thirty (30) minutes after being notified. The Contractor shall respond via the same means as the original notification or by other approved method.

3) The Contractor shall arrive to the site within ninety (90) minutes

of the Engineer’s initial notification. The Contractor shall notify the COTR upon arrival at the site.




4) The Contractor shall assess the situation and provide a diagnostic

report to the COTR within one hour of arrival onsite. The diagnostic report shall include details of the issue, the work necessary to complete the repair, and the estimated duration to make the repair.

5) The COTR will direct the Contractor to immediately make the

repair or to take other action relative to the issue. If the Contractor does not acknowledge receipt of the COTR’s notification as indicated in 2) above or does not arrive at the site within 90 minutes as indicated in 3) above, the Department may mobilize to the site, assess the situation, and take whatever action or make such repairs as it deems necessary in accordance with Section 017300, and assess a per hour, per location nonresponse fee of the amount specified in the contract for each hour, or portion thereof, starting at either the time of initial notification by the COTR. The assessment of this fee shall terminate either: when the Department leaves the site (if the Department has arrived on the site) or when the Contractor receives direction from the COTR (if the Department has not arrived on the site). This shall in no way relieve the Contractor of his responsibility for maintaining and operating the signal and completing the work.

At the time of notification or at any time while the Contractor is in route to the site, the Contractor may request additional time to respond to the site due to inclement weather or circumstances beyond the Contractor’s control. Approval of additional response time will be determined by the COTR.

c. Electrical Service: The Contractor shall make arrangements with the

local utility company for electrical service for Temporary Traffic Control Signals or for new service required during signal modifications, which shall include the cost of connection, disconnection, and energy. If electrical service is not available, the Contractor shall provide a generator capable of continuously operating the temporary and portable traffic control signals for at least 24 hours unassisted. All temporary traffic control signals used to control alternating one-way traffic shall be equipped with an Uninterruptable Power Supply system in accordance with Section 190703. When generator power is used, all generator power shall be conditioned through an Uninterruptable Power Supply system in accordance with Section 190703.

(k) Temporary (Construction) Pavement Markings: Temporary (construction) pavement

markings shall be installed at locations shown on the plans, in the Virginia Work Area Protection Manual, and at other locations as directed by the COTR. Temporary (construction) pavement markings shall conform to Section 190704 and be selected from the Materials Division’s Approved Products Lists 17 and 48. Temporary (construction) pavement markings are classified as Type A or B (temporary (construction) markings),




Type D, Classes II and III (removable tape), and Type E (non-reflective black removable tape).Temporary (construction) pavement markings shall be used as follows:

1. Type A or B pavement markings shall be used where the roadway is to be

resurfaced before changes in the traffic pattern or where pavement is to be demolished and traffic patterns will not change before demolition.

2. Type D, Class II or III pavement markings shall be used on final roadway

surfaces or in areas where traffic patterns are subject to change before pavement is resurfaced. Type D, Class III pavement markings shall be used on Limited Access highway projects, or other locations as shown on the plans. Type D, Class II pavement markings may be used on all other roadways except Limited Access highways when specified on the plans. Type D, Class III pavement markings may be used in place of Type D, Class II pavement markings at the contract price for Type D, Class II pavement markings.

The Contractor may install Type A or B pavement markings when the surface temperature of the pavement is below the manufacturer’s minimum application temperature for a Type D, Class II or III pavement marking, except on final pavement surfaces. In such cases, the Contractor shall select a Type A or B product known to perform the best under those temperature conditions. When a Type A or B pavement marking is used instead of a Type D pavement marking due to the surface temperature being below the manufacturer’s minimum application temperature, the Contractor will be paid the contract price for Type D, Class II or Class III pavement marking, which shall include the Type A or B markings and any necessary eradication of the Type A or B pavement markings.

3. Type E pavement markings shall be used to cover existing markings in

accordance with (l) herein.

The Contractor shall install temporary (construction) pavement markings in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Application thickness and bead application shall comply with the manufacturer’s recommendations except as follows. If the manufacturer’s recommendation for material thickness and quantity of beads is less than that used when the material was tested by the National Transportation Product Evaluation Program (NTPEP), the minimum product application rates shall conform to the NTPEP approved test rates for the specific marking. The Contractor shall furnish a copy of the manufacturer’s installation recommendations including the NTPEP data for product thickness and glass bead quantities to the COTR.

The Contractor shall maintain the temporary (construction) pavement markings and shall correct any deficient markings by reapplying markings as directed or needed. The Department considers deficient temporary (construction) pavement markings as any markings that do not provide adequate guidance to motorists due to inadequate retroreflectivity, color qualities, or adherence to the pavement. The COTR will make a visual nighttime inspection of all temporary (construction) pavement markings to identify areas of markings that have inadequate retroreflectivity qualities. Other deficient qualities may be identified by visual inspection at any time.




Those markings that no longer adhere to the pavement which will cause guidance problems for motorists or that are inadequately retroreflective as determined by the COTR shall be replaced by the Contractor with the following exceptions:

a. Reapplication of skip line temporary (construction) pavement markings

is not required unless the pavement marking does not adhere or inadequate retroreflectivity qualities are present for at least two consecutive skip lines.

b. Reapplication of centerline (except skip lines) or edge line temporary

(construction) pavement markings is not required unless the pavement marking does not adhere or inadequate retroreflectivity qualities are present for a continuous section of at least seventy (70) feet.

c. Reapplication of transverse markings is not required unless the pavement

marking does not adhere or inadequate retroreflectivity qualities are present for a continuous section of at least three (3) feet.

All Type A or B pavement markings that no longer adhere to the roadway that may cause guidance problems for motorists shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor. The Contractor may take retroflectivity readings to counter visual observations by the COTR as the basis for replacement of temporary (construction) pavement markings. These measurements shall be taken within forty eight (48) hours after the Contractor has been notified of the visual determination by the COTR of deficient markings. The COTR will grant additional time to the Contractor when inclement weather prevents accurate measurement of the temporary (construction) pavement markings. The Contractor shall brush any form of debris from the marking before taking the retroflectivity readings. Retroflectivity measurements shall be taken in the presence of the COTR using Contractor furnished equipment conforming to ASTM E 1710. A copy of the operating instructions for the reflectometer shall be furnished to the COTR prior to taking the measurements. The Contractor shall operate the equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. The photometric quantity to be measured is the coefficient of retroreflected luminance (RL), which shall be expressed as millicandelas per square foot per footcandle. Measurements shall be taken at three (3) random locations within each area of markings that are suspected of being inadequately retroreflective. When the length of the questionable visually inspected area is greater than one (1) mile, the Contractor shall take measurements at three locations per mile segment or portion thereof. Measurements for all lines shall be taken in the middle of the line horizontally. Measurements for skip lines shall be taken in the middle of their length. Measurements for transverse lines shall be taken outside of the wheel path locations. The COTR will designate the locations along the line segments where the measurements shall be taken. The Contractor shall make a log of the measurements and their locations and provide a copy to the COTR. When the average of the three (3) readings for an area is below 100 millicandelas per square foot per footcandle, the Contractor shall reapply the markings as indicated.




Removable Type D temporary (construction) pavement markings shall be replaced within the time frames recommended by the markings manufacturer to prevent the need for eradication. The Contractor shall furnish the COTR a copy of the manufacturer’s recommendations. Temporary (construction) pavement markings found in need of reapplication in accordance with these requirements shall be reapplied by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Department with the following exceptions:

• Type D markings that have been under traffic for more than ninety (90) days will

be paid for at the contract unit price when reapplied unless the manufacturer’s warranty coverage is still applicable.

• Markings damaged by the Department’s snow removal or other maintenance and

construction operations will be paid for at the contract unit price.

Temporary (construction) pavement markings shall be replaced in accordance with the time requirements of Section 190704.

Eradication for reapplication of Type A or B pavement markings is not required if allowed by the marking manufacturer, provided the existing marking is well adhered and the total thickness of the existing and reapplied marking combined will not exceed 40 mils. If not well adhered, 90 percent of the existing markings shall be removed before reinstallation of the markings. Temporary pavement markers shall be installed with temporary (construction) pavement markings in accordance with paragraph (m) herein.

(l) Eradicating Pavement Markings: Markings that may conflict with desired traffic

movement, as determined by the COTR, shall be eradicated as soon as practicable: either immediately before the shifting of traffic or immediately thereafter and before the conclusion of the workday during which the traffic shift is made.

The Contractor shall perform eradication by grinding, blasting, or a combination thereof. Grinding shall be limited to removal of material above the pavement surface except when removing thermoplastic and preformed tape markings, which may be removed by grinding alone. Blasting shall be used on both asphalt concrete and hydraulic cement concrete pavements to remove all other types of pavement markings. The Department will not permit obscuring existing pavement markings with black paint or asphalt as a substitute for removal or obliteration. The Contractor may submit other methods for eradication for the COTR’s approval. The Contractor shall minimize roadway surface damage when performing the eradication. The Contractor shall repair the pavement as directed by the COTR, if eradication of pavement markings results in damage to or deterioration of the roadway presenting unsafe conditions for road users including, but not limited to, motorcyclists and bicyclists.




The Contractor shall ensure workers are protected in conformance with Occupational Safety and Health Administration’s (OSHA) standards as detailed in 29 CFR 1910 or 1926, whichever is the most stringent, when eradicating pavement markings. The Contractor shall collect the eradication residue during or immediately after the eradication operation; however, dust shall be collected during the entire operation. Eradication residue from the removal of any pavement markings is considered to be a nonhazardous waste material and shall be disposed of in a properly permitted waste disposal facility in accordance with applicable state and federal laws and regulations. The Department does not require Contractor testing of the eradication residue for the eight Resource Conservation Recovery Act metals. When markings are removed for lane shifts, transitions, or other areas or conditions required in the VWAPM, 100 percent of the pavement marking shall be removed. Non-reflective removable black temporary (construction) pavement marking (Type E) may be used to cover existing markings instead of eradication on asphalt concrete surfaces when its use will not be required for more than 120 days or when specified as a pay item. The Contractor shall use this material to cover markings as indicated in the plans or as directed by the COTR. Non-reflective removable black temporary (construction) pavement marking shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

(m) Temporary Pavement Markers: Temporary pavement markers shall be installed with

temporary (construction) pavement markings in merging (lane drop) or shifting (lane shift) tapers of work zones that will encroach upon the traveled roadway for more than three (3) days and in other areas as required by the COTR. Temporary pavement markers shall not be required on Type E removable markings or Type D, Class III removable markings.

Temporary pavement markers shall installed on 20 foot centers in merging and shifting tapers in accordance with the VWAPM. When temporary pavement markers are required in other areas, they shall be installed on 40 foot centers unless otherwise required by the COTR. Temporary (construction) pavement markers shall be located between and in alignment with broken lines and beside solid line pavement markings opposite traffic. Where double line pavement markings separating traffic are installed, two-way markers shall be installed between the lines. The Contractor may install two one-way markers instead of each two-way marker at no additional cost to the Department. Temporary pavement markers shall be installed with a hot applied bitumen adhesive, except epoxy may be used on hydraulic cement concrete roadways and non-final surfaces of asphalt concrete roadways. Pavement damage caused by removing markers shall be repaired in kind by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Department. The Contractor shall replace damaged, ineffective, or missing temporary pavement markers upon notification by the COTR at no additional cost to the Department except those markers damaged by the Department’s snow removal operations or other maintenance and construction operations which will be paid for at the contract unit price.

(n) Diversions: Where temporary structures are necessary to maintain traffic, such structures

shall be of sufficient strength, width, and design to accommodate the volume and




character of traffic using the highway, be designed by an Engineer licensed to practice engineering in the Commonwealth of Virginia, and provided by the Contractor. Temporary structures crossing waterways shall provide necessary hydraulic openings to accommodate the flow of the waterway. Temporary structure designs shall be submitted to the COTR for review and approval prior to installation.

When a Diversion is no longer required, as determined by the COTR, it shall be promptly removed, and the materials shall be disposed of as approved or directed by the COTR. The Contractor shall design and provide temporary drainage facilities of adequate size to carry the normal flow of the existing drainage or waterway.

(o) Aggregate Material: Aggregate material shall be placed at crossovers, private entrances,

mailbox turnouts and where specified by the COTR. (p) Construction (Temporary) Pavement Message and Symbol Markings: Message markings

shall be the color required by the MUTCD, the plans for the specific location, or as specified by the COTR. The Contractor shall install message and symbol markings in accordance with MUTCD, Section 190704, Virginia Supplement of the MUTCD, VWAPM and Standard PM-10 of the VDOT Road and Bridge Standards.

Temporary pavement message and symbol markings shall be installed using Type A or Type D material as specified on the plans. Pavement messages and symbols markings shall be installed at locations shown on the plans or at locations designated by the COTR. The pavement message or symbol shall have clean and well-defined edges without running, bleeding or deformation, and shall be uniform in appearance throughout. Temporary pavement message marking material including maintenance of the markings shall comply with the requirements for temporary pavement markings. Retroreflective measurements shall be taken out of the wheel path locations and each separate entity of a pavement message marking shall be replaced when the average of the three readings for the entity is below 100 millicandelas per square foot per footcandle. Work performed in conjunction with paragraphs (k), (l), (m), and (p) herein shall be performed in accordance with Section 190704 except as noted herein.

(q) Type 3 Barricades: Type 3 barricades shall conform to NCHRP Report 350, Test Level 3,

or MASH, and be at least 4 feet wide with each barricade rail approximately 8 inches to 12 inches wide. Type 3 barricades shall be selected from those shown on the VDOT NCHRP 350 Approved Products List. The Contractor shall provide a certification letter stating the brands and models of Type III barricades from the list that will be used on the project. Instead of using Type 3 barricades on that listing, the Contractor may use other brands and/or models provided that he submits a copy of the FHWA acceptance letter indicating their compliance with NCHRP Report 350, Test Level 3, or MASH before their use. The Contractor may provide additional weight to provide the required ballast by placing one sandbag weighing no more than approximately 50 pound on each leg of the frame of the Type 3 Barricade as flat to the ground as possible.




(r) Truck-mounted or trailer-mounted attenuators: Truck-mounted and trailer-mounted

attenuators shall conform to NCHRP Report 350, Test Level 3, or MASH.

The Contractor shall submit catalog cuts/brochures of the Truck/Trailer-mounted attenuator and a copy of the FHWA’s acceptance letter documenting acceptance of the specific Truck/ Trailer-mounted attenuator before their use on the project. Truck-mounted and trailer-mounted attenuators shall be permanently identified with a device specific Manufacturers’ identification number by stamping or marking with a durable weather resistant material in accordance with Section 33.274.1 of the Code. The weight of the support vehicle shall be as recommended by the manufacturer of the Truck/ Trailer-mounted attenuator. The Contractor shall provide a copy of the manufacturer’s recommendations to the COTR, a copy of the original weigh ticket for the support vehicle and a self-certification letter stating the support vehicle has not been altered since the original weight ticket was issued. The weigh ticket shall contain adequate information to associate the ticket with the applicable support vehicle. A copy of the self-certification and weigh ticket shall be available in the support vehicle at all times. Additional weight may be added to the support vehicle to achieve the range recommended by the manufacturer of the Truck/Trailer-mounted attenuator provided the total weight is properly balanced without overloading any one axle and is within the Gross Vehicle Weight Recommendation of the support vehicle. The added weight shall be securely attached to the support vehicle to prevent movement during an impact or movement of the vehicle. The additional weight and attachment method shall be self-certified by the Contractor and a copy of the self-certification letter shall be with the support vehicle at all times or a final stage manufacturer’s certification sticker may be placed on the inside door of the altered vehicle. The Truck/Trailer-mounted attenuator shall be no less than 72 inches wide and no more than 96 inches wide. The rear panel shall have alternate 6 to 8 inch wide orange and black or yellow and black chevron (inverted V) stripes. Stripes shall be sloped at a 45 degree angle downward in both directions from the upper center of the rear panel. Stripes shall be fabricated from fluorescent orange or yellow prismatic lens reflective sheeting conforming to Section 190247. The support vehicle shall have at least one rotating amber or one high intensity amber flashing vehicle warning light (visible for 360 degrees) functioning while in operation in accordance with the VWAPM. When allowed by the VWAPM, an electronic arrow operated in the caution mode may be used with the vehicle warning light. When installing and removing lane closures on a multilane roadway as well as when performing mobile operations, the support vehicle shall be equipped with a vehicle warning light and an arrow board. The support vehicle shall be operated and parked in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.




Limitations: Traffic control devices shall not be installed from or removed to the Truck/Trailer-mounted attenuator support vehicle. When the Truck/Trailer-mounted attenuator is deployed there shall be no unsecured material in the bed of the support vehicle except the additional secured weight or truck-mounted devices such as an arrow board, a changeable message sign, or truck mounted signs. There shall also be no additional devices such as signs, lights, and flag holders attached to the Truck/Trailer-mounted attenuator except those that were tested on the Truck/Trailer-mounted attenuator and provided by the manufacturer of the Truck/Trailermounted attenuator. If the Truck/Trailer-mounted attenuator is impacted, resulting in damage that causes the unit to be ineffective, all work requiring the use of the Truck/Trailer-mounted attenuator shall cease until such time that repairs can be made or the Contractor provides another acceptable unit.

(s) Portable Changeable Message Sign (PCMS): Units shall be self-contained, including

message board and power supply, whether trailer or vehicle mounted. The controller head shall have a backup system to prevent loss of memory.

The sign shall be capable of sequentially displaying at least 2 phases of 3 lines of text each with appropriate controls for selection of messages and variable off-on times. The message board text shall be formed of characters at least 18 inches high for trailer mounted PCMS or at least 10 inches for vehicle mounted PCMS or they should consist of a full matrix display. Each line shall be composed of at least eight characters and each character module shall at a minimum use a five wide by seven high pixel matrix. The message shall be composed from keyboard entries. The message shall be legible in any lighting condition. Motorists should be able to read the entire PCMS message twice while traveling at the posted speed.

The sign panel support shall provide for an acceptable roadway viewing height that shall be at least 7 feet from bottom of sign to crown of road. The Contractor shall determine from its plan of operations or work schedule the most efficient and effective use of the PCMS units based on its plan of operations, maintenance of traffic sequencing, or traffic control operations. PCMS signs shall be periodically checked by the Contractor for compliance with manufacturer’s requirements for operation and functions, and shall be ready for immediate use once deployed to the project. During emergency situations the Contractor shall make every effort to deploy units it has assigned to the project. However, if the number of units shown on the plans are already in operation and cannot be reassigned to handle the emergency situation, the Contractor shall immediately contact the COTR. The COTR will then make a determination as to the most expeditious manner in which to deploy units for emergency use, whether by using Department supplied units, directing the Contractor to reassign those units he has committed to the project, or having the Contractor supply additional units as needed. In these circumstances, the cost for such additional units that are authorized by the COTR shall be paid for in accordance with Section 012210. If the COTR determines the use of additional units beyond the number of those identified in the plans is required due to reasons attributable to the Contractor or his manner of




operations, and no units are available, the Contractor shall furnish such additional units to the project within two hours of the COTR’s request or the Department will move to provide such units as necessary and deduct the cost from any monies due the Contractor. This action by the Engineer, if necessary, shall in no way relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for controlling, maintaining, and completing the work. The number of PCMS units estimated by the Department to be used for the project will be as shown on the plans. The number of units and hours of use estimated by the Department is based on the suggested maintenance of traffic shown in the plans and may be different from the Contractor’s plan of operation.

(t) Temporary Curb Ramps: Temporary curb ramps shall conform to the minimum

requirements of the 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design. (u) Temporary Detectable Warning Surface: Temporary detectable warning surface shall

conform to the minimum requirements of the 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design.

(v) Temporary Detectable Warning Strips: Temporary detectable warning strips shall

conform to the minimum requirements of the 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design.

(w) Portable Temporary Rumble Strip (PTRS): Portable Temporary Rumble Strip (PTRS) is

a transverse rumble strip that consists of intermittent, narrow, transverse areas of rough-textured or slightly raised or depressed surface that extends across the travel lane to alert drivers to unusual vehicular traffic conditions.

A PTRS may be made of rubber or recycled rubber and the color shall be orange or black. It shall have a recessed, raised or grooved design to prevent movement and hydroplaning. A PTRS shall consist of interlocking or hinged segments of equal length that prevent separation when in use. The combined overall usable length of the PTRS shall be between 10 9 and 11 feet. The width of the PTRS shall be 12 to 13 inches. The maximum height of the PTRS shall be 1 inch; and the minimum height shall be 5/8 inch. The weight of each roadway strip shall be a minimum of 100 lbs. to a maximum of 120 lbs. The leading and departing edge taper shall be between 12 and 15 degrees. The PTRS shall be installed without the use of adhesives or fasteners. Each roadway length of the PTRS shall have either a minimum of one cutout handle in the end of the rumble strip, or an interlocking segment which can be used as a handle for easy deployment or removal. The manufacturer of the PTRS shall provide a signed affidavit that states the PTRS is able to withstand being run over by an 80,000 pound vehicle and retain its original placement with minor incidental movement of 6 inches or less during an 8 hour deployment. Incidental movement of the PTRS shall be parallel with other rumble strips in an array but shall not move so that its placement compromises the performance and safety of the other rumble strips, workers or the traveling public.




The PTRS shall be used in arrays of three rumble strips spaced 5 to 8 feet center to center, placed transverse across the travel lane. Only one set of PTRS should be used in the work zone’s advance warning area per direction.

(x) Work Zone Traffic Control: The Contractor shall provide individuals trained in Work

Zone Traffic Control. 190512.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Flagger service will be measured in hours of operation as authorized or approved by the COTR. Authorized flagger service shall be according to the VWAPM and will be paid for at the contract unit price per hour. This price shall include paddles and safety equipment. Automated flagger assistance device (AFAD) will be measured in hours of operation per each AFAD as authorized or approved by the COTR. When the contract requires the use of the AFAD, it will be paid for at the contract unit price per hour for each device used. This price shall include furnishing or mobilizing the AFAD to the project, services of trained AFAD operator(s), channelizing devices, safety equipment, fuel, necessary warning devices and maintenance. Separate payment for the certified flagger operating the AFAD will not be made. When an AFAD is used for the Contractor’s convenience, each AFAD will be paid for as Flagger Service and will be measured in hours as authorized or approved by the COTR. Pilot vehicles will be measured in hours of actual use, as required by the COTR, and will be paid for at the contract unit price per hour. This price shall include vehicles, drivers, necessary warning devices, fuel, and maintenance. Electronic arrow boards will be measured in hours of actual use, as required by the COTR, except when used as an alternative to rotating amber light or alternating high intensity amber flashing light. In such cases, payment will not be made for electronic arrows. Electronic arrows will be paid for at the contract unit price per hour. This price shall include arrow board, fuel, maintenance, and a truck or trailer having flashing amber warning lights. Warning lights used on signs will be measured in days of actual use for the type specified and will be paid for at the contract unit price per day. This price shall include maintaining, relocating, and removing warning lights as needed. Warning lights installed on traffic barrier service will not be measured for separate payment, but the cost thereof shall be included in the contract linear foot price for traffic barrier service. Group 1 channelizing devices will not be measured for separate payment. The cost thereof shall be included in the price for other appropriate pay items. Group 2 channelizing devices, as required by the COTR, will be measured in days and will be paid for at the contract unit price per day. This price shall include maintaining and removing devices when no longer required, and signs. When Group 2 channelizing devices are moved to a new location or are removed and reinstalled at the same location, they will be measured for separate payment. However, when the Group 2 channelizing devices are moved from one lane to another by simply moving the devices across the lane edge line without a planned or authorized removal from the roadway, no additional payment will be made.




Group 2 longitudinal channelizing devices will be measured in linear feet and will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot per location. This price shall include maintaining and removing when no longer required. When a Group 2 longitudinal channelizing device is moved to a new location as directed or approved by the COTR, the relocated longitudinal channelizing device will be measured for separate payment. Pedestrian barricade devices will be measured in linear feet and will be paid for at the contract unit price per foot per location. This price shall include maintaining, sand bag ballast, and removing when no longer required. When pedestrian barricade is moved to a new location as directed or approved by the COTR, the relocated barricade will be measured for separate payment. Traffic barrier service will be measured in linear feet and will be paid for at the contract unit price per foot per location. This price shall include maintaining Type B warning lights, barrier delineators, barrier panels, fixed object attachments; patching restraint holes, and removing when no longer required. When fixed object attachments are used on traffic barrier service in locations where existing guardrail is in place, this price shall also include restoring existing guardrail to its original condition. When traffic barrier service is moved to a new location as directed or approved by the COTR, the relocated barrier will be measured for separate payment. Payment for traffic barrier service will not be made until the work behind the barrier is actively pursued. Traffic barrier service guardrail terminal will be measured and paid for in units of each or linear feet, as applicable. This price shall include guardrail terminal, barrier delineators and removing the traffic barriers surface guardrail terminal when no longer needed. When traffic barrier service guardrail terminal is moved to a new location, as directed or approved by the COTR, the relocated terminal will be measured for separate payment. Impact attenuator service will be measured in units of each and will be paid for at the contract unit price per each. This price shall include impact attenuator and object marker. Impact attenuators used with barrier openings for equipment access will not be measured for separate payment but the cost thereof shall be included with other appropriate items. When impact attenuator service is moved to a new location, as directed or approved by the COTR, the relocated terminal will be measured for separate payment. Temporary traffic control signal will be paid for at the contract lump sum price for the location specified in the Contract. This price shall include, but not be limited to, supports; span wire; tether wire; conduit; conductor cable; traffic signal heads; backplates; hanger assemblies; necessary control items; vehicle detection; uninterruptable power supply; and, when approved, portable traffic control signal equipment. The price shall also include installing, maintaining, adjusting, and aligning signal equipment; when required plan development, inclusive of signal layout, signal timing, phasing, and/ or sequencing; providing electrical service; utility company costs; and removing temporary signal equipment when no longer required. Modify signal (Location) will be paid for at the contract lump sum price for the location specified in the Contract. This price shall include, but not be limited to, supports; span wire; tether wire; conduit; conductor cable; traffic signal heads; backplates; hanger assemblies; necessary control items; vehicle detection; uninterruptable power supply; and modifying existing or proposed signals as necessary to support temporary traffic alignments in various phases of project construction or, when approved, furnishing and installing portable traffic control signal equipment. The price shall also include supplying and installing supplemental signal equipment when necessary; maintaining, adjusting, and aligning signal equipment; plan development, inclusive of signal layout, signal timing, phasing, and sequencing;




providing electrical service; utility company costs; and removing temporary equipment when no longer required. Temporary (Construction) pavement markings will be measured in linear feet and will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot for the type, class and width specified. This price shall include marking materials, glass beads, adhesive, preparing the surface, maintaining, removing removable markings when no longer required, inspections, and testing. Temporary (Construction) pavement message markings will be measured in units of each and will be paid for at the contract unit price per each. This price shall include marking materials, preparing the surface, adhesive, maintaining, removing removable markings when no longer required, inspections, and testing. Temporary pavement markers will be measured in units of each and will be paid for at the contract unit price per each. This price shall include temporary markers, surface preparation, adhesive, maintaining and replacing lost or damaged markers, and removing the pavement markers and adhesive when no longer required. Eradication of existing pavement markings will be measured in linear feet of a 6 inch width or portion thereof as specified herein. Widths that exceed a 6 inch increment by more than 1/2 inch will be measured as the next 6 inch increment. Measurement and payment for eradication of existing pavement markings specified herein shall be limited to linear pavement line markings. Eradication of existing pavement markings will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot. This price shall include removing linear pavement line markings, cleanup, and disposing of residue. Eradication of existing nonlinear pavement markings will be measured in square feet based on a theoretical box defined by the outermost limits of the nonlinear pavement markings as defined in Standard PM-10 of the VDOT Road and Bridge Standards. Nonlinear pavement markings shall include but not be limited to, arrows, images, symbols, and messages. Eradication of existing nonlinear pavement markings will be paid for at the contract unit price per square foot. This price shall include removing nonlinear pavement markings, cleanup, and disposing of residue. Temporary Diversions will be measured in linear feet along the centerline of the Diversion or by individual components with the quantities shown on the plans as maintenance of traffic items, in which case the components will be measured in accordance with the applicable specifications. When listed as a single pay item, temporary Diversions will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot. This price shall include excavating, grading, aggregate materials, drainage items, asphalt, maintaining and removing the Diversion, disposing of surplus and unsuitable material, and restoring property. Aggregate material will be measured in tons and will be paid for at the contract price per ton for the type specified. This price shall include preparing the grade and furnishing, placing, maintaining, and removing material as required. Type 3 barricades will be measured in units of each and will be paid for at the contract unit price per each for the width specified. Multiple 4 foot wide Type 3 barricades may be used together to obtain the width specified in the pay item. This price shall include barricades with retroreflective sheeting; sandbags; appropriate warning signs; and maintaining, relocating to new locations, and removing the barricades when no longer required. When Type 3 barricades are moved to a new location, as directed or approved by the COTR, the relocated barricade will be measured for separate payment.




Temporary (Construction) signs installed for long term stationary temporary traffic control zone as defined by the VWAPM, will be measured in square feet and will be paid for at the contract unit price per square foot. This price shall include furnishing, installing, maintaining; covering, uncovering, relocating and removing temporary signs, temporary sign panels, sign panel bracing, sign supports, hardware, delineators, and flags. Payment based on square footage shall be compensation for the sign(s) for the duration of the project; multiple payments for the same sign used more than once will not be allowed. Temporary signs, portable sign supports and weights, and vehicle mounted signs, their supports and mounting hardware used for intermediate term, short -term, short duration and mobile work operations, as defined in the VWAPM will not be measured for payment; all costs for providing such signs shall be included with other items of work. Truck-mounted attenuator will be measured in hours of actual use and will be paid for at the contract unit price per hour. This price shall include the truck-mounted attenuator, support vehicle, vehicle warning lights, vehicle mounted signs, electronic arrow boards used in lieu of vehicle warning lights, and maintenance. Electronic arrow boards required on truck-mounted attenuator support vehicles in moving or mobile operations will be measured and paid for separately. Portable changeable message sign will be measured in hours of actual use and will be paid for at the contract unit price per hour. This price shall include mobilizing the units to the project, maintenance, operation, and repositioning the units. Temporary curb ramp will be measured in units of each and will be paid for at the contract unit price per each. This price shall include detectable edging, landings, maintaining, and removing when no longer required. When the temporary curb ramp is moved to a new location as directed or approved by the COTR, the relocated temporary curb ramp will be measured for separate payment. Temporary detectable warning surface will be measured in linear feet and will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot. This price shall include ADA compliant truncated domes, maintaining, and removing when no longer required Portable Temporary rumble strip (PTRS) will be measured in units of each and will be paid for at the contract unit price per each array consisting of three rumble strips. This price shall include installing, maintaining, removing and relocating throughout the life of the project. Temporary detectable warning strip will be measured in linear feet and will be paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot. This price shall include ADA compliant truncated domes, maintaining, and removing when no longer required. Basic Work Zone Traffic Control: Separate payment will not be made for providing a person in accordance with Section 012210. The cost thereof shall be included in the price of other appropriate pay items. Intermediate Work Zone Traffic Control: Separate payment will not be made for providing a person in accordance with Section 012210. The cost thereof shall be included in the price of other appropriate pay items.




Payment will be made under: Item No. Pay Item Pay Unit 190512-1 Maintenance of Traffic Lump Sum END OF SECTION 190512



MOBILIZATION 190513 - 1

SECTION 190513 – MOBILIZATION 190513.01 DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of the performance of construction preparatory operations, including the movement of personnel and equipment to the project site and for the establishment of the Contractor's offices, construction of temporary fencing and its removal at the end of the work, and providing other facilities necessary to begin work on a substantial phase of the contract. 190513.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Mobilization will not be measured and will be paid for at the contract lump sum price, which price shall be full compensation for performing the work specified and the furnishing of all materials, labor, tools, equipment and incidentals necessary to mobilize and subsequently demobilize the construction preparatory operations for construction. The payment for Mobilization shall not exceed 5% of the total contract amount. Except as otherwise provided, payment for mobilization up to the limitations shown hereinafter will be made in three installments. The first installment of 50 percent of the contract lump sum price, will be made on the first monthly payment following partial mobilization and the initiation of construction work. The next installment will be made on the second monthly payment of 35 percent, assuming the completion of substantial mobilization including the erection of all Contractor's offices and buildings. Upon completion of demobilization a third and final payment of 15 percent will be made. No additional payment will be made for demobilization and remobilization due to shutdowns, suspensions of the work or for other mobilization activities. Payment will be made under: Item No. Pay Item Pay Unit 190513-1 Mobilization Lump Sum 190513.03 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL

(a) Submittals

Conform to all applicable provisions of Section 013300. (b) Installation Not applicable. (c) Final Acceptance

Conform to all applicable provisions of Section 014000. END OF SECTION 190513



MOBILIZATION 190513 - 2




SEEDING 190603- 1

SECTION 190603 – SEEDING 190603.01 DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of furnishing and applying mulch and seed in the quantities specified to stabilize areas designated on the plans or selected by the COTR. 190603.02 MATERIALS

(a) Seed shall conform to Section 190244.02(c). 1. Riparian Seed Mix shall meet the species composition as follows:

a)

Botanical Name / Common Name Percentage (%)

by Weight

Panicum anceps / Beaked Panicgrass 21 Panicum clandestinum / Deertongue 20 Elymus virginicus / Virginia Wild Rye 15 Sorghastrum nutans / Indiangrass 15 Andropogon gerardii / Big Bluestem 7.5 Panicum virgatum / Switchgrass 5 Carex vulpinoidea / Fox Sedge 4 Panicum rigidulum / Redtop Panicgrass 4 Helenium fexuosum / Purplehead Sneezeweed 2 Senna marilandica / Maryland Senna 2 Eupatorium perfoliatum / Boneset 1.5 Asclepias incarnata / Swamp Milkweed 1 Hibiscus moscheutos / Crimsoneyed Rosemallow 1 Vernonia noveboracensis / New York Ironweed 1

b) Temporary Seed shall be composed of 100 percent Annual Ryegrass

(Lolium multiflorum). (b) Not Used. (c) Not Used. (d) Mulches and Hydraulic Erosion Control Products shall conform to Section 190244.02(g). (e) Not Used. (f) Not Used.



SEEDING 190603- 2

(g) Sediment Retention Products shall conform to Section 190244.02(o). (h) Soil Stabilization Matting shall conform to Section 190611. (i) Topsoil shall conform to Section 190244.02 (b).

190603.03 PROCEDURES The Contractor shall perform seeding operations at the times designated in Section 190303.03(b) and as indicated herein. The Contractor shall not perform seeding operations when the ground is frozen or when the ambient temperature is below 32 degrees F or weather conditions will prevent proper soil preparation and subsequent operations. When hydroseeding is performed, nozzles or sprays shall not be directed toward the ground in a manner that will cause erosion or runoff. The Contractor shall notify the COTR at least 48 hours prior to beginning seeding operations.

(a) Preparing Soil

• Slopes 3H:1V or flatter shall be loosened to a depth of approximately 3 inches by disking, harrowing, or other methods approved by the COTR.

• Excavated slopes steeper than 3H:1V: Loosening of soil will not be required

except to eliminate hard or crusted surfaces. • Shoulders and embankment slopes steeper than 3H:1V shall be loosened to a

depth of approximately 1 inch. • Clods, loose stones, and other foreign material larger than 3 inches in any

dimension shall be removed and disposed of in accordance with Section 017300 or as directed by the COTR.

• Gullies, washes, and disturbed areas that develop subsequent to final grading

shall be repaired before they are seeded. Soil preparation for overseeding shall include the repair of gullies, washes, and disturbed areas that develop prior to final overseeding and project acceptance.

• Topsoil, when specified, shall be applied in accordance with Section 190244.02

(b).

• Soil Stabilization Matting when specified shall be installed in accordance with Section 190611.

(b) Not Used.

(c) Not Used.

(d) Applying Seed

Applying riparian seed mix shall consist of preparing the seed bed and uniformly applying seedover the area designated to be seeded in the Contract.



SEEDING 190603- 3

Riparian Seed Mix shall be applied at a rate of 60 pounds of Pure Live Seed (PLS) per acre. Areas to receive Riparian Seed Mix shall also receive Annual Ryegrass (Lolium multiflorum), applied at a rate of 20 bulk pounds per acre. Each individual seed species shall be delivered in individual sealed and labeled bags in accordance with Section 190244.02(c). Pre-mixed seed mixes will not be approved for use without prior authorization from the COTR. Once all individual seed species are approved, the Contractor shall uniformly mix the Riparian Seed Mix by hand prior to spreading. The preferred method will be to apply the Riparian Seed Mix and regular seed using a handheld, knapsack style seed spreader. The use of other methods will need to be approved by the COTR prior to use. The Riparian Seed Mix shall be incorporated into the soil to a depth of ¼ inch by lightly raking or dragging the area. Apply Soil Stabilization Matting according to Section 190611. Where temporary seeding is employed as a means of soil stabilization of unfinished areas it shall consist of applying seed and mulch in accordance with the rates specified in the plans or in this section to stabilize areas on which grading operations are anticipated to be suspended for durations greater than 14 days. Where temporary seeding is required or directed by the COTR, the cost for removal of vegetation once grading operations resume shall be included in the price of seeding. For hydroseeding, seed shall be put in the mixture slowly to result in a uniform mixture before application. Hydroseeding mixtures shall be constantly agitated from the time of mixing until application on the seed bed and shall be applied within 8 hours from the beginning of mixing operations. Overseeding shall generally consist of applying reduced quantities seed on prepared areas as directed by the COTR.

(e) Applying mulch or hydraulic erosion control products (HECP) for seeding or erosion

control: The Contractor shall apply mulch or HECP within 48 hours after completion of the seeding operation.

Selection of the appropriate seeding mulch or HECP for seeding shall be based on the following table. Mulch will not be required for overseeded areas.



SEEDING 190603- 4

HECP shall be applied at the following amounts per type:

1. HECP, Type 1 at the rate of 2,000 Pounds per acre. In lieu of applying Type I the Contractor may substitute one of the following for the HECP Type 1 with the approval of the COTR.

a. Straw and hay at the rate of approximately 2 tons per acre. Straw and hay

shall be applied to a uniform thickness in such a manner that not more than 10 percent of the soil surface will be exposed once installed. Wet straw or wet hay shall not be used. Straw or hay shall be anchored to the seeded surface by spraying with a HECP, Type 1 at the rate of 750 pounds per acre; or using other materials or methods approved by the COTR. Straw or hay should not be used on medians of shoulders that are directly adjacent to roadways that are open to traffic.

b. HECP, Type 1 at a rate of 1,000 pounds per acre along with the

installation of Rolled Erosion Control Products (RECP) EC-2, Type 1.

2. HECP Type 2 at a rate of 2,500 pounds per acre. In lieu of installing at the previous rate, the Contractor may substitute HECP, Type 2 at a rate of 1,000 pounds per acre along with the installation of RECP, EC 2 Type 1.

3. HECP Type 3 at a rate of 3,000 pounds per acre. In lieu of installing HECP, Type

3 at the previous rate the Contractor may substitute one of the following with the approval of the COTR.

a. HECP, Type 3 at a rate of 1,000 pounds per acre along with the

installation of RECP, EC-2, Type 3 or, b. A compost blanket at the rate of 806 cubic yards per acre (average depth

of 2 inches).

4. Not Used.

(f) Not Used..

190603.04 ACCEPTANCE Final Acceptance and payment to the Contractor will only be granted after all seeding operations have been completed and when seedlings have grown to a minimum of 4 inches tall, exhibit healthy green color, have established a minimum of 95 percent ground cover and vegetation is uniform, mature enough to survive site conditions and will inhibit erosion, as approved by the COTR.



SEEDING 190603- 5

190603.05 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Riparian Seed Mix will be measured in pounds of seed applied and will be paid for at the contract unit price per pound. Temporary Seed, Annual Ryegrass (Lolium multiflorum) will be measured in pounds and shall be considered incidental to the price per pound of Riparian Seed Mix. Overseeding will be in pounds of seed applied and will not be measured but shall be considered incidental to the cost of Riparian Seed Mix. This price shall include the repairing gullies, washes, and disturbed areas that develop subsequent to seeding and furnishing and applying seed. Prices for Riparian Seed Mix shall include preparing seed beds; furnishing and applying seed and maintaining seeded areas until final acceptance. When bags of seed are transferred from project to project, certified scales shall be used for weighing the seed. The COTR will not accept open bags for use. Hydraulic Erosion Control Products will be measured in square yards and will be paid for at the contract unit price per square yard for the type specified. This price shall include preparing seed beds, furnishing and installing, and preparing slopes or channels as required. Measurement and payment for Topsoil will be in accordance with Section 190435. Measurement and payment for Soil Stabilization Matting will be in accordance with Section 190611. Payment will be made under: Item No. Pay Item Pay Unit 190603-1 Riparian Seed Mix Pound END OF SECTION 190603



SEEDING 190603- 6




PLANTING 190605 - 1

SECTION 190605 – PLANTING 190605.01 DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of furnishing and planting trees, shrubs, vines, perennials, and other plants of the kinds, sizes, qualities, and quantities specified on the plans or by the COTR and maintaining and replacing plants as specified herein. The fulfillment of the work is divided into two phases, the Installation Phase and the Establishment Period. The Installation Phase will begin with the start of landscaping operations by the Contractor after the Planting Operations Coordination Meeting and will terminate with Installation Phase Acceptance by MWAA. The Establishment Period will begin once all plantings are accepted by the Department in accordance with Section 190605.07 All plant identifications, phase inspections, discretionary actions, approvals, and acceptance or rejection decisions will be conducted by the COTR or MWAA. For purposes of this Section, references to the COTR will identified as a “duly authorized representative” as specified in the definitions in Section 101.02. The COTR is granted the authority as specified in Section 105.03(a) in administering this specification. The COTR is granted the authority of the Inspector specified in Section 105.03(b) in administering this specification. The authority COTR or MWAA to reject or suspend work is limited to safety issues and work covered by this specification. 190605.02 MATERIALS

(a) Not Used. (b) Topsoil shall conform to Section 190244.02(b). (c) Seed shall conform to Sections 190244.02(c) and 190603. (d) Not Used. (e) Not Used. (f) Not Used. (g) Trees, Shrubs, Vines, Perennials, and Other Plants shall conform to Section 190244.02(i). (h) Not Used. (i) Not Used. (j) Not Used.

190605.3 QUALIFICATIONS OF PERSONNEL



PLANTING 190605 - 2

(a) Contractor and Equipment Qualifications: The Contractor shall be personally experienced or arrange to furnish a subcontractor who is personally experienced in all aspects of landscape preparation, planting operations, arboriculture, and landscape maintenance operations as required by the work described in the Contract, including these Specifications. Workers and equipment shall conform to Section 105.05. The Contractor shall submit documentation of equipment proposed for use on the project to the COTR. On independent landscape projects, the Contractor is also required to have or to furnish personnel possessing appropriate Traffic Control and Erosion and Siltation Control certifications to control the work according to Sections 105.14, 107.16 and Section 190512 as appropriate.

(b) Landscape Operations Crew and Crew Manager Qualifications: The Contractor shall

furnish the following personnel to supervise landscape field operations:

1. Work Crew The majority of crew personnel must have at least two years continuous experience working on a commercial landscaping crew.

2. The Crew Manager Crew Manager must have at least three years continuous

experience working as a Virginia Nursery and Landscape Association (VNLA) Certified Horticulturalist, or approved equivalent from a neighboring state. This individual shall be proficient in areas of worker safety, environmental regulations, and efficient landscape management in conformance with accepted horticultural practice and methodologies.

(c) Not Used.

(d) Not Used.


(a) Confirmed Order Documentation: The Contractor shall submit documentation to the COTR of a confirmed order of all plant materials required for the contract at least 30 days in advance of the start of the proposed planting operations. This documentation shall list the source(s) of supply, all species by common and botanical name, specific variety, and cultivar in the sizes, and quantities reserved. When special requirements are listed on the planting summary sheet, such as “Specimen Quality,” or “Specimen Street Tree”, etc., the documentation shall certify that the species reserved meets those specific requirements. The COTR may require sample photographs of materials to be supplied and/or to inspect and approve the selection of plant materials at the source of supply prior to delivery, once the documentation of confirmed order is received. If specific plant materials are not available, the Contractor shall submit a request for substitutions in accordance with paragraph (g) herein.

(b) Contractor’s Installation Plan: The Contractor shall follow the Contract phasing

plan (if applicable) or submit to the COTR a plan for executing the planting operations for the project at least one week prior to the date of the Planting Operations Coordination Meeting (paragraph (c) herein). The plan shall be submitted in an 11x17 inch format with color coding for each phase of the installation planting plan. The plan shall include, but not be limited to, the anticipated date of delivery of specific planting materials per phase,



PLANTING 190605 - 3

staging of materials (as necessary), phasing of site preparation and the phased installation of plant materials that can be completed in three to five days of continuous work, barring any delays due to weather or other unforeseen circumstances. Very large planting operations, such as those entailing interchange plantings, may be staged by selected quadrants (areas) as necessary.

(c) Not Used. (d) Not Used.

(e) Sources of Supply: All plants shall be obtained from a nursery certified by the VDACS

with a “Certificate of Registration”, or certified by a comparable agency responsible for nursery inspection and issuance of a “Certificate of Registration” from the State of origin. The Contractor shall supply the COTR with a copy of this certification with each separate delivery of plant materials to the project site. Failure to supply this certification will result in rejection of the plant delivery.

(f) Inspecting and Identifying Plants: Plants will be inspected and identified by the COTR in

accordance with the Standardized Plant Names prepared by the Editorial Committee of the American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature. The COTR may inspect plants at any time and place. Plants will be inspected immediately prior to being planted. If plants are installed prior to inspection and found to be noncompliant, they shall be replaced with Department approved plants at the Contractor’s expense.

(g) Substitutions: The COTR will not allow any changes in the quantity, size, kind, or quality

of plants from those specified in the Contract unless otherwise authorized in writing by the MWAA representative. When requesting permission to substitute, the Contractor shall submit to the COTR written evidence in accordance with paragraph (a) herein of the Contractor contacting at least 3 certified nurseries in search of specified plants, verifying their unavailability, and provide the COTR with the nursery contact information including date, time, and contact name and title. The COTR may direct the Contractor to contact additional nurseries to confirm that the specified plants are unavailable from those sources as well. After ascertaining that the specified plants are not available the Contractor shall suggest substitute plants that best conform to the Contract. If the COTR approves the substitution, the Contractor shall indicate the reduced cost, if any, that will accrue to the Department as a result of the substitution. Substitute plant materials shall conform to the same requirements as plant materials originally designated in the Contract. As an option, the COTR may also delete plants from the Contract in lieu of approving substitutions.

(h) Plant Acclimation: The Contractor shall ensure that container grown plants are

acclimated to prevailing weather conditions before their installation. Any plants originating from greenhouse storage shall be acclimated prior to shipping. Generally, acclimation can be satisfied by placing plants outdoors for a period of at least 1 week prior to shipment. Install bare root plants while dormant when soil and air temperatures are above freezing.

(i) Delivery: The Contractor shall notify the COTR at least 48 hours in advance of the

anticipated delivery date for plants. The Contractor shall submit a legible copy of the invoice showing the sources of supply, all species by common and botanical name,



PLANTING 190605 - 4

specific variety, and cultivar in the sizes amount, and quality (if applicable) reserved in each shipment to the Engineer. A copy of the current Certificate of Nursery Inspection from the State of origin must accompany each shipment of plants for acceptance.

(j) Labeling: Plant material delivered to the project shall be legibly identified with a

waterproof label as to the genus, species (common and botanical name), cultivar, quality (where applicable), and size of the plants. When plants are in bales, bundles, boxes, or other containers, a legible label indicating the genus, species (common and botanical name), size, and quantity of the plants shall be attached to each container. A minimum of 10 percent of each species in each shipment shall be so labeled. The COTR will reject plants that do not comply with this identification labeling requirement.

(k) Transporting and Protecting: Plants transported to the project in open vehicles shall be

covered with suitable covers securely fastened to the body of the vehicle for protection. Closed vehicles shall be adequately ventilated to prevent overheating or dehydration of plants. Plants shall be kept moist, fresh, and protected at all times.

(l) Storing: When plants are to be stored prior to installation, they shall be stored at a

location approved by the COTR. The COTR will reject any plants stored for more than 30 days. Unless the COTR approves other methods of storage, bare-root plants that are not planted within 24 hours after delivery shall be heeled-in in a moist trench dug in the ground. Bundled plants shall be opened, and the plants shall be carefully separated and placed singularly in the trench with the roots spread in a natural position. Roots of each layer of plants shall be immediately covered with moist, pulverized soil; moist sawdust; or other approved material in a manner satisfactory to the COTR. The Contractor shall ensure root-covering materials are kept moist at all times. The Contractor shall provide shade for plants when and as directed by the COTR. Balled material, container-grown plants, and plants in plantable pots that are not installed within 48 hours of delivery shall be grouped together according to the method of containment they are delivered in, and shall have their root zones protected by covering their root balls or containers with wet sawdust, mulch or other approved material. Plants rejected by the COTR and/or MWAA for non-compliance to these requirements shall be removed from the storage area within 24 hours of rejection or, with the written approval of the COTR, may be marked with yellow paint or otherwise made readily identifiable for later disposal. If the Contractor has not removed rejected plants or acceptably marked such material within 24 hours of rejection, the COTR will not permit the use of other plants from the storage area until the rejected plants have been removed or properly identified as “Rejected” by marking.

(m) Preparation: The Contractor shall inspect all areas designated on the plans for planting to

ensure that final grade has been met. Planting operations shall not proceed in any area that has not reached final grade. Plantings that have been installed prior to establishment of final grade shall be reinstalled at the Contractor’s expense or are subject to rejection upon review by the COTR and MWAA.

(n) Not Used.

(o) Layout: The Contractor shall stake or mark plant locations and outlines of plant bed areas

designated to receive plants. The COTR will inspect and approve plant locations and planting beds prior to the start of plant installation. The Contractor shall notify the COTR a minimum of 48 hours prior to scheduling the layout inspection. Planting will not be



PLANTING 190605 - 5

permitted until the COTR has approved the staking layout. Unforeseen or unintended conditions such as the location of traffic signs, utilities, and drainage items, etc. may necessitate adjustments in proposed plant locations; however, such adjustments will only be permitted when approved by the COTR.

(p) Not Used.

(q) Planting 1. Livestakes shall conform to Section 190612 and shall be planted in accordance to

the spacing and areas indicated on the plans.

2. Topsoil shall conform to Section 190244.02(b). Topsoil shall be furnished to a minimum depth of 4 inches in the areas indicated on the plans.

3. Riparian Seed Mix shall conform to Sections 190244.02(c) and 190603 and shall

be furnished in areas as indicated on the plans. 4. Soil Stabilization Matting shall conform to Section 190611 and shall be installed

in areas as indicated on the plans.

1. Not Used.

2. Not Used. 3. Not Used. 4. Not Used.

5. Not Used.

6. Not Used.

7. Not Used.

8. Not Used. 9. Not Used. 10. Not Used. 11. Not Used.

(r) Not Used. (s) Not Used.



PLANTING 190605 - 6

190605.5 COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION PHASE

(a) Installation Phase Plant Replacements: Between the beginning and ending dates of the Installation Phase, plants that are dead, defective, or otherwise not in a healthy growing condition as determined by the COTR shall be removed immediately and replaced as soon as viably feasible within the appropriate planting season at the Contractor’s expense. Plant replacements shall be made once in the spring, if required, and once in the fall, if required (See Planting Season), as necessary to replace unacceptable plant materials as directed by the COTR.

(b) Installation Phase Inspection: The Contractor shall request an Installation Phase Acceptance inspection be performed by the COTR to confirm completion of all planting operations in accordance with this Section and the Contract, and to verify all plants are living, healthy and in a viable growing condition. The Installation Phase Acceptance Inspection will be performed on a mutually agreeable date following completion of the appropriate planting season (spring or fall), but in no case, less than 14 days before the end date of the appropriate planting season. Plants that are replaced in order to meet the initial specification requirements to begin the Establishment Period are not considered as “plant replacements” and, therefore, are to be replaced at the Contractor’s expense.

The COTR will schedule the Installation Phase Acceptance Inspection with the Contractor, MWAA (or MWAA representative) and any other affected parties at a mutually agreeable time and place on the project site.

(c) Installation Phase Punch List: The COTR, in consultation with the Contractor, will develop an Installation Phase Punch List of unfulfilled requirements to be met and any deficiencies, including a list of plants to be replaced prior to acceptance of this phase of the planting operation. The Contractor shall complete the Punch List requirements and replace plants as indicated.

(d) Installation Phase Acceptance: The COTR will perform re-inspection with the Contractor

as needed until the Installation Phase planting is accepted. The COTR will approve and issue Installation Phase Acceptance when all items on the Installation Phase Punch List are completed, replacement plants are properly installed, and all Installation Phase requirements for Acceptance listed below have been met.

190605.6 PLANT CARE AND MAINTENANCE Plant care and maintenance shall begin immediately after each plant is satisfactorily installed and shall continue until the end of the Establishment Period. Care and maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, replacing displaced mulch, repairing and reshaping water rings or saucers, maintaining stakes and guys as originally installed, watering when needed as required by the specifications or as directed by the COTR, pruning as needed, applications of pesticides, herbicides or fungicides as required, and performing any other work required to keep plants in a healthy growing condition. Dead, defective, or rejected plants shall be immediately removed and replaced in accordance with of Section 190605.05(a).



PLANTING 190605 - 7

190605.7 ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD The Contractor shall submit an Establishment Period Phased Maintenance Schedule to the COTR for review and approval at least one week prior to the start of the Establishment Period. The Establishment Period shall begin on a date, determined by the COTR, following completion of the appropriate planting season (spring or fall) and acceptance of the Installation Phase by the Department. The Establishment Period shall continue through a minimum of one calendar year (or for the time period established in the Contract), and shall terminate on the date determined in writing by the COTR in accordance with Section 190605.8. In order to satisfy the Establishment Period requirements and provide for Final Acceptance of the Contract in accordance with Section 108.09(c), the Contractor shall provide the Department a minimum one year (or as necessary to cover the Establishment Period duration) separate performance bond in the full amount of the Landscaping section of the contract applicable for the duration of the Establishment Period. The Contractor shall do all work necessary to keep the plants in a healthy growing condition, including, but not limited to the following:

(a) Watering: The Contractor’s watering schedule shall be in accordance with the frequency listed on the project’s summary sheet general notes and in accordance with the Contractor’s approved Establishment Period Phased Maintenance Schedule. That schedule withstanding, the Contractor shall be responsible for watering as frequently as is necessary to maintain an adequate supply of moisture within the root zone of all plantings at all times and especially whenever there is less than 1 inch of rainfall in a seven day period during the months of April through September. Water shall not be applied at a force that displaces soil or mulch. Quantities and frequency of watering shown on the plans are the minimum for estimating purposes only.

1. The COTR may require the use of watering needles or other approved watering

methods to prevent displacement of soil, mulch and the runoff of water. The COTR may make periodic inspections to ascertain the adequacy of the Contractor’s watering efforts and the moisture content of the soil in the root zone of plantings. If it is determined from the Department’s inspection the Contractor’s watering efforts are not adequate to continuously maintain moisture in the root zone of plantings the Contractor will be notified that additional watering is required and shall respond as detailed herein.

2. The quantity of water supplied shall not be in excess of that normally required to

ensure optimum growing conditions. Watering shall not commence until methods and equipment have been approved by the COTR. The COTR may require or suspend watering at any time.

Notification and Scheduling: When notified by the COTR that additional watering is required (in addition to watering scheduled in the Contractor’s approved Establishment Period Phased Maintenance Schedule), the Contractor shall begin watering within 48 hours of such notification with sufficient water, labor, materials, and equipment as required and shall continue to water daily where and as directed, without delays or interruptions, to ensure that the root zones of plantings do not become dry at any time. If the Contractor fails to begin watering operations within 48 hours after notification, the COTR may proceed with adequate water, forces, equipment, and materials to perform the needed



PLANTING 190605 - 8

watering and the entire cost of the Department’s watering operations will be deducted from monies due the Contractor.

(b) All Establishment Period maintenance work shall begin within 7 working days after the

COTR notifies the Contractor that the Establishment Period has begun.

Establishment Period Plant Replacements: Between the beginning and ending dates of the Establishment Period, plants that are dead, defective, or otherwise not in a healthy growing condition as determined by the COTR shall be removed immediately and replaced as soon as viably feasible within the appropriate growing season at the monetary replacement amounts listed below. Plant replacements shall be made once in the dormancy period, if required (Between November 1 and April 30) as necessary to replace dead, damaged, or defective plant materials unless otherwise directed by the COTR and/or MWAA.

For each plant replaced, the first replacement shall be at the Contractor’s expense. The second replacement, if required, will be paid at 35 percent of the original contract unit price for each plant replaced. The criteria used to identify plants that are unacceptable during the Installation Phase and which shall be replaced at the spring or fall times as indicated in Section 190605.05 (a) above shall be used to determine acceptability during the Establishment Phase. Replacement plants shall be true to species, cultivar, size, root condition, and quality as specified in the Contract unless a request for substitution is submitted and approved by the COTR, in which cases substitutions shall conform to Section 190605.04 (g).

(c) Not Used. (d) Not Used. (e) Not Used. (f) Not Used.

(g) Not Used.

190605.8 TERMINATION OF ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD

(a) Establishment Period Final Inspection: The COTR will schedule the Establishment Period Final Inspection with the Contractor, MWAA (or MWAA representative), and any other affected parties on a mutually agreeable date at least one year, or as otherwise required by the duration of the Establishment Period stated in the Contract, following the start date of the Establishment Period. During this inspection an Establishment Phase Terminal Punch List will be developed, if necessary, to address deficiencies, repairs, replacements, and other work as specified in the Contract.

The Establishment Period Final Inspection will be performed on a mutually agreeable date at least one year following the start date of the Establishment Period and 1 year completion of the appropriate planting season (spring or fall) but in no case less than 14 days before the end date of the appropriate planting season.



PLANTING 190605 - 9

Any dead, missing, or defective plants shall be replaced as directed by the COTR prior to the termination of the Establishment Period. A minimum of 75 percent of the plants must be alive and healthy at the end the establishment period.

(b) Establishment Period Final Inspection Punch List: The COTR will develop an

Establishment Period Punch List based on the requirements listed below of any unfulfilled requirements or deficiencies, including a list of plants to be replaced prior to acceptance of this phase of the planting operations. The Contractor shall perform repairs, replacements and other work as required to finalize conformance to Punch List items and any other unfulfilled requirements specified in the Contract.

(c) Final Acceptance of the Establishment Period shall end on a date established by the

COTR, when the Contractor receives written notification from the COTR that confirms all the requirements of this Section have been satisfactorily completed.

190605.09 GUARANTEE The Contractor shall provide the Department a minimum one-year separate performance bond in the full amount of the Landscaping section of the contract applicable for the duration of the Establishment Period. The 1-year landscape performance bond shall begin on the start date of the Establishment Period as described in Section 190605.07. The Contractor’s separate performance bond for the landscaping portion of the Contract as specified in Section 190605.07 shall provide for necessary maintenance during the Establishment Period. Among other things this bond shall ensure plant replacements in kind (or with a substitute acceptable to the COTR) for plants that are not in a healthy growing condition or that have died back to the crown or beyond the normal pruning limit and for all associated maintenance as required by these specifications and the Contractor’s approved Establishment Period Phased Maintenance Schedule. 190605.10 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Plants will be measured in units of each, on an actual count of living plants in a healthy growing condition, and will be paid for at the contract unit price per each as described in the Contract for the size (and, if specified, quality) designated. Plants that the COTR deleted from the Contract will not be measured for payment. This price shall include furnishing and installing plants and miscellaneous planting materials; materials, labor and equipment necessary to complete the workinitial watering when planting; watering during the Installation Phase and the Establishment Period; replacing dead or damaged plants; and maintaining plants in a healthy growing condition until final acceptance.

(a) Not Used.

(b) Replacements for plants lost during the Establishment Period due to damage or destruction caused by non-Contract personnel or equipment, or damage or destruction caused by wild or domestic animals will be paid for at the rate of 35 percent the contract unit price per each. If the COTR determines the cause of damage, destruction, or loss to be theft, vandalism, or public vehicular damage, the rate will be 50 percent of the contract unit price per each. This price shall include all costs associated with furnishing and



PLANTING 190605 - 10

installing the replacement plant. Replacements for plants that die due to other reasons shall be replaced and paid for in accordance with Section 190605.07 (l).

(c) Payment will be made according to the following schedule when all construction,

requirements are met:

PAYMENT SCHEDULE

CONSTRUCTION

REQUIREMENTS

PERCENT OF TOTAL

CONTRACT PRICE

PAYMENT FOR

COMPLETED WORK

Schedule thru Installation Phase 60 At Installation Phase

Acceptance Establishment Phase

thru Final Acceptance 40 At Final Acceptance

Total Payment 100%

(d) Not Used.

(e) Watering during the Installation Period shall be applied at the rates and frequencies

designated on the Plans and, during the Establishment Period, in accordance with the Contractor’s approved Establishment Period Phased Maintenance Schedule.

(f) Not Used.

(g) Forfeiture: failure to complete operations required or directed in conformance with the

Plant Payment Schedule will result in delay of that percentage of payment based upon the list of Contract Prices until the work is completed or, in the absence of completion, forfeiture of that percentage.

Payment will be made under:

(a) Livestakes: Will be measured and paid for in accordance with Section 190612.

(b) Riparian Seed Mix: Will be measured and paid for in accordance with Section 190603. (c) Soil Stabilization Matting: Will be measured and paid for in accordance with Section

190611. (d) Topsoil: Topsoil shall be accordance with Section 190244.02(b). Topsoil shall be spread

to a minimum depth of 4 inches in the areas indicated on the plans. The price will include all hauling, spreading, any necessary stockpiling operations, compaction, equipment, tools and labor and all incidentals necessary to complete the work.

Payment will be made under: Item No. Pay Item Pay Unit




190605-1 Topsoil Class B – 4” Depth Cubic Yard END OF SECTION 190605







SOIL STABLIZATION MATTING (SSM) 190611 - 1

SECTION 190611 – SOIL STABILIZATION MATTING (SSM) 190611.01 DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of furnishing and placing Soil Stabilization Matting (SSM)on construction slopes, in drainage channels or concentrated flow areas to facilitate vegetation establishment according to these Specifications and in conformity to the dimensions, lines, and grades shown on the Plans or as established by the COTR. 190611.02 MATERIALS

(a) Soil Stabilization Matting shall be Bristle Coir Fiber Matting. Soil Stabilization Matting shall consist of machine twisted twines and be 100 percent biodegradable. Soil Stabilization Matting which uses plastics, metals or other non-biodegradable materials in the construction of the material will not be permitted. The matting shall exceed EC-2, Type 4 Rolled Erosion Products specifications as specified in Section 190244 and meet the following minimum specifications:

Physical Property Test Method Requirements

Weight (min.): ASTM D3776 26.0 oz. / SY Wide Width Tensile Strength – WET Machine Direction (min): ASTM D4595 1260 lbs. / ft.

Wide Width Tensile Strength – DRY Machine Direction (min): ASTM D4595 1960 lbs. / ft.

Thickness (min): ASTM D1777 / D5199 0.30 inch (7.6mm)

Recommended Maximum Shear Stress: Flume Tests 5.0 lbs. /ft2. Recommended Velocity (feet per second): Flume Tests 16 ft. / sec.

(b) Staples for securing the soil stabilization matting shall be U or T shaped steel wire with a minimum gage of 8. The U-shaped staples shall average 1 to 1.5 inches wide. The T shaped staples shall have a main and a secondary leg and a 4-inch head. The length of the U and T shaped staples shall be 8 inches’ minimum. (c) Wood Stakes for securing the soil stabilization matting shall be untreated hardwood or southern yellow pine with a saw-formed point on one end to drive the stake into the ground. The other end of the stake shall contain a small notch to hook over and secure the Soil Stabilization Matting. The stakes shall be 1 inch by 2 inch in size and be a minimum of 18 inches in length. Dead Wedge Stakes, which are common spruce-pine-fir (SPF) lumber cut into long wedges with each having an approximate dimension of 1-1/2 inches by 3-1/2 inches by 2 feet long may also be used to secure the soil stabilization matting. Treated lumber for use as stakes will not be allowed.





(a) Installation

1. Preparing Areas: Proposed ground shall be shaped in accordance with the cross sections shown on the Plans and then rolled or tamped to compact soil in place before final shaping.

During shaping operations, the Contractor shall prepare a seedbed approximately 3/4 inch in depth over the areas to be covered by the SSM. Stones, roots, and other objects that will prevent the protective covering from making consistently firm contact with the seedbed shall be removed before covering is installed.

2. Applying Seed: Seed shall be applied at a rate of 30 pounds per acre in

accordance with Section 190603 prior to installation of the SSM.

Seeded areas adjacent to the channel or ditch that are disturbed during installation of covering shall be uniformly reshaped, reseeded, and mulched for seeding at the Contractor’s expense.

3. Unrolling: The SSM shall be installed perpendicular to the flow of water, laying

the SSM smoothly in firm uniform contact with the proposed surface without stretching or tenting of the fabric.

The SSM will be installed in an overlapping fashion or “shingle-style” with the

upstream section of SSM overlapping the next downstream section. Each overlap of sections shall be a minimum of 6 inches.

4. Keying-in: The ends of the SSM shall be keyed into the ground by digging a

trench a minimum of 1 foot deep and backfilling and tamping the ground/materials firmly in place. Where this is not feasible, wood stakes shall be utilized a minimum of 1 foot on center, along the edge of the SSM. Where the ends of the SSM meet the proposed channel bed, the SSM must be keyed in under the proposed gravel underlayment a minimum of 12 inches. Where no gravel underlayment is proposed, the stream side edge of the SSM shall be keyed in underneath the edge of the proposed rock/soil mix. The leading upstream end, where installation of the SSM begins shall be keyed into the ground accordingly. The downstream edge of the last section of SSM shall also be keyed into the ground accordingly.

5. Fastening: The ends and overlapping sections of the SSM shall be fastened to the

ground using Wood Stakes specified in 190611.02 (c). The wood stakes shall be installed with a maximum spacing of 2 feet on center. All Wood stakes shall be driven into the ground at a 30-degree opposing angle to the direction of flow until no more than 3 inches of the wood stake is exposed above the proposed ground. Wood stakes that hit refusal before being fully installed shall be cut off so that no more than 3 inches of the wood stake is exposed above ground.




Staples and/or Wood Stakes shall be utilized to secure all remaining areas of the SSM. Staples shall be in accordance with 190611.02 (b) and installed a maximum of 1 foot on center and driven completely flush with the proposed ground. Staples that hit refusal prior to being fully installed must be removed and reinstalled in another location in the immediate vicinity. Wood Stakes shall be installed a maximum of 2 feet on center

5. Watering: The SSM shall be gently watered with a sprinkler or water break

nozzle within 24 hours of installation to bond the SSM and set the seed to the soil. Apply water at a rate of 300 gallons per 1000 square feet to ensure the soil in sufficiently wet to a depth of 2 inches below the SSM.


(a) Seeding Materials: Will be measured and paid for in accordance with Section 190603.

(b) Soil Stabilization Matting (SSM): Will be measured in square yards of area covered, complete-in-place, in accordance with the nominal plan dimensions and will be paid for at the contract unit price per square yard for the type specified. Overlaps, over-widths, and trenching or keying-in of the SSM will not be measured for payment. Staples and Wood Stakes shall be considered incidental to the price of SSM. This price shall include furnishing, installing, smoothing, and shaping ditch channels and waterways; preparing seed beds; and furnishing and applying water.

Payment will be made under: Item No. Pay Item Pay Unit 190611-1 Soil Stabilization Matting Square Yard END OF SECTION 190611






LIVE STAKES (LS) 190612 - 1

SECTION 190612 – LIVE STAKES (LS) 190612.01 DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of furnishing and placing Live Stakes (LS) in areas as specified on the Plans or as established by the COTR. 190613.02 MATERIALS

(a) Watering. Shall conform to Section 190605.7 (a).

(b) Live Stakes (LS). Obtain LS from an approved landscape nursery that produces native bioengineering plant materials. LS shall be freshly cut, dormant branches of species specified on the plans. LS shall be ¾ of an inch to 1-1/2 inches in diameter and a minimum of 3 feet in length. Livestakes specifications shall meet or exceed Practice 2.6: Live Stakes according to the Virginia Stream Restoration and Stabilization Best Management Practices Guide.


(a) Schedule

1. The Contractor shall submit a proposed construction schedule with the source of supply of LS before beginning operations. LS shall be installed with 5 calendar days from the date delivery.

(b) Transportation and Storage. Shall conform to Section 190605.04 (k) and 190605.04 (l).

(c) Preparation. Shall conform to Section 190605.04 (m) and the following:

1. Cut each LS to the specified size. Ensure that the cuts are smooth, and the cut surface is small.

2. Cleanly remove side branches and small brushy limbs.

3. Scarify each LS along the bottom two-thirds of its length so that 20 percent of the

bark is abraded. Discard each LS that has been girdled. 4. Cut the bottom end of each LS at a 30 to 45-degree angle for easier insertion into

the soil. 5. Cut the top of each LS at a 90-degree angle to ensure a flat surface for tamping

into the soil.

(d) Installation

1. Install LS from November 1 to April 30th, while the plant material is dormant. Do not install into frozen ground.


LIVE STAKES (LS) 190612 - 2

2. Install LS according to the locations and spacing shown on the plans. In general,

LS will be planted in the near-bank area of the channel, no more than 6 feet from either top-of-bank. Spacing of LS shall be 2 feet on-center.

3. Orient the buds of each LS upward. 4. Use a metal rebar stake to make a pilot hole to install LS in firm soil. Tamp LS

into the soil with a rubber mallet. 5. Ensure the tops of LS are pointed downstream at approximately a 30-degree

angle. 6. Install at least two-thirds of the LS below the surface of the soil. 7. Firm the soil around each installed LS. 8. Trim tops or replace LS that are severely damaged or split during installation.

(e) Installation Phase Inspection and Acceptance shall conform to Section 190605.5.

(f) Establishment Phase. Shall conform to Section 190605.7.

(f) Final Acceptance. Shall conform to Section 190605.8. 190612.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Live Stakes (LS) will be measured and paid for in units of each. Payment for LS shall include all transportation, handling, and storage to ensure the LS are alive and robust. Payment shall also include the preparation of each LS to be planted and the actual installation, including the tools and incidental necessary to properly install the LS. Payment shall conform to the Establishment and Final Acceptance terms as described herein. Payment will be made under: Item No. Pay Item Pay Unit 190612-1 Livestakes Each END OF SECTION 190612



TRAFFIC SIGNS 190701 - 1

SECTION 190701 – TRAFFIC SIGNS 190701.01 DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of fabricating, refurbishing, furnishing, and erecting signs as specified on the plans or elsewhere in the contract. 190701.02 MATERIALS

(a) Reflective sheeting shall conform to Section 190247 and shall be selected from the

Materials Division’s Approved Products List 46. The color for the legend and background shall be in accordance with the MUTCD, the Virginia Supplement to the MUTCD, and as specified in the plans.

(b) Sign panel rivets shall be powder coated to match the color of the portion of the sign

sheeting that the rivets will protrude from. The rivets shall be fabricated in accordance with Standard Drawing SPD-1.


(a) Fabrication:

1. Aluminum welds: Aluminum shall be welded according to Section 190407. 2. Sign panels: Panels for permanent signs shall be fabricated of aluminum 0.100-

inch in thickness and shall be smooth, flat, and free of metal burrs and splinters. Sign panels for overlays shall be aluminum alloy conforming to the Section 190229.02(a), between 0.080 and 0.100 gage in thickness.

Extruded sign panels shall conform to the Standard Drawings and Section 190229.02(c).

3. Applying retroreflective background sheeting: Sheeting shall be applied

according to the manufacturer’s instructions and the detailed requirements herein.

The Contractor shall have sign panels 16 square feet or more in area fabricated from a single piece of applied sheeting, except in the case of sign panels fabricated with fluorescent orange prismatic lens sheeting. Fabricate fluorescent orange prismatic sign panels having an area of 16 square feet or more from sheeting at least 4 feet by 2 feet in dimension, except one piece of sheeting may be less than 2 feet wide to obtain the exact dimensions required. The COTR will not permit joints, splices, or laps on sign panels less than 16 square feet in area except the following will be allowed:

a. One factory splice from a roll.




b. One joint on fluorescent prismatic lens orange signs when one dimension of the panel is greater than 36 inches but less than 48 inches.

When applying more than one width of reflective sheeting (except for fluorescent orange prismatic lens sheeting) to a sign panel, sheeting edges shall form a vertical butt joint having no gaps or may overlap, but not more than 3/8 inch. The bottom edge of the top width of sheeting shall lie continuously over the top edge of the next lower width of sheeting in a shingle style lap of not more than 3/8 inch when horizontal joints are required, except in the case of fluorescent orange prismatic lens sheeting. Multiple pieces of fluorescent orange prismatic lens sheeting shall be installed with a gap 1/32 to 1/16 inch between the edges, except in the case of fluorescent prismatic lens orange sheeting. Match sheeting carefully to maintain uniform shading and prevent contrast between widths of sheeting.

The finished sign shall be free from cracks, gaps, streaks, wrinkles, blisters, discoloration, buckles, and warps and shall have a smooth surface of uniform color.

4. Letters, numerals, arrows, symbols, borders, and other features of the sign

message: Features of the sign message shall conform to the MUTCD and the Virginia Standard Highway Signs Book. The Contractor shall ensure fabricator shall Form units of the sign message to provide a continuous stroke width with smooth edges and a flat surface free from warps, blisters, wrinkles, burrs, and splinters. Features shall also conform to the following:

a. Type L1, screen process, applied: Features shall be produced by a direct

or reverse screening process approved by the COTR. Sign messages and borders that are darker than the sign field shall be applied to the reflective sheeting by a direct process. Sign messages and borders that are lighter than the sign field shall be produced by the reverse process in which the message and border are outlined by a color that is darker than the paint or the sheeting on the sign field. Transparent colors, inks, and paints used in the screening process shall be of the type, formulation, and quality recommended by the sheeting manufacturer.

Screening applications shall produce a uniform color and tone. Edges of the legend and borders shall not have blemishes. Signs shall be air dried or baked according to the manufacturer’s recommendations to provide a smooth, hard finish.

b. Type L2, plastic film sheeting, applied: Features of the sign message

shall be cut from plastic film sheeting of the color specified on the plans. Sheeting shall be an elastomeric pigmented film coated on one side with an adhesive and covered with a paper liner that is removable from the adhesive without being moistened. Adhesive shall be activated by heat or a solvent recommended by the sheeting manufacturer. Adhesive shall be suitable for application with a hand roller, squeeze roller, or vacuum applicator to form a durable bond to wood, metal, plastic, porcelain




enamel, paint lacquer, and reflective sheeting. Sheeting shall be at least 0.002 and not more than 0.0035 inch in thickness and sufficiently opaque so that its color will be unaffected by the color of the sign field.

c. Type L3, cutout, reflective sheeting, and pressure applied: Features of

the sign message shall be cut from approved reflective sheeting of the color specified on the plans. Sheeting shall have heat-activated or pressure-sensitive adhesive and be applied to the background sheeting according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

d. Type L4, overlay film, pressure applied: Features of the sign message

shall be created by using a background sheeting of the color needed for the sign message and then applying the overlay film with the sign message areas removed from the film. The overlay film shall be transparent and shall be of the color needed to provide the correct background color of the sign.

5. Joining sign base panels: Horizontal joints shall be constructed according to the

Standard Drawing SPD-1. Where multiple vertical panels adjoin, the face and edges shall be milled or finished to a tolerance of ±1/32 inch from a straight plane such that no gap more than 1/16 inch is produced between panels.

Extruded sign panels shall be assembled according to the Standard Drawing SPD-2.

6. Applying the sign message: The Contractor shall ensure features shall be straight,

properly spaced, smooth to the applied surface, and free from irregular edges. 7. Sign finishing: The complete outer edge, splices, messages, and borders of signs

shall be sealed after application to the sign panel. Sealant material and its application shall be according to the sheeting manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions.

8. Rejected sign messages: The Contractor shall immediately obliterate sign

messages on signs that the COTR has rejected, and remove those signs from the project.

9. Bracing: Bracing shall be installed on the backs of all non-extruded signs when

required by the Standard Drawings.

(b) Transporting and Storing Signs from the Fabricator: Transport signs according to either of the following methods.

1. The Contractor shall ensure signs are transported in cardboard cartons with a

slipsheet covering the sheeting. The slipsheet shall be paper with a plastic coating on one side, with the plastic side faced against the sign sheeting according to the sheeting manufacturer’s recommendations. Not more than 10 signs may be placed in any one carton. Signs shall alternate face-to-face, back-to-back, throughout the carton. A microfoam pad at least 1/16 inch in thickness shall be used between signs placed face to face. Cartons shall be placed vertically within




a container designed to elevate boxes above ground level and provide lateral structural support. Cartons shall not be exposed to moisture before or during transportation; or

2. Signs shall be transported on an open truck or trailer bed with vertical racks for

attachment of signs. Racks shall be designed to provide lateral structural support and allow the free flow of air around the sign face. Large signs may be transported on an open truck or trailer bed in shipping containers consisting of framing around edges of signs. Framing shall be untreated lumber that provides support for the sign without allowing pressure on the sign sheeting. Each container may house two signs positioned with the sign sheeting facing toward the inside. Signs shall be held in place in containers through the use of metal stiffeners attached to the framing, such as T-bars, Z-bars, or horizontal stiffeners. The Contractor shall ensure shipping containers are secured in the vertical position for transportation.

Signs transported in cardboard cartons shall be stored in their original shipping containers in a dry, enclosed location providing protection from extreme heat and humidity. Signs transported on racks or in wooden containers shall be stored on vertical racks designed to elevate signs above ground level, provide lateral structural support, and permit the free flow of air around the sign face. The Contractor shall not store signs where they are subjected to water runoff. The Contractor may remove signs from storage and install them on their structural supports before the structure is erected; however, in such cases, the structure along with the sign shall be erected within 24 hours after removal of the sign from storage. During this 24 hour time period, the sign and its structural support shall be stored at a sufficient angle to facilitate water runoff from the sign while preventing the sign from coming in contact with the ground. The Contractor shall not band signs together, cover them with tarps, store them flat, or subject the sign sheeting to pressure during storage. The COTR will reject any signs that have been transported or stored in cardboard cartons that have been exposed to moisture to the extent that moisture has entered the cartons. The Contractor shall immediately obliterate sign messages on signs rejected by the COTR, and remove the rejected signs from the project.

(c) Transporting and Storing Relocated Signs: The Contractor shall transport and store signs

designated for relocation in a manner that will not allow pressure to be placed on the sign sheeting. Relocated signs shall be stored in their vertical position above ground level. Relocated signs that have been removed from their structure shall be stored according to paragraph (b) herein.

(d) Erection: The Contractor shall install sign panels on overhead sign structures so that the

vertical clearance is no less than 19 feet and no more than 21 feet from the bottom of the lowest mounted sign panel to the crown of the roadway, unless otherwise specified on the plans. Walkway or luminaire assemblies shall have a vertical clearance of not less than 17 feet 6 inches from the bottom of the assembly to the crown of the roadway.




If possible, the Contractor shall install sign panels at a time when covering of the sign message will not be needed. When this is not possible, a porous cloth cover rendering the sign message nonvisible shall be placed over the sign sheeting, folded over the sign edges, and secured to the back of the sign panel. Sign panels shall be securely fastened to posts or supports and erected plumb. Ground-mounted signs shall be horizontally angled at 93 degrees between the face of the sign panel and the centerline of the roadway, unless otherwise indicated on the plans or directed by the COTR. Vertical and horizontal spacing between installed signs shall be 1 inch where multiple signs are installed on the same structure. A 1/16 inch thick neoprene gasket shall be used between the seat of the galvanized steel post clamps and the framing unit. Illumination of signs shall be according to Section 190705. Damage to reflective sheeting may be repaired and edges sealed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and the following: Sign patch material shall be of the same type and color as the surrounding sheeting and shall have at least the same life expectancy. Patching will not be permitted on any letter, numeral, arrow, symbol, or border. The COTR will reject signs where the number, size, or spacing of patches is more than the following, and the signs shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense:

The Contractor shall repair superficial damage to sign panels using methods recommended by the sheeting manufacturer that result in a smooth, flat, and completely legible panel. The COTR will reject sign panels that have more than superficial damage, such panels shall be replaced at the Contractor’s expense. Existing overlays and demountable messages including borders, present on signs designated to receive overlays shall be removed to facilitate the installation of the new overlay. Bullet holes and bent sections shall be flattened so that the sign face is free of projections and large indentations to facilitate installation of the new overlay.




Overlayments 3 feet or less in total horizontal dimension shall be accomplished with one panel. Overlayments greater than 3 feet in total horizontal dimension shall be accomplished with panels no less than 3 feet wide except that one panel per overlayment may be less than 3 feet wide to obtain the exact horizontal dimension required. Joints of overlays shall be tightly butted and not overlap. Overlay panels shall be erected with aluminum rivets. Rivets shall be no less than 3/16 inch in diameter and of such length as to fasten the panels securely and form a compressed head conforming to the manufacturer’s recommendations. Rivets shall be located on 1-foot centers, positioned 1 inch from each panel’s edges, completely around the sign’s perimeter. Where overlayment panels are 30 inches or greater in width, a column of rivets shall be installed on 1-foot centers down the centerline of the panel. Rivets shall be installed in such a sequence as to prevent buckling of the panels. Overlay panels shall be performed on a flat surface with no protruding bolts or bolt heads on the existing sign panel. Overlay of overhead sign panels shall be according to details on the Plans.

(e) Warranty Requirements: The Contractor shall provide a manufacturer’s warranty in

accordance with Section 190247 for permanent traffic control signs. Providing a manufacturer’s warranty of the type and length specified in Section 190247 will be considered incidental to the cost of the sign panel or overlay sign panel.

(f) Documentation Requirements:

For warranty requirements, each permanent traffic control sign shall be labeled on the blank side of the sign panel in a location, not to be obscured by sign supports or mounting hardware, with the following information:

1. Sheeting Manufacturer’s name or logo. 2. product designation or number. 3. lot number. 4. Sign fabricator’s name or logo. 5. Month and year the sign was fabricated. The month and year may be indicated by

punchout numerals. 6. Installation date. 7. VDOT acronym or logo.

Labels shall be made of a self-adhesive, permanent, weather resistant material and shall be a minimum 4” by 4” in size. Label may be made from permanent sign material provided the finished label meets all other aspects required for warranty documentation.




The Contractor shall ensure information required for warranty documentation is supplied by permanent means capable of resisting weathering for the full duration of the warranty period, such as sign ink, where the information required for the label is not furnished by punched-out numerals. Prior to applying the label, the area shall be thoroughly cleaned to ensure proper adhesion or application of ink. The Contractor shall provide an .xlsx formatted file to the COTR, using a sign inventory template provided by the COTR. The file shall include the information required above for the label, as well as the following:

1. Route no. 2. Project UPC no. (if applicable). 3. Station or milepost information. 4. Lane designation. 5. MUTCD or VA Supplement to the MUTCD sign code, if applicable and if

denoted on the plans. 6. Sign message. 7. Sign width. 8. Sign height.

The cost of preparing and submitting the .xlsx formatted file shall be included with the cost of the sign panel pay items.

190701.4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Sign panels will be measured in square feet and will be paid for at the contract unit price per square foot. This price shall include background sheeting, sign messages, finishing, framing units, hanger assemblies, bracing, stiffeners, splicing, backing strips, post clips/post clamps, warranty, and labeling. Overlay sign panels will be measured in square feet of sign panels without deductions for rounded corners. Overlay sign panel will be paid for at the contract unit price per square foot. This price shall include verifying the size and color of overlayment panel; removing existing overlayment and demountable messages including borders; fabricating, and new overlayment.




Payment will be made under: Item No. Pay Item Pay Unit 190701-1 Sign Panel (for existing and new overhead sign) Square Foot END OF SECTION 190701



DELINEATORS 190702 - 1

SECTION 190702 – DELINEATORS 190702.01 DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of furnishing and installing road-edge, barrier, flexible post, or guardrail delineators of the type specified in accordance with these specifications and in conformity with the lines and dimensions on the plans or as established by the COTR. 190702.02 MATERIALS

(a) Fabrication of aluminum panels with reflective sheeting shall conform to Section 190701. (b) Reflective sheeting shall conform to Section 190247.02(f) and shall be selected from the

VDOT’s Approved Products List 46. (c) Plastic lens retroreflector delineators shall conform to Section 190235. (d) Plastic panels shall conform to Section 190235. (e) Aluminum panels shall conform to Section 190235. (f) Adhesive for attaching delineators to guardrail and barrier shall be as recommended by

the delineator manufacturer. (g) Flexible Post Delineators and anchoring systems shall conform to Section 190235 and

shall be selected from the VDOT Materials Division’s Approved Products List 16. Surface-mount flexible post delineators shall contain an anchoring system for attaching the flexible post delineator to the pavement, median, or island. Ground-mount flexible post delineators shall contain an anchoring system for anchoring the flexible post delineator in earth.

190702.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Retroreflectors for road edge, flexible post, barrier, and guardrail delineators shall be the same color as the adjacent pavement marking, unless otherwise specified on the plans. Barrier delineators on the top of barriers separating opposing directions of traffic shall be yellow on both sides.

(a) Road-edge Delineators:

1. Interstate road-edge delineators shall consist of two types.

Type I shall be an aluminum panel with reflective sheeting. Type II shall be a plastic lens retroreflector.

2. Standard and special road-edge delineators shall be an aluminum alloy panel with reflective sheeting.




(b) Barrier and Guardrail Delineators shall have no less than 7.0 square inches of

retroreflective sheeting and shall have no more than 5 inches of vertical projection when installed. The delineator shall be fabricated from a flexible plastic panel.


(a) Roadedge delineators shall be placed as shown on the Standard Drawings, ED-2 or ED-3, as appropriate. Posts shall be installed plumb and to the details and dimensions shown.

(b) Barrier and guardrail delineators shall be applied to clean, dry surfaces in accordance

with the delineator manufacturer’s recommendations. Loose material and dirt shall be removed from concrete by wire brushing and from steel surfaces by other appropriate methods. When recommended by the manufacturer, a primer shall be used to aid adhesion.

Delineators shall be installed on all barriers and guardrails that are within 15 feet of the edge of the pavement. Barrier delineators shall be installed on the respective barriers at the locations shown on the Standard Drawings, MB-Series, or on the relevant bridge parapet/railing detail shown on the plans. Barrier delineators shall be installed using an adhesive recommended by the delineator’s manufacturer. The Contractor shall install guardrail delineators at the midpoint of the offset block, if an offset block is used, or on the web of the guardrail posts if an offset block is not required in the installation. The COTR will not permit field cutting or adjustments where weak post guardrail and cable guardrail systems are installed, delineators shall be manufactured to fit. If a bolting system is used to attach the delineators to the posts, the bolting system shall be such that drilling of the guardrail posts or offset blocks is unnecessary. Delineators shall be attached with screws or by an adhesive system recommended by the manufacturer where delineators are to be attached to wood or recycled plastic offset blocks. Screws shall be stainless steel or galvanized. Spacing for delineators on barrier or guardrail shall be on 80-foot centers unless otherwise indicated. Delineators mounted on guardrail and barriers located in curves on interchange ramps shall be spaced in accordance with the spacing for interstate road-edge delineators as shown on the Standard Drawing ED-3, except that the maximum spacing shall be 80 feet. Where the center-to-center spacing for delineators on guardrail cannot be obtained due to post spacing, the delineators shall be installed to provide spacing that is not greater than the spacing indicated herein.

(c) Flexible Post Delineators – Surface-mount delineators shall be attached to clean, dry

roadways, medians, or concrete island surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Loose material and dirt shall be removed from concrete surfaces by wire brushing. When recommended by the manufacturer, a specified primer shall be used to aid in adhesion.




Ground-mount flexible post delineators shall be embedded in the ground in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

190702.5 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Road-edge delineators will be measured in units of each and will be paid for at the contract unit price per each for the standard and type specified. This price shall include post, fasteners, retroreflective elements, excavation, and backfill. Barrier and guardrail delineators are considered incidental to barrier and guardrail construction and will not be measured for separate payment unless otherwise specified in the Contract. When specified in the Contract for installation on existing barriers and guardrail, delineators will be measured in units of each and will be paid for at the contract unit price per each. This price shall include surface preparation, delineators, primer if required by the manufacturer, adhesive, fasteners, and retroreflectors. Flexible Post Delineators will be measured in units of each and will be paid for at the contract unit price per each for the type specified. This price shall include flexible post, surface preparation, primer if required by the manufacturer, anchors, adhesives, and retroreflective elements. Payment will be made under:







PAVEMENT MARKINGS AND MARKERS 190704 - 1

SECTION 190704 – PAVEMENT MARKINGS AND MARKERS 190704.01 DESCRIPTION This work shall consist of establishing the location of retroreflective pavement markings and installing pavement markings and pavement markers in accordance with the MUTCD, the Virginia Supplement to the MUTCD, these Specifications, the Plans, and as directed by the COTR. 190704.02 MATERIALS

(a) Pavement Markings shall conform to Section 190246. (b) Glass Beads and retroreflective optics materials shall conform to Section 190234. (c) Pavement Markers shall conform to Section 190235.

All pavement marking materials shall be selected from the Materials Division’s Approved Products List 17. For Type B, Class VI pavement marking materials that are to be applied to latex emulsion or slurry seal surfaces. The selected Type B, Class VI manufacturer shall be a manufacturer that approves and warranties their product for application on that type of surface. The Contractor shall use a Department approved inventory tracking system for all materials received from the manufacturer. Shipment of materials from such inventory shall be accompanied by a signed Form C-85 containing the following certification statement:

Material shipped under this certification has been tested and approved by VDOT as indicated by laboratory test numbers (MS#) listed hereon.

190704.03 PROCEDURES Once received by the Contractor, the Contractor shall store all materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions until the day of installation, unless the COTR otherwise authorizes. Pavement marking material shall not be installed if the material has exceeded its shelf life, has been improperly stored, has deteriorated or is otherwise damaged. The Contractor shall furnish a copy of the manufacturer’s installation instructions to the COTR prior to installation. The Contractor shall have a certified Pavement Marking Technician present during all temporary pavement marking, permanent pavement marking, and pavement marker operations. All pavement markings and markers shall be installed on new roadways prior to opening the roadways to traffic. Temporary or permanent pavement marking installation, including edge lines and message markings, shall be completed within the time limits stated herein on existing roadways where the pavement markings have been removed or obscured and the roadway is to be reopened to traffic, unless otherwise directed by the COTR. The COTR will only authorize exceptions to these time limits for weather conditions preventing installation, when pavement surface conditions required by the manufacturer or these specifications such as cooling, curing, or aging limit application prior to the



installation of permanent markings, or when Type B, Class VI marking material is to be inlaid into the freshly paved asphalt concrete roadway surface. Epoxy resin and polyurea pavement markings shall be installed on new pavement in accordance with the manufacturers’ instructions. Pavement markings shall not be installed on new asphalt concrete pavement until the pavement mat has cooled sufficiently to support the pavement marking equipment without deformation. Time limits for installation are as follow:

• Pavement marking installation on interstates, other freeways (fully limited-access, divided roadway with two or more lanes per direction) with posted speed limit of 55 mph or greater, and interstate/freeway ramps, where the corresponding pavement markings were removed, eradicated, or obscured shall be completed prior to opening the lane to traffic.

• Pavement marking installation on non-freeway roads having traffic volumes of 10,000

ADT or more shall be completed within 24 hours after the end of the workday when the corresponding existing pavement markings were removed, eradicated, or obscured.

• Pavement marking installation on non-freeway roads having traffic volumes between

3,000 and 10,000 ADT shall be completed within 48 hours after the end of the workday when the corresponding existing pavement markings were removed, eradicated, or obscured.

• Pavement marking installation on non-freeway roads having traffic volumes of less than

3,000 ADT shall be completed within 72 hours after the end of the workday when the corresponding existing pavement markings were removed or obscured.

If an approach to a signalized intersection has (a) two or more approach through lanes, (b) 45 mph or greater speed limit, (c) greater than 3000 ADT, and (d) all markings on that approach are obliterated, then all lane lines and centerlines within 250 feet of the stop line location shall be temporarily or permanently marked within 24 hours of opening the approach to traffic, unless a time extension is approved by the COTR and “Unmarked Pavement Ahead” or “No Center Line” warning signs were properly installed when the unmarked approach was first opened to traffic as per the VWAPM.

• Temporary symbol/message markings and temporary edge lines, if required by the

Contract, shall be marked within 72 hours after the end of the work day when the corresponding existing markings were obscured, removed, or eradicated on roads with 10,000 or greater ADT, and shall be marked within 96 hours after the end of the work day when the corresponding existing markings were obscured, removed, or eradicated on roads with less than 10,000 ADT.

If the Contractor cannot have permanent pavement markings installed within the time limits specified, the Contractor shall install temporary pavement markings within the same time limits and maintain such markings until the permanent pavement markings can be installed. The cost of installing, maintaining, and removing/eradicating temporary pavement markings shall be at no additional cost to the Department unless otherwise indicated in the Contract or directed by the COTR. The Contractor may mark the locations of proposed permanent markings on the roadway by installing premarking materials. Premarkings may be accomplished by installing Type D (removable, any class) tape, chalk, or lumber crayons, except pavement markings such as stop lines, crosswalks, messages,



hatching, etc., shall be premarked using chalk or lumber crayons. Premarkings shall be of the same general color as the pavement markings being premarked. When tape is used as a premarking material, premarking shall consist of 4inch by 4-inch-maximum squares or 4-inch-maximum diameter circles spaced at 100-foot minimum intervals in tangent sections and 50-foot minimum intervals in curved sections. At locations where the pavement marking will switch colors, e.g., gore marking, the ends of the markings may be premarked regardless of the spacing. When the Contractor uses chalk or lumber crayon as a premarking, the entire length of the proposed pavement marking may be premarked. Premarkings shall be installed so their installation will not affect the adhesion of the permanent pavement markings. When Type D tape is used as the premarking material and the lateral location of such premarkings to location of the final pavement markings exceeds 6 inches, the Type D premarkings shall be removed at no additional cost to the Department. Permanent pavement markings shall not be installed over temporary paint if the paint exceeds the maximum allowable specified thickness in Table VII-3 or is not fully dry. If the temporary paint is not located directly underneath the location where the permanent markings are to be installed, it shall be 100% eradicated prior to installation of the permanent markings at no additional cost to the Department. The Contractor shall exercise caution and protect the public from damage while performing pavement marking operations. The Contractor shall be responsible for the complete preparation of the pavement surface, including, but not limited to, removing dust, dirt, loose particles, oily residues, curing compounds, concrete laitance, residues from eradication, and other foreign matter immediately prior to installing pavement markings. The pavement surface shall be clean and dry at the time of pavement marking installation and shall be tested in accordance with VTM-94 prior to permanent installation. The Contractor shall provide the apparatus indicated in VTM-94 that are needed to perform the moisture test prior to application. Liquid markings shall be applied so as to prevent splattering and overspray and shall be protected from traffic until track free by the use of traffic control guarding or warning devices as necessary. If a vehicle crosses a pavement marking and tracks it or if splattering or overspray occurs, the affected marking and resultant tracking, overspray, or splattering shall be completely removed and new markings applied at the Contractor’s expense. Truck-mounted equipment for application of liquid long line Type B markings shall be capable of hot applying liquid and/or plastic markings and broadcasting glass beads uniformly over the entire surface of the marking. Truck mounted equipment tanks shall be equipped with a mechanical agitator to keep the pavement marking materials thoroughly mixed at all times. Materials shall be blended, heated, and applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. Markings shall be applied in widths of 4 through 8 inches in accordance with the the Plans and Specifications. Equipment shall be capable of applying two pavement lines, either solid or skip, at the same time when double line markings are required. Non-truck mounted equipment shall be self-propelled and regulated to allow for calibration of the amount and type of material applied. The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that equipment is thoroughly cleaned between changes in colors or types of materials.



Markings shall not be installed directly over longitudinal pavement joints, except to cross the joint perpendicularly or at an angle. Pavement markings shall have clean and well-defined edges without running, bleeding or deformation. Markings shall be uniform in appearance, free of waviness; (waviness is defined as the edge of the marking shall not vary from a straight line more than 1/4 inch in three feet or more than one inch in fifty feet for a maximum distance of 500 feet); shall be straight on tangent alignment; and shall be on a true arc on curved alignment. The widths of pavement markings shall not deviate more than 1/4 inch on tangent nor more than 1/2 inch on curves from the required width. The length of the gap and the length of the individual stripes that form skip lines shall not deviate more than two inches from their required lengths. The length of the gap and individual skip line shall be of such uniformity throughout the entire length of each that a normal striping machine shall be able to repeat the pattern and superimpose additional striping upon the existing marking. Glass beads and retroreflective optics shall be applied at the rate specified herein or as specified in the Materials Division’s Approved Products List for the specific pavement marking product. Beads and optics shall be evenly distributed over the entire surface of the marking. The Contractor shall apply beads to the surface of liquid markings with a bead dispenser attached to the applicator that shall uniformly dispense beads simultaneously on and into the just-applied marking. The bead dispenser shall be equipped with a cut-off control synchronized with the applied marking material cut off control so that the beads are applied totally on the marking. Beads shall be applied while the liquid marking is still fluid. Approximately seventy (70) percent of beads shall be buried in the marking, and the remaining 30 percent shall be 50 to 60 percent embedded in the marking’s surface unless otherwise specified by the pavement marking manufacturer. Beads installed on crosswalks and stop lines on roadways with curbs only (no gutter) may be hand applied for two feet at the end of each line next to the curb with 100 percent of the beads embedded 50 to 60 percent into the marking’s surface. The COTR will make a visual evaluation of the pavement marking material to assess the condition, retroreflectivity, and color after its installation and again prior to final acceptance. The Department, the Contractor, and the marking manufacturer’s representative will make a further inspection if problem areas are suspected to identify specific areas of concern. If required by the COTR, the suspect areas shall be tested by the Contractor in the presence of the COTR in accordance with VTM-125 to define the evaluation sections and the number of measurements needed. Acceptable test results shall meet the retroreflectivity and color requirements specified in Section 190246. Markings that do not meet the requirements for retroreflectivity and day and nighttime color specified in Section 190246 shall be eradicated and replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Department. Pavement markings that exhibit signs of significant tearing, deformation, shrinkage, roll back, lifting, or other signs of poor adhesion shall also be replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Department. All costs associated with testing the marking material for retroreflectivity, color, and adhesion shall be borne by the Contractor. The Contractor will be paid for maintenance of traffic during this testing at the contract unit price for the maintenance of traffic items used. Pavement marking manufacturer’s material guarantees shall be obtained by the Contractor and assigned to the Department in writing prior to final acceptance.

(a) Pavement Line Markings: Pavement markings shall be white or yellow markings (unless another color is specified in the Contract) as required by the MUTCD and plans for the



specific location or as specified by the COTR. Line markings shall be installed in accordance with Table VII-3 unless otherwise recommended by the manufacturer and approved by the COTR. The Contractor shall furnish a copy of the manufacturer’s installation instructions for the specific marking to the COTR prior to installation.

The Contractor shall perform quality control testing for application thickness and glass bead rate in accordance with VTM-94 at the beginning of each workday and every 3 hours thereafter. The Contractor shall provide the apparatuses needed to perform the quality control testing in accordance with VTM-94. Compliance testing using VTM-94 shall be performed in the presence of the COTR and shall be documented on the Pavement Marking, Contractor’s Daily Log and Quality Control Report, Form C-85, immediately after testing is completed. If requested by the COTR, the Contractor shall provide a quality control (QC) test plate and the provision of the test plate shall be documented on the Form C-85. The Contractor shall also provide a printed or electronic copy of the signed Form C-85 to the Materials Division Quality Assurance Technician for materials notebook evaluation. The Contractor shall maintain a daily log, Form C-85, for both temporary and permanent pavement markings and markers. The C-85 form shall not be modified; all log entries shall be made in ink; and shall be legible. The log shall be signed by the Contractor and delivered to the COTR by the end of each workday. If the C-85 is in electronic format, it shall be kept current with VTM-94 testing throughout the day and a printed copy, signed by the Contractor, shall be delivered to the COTR at the end of each workday. Pavement line markings shall consist of solid and skip lines, including but not limited to, lane division lines, edgelines, channelizing, outlining and marking safety zones around objects, and forming islands and parking lot stalls.

1. Type A markings shall be applied to asphalt concrete and hydraulic cement

concrete pavements in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. Paint shall not be applied over existing pavement markings of other materials unless the existing marking is 90 percent worn away or eradicated. Paint may be applied over existing painted markings if the existing paint is clean and well adhered.

Paint shall be thoroughly mixed and heated such that it will not track within 60 seconds after its application. Glass beads and retroreflective optics shall be applied to the entire surface of the marking at the minimum rate of 6 pounds per gallon of paint, unless specified otherwise in the Materials Division’s Approved Products List 20 for the selected pavement marking product.

2. Type B markings shall be applied to asphalt concrete and hydraulic cement

concrete pavements in accordance with the manufacturers’ installation instructions. Type B markings shall not be applied over existing pavement markings materials unless the existing marking is 90 percent removed.

The Contractor shall furnish a properly calibrated infrared instrument to measure the actual temperature of molten thermoplastic material. Multi-component



material shall be applied using internally injected guns for the proper mixing of components.

Non–truck mounted equipment for application of thermoplastic material shall be of the screed extrude type with a screw drive.

a. Thermoplastic (Class I) material shall be applied by screed extrusion,

ribbon gun, or spray equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. A primer/adhesive manufactured or recommended by the thermoplastic marking manufacturer shall be applied to hydraulic cement concrete surfaces and to asphalt concrete surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

Alkyd thermoplastic may be applied directly after the paving operations if the paved surface can support the equipment. Hydrocarbon thermoplastic shall not be applied to asphalt surfaces less than 30 days after paving operations are complete, hydrocarbon thermoplastic may be applied to hydraulic cement concrete surfaces as soon as permitted by the manufacturer’s instructions. Alkyd and hydrocarbon materials shall not be mixed together. Thermoplastic shall not be applied over existing pavement markings of other materials unless the existing marking is 90 percent percent worn away or eradicated; or over previously applied temporary paint that is fully dry and is at a thickness of 10 mils or less. Thermoplastic shall only be applied over existing thermoplastic markings, if the existing thermoplastic markings are clean, chalk free (not powdery), and well adhered. Thermoplastic marking material shall be applied at thickness of 90 mils (+/5 mils) above the riding surface, whether dense or open graded surface. Glass beads and retroreflective optics shall be surface applied at the rate of 7 pounds per 100 square feet unless specified otherwise on the Materials Division’s Approved Products List 43 for the specific thermoplastic product.

b. Preformed thermoplastic (Class II) material shall be installed as lines,

stop bars, message markings, legends, and symbols in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. A primer/sealer manufactured by or recommended by the preformed thermoplastic manufacturer shall be applied to all hydraulic cement concrete surfaces and to asphalt concrete surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions.

Preformed thermoplastic shall not be applied over existing pavement markings of other materials unless the existing marking is 90 percent worn away or eradicated; or over previously applied temporary paint that



is fully dry and is at a thickness of 10 mils or less. Preformed thermoplastic may be applied over existing thermoplastic markings, provided the existing thermoplastic marking is clean, chalk free (not powdery), and well adhered. Preformed thermoplastic shall be 125 mils thick (+/5 mils) unless otherwise approved by the COTR. Additional glass beads and retroreflective optics shall be evenly applied at a rate of 7 pounds per 100 square feet (unless another rate is specified in the Materials Division’s Approved Products List 73 for the selected pavement marking product) to flood the entire surface immediately after installation while the material is molten.

c. Epoxy resin (Class III) material shall be applied in accordance with the

manufacturer’s installation instructions and shall not be applied over existing pavement markings unless the existing marking is 90 percent worn away or eradicated. Epoxy marking material shall be applied at a wet film thickness of 20 mils (+/1 mil).

Glass beads and retroreflective optics shall be applied to the surface of the marking at the rate of 25 pounds per gallon of material, unless otherwise specified in the Materials Division’s Approved Products List 75 for the specific epoxy resin product.

d. Plastic-backed preformed tape (Class IV) shall be installed in accordance

with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. Tape may be applied to asphalt concrete and hydraulic cement concrete pavements. Tape may be installed immediately following the final rolling of new asphalt concrete surface provided installation is done is strict conformance with the preformed tape manufacturer’s instructions for this type of application. Tape shall not be applied over existing pavement markings of other materials unless the existing marking is 90 percent worn away or eradicated.

Primer/adhesive shall be used to enhance adhesion in accordance with the manufacturers’ installation instructions, except when tape is inlaid immediately following the final rolling of the new asphalt concrete surface. Tape for pavement line markings shall be applied by an application cart as recommended by the manufacturer. Tape shall be tamped into place with a tamper cart with a weight as recommended by the manufacturer. Vehicle wheels may be used to tamp line markings if allowed by the manufacturer’s installation instructions. If vehicle wheels are used to tamp the markings, the Contractor shall ensure that the vehicle tires ride true down the length of the tape marking.



e. Patterned preformed tape (Class VI) shall be installed either under the guidance of the manufacturer’s representative or by a manufacturer’s certified technician. Type B, Class VI markings applied to new plant mix asphalt surfaces shall be installed as per manufacturer’s installation instructions, except that non-embedded (adhesive) surface application will not be permitted; the markings shall be inlaid in the freshly installed asphalt surface before the pavement mat has cooled. The temperature of the asphalt mat shall be between 100 and 180 degrees. The Type B, Class VI markings shall be inlaid with a roller (minimum 2 tons) operating in a non-vibratory mode when the asphalt mat is between 100 and 180 degrees. The Contractor shall ensure that markings are not degraded by subsequent paving and shoulder operations. Markings that are improperly inlaid during the pavement operations shall be completely eradicated and reapplied via non-embedded surface application at the Contractor’s expense. Type B Class VI markings shall not be installed directly over existing markings, except that Type B Class VI markings may be installed over previously applied temporary paint that is fully dry and is at a thickness of 10 mils or less. When Type B, Class VI markings are specified for an asphalt roadway that includes a concrete bridge deck greater than 75 feet in length within the limits of the road, Type B Class VI contrast (black-bordered) tape shall be surface-applied on the concrete bridge deck for the lane lines and edge lines unless otherwise specified in the Contract or directed by the COTR.

f. Polyurea (Class VII) shall be applied in accordance with the

manufacturer’s installation instructions. Polyurea marking material shall not be applied over existing pavement markings unless the existing marking is 90 percent worn away or eradicated; or over previously applied temporary paint that is fully dry and is at a thickness of 10 mils or less.

Polyurea marking material shall be applied at a wet film thickness of 20 mils (+/1 mil). Glass beads and retroreflective optics shall be applied at the rate specified in the Materials Division’s Approved Products List 74 for the specific polyurea product.

3. Type D and E temporary pavement markings shall be installed in accordance

with the manufacturers’ installation instructions and will be paid for in accordance with Section 190512.

(b) Pavement message and symbols markings shall be the color required by the MUTCD or

the plans for the specific location or as specified by the COTR. The Contractor shall



install message and symbols markings in accordance with Table VII-3, unless otherwise recommended in the manufacturers’ installation instructions and approved by the COTR.

Pavement message and symbol markings shall be installed using Type B, Class I (Alkyd), Class II, Class IV, or Class VI material as specified on the plans. Message and symbol markings include, but shall not be limited to, those detailed in Standard PM-10 of the Standard Drawings.

Pavement messages and symbols markings shall be installed at locations shown on the plans or at locations designated by the COTR. The pavement message or symbol shall have clean and well-defined edges without running, bleeding or deformation; shall be uniform in appearance throughout, and free of overlaps.

Type B, Class I hydrocarbon thermoplastic material shall not be used for messages or symbols.



(c) Eradication: Eradication of existing pavement markings shall be in accordance with

Section 190512 except only 90 percent removal is required where the new markings will completely cover existing markings.

(d) Pavement markers: Retroreflectors for pavement markers shall conform to Section

190235 and be the same color as the adjacent pavement marking except the backsides of the markers shall be as follows:

• One-way markers: The backside shall be red and the front side white. • Two-way markers: The backside shall match the adjacent pavement

marking. 1. Snow-plowable raised pavement markers shall be installed by cutting two

parallel grooves into the pavement at the depth and dimensions recommended by the marker manufacturer. Grooves shall be parallel to the adjacent pavement marking. Grooves shall be cut with saw blades having a diameter to match the curvature of the steel casting bottom and keels. Keel surfaces and the cut grooves shall be free from moisture, scale, dirt, oil, grease, debris, or any other contaminant that might reduce bonding. Snow-plowable raised pavement markers shall not be installed on existing or new bridge decks. When pavement markers are required on concrete bridge decks, raised pavement markers shall be used and bonded to the surface using an adhesive in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

Snowplowable raised pavement markers shall be installed at least 2 inches from any joint, crack, or seam.

Casting keels shall be bonded in the saw-cut grooves in accordance with the manufacturers’ installation instructions. The bonding material shall be from the Materials Division’s Approved Products List 22 for the specific marker. Front and rear keel tips of the casting shall be installed flush with or below the pavement surface. The installed height of the raised pavement marker shall be approximately 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch above the pavement surface. The ambient air temperature, ambient moisture condition, and pavement surface condition shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions at the time of installation. The top of reflectors shall be mounted flush with or below the top of the casting. If the snowplowable raised pavement marker retroreflector becomes soiled or damaged during installation (including dirtying from duct tape or similar adhesive residue), the retroreflector shall be replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Department.

2. Raised pavement markers shall be bonded to the pavement surface in accordance

with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. The bonding material shall be from the Materials Division’s Approved Products List 22 for the specific marker.



190704.4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Pavement line markings will be measured and paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot. This price shall include the pavement marking material, surface preparation, quality control tests, daily log, guarding devices, primer/adhesive, and glass beads. Pavement message markings will be measured and paid for at the contract unit price per each per location. This price shall include the pavement marking material, surface preparation, quality control tests, daily log, guarding devices, primer/adhesive, and glass beads. Pavement markers will be measured and paid for at the contract unit price per each. This price shall include prismatic retroreflectors, pavement cutting, adhesive, and castings. Eradication of pavement markings will be measured and paid for in accordance with Section 190512. Payment will be made under: 190704.5 CONTRACTOR QUALITY CONTROL

(a) Conform to all applicable provisions of Section 014000 Contractor Quality Control

Program.

(b) Sampling and Testing:

1. As soon as the paint and reflective materials are available for sampling, obtain by random selection from the sealed containers, two quart samples of each batch in the presence of the COTR.

2. Accomplish adequate mixing prior to sampling to ensure a uniform,

representative sample. 3. A batch is defined as that quantity of material processed by the manufacturer at

one time and identified by number on the label. 4. Clearly identify samples by designated name, specification number, batch

number, project contract number, intended use, and quantity involved. 5. Test samples by an approved laboratory. If a sample fails to meet specification,

replace the material in the area represented by the samples and retest the replacement material as specified above.

6. Submit copy of the test results to the COTR.

Item No. Pay Item

Pay Unit

190704-1 Pavement Line Marking, Type B, Class I, 6” White Linear foot



7. Include in the report of test results a listing of any specification requirements not verified by the test laboratory.

8. At the discretion of the COTR, additional samples provided may be tested by the

Authority for verification.

(c) Inspection:

1. General:

a. Examine material at the job site to determine that it is the material referenced in the report of test results or certificates of compliance.

b. A certificate of compliance shall be accompanied by test results substantiating conformance to the specified requirements.

2. Surface Preparations and Application Procedures:

a. Surface preparations and application procedures will be examined by the

COTR to determine conformance with the requirements specified.

b. Approve each separate operation prior to initiation of subsequent operations.

(d) Traffic Control and Protection:

1. Place warning signs in accordance with the “Virginia Work Area Protection

Manual”.

2. Place channelizing devices along newly painted lines to control traffic and prevent damage to newly painted surfaces.

3. Mark painting equipment with large warning signs indicating slow moving

painting equipment in operation.

(e) Contractor Quality Control Overview:

1. Quality Control:

a. The Contractor shall establish and maintain quality control for operations under this section to assure compliance with contract requirements and maintain records of his quality control for all materials, equipment, and construction operations including but not necessarily limited to the following.

(1) Survey layouts, cleaning, and preparation of surface to receive

paint.

(2) Application of paint.



(3) Protection of finish surface.

(4) Damage or defects.

b. A copy of all records as well as the records of corrective action taken shall be furnished by the COTR.






STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION 312514 - 1

SECTION 312514 - STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, Contract and Special Provisions, Supplementary Conditions, latest version of Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook and other Division-01 Specifications apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes preparation for and submitting for approval for a Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP).

1. Provisions for furnishing, installing and removal of silt fence, filter boxes, storm drain inlet protection, straw bale barriers, construction entrances, sediment traps, diversion berm, dust control and other erosion control measures during construction, and temporary and permanent soil stabilization measures, as noted on the contract plans and in the approved SPPP. All measures and practices shall be in accordance with the latest version of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook and for preventing contamination of stormwater from construction activities in accordance with the Commonwealth of Virginia Regulation 9VAC25-840 (i.e., temporary fuel storage, fueling operations, equipment maintenance, hazardous material and waste handling, good housekeeping practices, etc.).

B. Related Sections 1. Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements” for quality issues.

C. Applicable Regulations – Use the most recent version found on the Virginia General Assembly’s Legislative Information System website.

1. Commonwealth of Virginia – Erosion and Sediment Control and Stormwater

Management Certification Regulations 9VAC25-850 2. Commonwealth of Virginia – Erosion and Sediment Control Law 3. Commonwealth of Virginia – Virginia Stormwater Management Act 4. Commonwealth of Virginia – Virginia Stormwater Management Program

(VSMP) Regulation 5. Commonwealth of Virginia – Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Program

Regulation 6. Commonwealth of Virginia – General VPDES Permit for Discharges of

Stormwater from Construction Activities Regulation



1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. CWA- Clean Water Act means the law passed by the Congress of the United States in 1972 controlling the Discharge of Pollutants into the Nation's waterways.

B. BMP- Best Management Practices are defined as any one or group of management practices, activities, policies, equipment, and structures that will: prevent pollutants from entering the environment, minimize pollutants from entering the environment, and mitigate, reduce, and treat prior to the pollutant entering the environment.

C. NPDES- National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System is the national program for issuing, modifying, revoking, reissuing, terminating, monitoring and enforcing permits pursuant to sections 402, 318, and 405 of the CWA.

D. SWPPP – Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan means a document that is prepared in accordance with good engineering practices and that identifies potential sources of pollutants that may reasonably be expected to affect the quality of stormwater discharges. A SWPPP required under a VSMP for construction activities shall identify and require the implementation of control measures, and shall include but not be limited to an approved Erosion and Sediment Control Plan, an approved Stormwater Management Plan and an approved Pollution Prevention Plan.

E. VDEQ- Virginia Department of Environmental Quality is the agency of the Commonwealth of Virginia that manages the Commonwealth of Virginia's environmental regulations.

F. VPDES- Virginia Pollutant Discharge Elimination System is the Commonwealth of Virginia program and regulations that describe the proper management of discharges of pollutants into the waters of the Commonwealth

G. VSMP Authority – The Metropolitan Washington Airports Authority is the VSMP Administrator.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) – For all projects where Land Disturbing Activities (LDAs) will exceed 10,000 square feet, prepare and submit for written approval by the Authority in accordance with the information provided below. Do not initiate ground-disturbing activities until the Authority has approved the SWPPP and the VSMP construction permit (required for projects with LDA’s exceeding 1-acre) has been received from Virginia DEQ.

B. SWPPP Plan Preparer Checklist – For all projects where a SWPPP is required, the Contractor shall complete and submit the SWPPP Plan Preparer Checklist along with the SWPPP for review and approval by the COTR. The SWPPP Plan Preparer Checklist is provided in Appendix I of this Section.

C. The SWPPP consists of the Stormwater Management Plan, Erosion and Sediment Control Plan, and Pollution Prevention (P2) Plan. The Contractor’s SWPPP must be approved by the Authority as condition of the Authority's issuance of a Construction Permit by the Authority's



Building Codes Department. Issuance of this Construction Permit is required prior to initiation of any land-disturbing activities.

D. The SWPPP may utilize plans, details, notes and other information provided in the construction documents, however, such information shall not, in itself, be construed to meet the requirements of this Section. Provide additional details to ensure that the SWPPP accurately reflects means and methods for construction.

E. The Contractor shall prepare the Pollution Prevention (P2) Plan in accordance with 9 VAC25-870-56. The P2 Plan shall identify potential sources of pollutants that may reasonably be expected to affect the quality of stormwater discharges from the construction site and describe the control measures that will be utilized to minimize pollutants in stormwater discharges from the construction site.

F. The P2 Plan shall include all drawings that are relevant for the P2 Plan including but not limited to: designated equipment storage/maintenance areas, material storage areas, location of designated concrete wash-out pits, controls initiated to minimize spills or leaks, location of portable toilets, and effluent discharge location map for all dewatering activities. All plans and associated details must be legible. Submit three bound copies to the COTR for review and approval.

G. Plan Certification with Virginia Pollution Discharge Elimination System Regulation (9VAC 25-880, Part III K 4.

1. Submit with Plan Certification the following certification statement signed by an officer of the company of Contractor and signed by all its subcontractors: "I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the General Permit for Discharges from Construction Activities that authorizes the storm water discharges from construction activities associated with the site identified by the permit."

2. The above certification shall be executed on the Contractor's letterhead. Include the name, title, address, and telephone number of contractor and all subcontractors, and the date the certification is made. The Certification shall be attached to the SWPPP and submitted to the COTR.

H. For all LDAs exceeding 1-acre, the Contractor shall apply for a Virginia Stormwater Management Program (VSMP) permit. Once the SWPPP has been approved by the COTR, prepare and submit a VSMP permit application to the Virginia Department of Environmental Quality (VDEQ) to obtain the VSMP permit. Along with the VSMP permit application, The Contractor shall also complete and submit the Annual Standards and Specifications Entity Form (Appendix II). The Contractor shall include the proper payment with the permit application. The Contractor shall include the cost for the preparation of the SWPPP and for obtaining the VSMP permit in the cost of the project.

I. Be responsible for submitting the MWAA Termination of Land Disturbance Form (Appendix III) and the Notice of Project Termination (NOPT) shown in Appendix IV for all construction activities within this particular construction project. The MWAA Termination of Land Disturbance Form shall be completed and approved by the COTR prior to submitting the NOPT to VDEQ. Contractor shall notify the Authority and provide a copy to the COTR upon completion of this construction project.



J. Submit the name, contact information, and a copy of the certificate of competence for the Responsible Land-Disturber (RLD) issued by the VDEQ for the person in charge of and responsible for carrying out the land-disturbing activity prior to conducting any land-disturbing activities.

K. The Contractor shall prepare and submit the SWPPP for approval prior to the start of any land-disturbing activities (LDA’s) At a minimum, the SWPPP shall include the following:

1. Completed and signed SWPPP Plan Preparer Checklist 2. Approved erosion and sediment control plan 3. Approved stormwater management plan 4. VSMP registration statement 5. Approved VSMP permit (once received from VDEQ) 6. Pollution Prevention (P2) Plan. 7. Plan specifying any additional control measures to meet the requirements of a

TMDL assigned to state waters impacted by discharges from this project (If applicable)

8. The Stormwater Management and Erosion and Sediment Control Plans will be prepared by the Designer of Record (DOR) and will be provided to the Contractor for inclusion with the SWPPP.

9. All stormwater management and erosion and sediment control drawings and details. All drawings shall be a minimum of half-size or larger.

L. The Contractor is responsible for maintaining the SWPPP. The SWPPP shall be maintained as follows: 1. A sign or notice shall be posted conspicuously near the main entrance of the

construction site. The sign or notice shall contain the following information: a. A copy of the VSMP permit coverage letter that includes the registration

number for the construction activity. b. The internet address at which a copy of the SWPPP may be found or the

location of a hard copy of the SWPPP and name and telephone number of a contact person for scheduling viewing times.

2. The SWPPP shall be maintained and updated in accordance with the following: a. The Contractor shall amend the SWPPP whenever there is a change in

design, construction, operation, or maintenance that has a significant effect on the discharge of pollutants to state waters and that has not been previously addressed in the SWPPP.

b. The SWPPP shall be amended if during inspections or investigations by the Contractor’s qualified personnel (Contractor’s qualified personnel in accordance with 9VAC25-870-10), VDEQ, or the VSMP authority it is determined that existing control measures are ineffective in minimizing pollutants in stormwater discharges from the construction site. If approval by the VSMP authority is necessary for the new control measure, revisions to the SWPPP shall be completed within 7 calendar days of approval.



c. Revisions to the SWPPP must be dated and signed in accordance with 9VAC25-880-70.

3. The SWPPP shall clearly identify the contractor(s) or subcontractor(s) that will be responsible for implementing or maintaining each measure identified in the SWPPP.

4. All changes to the approved E&S and the SWM plans require coordination with, and prior approval from the Engineer of Record (EOR). All changes shall be submitted to the VSMP Authority for approval. The Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with updating the SWPP, and with all design or construction changes to the approved SWM or E&S Control Plans.

M. At a minimum, the SWPPP shall include the following detailed site specific information:

1. General information.

a. A signed copy of the registration statement for coverage under the general VPDES permit for discharges of stormwater from construction activities; b. Upon receipt, a copy of the notice of coverage under the general VPDES permit for discharges of stormwater from construction activities (i.e., notice of coverage letter); c. A copy of the general VPDES permit for discharges of stormwater from construction activities; d. A narrative description of the nature of the construction activity, including the function of the project (e.g., low density residential, shopping mall, highway, etc.); e. A legible site plan identifying:

(1) Directions of stormwater flow and approximate slopes anticipated after major grading activities;

(2) Limits of land disturbance including steep slopes and natural buffers around surface waters that will not be disturbed;

(3) Locations of major structural and nonstructural control measures including sediment basins and traps, perimeter dikes, sediment barriers, and other measures intended to filter, settle, or similarly treat sediment that will be installed between disturbed areas and the undisturbed vegetated areas, in order to increase sediment removal and maximize stormwater infiltration;

(4) Locations of surface waters;

(5) Locations where concentrated stormwater is discharged;

(6) Locations of support activities, when applicable and when required by the VSMP authority, including but not limited to: (i) areas where equipment and vehicle washing, wheel wash water, and other wash water is to occur;



(ii) storage areas for chemicals such as acids, fuels, fertilizers and other lawn care chemicals; (iii) concrete wash out areas; (iv) vehicle fueling and maintenance areas; (v) sanitary waste facilities, including those temporarily placed on the construction site; and (vi) construction waste storage.

2. Pollution Prevention (P2) Plan. A pollution prevention plan that addresses potential pollutant-generating activities that may reasonably be expected to affect the quality of stormwater discharges from the construction activity, including any support activity. The pollution prevention plan shall: a. Identify the potential pollutant-generating activities and the pollutant that is

expected to be exposed to stormwater;

b. Describe the location where the potential pollutant-generating activities will occur, or if identified on the site plan, reference the site plan;

c. Identify all non-stormwater discharges, as authorized in 9VAC25-880-70,

Part I E of the general permit, that are or will be commingled with stormwater discharges from the construction activity, including any support activity

d. Identify the person responsible for implementing the pollution prevention

practice or practices for each pollutant-generating activity (if other than the person listed as the qualified personnel);

e. Describe the pollution prevention practices and procedures that will be

implemented to:

(1) Prevent and respond to leaks, spills and other releases including (i) procedures for expeditiously stopping, containing, and cleaning up spills, leaks, and other releases; and (ii) procedures for reporting leaks, spills, and other releases in accordance with 9VAC25-880-70, Part III G;

(2) Prevent the discharge of spilled and leaked fuels and chemicals from vehicle fueling and maintenance activities (e.g., providing secondary containment such as spill berms, decks, spill containment pallets, providing cover where appropriate, and having spill kits readily available);

(3) Prevent the discharge of soaps, solvents, detergents, and wash water from

construction materials, including the clean-up of stucco, paint, form release oils, and curing compounds (e.g., providing (i) cover (e.g., plastic sheeting or temporary roofs) to prevent contact with stormwater; (ii) collection and proper disposal in a manner to prevent contact with stormwater; and (iii) a similarly effective means designed to prevent discharge of these pollutants).

(4) Minimize the discharge of pollutants from vehicle and equipment washing, wheel wash water and other types of washing (e.g., locating activities away from surface waters and stormwater inlets or conveyance and directing wash waters to sediment basins or traps, using filtration



devices such as filter bags or sand filters or using similarly effective controls);

(5) Direct concrete wash water into a leak-proof container or leak-proof settling basin that is designed so that no overflows can occur due to inadequate sizing or precipitation. Hardened concrete wastes shall be removed and disposed of in a manner consistent with the handling of other construction wastes. Liquid concrete wastes shall be removed and disposed of in a manner consistent with the handling of other construction wash waters and shall not be discharged to surface waters;

(6) Minimize the discharge of pollutants from storage, handling, and disposal

of construction products, materials and wastes including (i) building products such as asphalt sealants, copper flashing, roofing materials, adhesives, concrete admixtures; (ii) pesticides, herbicides, insecticides, fertilizers, and landscape materials; and (iii) construction and domestic wastes such as packaging materials, scrap construction materials, masonry products, timber, pipe and electrical cuttings, plastics, styrofoam, concrete, and other trash or building materials;

(7) Prevent the discharge of fuels, oils, and other petroleum products, hazardous or toxic wastes, and sanitary wastes; and

(8) Address any other discharge from the potential pollutant-generating activities not addressed above.

f. The pollution prevention plan shall describe procedures for providing

pollution prevention awareness of all applicable wastes, including any wash water, disposal practices and applicable disposal locations of such wastes, to personnel in order to comply with the conditions of this permit. The operator shall implement the procedures described in the SWPPP.

3. SWPPP requirements for discharges to impaired waters, surface waters with an applicable TMDL wasteload allocation established and approved prior to the term of this permit, and exceptional waters. The SWPPP shall: a. Identify the impaired water(s), approved TMDL(s), pollutant(s) of concern, and exceptional waters, when applicable;

b. Provide clear direction that:

(1) Permanent or temporary soil stabilization shall be applied to denuded areas within seven days after final grade is reached on any portion of the site; (2) Nutrients shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and shall not be applied during rainfall events; and (3) A modified inspection schedule shall be implemented in accordance with 9VAC25-880-70, Part I B 4 or Part I B 5.

4. Qualified personnel. The name, phone number, and qualifications of the qualified

personnel conducting inspections required by this general permit.



5. Delegation of authority. The individuals or positions with delegated authority, in

accordance with 9VAC25-880-70, Part III K, to sign inspection reports or modify the SWPPP.

6. SWPPP signature. The SWPPP shall be signed and dated in accordance with Part

9VAC25-880-70, III K.B. SWPPP amendments, modification, and updates.

a. The Operator shall amend the SWPPP whenever there is a change in design, construction, operation, or maintenance that has a significant effect on the discharge of pollutants to surface waters and that has not been previously addressed in the SWPPP.

b. The SWPPP must be amended if, during inspections or investigations by the

Operator's qualified personnel, or by local, state, or federal officials, it is determined that the existing control measures are ineffective in minimizing pollutants in discharges from the construction activity. Revisions to the SWPPP shall include additional or modified control measures designed and implemented to correct problems identified. If approval by the VESCP authority, VSMP authority, or department is necessary for the control measure, revisions to the SWPPP shall be completed no later than seven calendar days following approval. Implementation of these additional or modified control measures must be accomplished as described in 9VAC25-880-70, Part II G.

c. The SWPPP must clearly identify the contractor(s) that will implement and

maintain each control measure identified in the SWPPP. The SWPPP shall be amended to identify any new contractor that will implement and maintain a control measure.

d. The operator shall update the SWPPP no later than seven days following

any modifications to its implementation. A sample Inspection form is provided in Appendix V of this Section. All modifications or updates to the SWPPP shall be noted and shall include the following items:

(1) A record of dates when:

(a) Major grading activities occur; (b) Construction activities temporarily or permanently cease on a portion of the site; and (c) Stabilization measures are initiated.

(2) Documentation of replaced or modified controls where periodic inspections or other information have indicated that the controls have been used inappropriately or incorrectly and where modified as soon as possible; (3) Areas that have reached final stabilization and where no further SWPPP or inspection requirements apply;



(4) All properties that are no longer under the legal control of the operator and the dates on which the operator no longer had legal control over each property; (5) The date of any prohibited discharges, the discharge volume released, and what actions were taken to minimize the impact of the release; (6) Measures taken to prevent the reoccurrence of any prohibited discharge; and (7) Measures taken to address any evidence identified as a result of an inspection required under 9VAC25-880-70, Part II F

7. Amendments, modifications, or updates to the SWPPP shall be signed in accordance with 9VAC25-880-70, Part III K.

8. Public Notification. Upon commencement of land disturbance, the operator shall

post conspicuously a copy of the notice of coverage letter near the main entrance of the construction activity. For linear projects, the operator shall post the notice of coverage letter at a publicly accessible location near an active part of the construction project (e.g., where a pipeline project crosses a public road). The operator shall maintain the posted information until termination of permit coverage as specified in 9VAC25-880-70, Part I F.

D. SWPPP availability.

1. Operators with day-to-day operational control over SWPPP implementation shall have a copy of the SWPPP available at a central location on-site for use by those identified as having responsibilities under the SWPPP whenever they are on the construction site. 2. The operator shall make the SWPPP and all amendments, modifications, and updates available upon request to the department, the VSMP authority, the EPA, the VESCP authority, local government officials, or the operator of a municipal separate storm sewer system receiving discharges from the construction activity. If an on-site location is unavailable to store the SWPPP when no personnel are present, notice of the SWPPP's location must be posted near the main entrance of the construction site. 3. The operator shall make the SWPPP available for public review in an electronic format or in hard copy. Information for public access to the SWPPP shall be posted and maintained in accordance 9VAC25-880-70, Part II C. If not provided electronically, public access to the SWPPP may be arranged upon request at a time and at a publicly accessible location convenient to the operator or his designee but shall be no less than once per month and shall be during normal business hours. Information not required to be contained within the SWPPP by this general permit is not required to be released.

E. SWPPP implementation. The operator shall implement the SWPPP and subsequent amendments, modifications, and updates from commencement of land disturbance until permit termination.



1. All control measures must be properly maintained in effective operating condition in accordance with good engineering practices and, where applicable, manufacturer specifications. If a site inspection required by 9VAC25-880-70, Part II F identifies a control measure that is not operating effectively, corrective action(s) shall be completed as soon as practicable, but no later than seven days after discovery or a longer period as established by the VSMP authority, to maintain the continued effectiveness of stormwater controls.

2. If site inspections required by 9VAC25-880-70, Part II F identify an existing control

measure that needs to be modified or if an additional control measure is necessary for any reason, implementation shall be completed prior to the next anticipated measurable storm event. If implementation prior to the next anticipated measurable storm even is impracticable, then alternative control measures shall be implemented as soon as practicable, but no later than seven days after discovery or a longer period as established by the VSMP authority.

F. SWPPP Inspections.

1. Personnel responsible for on-site and off-site inspections. Inspections required by the general permit shall be conducted by the qualified personnel identified by the operator in the SWPPP. The operator is responsible for insuring that the qualified personnel conduct the inspection. 2. Inspection Schedule

a. Inspections shall be conducted at a frequency of: (1) At least once every five business days; or (2) At least once every 10 business days and no later than 48 hours following a measurable storm event. In the event that a measurable storm event occurs when there are more than 48 hours between normal working days, the inspection shall be conducted no later than the next business day.

b. Where areas have been temporarily stabilized and land-disturbing activities will be suspended due to continuous frozen ground conditions, the inspection frequency may be reduced to once per month provided stormwater discharges are unlikely. If weather conditions (such as above freezing temperatures or rain or snow events) make discharges likely, the operator shall immediately resume the regular inspection frequency. c. Representative inspections may be utilized for utility line installation, pipeline construction, or other similar linear construction activities provided that:

(1) Temporary or permanent stabilization has been installed and vehicle access may compromise the temporary or permanent stabilization and potentially cause additional land disturbance increasing the potential for erosion; (2) Inspections occur on the same frequency as other construction projects. (3). Control measures are inspected along the construction site of 0.25 miles above and below each access point (i.e., where a roadway, undisturbed right-of-



way, or other similar feature intersects the construction site and access does not compromise temporary or permanent stabilization); and (4) Inspection locations are provided in the report required by 9VAC25-880-70, Part II F.

3. Inspection requirements. a. As part of the inspection, the qualified personnel shall:

(1) Record the date and time of the inspection and the date of the last measurable storm event; (2) Record the information and a description of any discharges occurring at the time of the inspection; (3) Record any land disturbing activities that have occurred outside of the approved erosion and sediment control plan; (4) Inspect the following for installation in accordance with the approved erosion and sediment control plan, identification of any maintenance needs and evaluation of effectiveness in minimizing sediment discharge, including whether the control has been inappropriately or incorrectly used:

(a) All perimeter erosion and sediment controls, such as silt fence; (b) Soil stockpiles, when applicable, and borrow areas for stabilization or sediment trapping measures; (c) Completed earthen structures, such as dams, dikes, ditches, and diversions for stabilization; (d) Cut and fill slopes; (e) Sediment basins and traps, sediment barriers, and other measures installed to control sediment discharge from stormwater; (f) Temporary or permanent channel, flume, or other slope drain structures installed to convey concentrated runoff down cut and fill slopes; (g) Storm inlets that have been made operational to ensure that sediment laden stormwater does not enter without first being filtered or similarly treated; and (h) Construction vehicle access routes that intersect or access paved roads for minimizing sediment tracking.

(5) Inspect areas that have reached final grade or that will remain dormant for more than 14 days for initiation of stabilization activities;

(6) Inspect areas that have reached final grade or that will remain dormant for more than 14 days for completion of stabilization activities within seven days of reaching grade or stopping work;

(7) Inspect for evidence that the approved erosion and sediment control plan, "agreement in lieu of a plan", or erosion and sediment control plan prepared in accordance with department-approved annual standards and specifications has not been properly implemented. This includes but is not limited to:



(a) Concentrated flows of stormwater in conveyances such as rills, rivulets or channels that have not been filtered, settled or similarly treated prior to discharge or evidence thereof; (b) Sediment laden or turbid flows of stormwater that have not been filtered or settled to remove sediments prior to discharge; (c) Sediment deposition in areas that drain to unprotected stormwater inlets or catch basins that discharge to surface waters. Inlets and catch basins with failing sediments controls due to improper installation, lack of maintenance, or inadequate design are considered unprotected; (d) Sediment deposition on any property (including public and private streets) outside of the construction activity covered by this general permit; (e) Required stabilization has not been initiated or completed on portions of the site; (f) Sediment basins without adequate wet or dry storage or sediment basins that allow the discharge of stormwater from the wet storage portion of the trap; (g) Sediment traps without adequate wet or dry storage or sediment traps that allow the discharge of stormwater from the wet storage portion of the trap; and (h) Land disturbance outside of the approved area to be disturbed;

(8) Inspect pollutant generating activities identified in the pollution prevention plan for the proper implementation, maintenance and effectiveness of the procedures and practices; (9) Identify any pollutant generating activities not identified in the pollution prevention plan; and (10) Identify and document the presence of any evidence of the discharge of pollutants prohibited by this permit.

4. Inspection report. Each inspection report shall include the following items: a. The date and time of the inspection; b. Summarized findings of the inspection; c. The location(s) of prohibited discharges; d. The location(s) of control measures that require maintenance; e. The location(s) of control measures that failed to operate as designed or proved inadequate or inappropriate for a particular location; f. The location(s) where any evidence identified under 9VAC25-880-70, Part II F 3 a (7) exists; g. The location(s) where any additional control measure is needed that did not exist at the time of inspection; h. A list of corrective actions required (including any changes to the SWPPP that are necessary) as a result of the inspection or to maintain permit compliance i. Documentation of any corrective actions required from a previous inspection that has not been implemented; and j. The date and signature of the qualified personnel and the operator or their authorized representative.



k. The inspection report and any actions taken in accordance with 9VAC25-880-70, Part II must be retained by the operator as part of the SWPPP for at least three years from the date that general permit coverage expires or is terminated. The inspection report shall identify any incidents of noncompliance. Where an inspection report does not identify any incidents of noncompliance, the report shall contain a certification that the facility is in compliance with the SWPPP and this general permit. The report shall be signed in accordance with 9VAC25-880-70, Part III K of this permit.

G. Corrective actions.

1. The operator shall implement the corrective action(s) identified as a result of an inspection as soon as practicable but no later than seven days after discovery or a longer period as approved by the VSMP authority. If approval of a correction action by a regulatory authority (e.g., VSMP authority, VESCP authority, the department) is necessary, additional control measures shall be implemented to minimize pollutants in stormwater discharges until such approvals can be obtained. 2. The operator may be required to remove accumulated sediment deposits located outside of the construction activity covered by this permit as soon as practicable in order to minimize environmental impacts. The operator shall notify the VSMP authority and the department as well as obtain all applicable federal, state, and local authorizations, approvals, and permits prior to the removal of sediments accumulated in surface waters including wetlands.

H. Notice of Project Termination (NOPT) - The following must be completed, submitted and accepted by the Authority:

1. MWAA Termination of Land Disturbance Form 2. Certified and Sealed BMP Construction Checklist (if applicable). 3. The Contractor shall prepare and submit construction record drawings appropriately sealed and signed by a professional registered in the commonwealth of Virginia, certifying that the stormwater management facilities have been constructed in accordance with the approved plans. 4. The long-term maintenance agreement and any changes to the stormwater management system have been noted in the record drawings and maintenance plans.

5. Preparation and submission of Notice of Termination Form (VAR 10) found in Appendix IV or its replacement). The Notice of Termination Form is submitted to the Authority, with final termination of coverage under the Construction General Permit processed by DEQ.



6. PRODUCTS

1. General

a. Provide erosion and sediment control devices and products as indicated, in accordance with the SPPP and in accordance with the latest updated version of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook.

7. EXECUTION

1. Implementation

a. Implement and maintain the approved SWPPP throughout the life of the contract in accordance with provisions of the Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control Handbook and applicable contract documents.

b. Exercise every reasonable precaution, including temporary and permanent measures, throughout the duration of the project to control erosion and prevent or minimize pollution of rivers, streams, lakes and other receiving waters. Apply siltation and stabilization control measures to material, subject to erosion, exposed by any activity associated with construction including but not limited to local material sources, stockpiles, disposal areas, and haul roads.

c. Be solely responsible for complying with the soil erosion, sedimentation control and good housekeeping requirements of this Contract, and for otherwise preventing contamination of storm water from construction activities. Be solely responsible for any and all fines, penalties or damage that result from the Contractor’s failure to comply.

2. Erosion and Siltation Control:

a. Control erosion and siltation through the use of the devices and measures specified herein, in the approved SWPPP or as is otherwise necessary. The Authority reserves the right to require other temporary measures not specifically described herein to correct an erosion or siltation condition.

b. Maintenance: Maintain erosion and siltation control devices and measures in a functional condition at all times. Inspect temporary and permanent erosion and sedimentation control measures after each rainfall and at least daily during periods of prolonged rainfall. Correct deficiencies immediately. Make a daily review of the location of erosion and sediment control devices to ensure that they are properly located for effectiveness. Where deficiencies exist, make corrections immediately as approved or directed by the COTR.



8. CONTRACTOR’S QUALITY CONTROL

1. Field Quality Control

a. Conform to all applicable provisions of Division 01 Section “Quality Requirements". Be responsible for periodic inspections for conformance with the approved SPPP. The results of the periodic inspections shall be submitted to the COTR upon completion.

9. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

1. Payment will be made as the contract lump sum price for stormwater pollution prevention. The price shall be full compensation for preparation and submission of a stormwater pollution prevention plan, furnishing and installing and removal of construction entrances, wash racks, silt fence, super silt fence, diversion pipes, sand bags, pumps and associated piping, inlet and culvert inlet protection, straw bale dikes, portable sediment tanks, temporary bituminous curb, sandbags, sandbag dikes or temporary sheet piling, slope drains, riprap, dust control, siltation control excavation, sediment removal and disposal, removal of temporary controls and devices, and all other materials necessary to complete the item, including all required maintenance, as specified, indicated or as directed.

Payment will be made under: UUItem NoUU. UUPay ItemUU UUPay Unit 312514-1 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Lump Sum And Erosion and Sediment Control



APPENDIX I SWPPP Plan Preparer Checklist Form



MWAA STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN (SWPPP) PREPARER CHECKLIST

COVER PAGE Yes No NA Location in SWPPP or Drawings

Name of Project, Construction Permit Number, Operator information (including address and telephone number), date, project longitude and latitude, and signed Certification Statement (In accordance with 9VAC25-880, Part III K)

Section I GENERAL INFORMATION Yes No NA Location in SWPPP or Drawings Copy of Registration Statement Copy of the Notice of Coverage Letter Provided a copy of the Construction General Permit (VDEQ and/or EPA)

Variances (if necessary) requesting in writing, for a waiver or modification for any of the minimum standards and specifications of the VESCH.

Responsible Land Disturber certificate(s) List of qualified personnel including name, mobile cell number, and qualifications of the personnel conducting inspections required by the Construction General Permit.

Signed and dated written authorization for the duly authorized representative in accordance with Part III K 1 of the Construction General Permit Regulations 9VAC25-880.

If multiple Operators, identify all operators and the areas over which each operator has control.

Describe the availability of the SWPPP for public review including the location for the posting of the Construction General Permit(s) in accordance with 9VAC25-880, Part II, D. Sign or notice must contain the Permit Coverage Letter, name and contact information for viewing the SWPPP.

SECTION II SITE INFORMATION Yes No NA Location in SWPPP or Drawings A brief narrative of the description of the nature of the construction activity including any phasing.

Description of the intended sequence of major construction activities.

Indicate the total area of disturbance (acres) including any offsite borrow or fill sites.

List of all authorized non-stormwater discharges SECTION III SITE PLAN Yes No NA Location in SWPPP or Drawings

Directions of Stormwater flow and approximate slopes and natural buffers around surface waters



that will not be disturbed SECTION III SITE PLAN (Cont.) Yes No NA Location in SWPPP or Drawings

Limits of Land Disturbing Activities (LDAs) including steep slopes and natural buffers around surface waters that will not be disturbed.

Locations of structures off major structural and nonstructural control measures including sediment basins/traps, perimeter dikes, sediment barriers, and other measures intended to filter sediment between disturbed and undisturbed areas.

Locations of surface waters including wetlands Locations where concentrated stormwater is discharged to surface waters

Locations of support activities such as vehicle maintenance, vehicle fueling, vehicle wheel wash, chemical and fuel storage areas, fertilizer storage, concrete wash-out pits, sanitary waste facilities, construction waste storage, and temporary soil stockpiles.

Location of the rain gauge or methodology used to identify a measurable storm event.

SECTION IV EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Yes No NA Location in SWPPP or Drawings Narrative describing the maintenance responsibilities for all erosion and sediment controls.

Provide a schedule/frequency for performing erosion and sediment control inspections in accordance with 9VAC25-880, Part II, F.

Provide a list of all of the applicable Minimum Standards

Provide a list of all of the erosion and sediment controls including estimated installation and removal dates.

Describe all measures to prevent off-site tracking of sediments to paved surfaces or the generation of dust

Describe all temporary and permanent stabilization practices

Describe the method for tracking construction activities, and when control measures will be installed, or areas will be stabilized (i.e. grading and stabilization log).

Provide an example of the proposed inspection form. The inspection form shall comply with all of the inspection requirements listed in 9VAC25-880, Part II F.



SECTION V POTENTIAL POLLUTANT SOURCES (P2) Yes No NA Location in SWPPP or Drawings List and describe all potential pollutant- generating activities and the pollutant that is expected to be exposed to stormwater

Describe the location or indicate on the site drawing where the potential pollutant-generating activity will occur.

Identify the person(s) responsible for implementing the pollution prevention practices

Describe the pollution prevention practices and the procedures that will be implemented to:

• Prevent and respond, contain and clean-up spills, leaks and other releases

• Report spills, leaks and other releases in accordance with 9VAC25-880, Part III G.

• Prevent the discharge of spilled and leaked fuels and chemicals from vehicle fueling and maintenance activities (e.g. secondary containment, spill containment pallets, covers, and location of spill response kits/equipment).

Describe the pollution prevention measures used to prevent the discharge of soaps, solvents, detergents, and wash water from construction materials including clean-up of stucco, paint, form release oils, and curing compounds to prevent contact with stormwater.

Describe the pollution prevention measures used to prevent the discharge of pollutants from vehicle and equipment washing, wheel wash water, etc. to prevent sediment from being discharged to the stormwater system.

Describe the pollution prevention measures used to prevent the discharge of concrete wash water, and the removal and disposal methods for hardened concrete waste, and liquid waste. Include size and anticipated storage volumes, including adequate freeboard for all concrete wash-out pits.

Describe the pollution prevention measures used to prevent the discharge of pollutants from storage, handling and disposal of construction products, materials and wastes including but not limited to: asphalts, adhesives, concrete admixtures, pesticides, herbicides, fertilizers, pipe cuttings, scrap material and other solid waste.



SECTION V POTENTIAL POLLUTANT SOURCES (P2) (Cont.)

Yes No NA Location in SWPPP or Drawings

Describe the procedures for providing and documenting pollution prevention awareness/training for all anticipated wastes, and anticipated proper disposal practices.

Provide emergency response contact name(s) and numbers including MWAA Fire Dept., VDEQ Spill Notification numbers: General # 800-468-8892 and Alan Lacy 703-583-3864

SECTION VI DISCHARGES TO IMPAIRED WATERS Yes No NA Location in SWPPP or Drawings Identify any impaired water(s), approved TMDLs, pollutants of concern and exceptional waters identified in 9VAC25-260-30 A 3 c.

If applicable provide clear direction that: • Permanent or temporary stabilization will

be applied to denuded areas within 7 days after final grade is reached on any portion of the site

• Nutrients will be applied in accordance with the manufactures recommendations or an approved nutrient management plan

• A modified inspection schedule will be implemented in accordance with 9VAC25-880, Part I B 4 or Part I B 5.

SECTION VII SWPPP AMENDMENTS & MODIFICAITONS Yes No NA Location in SWPPP or Drawings Provide the procedures(s) for tracking and documenting all amendments, modifications, and updates whenever there is a change in the design, construction operation, or maintenance that has a significant effect on the discharge of pollutants to surface waters that have not already been addressed in this SWPPP. (All amendments or modifications shall be documented and signed in accordance with all of the requirements in 9VAC25-880, Part II B.)

SECTION VIII CORRECTIVE ACTIONS Yes No NA Location in SWPPP or Drawings Describe the procedures for implementing corrective actions in accordance with 9VAC25-880, Part II G.

Company Name: Plan Preparer (Print): Plan Preparer (Signature):



APPENDIX II Annual Standards and Specifications Entity Form



Annual Standards & Specification (AS&S) Entity Information General VPDES Permit for Discharges of Stormwater from Construction Activities

(VAR10) (To be completed by the AS&S Entity and submitted with the VAR10 Registration

Statement)

1. Annual Standards & Specifications Entity/Holder:

2. AS&S Coverage Verification a. Operator:

b. Project name:

c. Technical Criteria Used: d. Estimated Area to be

Disturbed (acres):

3. Plan Approval Verification a. Erosion & Sediment

Control (ESC) Plan Reviewer Name:

i. ESC Plan Reviewer Certification Number:

b. Stormwater Management (SWM) Plan Reviewer Name:

i. SWM Plan Review Certification Number

Printed Name: Title:

Signature: Date:

(Please sign in ink. This must be signed by an employee of the AS&S entity who has oversight of this project and is aware of its coverage under their AS&S.)

Instructions for completion: 2.a. Operator = Owner, operator, developer, person or general contractor that the AS&S holder is allowing to operate under their DEQ approved AS&S. 2.b. Project Name = Name of the construction activity as it appears on the Registration Statement. 2.c. Stormwater Management Technical Criteria = The technical criteria used for this project will be either IIB or IIC per the SWM Regulations; 9VAC25-870. 2.d. Estimated Area to Be Disturbed = Provide the estimated area (to the nearest one-hundredth acre) to be disturbed by the construction activity. Include the estimated area of land disturbance that will occur at any off-site support activity to be covered under this general permit.

(Further questions can be directed to the Stormwater Construction General Permitting personnel; [email protected])

mailto:[email protected]



APPENDIX III

MWAA Termination of Land Disturbance Form



Termination of MWAA Land Disturbance

Instruction: This form is to be used as a request of termination of land disturbance between the Contractor/Operator and MWAA. This form will NOT result in termination of VAR10 General Permit coverage from DEQ. However, the Contractor/Operator SHALL NOT terminate VAR10 General Permit coverage with DEQ, when applicable, until Termination of Land Disturbance Approval from MWAA is provided on this form. Project Name: _______________________________ VAR10 Permit # (where applicable): _____________ Section 1– Conditions for Termination of Land Disturbance The conditions of this section shall be met and this form shall be signed by both the Operator and the MWAA Project Manager prior to termination of land disturbance (check those that apply): No further land disturbance activities are planned. The project area has been stabilized in accordance with the approved plans, which includes seeding,

mulching, sodding, paving, or other means. All temporary erosion and sediment control measures have been removed. All pollution prevention measures have been removed from the site and disposed of in a legal manner. All permanent post‐construction stormwater management facilities have MWAA approved record

drawings. All trash and debris has been removed from the site. Section 2 – Operator Certification: "I certify under penalty of law that I have read and understand this document and that this document and all attachments were prepared in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and evaluated the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate, and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. Upon approval of this form, I will request termination of the VAR10 General Permit from DEQ, when applicable." Operator/Contractor: _____________________________________ Company: ______________ Signature: _________________________________________________ Date: __________________ Section 3 – Termination of Land Disturbance Approval (This section to be completed by the MWAA Stormwater Inspector or Combined Administrator) MWAA recognizes this request to be accurate based on the certification above and terminates the Operator/Contractor’s land disturbance activity as it applies to the MWAA Annual Standards and Specifications for ESC and SWM. MWAA Stormwater Inspector or Combined Administrator (Print): ______________________________ Signature: _____________________________________ Date: ________________________



APPENDIX IV

VDEQ Notice of Project Termination (NOPT) Form



Notice of Termination General VPDES Permit for Discharges of Stormwater from Construction

Activities (VAR10)

(Please Type or Print All Information)

1. Construction Activity Operator:

Name: _________________________________________________________________________________

Contact: ________________________________________________________________________________

Mailing Address: _________________________________________________________________________

City: ___________________ State: _____________ Zip: ____________ Phone: ________________________

Email address (if available):

2. Name and Location of the Construction Activity: (As listed on the Registration Statement.)

Name: ________________________________________________________________________________

Address (if available): ____________________________________________________________________

City: _________________________________ State: _________________ Zip: _______________________

County (if not located within a City): ________________________________________________________

Latitude (decimal degrees): __________________ Longitude (decimal degrees): _____________________

3. General Permit Registration Number: _____________________________________________________

4. Reason for Terminating Coverage Under the General Permit: (The operator shall submit a Notice of

Termination after one or more of the following conditions have been met.)

A. Necessary permanent control measures included in the SWPPP for the site are in place and functioning effectively and final stabilization has been achieved on all portions of the site for which

the operator is responsible. When applicable, long-term responsibility and maintenance requirements

for permanent control measures shall be recorded in the local land records prior to the submission of a

notice of termination;

B. Another operator has assumed control over all areas of the site that have not been finally stabilized

and obtained coverage for the ongoing discharge;

C. Coverage under an alternative VPDES or state permit has been obtained; or

D. For residential construction only, temporary soil stabilization has been completed and the residence

has been transferred to the homeowner.

The notice of termination should be submitted no later than 30 days after one of the above conditions being met. Authorization to discharge terminates at midnight on the date that the notice of termination is submitted for the conditions set forth in subsections B through D above, unless otherwise notified by the VSMP authority or the Department. Termination of authorizations to discharge for the conditions set forth in subsection A above shall be effective upon notification from the Department that the provisions of subsection A have been met or 60 days after submittal of the notice of terminations, whichever occurs first.

5. Permanent Control Measures Installed: (When applicable, a list of the on-site and off-site permanent control measures (both structural and nonstructural) that were installed to comply with the stormwater management technical criteria. Attach a separate list if additional space is needed.)

Permanent Control Measure #1

Type of Permanent Control Measure: ___________________________________________________________



Date Functional: ___________________________________________________________________________

Address (if available): _______________________________________________________________________

City: __________________________ State: ___________________ Zip: _______________________________

County (if not located within a City): ___________________________________________________________

Latitude (decimal degrees): _________________ Longitude (decimal degrees): _________________________

Receiving Water: __________________________________________________________________________

Total Acres Treated: ________________________ Impervious Acres Treated: __________________________

Permanent Control Measure #2 Type of Permanent Control Measure: ___________________________________________________________

Date Functional: ___________________________________________________________________________


City: __________________________ State: ___________________ Zip: _______________________________



Receiving Water: __________________________________________________________________________


Permanent Control Measure #3

Type of Permanent Control Measure: ___________________________________________________________

Date Functional: ___________________________________________________________________________


City: __________________________ State: ___________________ Zip: _______________________________



Receiving Water: __________________________________________________________________________


1. Participation in a Regional Stormwater Management Plan: (When applicable, information related to the

participation in a regional stormwater management plan. Attach a separate list if additional space is

needed.)

REGIONAL STORMWATER MANAGEMENT FACILITY

Type of Regional Stormwater Management Facility: _______________________________________________


City: _______________________ State: ____________________ Zip: _________________________________


Latitude (decimal degrees): _____________________ Longitude (decimal degrees): _____________________

Total Site Acres Treated: _______________ Impervious Site Acres Treated: ___________________________



2. Perpetual Nutrient Credits: (When applicable, information related to perpetual nutrient credits that were

acquired in accordance with § 62.1-44.15:35 of the Code of Virginia. Attach a separate list if additional space is needed.)

Nonpoint Nutrient Credit Generating Entity

Name: ________________________________________________________________________________

Perpetual Nutrient Credits Acquired (lbs/acre/year): _____________________________________________

3. Certification: "I certify under penalty of law that I have read and understand this Notice of Termination and that this document and all attachments were prepared in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and evaluated the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, the information submitted is to the best of my knowledge and belief true, accurate, and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations."

Printed Name: ________________________________________ Title: ______________________________

Signature: ____________________________________________________ Date: _____________________

(Please sign in INK. This Certification must be signed by the appropriate person associated with the operator identified in Item #1.)


APPENDIX V Sample SWPPP Construction Inspection Form

Page 1 of 4


MWAA Construction Site Inspection Certification Form General Information

Project Name: MWAA Contact VAR10 Permit # (where applicable) Location: Date of Inspection: Start/End Time: Contact Information/Responsible Parties

* Site Representative (see below) Representative’s email and phone number:

Inspector’s Name(s): Inspector’s email and phone number:

Inspectors DEQ Certification #(s): Other contact information (as applicable):

* PM, Contractor, RLD or other individual with responsibility for implementation of the ESC Plan and the SWPPP, where applicable.

Inspection Type (check all that apply)

After installation of initial ESC measures Within 48-hours after a runoff event (≥ 0.25 inches of rain over 24-hours)* Contractor’s self-inspection as required in SWPPP (where applicable)

Periodic SWM inspection Final Stabilization 2-week inspection Other

* If within 48-hours of runoff event, provide: date of event: and rainfall amount (inches):

Weather Conditions (check all that apply)

Clear Sunny Partly Cloudy Cloudy Cold Cool Mild Hot Raining Post-rain event

Are discharges occurring from the site at the time of inspection or evidence of off-site sediment transport? Yes If yes, describe:

No

Construction Inspection Checklist

(For projects under 1 acre of disturbance that do not require a Construction General Permit ONLY Section 1 of this form applies. Where disturbance is

equal to or greater than an acre, all Sections apply)

Yes

No

N/A

Location of Concern and Recommended Corrective

Action/Notes (additional notes at end of form)

1

Section 1 - ESC Plan Inspection: Part II(A)2

See MWAA

approved ESC and SWM Plans, where applicable

1a

Are deficiencies identified during previous inspections corrected? Notify MWAA PM if a specific deficiency has been identified and not corrected on each of the past 3

1b

Are all land-disturbing activities within the area of disturbance identified on the approved ESC Plan?

1c

Are all erosion and sediment controls maintained, properly repaired and functional? [9VAC25-840-60]

1d

Are site ESC operations consistent with the ESC phasing plan or have modifications to the plan been appropriately approved and documented?

1e

Are temporary or permanent stabilization measures applied within allowable time frames (7 days after final grade or where dormant for more than 14 days)? [9VAC25-840-40]

1f

Are disposal/borrow areas and stockpiles (on-site and off-site) stabilized or protected with sediment trapping measures? Are off-site areas on plan or have separate MWAA or locality approved ESC Plan?

Page 2 of 4


MWAA Construction Site Inspection Certification Form


Yes

No

N/A



1g

Are all temporary ESC measures that are no longer needed removed and applicable site areas permanently stabilized?

1h

Are initial ESC measures, including perimeter controls, (i.e. silt fence, sediment basins and traps, perimeter dikes) intended to trap sediment installed and functional prior to upslope land disturbance?

1i

Are earthen structures, such as dams, dikes, diversions, and cut/fill slopes, stabilized or protected with functioning sediment trapping measures?

1j

Are sediment basins/traps constructed according to the plans/specifications, functional and maintained?

1k

Are cut/fill slopes protected from concentrated runoff with channel flumes or slope drains?

1l

Are slopes with water seeps protected with adequate drainage and stabilization?

1m

Do operational storm sewer and culvert inlets have inlet protection according to the plans/specifications?

1n

Are constructed stormwater conveyance channels and ditches stabilized with the appropriate channel lining and/or outlet protection according to the plans/specifications?

1o

Is non-erodible material or cover provided for all causeways and cofferdams where work is performed in a live watercourse?

1p

Is a live watercourse crossed by construction vehicles more than twice in a 6-month period, and if so, is the temporary stream crossing used for crossing constructed of non-erodible materials?

1q

Where work is performed in a live watercourse, are applicable federal and state permits available?

1r

Where work is performed in a live watercourse, have the bed and banks been stabilized immediately and per the plan/specifications?

1s

Are underground utilities installed with less than 500’ of trench open, sediment trapping controls for excavated material, filtering of effluent from dewatering, and compaction and restabilization of backfill?

1t

Are construction entrances properly located, installed and maintained?

1u

Does sediment tracked onto adjacent roadways appear to be removed each day?

Page 3 of 4




Yes

No

N/A



1v

If the site is stabilized, have ESC measures been removed and trapped sediment been stabilized or appropriately removed?

1w

Is there evidence of downstream or other off-site sediment transport? (Provide locations and description of impacts if applicable.)

1x

Are adjacent properties and waterways adequately protected from accidental land disturbance, potential pollutant discharge, erosion, flooding, and sedimentation from the project site?

1y

Do all locations concentrated of concentrated runoff leaving the site discharge to a channel (i.e. stream, storm sewer, or ditch)?

1z

Are any ESC measures to protect SWM practices (i.e. infiltration basin, bioretention) that are shown on the plans to prevent compaction or clogging installed?

1aa

Is runoff and other discharges (dewatering) that contain sediment or other pollutants being properly treated prior to discharging from the site?

1bb

Are permanent stormwater measures (basins, etc.) properly installed/converted, stabilized and functional?

2.

Section 2 - Pollution Prevention Plan Inspection: Part II(A)4

(Applicable to land disturbance 1 acre or greater)

Yes

No

N/A

See project-specific Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP)

2a

Are functional measures in place to prevent and respond to leaks, spills and other pollutant releases including procedures for expeditiously stopping, containing, cleaning up spills and reporting?

2b

Are functional measures in place to prevent the release of soaps, solvents, detergents, wash water from construction materials, paint clean-up and other pollutants and/or also from contact with stormwater?

2c

Are wash waters from vehicles, equipment, construction materials and the like prevented from release and/or properly treated before leaving the site?

2d

Is the concrete wash-out waste directed into a properly installed leak- proof container? Is the treatment mechanism properly maintained and utilized?

2e

Are construction products, materials, and wastes being properly stored, handled, labeled? Are loose trash and debris properly contained?

2f

Are other potential pollutant-generating activities not listed above being properly managed to prevent exposure to precipitation/runoff?

2g

Have all pollutant generating activities present on the site been identified in the Pollution Prevention Plan?


Page 4 of 4


CERTIFICATION INSTRUCTION

This Inspection Form is not complete without the completion of the appropriate certification(s) by the individual(s) listed below.

Reports conducted by MWAA or MWAA representative will be provided to the Operator or Duly Authorized Representative by (check all that

apply): □ Hardcopy □Email □Other________ within 48 hours.

• CERT-1 is required with MWAA inspections.

• CERT-2 is required by the VAR10 operator for all inspections, including self-inspections

required by the VAR10.

CERT-1: INSPECTION CERTIFICATION STATEMENT

“I certify under penalty of law that I performed the inspection described in this form as a Certified Project Inspector for ESC and SWM per the

Virginia Erosion and Sediment Control and Stormwater Management Certification Regulations (9VAC25-850). I certify that the inspection

described in the form reflects site conditions to the best of my knowledge and belief and is true, accurate and complete. On inspection

forms where no corrective action is identified, the construction activity is in compliance with the project SWPPP. I am aware that there are

significant penalties for submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations and falsifying

inspections (reports).”

Inspector’s Name:________________________________________________________________________________________

Signature: _____________________________________________________________________Date: ________________

CERT-2: OPERATOR (OR DULY AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE) CERTIFICATION STATEMENT

"I certify under penalty of law that I have read and understand this document and that this document and all attachments were prepared in

accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and evaluated the information submitted. Based on

my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information, the

information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate, and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for

submitting false information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations."

The inspection form shall be maintained in the project SWPPP. Corrections to incidents of noncompliance identified on this form will be corrected within 7 days or as otherwise identified per incident. Operator (or Duly Authorized Representative) Name: _________________________________________________________

Signature: Date_____________

3

Section 3 - SWPPP Documentation Inspection: Part ll(A)1

(Applicable to land disturbance 1 acre or greater)

Yes

No

N/A

See Section 1.0 and Various Appendices in the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan

3a

Copy of notice of coverage letter and information for public access to the SWPPP posted near main entrance of the site?

3b

Copy of complete SWPPP available onsite for operators and inspectors?

3c

SWPPP is being amended, modified, updated and appropriately signed?

3d

Are dates when major grading activities occurred properly recorded?

3e

Are SWPPP inspections conducted by contractor at required frequency, summarized including corrective actions, appropriately signed and retained with the SWPPP?



METROPOLITAN WASHINGTON AIRPORTS AUTHORITY DTRE03 DULLES TOLL ROAD STREAM REHABILITATION September 14, 2020 Nationwide Permit (3) Maintenance Effective 3/19/2017

Expires 3/18/2022

(a) The repair, rehabilitation, or replacement of any previously authorized, currently serviceable structure or fill, or of any currently serviceable structure or fill authorized by 33 CFR 330.3, provided that the structure or fill is not to be put to uses differing from those uses specified or contemplated for it in the original permit or the most recently authorized modification. Minor deviations in the structure's configuration or filled area, including those due to changes in materials, construction techniques, requirements of other regulatory agencies, or current construction codes or safety standards that are necessary to make the repair, rehabilitation, or replacement are authorized. This NWP also authorizes the removal of previously authorized structures or fills. Any stream channel modification is limited to the minimum necessary for the repair, rehabilitation, or replacement of the structure or fill; such modifications, including the removal of material from the stream channel, must be immediately adjacent to the project. This NWP also authorizes the removal of accumulated sediment and debris within, and in the immediate vicinity of, the structure or fill. This NWP also authorizes the repair, rehabilitation, or replacement of those structures or fills destroyed or damaged by storms, floods, fire or other discrete events, provided the repair, rehabilitation, or replacement is commenced, or is under contract to commence, within two years of the date of their destruction or damage. In cases of catastrophic events, such as hurricanes or tornadoes, this two-year limit may be waived by the district engineer, provided the permittee can demonstrate funding, contract, or other similar delays.

(b) This NWP also authorizes the removal of accumulated sediments and debris outside the immediate vicinity of existing structures (e.g., bridges, culverted road crossings, water intake structures, etc.). The removal of sediment is limited to the minimum necessary to restore the waterway in the vicinity of the structure to the approximate dimensions that existed when the structure was built, but cannot extend farther than 200 feet in any direction from the structure. This 200 foot limit does not apply to maintenance dredging to remove accumulated sediments blocking or restricting outfall and intake structures or to maintenance dredging to remove accumulated sediments from canals associated with outfall and intake structures. All dredged or excavated materials must be deposited and retained in an area that has no waters of the United States unless otherwise specifically approved by the district engineer under separate authorization.

(c) This NWP also authorizes temporary structures, fills, and work, including the use of temporary mats, necessary to conduct the maintenance activity. Appropriate measures must be taken to maintain normal downstream flows and minimize flooding to the maximum extent practicable, when temporary structures, work, and discharges, including cofferdams, are necessary for construction activities, access fills, or dewatering of construction sites. Temporary fills must consist of materials, and be placed in a manner, that will not be eroded by expected high flows. After conducting the maintenance activity, temporary fills must be removed in their entirety and the affected areas returned to pre-construction elevations. The areas affected by temporary fills must be revegetated, as appropriate.


(d) This NWP does not authorize maintenance dredging for the primary purpose of navigation. This NWP does not authorize beach restoration. This NWP does not authorize new stream channelization or stream relocation projects.

Notification: For activities authorized by paragraph (b) of this NWP, the permittee must submit a pre-construction notification to the district engineer prior to commencing the activity (see general condition 32). The pre- construction notification must include information regarding the original design capacities and configurations of the outfalls, intakes, small impoundments, and canals.

Note: This NWP authorizes the repair, rehabilitation, or replacement of any previously authorized structure or fill that does not qualify for the Clean Water Act section 404(f) exemption for maintenance.

Authority: Section 10 of the Rivers and Harbors Act of 1899 and section 404 of the Clean Water Act (Sections 10 and 404)

REGIONAL CONDITIONS:

1. Conditions for Waters Containing Submerged Aquatic Vegetation (SAV) Beds: This condition applies to: NWPs 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 22, 23, 25, 27, 28, 29, 31, 32, 33, 35, 36, 37, 38, 39, 44, 45, 48, 52, 53 and 54. A pre-construction notification (PCN) is required if work will occur in areas that contain submerged aquatic vegetation (SAV). Information about SAV habitat can be found at the Virginia Institute of Marine Science’s website http://web.vims.edu/bio/sav/. Additional avoidance and minimization measures, such as relocating a structure or time-of-year restrictions (TOYR), may be required to reduce impacts to SAV habitat.

2. Conditions for Anadromous Fish Use Areas: To ensure that activities authorized by any NWP do not impact documented spawning habitat or a migratory pathway for anadromous fish, a check for anadromous fish use areas must be conducted via the Norfolk District’s Regulatory GIS (for reporting permits) and/or the Virginia Department of Game and Inland Fisheries (VDGIF) Information System (by applicant for non-reporting permits) at http://vafwis.org/fwis/. For any proposed NWP, if the project is located in an area documented as an anadromous fish use area (confirmed or potential), a time-of-year restriction (TOYR) prohibiting all in-water work will be required from February 15 to June 30 of any given year or any TOYR specified by VDGIF and/or Virginia Marine Resources Commission (VMRC). For permits requiring a PCN, if the Norfolk District determines that the work is minimal and the TOYR is unnecessary, informal consultation will be conducted with NOAA Fisheries Service (NOAA) to obtain concurrence that the TOYR would not be required for the proposed activity. For dredging in the Elizabeth River upstream of the Mid- Town Tunnel on the mainstem and the West Norfolk Bridge (Route 164, Western Freeway) on the Western Branch of the Elizabeth River, a TOYR is not required.

3. Conditions for Designated Critical Resource Waters, which include National Estuarine Research Reserves: Notification is required for work under NWPs 3, 8, 10, 13, 15, 18, 19, 22, 23, 25, 27, 28, 30, 33, 34, 36, 37, 38 and 54 in the Chesapeake Bay National Estuarine Research Reserve in Virginia. This multi-site system along a salinity gradient of the York River includes Sweet Hall Marsh, Taskinas


Creek, Catlett Islands, and Goodwin Islands. More information can be found at: http://www.vims.edu/cbnerr/. NWPs 7, 12, 14, 16, 17, 21, 29, 31, 35, 39, 40, 42, 43, 44, 49, 50, 51, and 52 cannot be used to authorize the discharge of dredged or fill material in the Chesapeake Bay National Estuarine Research Reserve in Virginia.

4. Conditions for Federally Listed Species and Designated Critical Habitat: For ALL NWPs, notification is required for any project that may affect a federally listed threatened or endangered species or designated critical habitat. The U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service (Service) has developed an online system that allows users to find information about sensitive resources that may occur within the vicinity of a proposed project. This system is named “Information, Planning and Conservation System,” (IPaC), and is located at: http://ecos.fws.gov/ipac/. The applicant may use IPaC to determine if any federally listed species or designated critical habitat may be affected by their proposed project. If your Official Species List from IPaC identifies any federally listed endangered or threatened species, you are required to submit a PCN for the proposed activity, unless the project clearly does not impact a listed species or suitable habitat for the listed species. If you are unsure about whether your project will impact listed species, please submit a PCN, so the Norfolk District may review the action. Further information about the Virginia Field Office “Project Review Process” may be found at: http://www.fws.gov/northeast/virginiafield/endangered/projectreviews.html. Additional consultation may also be required with National Marine Fisheries Service for species or critical habitat under their jurisdiction, including sea turtles, marine mammals, shortnose sturgeon, and Atlantic sturgeon. For additional information about their jurisdiction in Virginia, please see https://www.greateratlantic.fisheries.noaa.gov/protected/index.html. Additional resources to assist in determining compliance with this condition can be found on our webpage: http://www.nao.usace.army.mil/Missions/Regulatory/USFWS.aspx

5. Conditions for Waters with Federally Listed Endangered or Threatened Species, Waters Federally Designated as Critical Habitat, and One-mile Upstream (including tributaries) of Any Such Waters: Any work proposed in critical habitat, as designated in regional condition 4, requires a PCN.

6. Conditions for Designated Trout Waters: Notification is required for work in the areas listed below for NWPs 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 12, 13, 14, 16, 17, 18, 19, 21, 23, 25, 29, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 36, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 49, 50, 51, 52, 53, and 54. This condition applies to activities occurring in two categories of waters; Class V (Put and Take Trout Waters) and Class VI (Natural Trout Waters), as defined by the Virginia State Water Control Board Regulations, Water Quality Standards (VR-680-21-00), dated January 1, 1991, or the most recently updated publication. The Virginia Department of Game and Inland Fisheries (VDGIF) designated these same trout streams into six classes.

Classes I-IV are considered wild trout streams. Classes V and VI are considered stockable trout streams. Information on designated trout streams can be obtained via their Virginia Fish and Wildlife Information Service's (VAFWIS's) Cold Water Stream Survey database. Basic access to the VAFWIS is available via http://vafwis.org/fwis/.

The waters, occurring specifically within the mountains of Virginia, are within the following river basins:

1) Potomac-Shenandoah River Basins


2) James River Basin

3) Roanoke River Basin

4) New River Basin

5) Tennessee and Big Sandy River Basins

6) Rappahannock River Basin

VDGIF recommends the following time-of-year restrictions (TOYRs) for any instream work within streams identified as wild trout waters in its Cold Water Stream Survey database. The recommended TOYRs for trout species are:

• Brook Trout: October 1 through March 31

• Brown Trout: October 1 through March 31

• Rainbow Trout: March 15 through May 15

This condition applies to the following counties and cities: Albemarle, Allegheny, Amherst, Augusta, Bath, Bedford, Bland, Botetourt, Bristol, Buchanan, Buena Vista, Carroll, Clarke, Covington, Craig, Dickenson, Floyd, Franklin, Frederick, Giles, Grayson, Greene, Henry, Highland, Lee, Loudoun, Madison, Montgomery, Nelson, Page, Patrick, Pulaski, Rappahannock, Roanoke City, Roanoke Co., Rockbridge, Rockingham, Russell, Scott, Shenandoah, Smyth, Staunton, Tazewell, Warren, Washington, Waynesboro, Wise, and Wythe. Any discharge of dredged and/or fill material authorized by the NWPs listed above, which would occur in the designated waterways or adjacent wetlands of the specified counties, requires notification to the appropriate Corps of Engineers field office, and written approval from that office prior to performing the work. The Norfolk District recommends that prospective permittees first contact the applicable Norfolk District Field Office, found at this web link: http://www.nao.usace.army.mil/Missions/Regulatory/Contacts.aspx, to determine if the PCN procedures would apply. The notification must be in writing and include the following information (the standard Joint Permit Application may also be used):

• Name, address, and telephone number of the prospective permittee.

• Name, address, email, and telephone number of the property owner.

• Location of the proposed project.

• Vicinity map and project drawings on 8.5-inch by 11-inch paper (plan view, profile, & cross-sectional view).

• Brief description of the proposed project and the project purpose.

• Where required by the terms of the nationwide permit, a delineation of affected special aquatic sites, including wetlands.

When all required information is received by the appropriate field office, the Corps will notify the prospective permittee within 45 days whether the project can proceed under the NWP or whether an


individual permit is required. If, after reviewing the PCN, the District Commander determines that the proposed activity would have more than minimal individual or cumulative adverse impacts on the aquatic environment or otherwise may be contrary to the public interest, then he/she will either condition the nationwide permit authorization to reduce or eliminate the adverse impacts, or notify the prospective permittee that the activity is not authorized by the NWP and provide instructions on how to seek authorization under an individual permit. If the prospective permittee is not notified otherwise within the 45-day period, the prospective permittee may assume that the project can proceed under the NWP.

7. Conditions Regarding Invasive Species: Plant species listed by the most current Virginia Department of Conservation and Recreation’s Invasive Alien Plant List shall not be used for re-vegetation for activities authorized by any NWP. The list of invasive plants in Virginia may be found at: http://www.dcr.virginia.gov/natural-heritage/invsppdflist. DCR recommends the use of regional native species for re-vegetation as identified in the DCR Native Plants for Conservation, Restoration and Landscaping brochures for the coastal, piedmont and mountain regions http://www.dcr.virginia.gov/natural- heritage/nativeplants#brochure.

8. Conditions Pertaining to Countersinking of Pipes and Culverts: This condition applies to: NWPs 3, 7, 12, 14, 17, 18, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, 32, 33, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 49, 50, 51, and 52. NOTE: COUNTERSINKING IS NOT REQUIRED IN TIDAL WATERS. However, replacement pipes/culverts in tidal waters must be installed with invert elevations no higher than the existing pipe/culvert invert elevation, and a new pipe/culvert must be installed with the invert no higher than the stream bottom elevation. For Nontidal Waters: Following consultation with the Virginia Department of Game and Inland Fisheries (VDGIF), the Norfolk District has determined that fish and other aquatic organisms are most likely present in any stream being crossed, in the absence of site-specific evidence to the contrary. Although prospective permittees have the option of providing such evidence, extensive efforts to collect such information is not encouraged, since countersinking will in most cases be required except as outlined in the conditions below. The following conditions will apply in nontidal waters:

a. All pipes: All pipes and culverts placed in streams will be countersunk at both the inlet and outlet ends, unless indicated otherwise by the Norfolk District on a case-by-case basis (see below). Pipes that are 24” or less in diameter shall be countersunk 3” below the natural stream bottom. Pipes that are greater than 24” in diameter shall be countersunk 6” below the natural stream bottom. The countersinking requirement does not apply to bottomless pipes/culverts or pipe arches. All single pipes or culverts (with bottoms) shall be depressed (countersunk) below the natural streambed at both the inlet and outlet of the structure. In sets of multiple pipes or culverts (with bottoms) at least one pipe or culvert shall be depressed (countersunk) at both the inlet and outlet to convey low flows.

b. When countersinking culverts, permittees must ensure reestablishment of a surface water channel (within 15 days post construction) that allows for the movement of aquatic organisms and maintains the same hydrologic regime that was present pre-construction (i.e. the depth of surface water through the permit area should match the upstream and downstream


depths). This may require the addition of finer materials to choke the larger stone and/or placement of riprap to allow for a low flow channel.

c. Exemption for extensions and certain maintenance: The requirement to countersink does not apply to extensions of existing pipes or culverts that are not countersunk, or to maintenance to pipes/culverts that does not involve replacing the pipe/culvert (such as repairing cracks, adding material to prevent/correct scour, etc.).

d. Floodplain pipes: The requirement to countersink does not apply to pipes or culverts that are being placed above ordinary high water, such as those placed to allow for floodplain flows. The placement of pipes above ordinary high water is not jurisdictional (provided no fill is discharged into wetlands).

e. Hydraulic opening: Pipes should be adequately sized to allow for the passage of ordinary high water with the countersinking and invert restrictions taken into account.

f. Pipes on bedrock or above existing utility lines: Different procedures will be followed for pipes or culverts to be placed on bedrock or above existing buried utility lines where it is not practicable to relocate the lines, depending on whether the work is for replacement of an existing pipe/culvert or a new pipe/culvert:

i. Replacement of an existing pipe/culvert: Countersinking is not required provided the elevations of the inlet and outlet ends of the replacement pipe/culvert are no higher above the stream bottom than those of the existing pipe/culvert. Documentation (photographic or other evidence) must be maintained in the permittee’s records showing the bedrock condition and the existing inlet and outlet elevations. That documentation will be available to the Norfolk District upon request, but notification or coordination with the Norfolk District is not otherwise required.

ii. A pipe/culvert is being placed in a new location: If the prospective permittee determines that bedrock or an existing buried utility line that is not practicable to relocate prevents countersinking, he/she should evaluate the use of a bottomless pipe/culvert, bottomless utility vault, span (bridge) or other bottomless structure to cross the waterway, and also evaluate alternative locations for the new pipe/culvert that will allow for countersinking. If the prospective permittee determines that neither a bottomless structure nor an alternative location is practicable, then he/she must submit a pre-construction notification (PCN) to the Norfolk District in accordance with General Condition 32 of the NWPs. In addition to the information required by General Condition 32, the prospective permittee must provide documentation of measures evaluated to minimize disruption of the movement of aquatic life as well as documentation of the cost, engineering factors, and site conditions that prohibit countersinking the pipe/culvert. Options that must be considered include partial countersinking (such as less than 3” of countersinking, or countersinking of one end of the pipe), and constructing stone step pools, low rock weirs downstream, or other measures to provide for the movement of aquatic organisms. The PCN must also include


photographs documenting site conditions. The prospective permittee may find it helpful to contact the regional fishery biologist for the VDGIF, for recommendations about the measures to be taken to allow for fish movements. When seeking advice from VDGIF, the prospective permittee should provide the VDGIF biologist with all available information such as location, flow rates, stream bottom features, description of proposed pipe(s), slopes, etc. Any recommendations from VDGIF should be included in the PCN. The Norfolk District will notify the prospective permittee whether the proposed work qualifies for the nationwide permit within 45 days of receipt of a complete PCN. NOTE: Blasting of stream bottoms through the use of explosives is not acceptable as a means of providing for countersinking of pipes on bedrock.

g. Pipes on steep terrain: Pipes being placed on steep terrain (slope of 5% or greater) must be countersunk in accordance with the conditions above and will in most cases be non-reporting. It is recommended that on slopes greater than 5%, a larger pipe than required be installed to allow for the passage of ordinary high water in order to increase the likelihood that natural velocities can be maintained. There may be situations where countersinking both the inlet and outlet may result in a slope in the pipe that results in flow velocities that cause excessive scour at the outlet and/or prohibit some fish movement. This type of situation could occur on the side of a mountain where falls and drop pools occur along a stream. Should this be the case, or should the prospective permittee not want to countersink the pipe/culvert for other reasons, he/she must submit a PCN to the Norfolk District in accordance with General Condition 32 of the Nationwide Permits. In addition to the information required by General Condition 32, the prospective permittee must provide documentation of measures evaluated to minimize disruption of the movement of aquatic life as well as documentation of the cost, engineering factors, and site conditions that prohibit countersinking the pipe/culvert. The prospective permittee should design the pipe to be placed at a slope as steep as stream characteristics allow, countersink the inlet 3-6”, and implement measures to minimize any disruption of fish movement. These measures can include constructing a stone step/pool structure, preferably using river rock/native stone rather than riprap, constructing low rock weirs to create a pool or pools, or other structures to allow for fish movements in both directions. Stone structures should be designed with sufficient-sized stone to prevent erosion or washout and should include keying-in as appropriate. These structures should be designed both to allow for fish passage and to minimize scour at the outlet. The quantities of fill discharged below ordinary high water necessary to comply with these requirements (i.e., the cubic yards of stone, riprap or other fill placed below the plane of ordinary high water) must be included in project totals. The prospective permittee may find it helpful to contact the regional fishery biologist for the VDGIF for recommendations about the measures to be taken to allow for fish movements. When seeking advice from DGIF, the prospective permittee should provide the DGIF biologist with all available information such as location, flow rates, stream bottom features, description of proposed pipe(s), slopes, etc. Any recommendations from DGIF should be included in the PCN. The Norfolk District will notify the prospective permittee whether the proposed work qualifies for the nationwide permit within 45 days of receipt of a complete PCN.


h. Problems encountered during construction: When a pipe/culvert is being replaced, and the design calls for countersinking at both ends of the pipe/culvert, and during construction it is found that the streambed/banks are on bedrock, a utility line, or other documentable obstacle, then the permittee must stop work and contact the Norfolk District (contact by telephone and/or email is acceptable). The permittee must provide the Norfolk District with specific information concerning site conditions and limitations on countersinking. The Norfolk District will work with the permittee to determine an acceptable plan, taking into consideration the information provided by the permittee, but the permittee should recognize that the Norfolk District could determine that the work will not qualify for a nationwide permit.

i. Emergency pipe replacements: In the case of an emergency situation, such as when a pipe/culvert washes out during a flood, a permittee is encouraged to countersink the replacement pipe at the time of replacement, in accordance with the conditions above. However, if conditions or timeframes do not allow for countersinking, then the pipe can be replaced as it was before the washout, but the permittee will have to come back and replace the pipe/culvert and countersink it in accordance with the guidance above. In other words, the replacement of the washed out pipe is viewed as a temporary repair, and a countersunk replacement should be made at the earliest possible date. The Norfolk District must be notified of all pipes/culverts that are replaced without countersinking at the time that it occurs, even if it is an otherwise non- reporting activity, and must provide the permittee's planned schedule for installing a countersunk replacement (it is acceptable to submit such notification by email). The permittee should anticipate whether bedrock or steep terrain will limit countersinking, and if so, should follow the procedures outlined in (g) and/or (h) above.

9. Conditions for the Repair of Pipes: This condition applies to: NWPs 3, 7, 12, 14, 17, 18, 21, 23, 25, 27, 29, 32, 33, 37, 38, 39, 40, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, 49, 50, 51, and 52.

NOTE: COUNTERSINKING IS NOT REQUIRED IN TIDAL WATERS. However, replacement pipes/culverts in tidal waters must be installed with invert elevations no higher than the existing pipe/culvert invert elevation, and a new pipe/culvert must be installed with the invert no higher than the stream bottom elevation. For Nontidal Waters: If any discharge of fill material will occur in conjunction with pipe maintenance, such as concrete being pumped over rebar into an existing deteriorated pipe for stabilization, then the following conditions apply:

a. If the existing pipe or multi-barrel array of pipes are NOT currently countersunk:

i. As long as the inlet and outlet invert elevations of at least one pipe located in the low flow channel are not being altered, and provided that no concrete apron is being constructed, then the work may proceed under the NWP for the other pipes, provided it complies with all other NWP General Conditions, including Condition 9 for Management of Water Flows. In such cases, notification to the Norfolk District Commander is not required, unless specified in the NWP Conditions for other reasons, and the permittee may proceed with the work.


ii. Otherwise, the prospective permittee must submit a pre-construction notification (PCN) to the Norfolk District Commander prior to commencing the activity. For all such projects, the following information should be provided:

1) Photographs of the existing inlet and outlet;

2) A measurement of the degree to which the work will raise the invert elevations of both the inlet and outlet of the existing pipe;

3) The reasons why other methods of pipe maintenance are not practicable (such as metal sleeves or a countersunk pipe replacement);

4) A vicinity map showing the pipe locations.

Depending on the specific case, the Norfolk District may discuss potential fish usage of the waterway with the Virginia Department of Game and Inland Fisheries.

The Norfolk District will assess all such pipe repair proposals in accordance with guidelines that can be found under “Pipe Repair Guidelines” at: http://www.nao.usace.army.mil/Missions/Regulatory/GuidanceDocume nts.aspx

iii. If the Norfolk District determines that the work qualifies for the NWP, additional conditions will be placed on the verification. Those conditions can be found at the web link above (in item ii).

iv. If the Norfolk District determines that the work does NOT qualify for the NWP, the applicant will be directed to apply for either Regional Permit 01 (applicable only for Virginia Department of Transportation projects) or an Individual Perm

v. it. However, it is anticipated that the applicant will still be required to perform the work such that the waterway is not blocked or restricted to a greater degree than its current conditions.

b. If the existing pipe or at least one pipe in the multi-barrel array of pipes IS countersunk and at least one pipe located in the low flow channel will continue to be countersunk, and no concrete aprons are proposed: No PCN to the Norfolk District is required, unless specified in the NWP Conditions for other reasons, and the permittee may proceed with the work.

c. If the existing pipe or at least one pipe in the multi-barrel array of pipes IS countersunk and no pipe will continue to be countersunk in the low flow channel: This work cannot be performed under the NWPs. The prospective permittee must apply for either a Regional Permit 01 (applicable only for VDOT projects) or an Individual Permit. However, it is anticipated that the prospective permittee will still be required to perform the work such that the waterway is not blocked or restricted more so than its current conditions.


d. In emergency situations, if conditions or timeframes do not allow for compliance with the procedure outlined herein, then the pipe can be temporarily repaired to the condition before the washout. If the temporary repair would require a PCN by the above procedures, the permittee must submit the PCN at the earliest practicable date, but no longer than 15 days after the temporary repair.

10. Condition for Impacts Requiring a Mitigation Plan: When a PCN is required, a mitigation plan needs to be submitted when the permanent loss of wetlands exceeds 1/10 acre and/or 300 linear feet of waters of the U.S., unless otherwise stated in the Regional Conditions (see Regional Condition 12).

11. Condition for Temporary Impacts: All temporarily disturbed waters and wetlands must be restored to their pre-construction contours within 12 months of commencing the temporary impacts’ construction. Impacts that will not be restored within 12 months (calculated from the start of the temporary impacts’ construction) will be considered permanent, unless otherwise approved by the Corps, and mitigation may be required. Once restored to their natural contours, soil in these areas must be mechanically loosened to a depth of 12 inches and wetland areas must be seeded or sprigged with appropriate native vegetation (see Regional Condition 7 regarding revegetation).

12. Condition for Transportation Projects Funded in Part or in Total by Local, State or Federal Funds: For all impacts associated with transportation projects funded in part or in total by local, state or federal funds and requiring a PCN, compensatory mitigation will generally be required for all permanent wetland impacts (including impacts less than 1/10 acre). Therefore, the PCN must include a mitigation plan addressing the proposed compensatory mitigation.

13. Condition for Projects Requiring Coordination Under Section 408: General Condition 31 of the NWPs requires that prospective permittees submit a pre- construction notification (PCN) if an NWP activity also requires permission from the Corps pursuant to 33 U.S.C. 408 because it will alter or temporarily or permanently occupy or use a US Army Corps of Engineers (USACE) federally authorized civil works project. For information on the location of Norfolk District projects, prospective permittees are directed to the maps showing the locations of Norfolk District projects located at: http://www.nao.usace.army.mil/Portals/31/docs/regulatory/RPSPdocs/RP- 17_Corps_Project_Maps.pdf. If the prospective permittee is uncertain whether the proposed activity might alter or temporarily or permanently occupy or use a Norfolk District federally authorized civil works project, the prospective permittee shall submit a PCN.

GENERAL CONDITIONS:

Note: To qualify for NWP authorization, the prospective permittee must comply with the following general conditions, as applicable, in addition to any regional or case- specific conditions imposed by the division engineer or district engineer. Prospective permittees should contact the appropriate Corps district office to determine if regional conditions have been imposed on an NWP. Prospective permittees should also contact the appropriate Corps district office to determine the status of Clean Water Act Section 401 water quality certification and/or Coastal authorization under one or more NWPs, or who is currently relying on an existing or prior permit authorization under one or more NWPs, has been and is on notice that all of the provisions of 33 CFR §§


330.1 through 330.6 apply to every NWP authorization. Note especially 33 CFR §

330.5 relating to the modification, suspension, or revocation of any NWP authorization.

1. Navigation.

(a) No activity may cause more than a minimal adverse effect on navigation.

(b) Any safety lights and signals prescribed by the U.S. Coast Guard, through regulations or otherwise, must be installed and maintained at the permittee's expense on authorized facilities in navigable waters of the United States.

(c) The permittee understands and agrees that, if future operations by the United States require the removal, relocation, or other alteration, of the structure or work herein authorized, or if, in the opinion of the Secretary of the Army or his authorized representative, said structure or work shall cause unreasonable obstruction to the free navigation of the navigable waters, the permittee will be required, upon due notice from the Corps of Engineers, to remove, relocate, or alter the structural work or obstructions caused thereby, without expense to the United States. No claim shall be made against the United States on account of any such removal or alteration.

2. Aquatic Life Movements. No activity may substantially disrupt the necessary life cycle movements of those species of aquatic life indigenous to the waterbody, including those species that normally migrate through the area, unless the activity's primary purpose is to impound water. All permanent and temporary crossings of waterbodies shall be suitably culverted, bridged, or otherwise designed and constructed to maintain low flows to sustain the movement of those aquatic species. If a bottomless culvert cannot be used, then the crossing should be designed and constructed to minimize adverse effects to aquatic life movements.

3. Spawning Areas. Activities in spawning areas during spawning seasons must be avoided to the maximum extent practicable. Activities that result in the physical destruction (e.g., through excavation, fill, or downstream smothering by substantial turbidity) of an important spawning area are not authorized.

4. Migratory Bird Breeding Areas. Activities in waters of the United States that serve as breeding areas for migratory birds must be avoided to the maximum extent practicable.

5. Shellfish Beds. No activity may occur in areas of concentrated shellfish populations, unless the activity is directly related to a shellfish harvesting activity authorized by NWPs 4 and 48, or is a shellfish seeding or habitat restoration activity authorized by NWP 27.

6. Suitable Material. No activity may use unsuitable material (e.g., trash, debris, car bodies, asphalt, etc.). Material used for construction or discharged must be free from toxic pollutants in toxic amounts (see section 307 of the Clean Water Act).


7. Water Supply Intakes. No activity may occur in the proximity of a public water supply intake, except where the activity is for the repair or improvement of public water supply intake structures or adjacent bank stabilization.

8. Adverse Effects from Impoundments. If the activity creates an impoundment of water, adverse effects to the aquatic system due to accelerating the passage of water, and/or restricting its flow must be minimized to the maximum extent practicable.

9. Management of Water Flows. To the maximum extent practicable, the pre- construction course, condition, capacity, and location of open waters must be maintained for each activity, including stream channelization, storm water management activities, and temporary and permanent road crossings, except as provided below. The activity must be constructed to withstand expected high flows. The activity must not restrict or impede the passage of normal or high flows, unless the primary purpose of the activity is to impound water or manage high flows. The activity may alter the pre-construction course, condition, capacity, and location of open waters if it benefits the aquatic environment (e.g., stream restoration or relocation activities).

10. Fills Within 100-Year Floodplains. The activity must comply with applicable FEMA- approved state or local floodplain management requirements.

11. Equipment. Heavy equipment working in wetlands or mudflats must be placed on mats, or other measures must be taken to minimize soil disturbance.

12. Soil Erosion and Sediment Controls. Appropriate soil erosion and sediment controls must be used and maintained in effective operating condition during construction, and all exposed soil and other fills, as well as any work below the ordinary high water mark or high tide line, must be permanently stabilized at the earliest practicable date. Permittees are encouraged to perform work within waters of the United States during periods of low-flow or no-flow, or during low tides.

13. Removal of Temporary Fills. Temporary fills must be removed in their entirety and the affected areas returned to pre-construction elevations. The affected areas must be revegetated, as appropriate.

14. Proper Maintenance. Any authorized structure or fill shall be properly maintained, including maintenance to ensure public safety and compliance with applicable NWP general conditions, as well as any activity-specific conditions added by the district engineer to an NWP authorization.

15. Single and Complete Project. The activity must be a single and complete project. The same NWP cannot be used more than once for the same single and complete project.


16. Wild and Scenic Rivers.

(a) No NWP activity may occur in a component of the National Wild and Scenic River System, or in a river officially designated by Congress as a “study river” for possible inclusion in the system while the river is in an official study status, unless the appropriate Federal agency with direct management responsibility for such river, has determined in writing that the proposed activity will not adversely affect the Wild and Scenic River designation or study status.

(b) If a proposed NWP activity will occur in a component of the National Wild and Scenic River System, or in a river officially designated by Congress as a “study river” for possible inclusion in the system while the river is in an official study status, the permittee must submit a pre-construction notification (see general condition 32). The district engineer will coordinate the PCN with the Federal agency with direct management responsibility for that river. The permittee shall not begin the NWP activity until notified by the district engineer that the Federal agency with direct management responsibility for that river has determined in writing that the proposed NWP activity will not adversely affect the Wild and Scenic River designation or study status.

(c) Information on Wild and Scenic Rivers may be obtained from the appropriate Federal land management agency responsible for the designated Wild and Scenic River or study river (e.g., National Park Service, U.S. Forest Service, Bureau of Land Management, U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service). Information on these rivers is also available at: http://www.rivers.gov/.

17. Tribal Rights. No NWP activity may cause more than minimal adverse effects on tribal rights (including treaty rights), protected tribal resources, or tribal lands.

18. Endangered Species.

(a) No activity is authorized under any NWP which is likely to directly or indirectly jeopardize the continued existence of a threatened or endangered species or a species proposed for such designation, as identified under the Federal Endangered Species Act (ESA), or which will directly or indirectly destroy or adversely modify the critical habitat of such species. No activity is authorized under any NWP which “may affect” a listed species or critical habitat, unless ESA section 7 consultation addressing the effects of the proposed activity has been completed. Direct effects are the immediate effects on listed species and critical habitat caused by the NWP activity. Indirect effects are those effects on listed species and critical habitat that are caused by the NWP activity and are later in time, but still are reasonably certain to occur.

(b) Federal agencies should follow their own procedures for complying with the requirements of the ESA. If pre-construction notification is required for the proposed activity, the Federal permittee must provide the district engineer with the appropriate documentation to demonstrate compliance with those requirements. The district engineer will verify that the appropriate documentation has been submitted. If the appropriate documentation has not been submitted, additional ESA section 7 consultation may be necessary for the activity and the


respective federal agency would be responsible for fulfilling its obligation under section 7 of the ESA.

(c) Non-federal permittees must submit a pre-construction notification to the district engineer if any listed species or designated critical habitat might be affected or is in the vicinity of the activity, or if the activity is located in designated critical habitat, and shall not begin work on the activity until notified by the district engineer that the requirements of the ESA have been satisfied and that the activity is authorized. For activities that might affect Federally-listed endangered or threatened species or designated critical habitat, the pre-construction notification must include the name(s) of the endangered or threatened species that might be affected by the proposed activity or that utilize the designated critical habitat that might be affected by the proposed activity. The district engineer will determine whether the proposed activity “may affect” or will have “no effect” to listed species and designated critical habitat and will notify the non-Federal applicant of the Corps’ determination within 45 days of receipt of a complete pre-construction notification. In cases where the non-Federal applicant has identified listed species or critical habitat that might be affected or is in the vicinity of the activity, and has so notified the Corps, the applicant shall not begin work until the Corps has provided notification that the proposed activity will have “no effect” on listed species or critical habitat, or until ESA section 7 consultation has been completed. If the non-Federal applicant has not heard back from the Corps within 45 days, the applicant must still wait for notification from the Corps.

(d) As a result of formal or informal consultation with the FWS or NMFS the district engineer may add species-specific permit conditions to the NWPs.

(e) Authorization of an activity by an NWP does not authorize the “take” of a threatened or endangered species as defined under the ESA. In the absence of separate authorization (e.g., an ESA Section 10 Permit, a Biological Opinion with “incidental take” provisions, etc.) from the FWS or the NMFS, the Endangered Species Act prohibits any person subject to the jurisdiction of the United States to take a listed species, where "take" means to harass, harm, pursue, hunt, shoot, wound, kill, trap, capture, or collect, or to attempt to engage in any such conduct. The word “harm” in the definition of “take'' means an act which actually kills or injures wildlife. Such an act may include significant habitat modification or degradation where it actually kills or injures wildlife by significantly impairing essential behavioral patterns, including breeding, feeding or sheltering.

(f) If the non-federal permittee has a valid ESA section 10(a)(1)(B) incidental take permit with an approved Habitat Conservation Plan for a project or a group of projects that includes the proposed NWP activity, the non-federal applicant should provide a copy of that ESA section 10(a)(1)(B) permit with the PCN required by paragraph (c) of this general condition. The district engineer will coordinate with the agency that issued the ESA section 10(a)(1)(B) permit to determine whether the proposed NWP activity and the associated incidental take were considered in the internal ESA section 7 consultation conducted for the ESA section 10(a)(1)(B) permit. If that coordination results in concurrence from the agency that the proposed NWP


activity and the associated incidental take were considered in the internal ESA section 7 consultation for the ESA section 10(a)(1)(B) permit, the district engineer does not need to conduct a separate ESA section 7 consultation for the proposed NWP activity. The district engineer will notify the non-federal applicant within 45 days of receipt of a complete pre-construction notification whether the ESA section 10(a)(1)(B) permit covers the proposed NWP activity or whether additional ESA section 7 consultation is required.

(g) Information on the location of threatened and endangered species and their critical habitat can be obtained directly from the offices of the FWS and NMFS or their World Wide Web pages at http://www.fws.gov/ or http://www.fws.gov/ipac and http://www.nmfs.noaa.gov/pr/species/esa/ respectively.

19. Migratory Birds and Bald and Golden Eagles. The permittee is responsible for ensuring their action complies with the Migratory Bird Treaty Act and the Bald and Golden Eagle Protection Act. The permittee is responsible for contacting appropriate local office of the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service to determine applicable measures to reduce impacts to migratory birds or eagles, including whether “incidental take” permits are necessary and available under the Migratory Bird Treaty Act or Bald and Golden Eagle Protection Act for a particular activity.

20. Historic Properties.

(a) In cases where the district engineer determines that the activity may have the potential to cause effects to properties listed, or eligible for listing, in the National Register of Historic Places, the activity is not authorized, until the requirements of Section 106 of the National Historic Preservation Act (NHPA) have been satisfied.

(b) Federal permittees should follow their own procedures for complying with the requirements of section 106 of the National Historic Preservation Act. If pre- construction notification is required for the proposed NWP activity, the Federal permittee must provide the district engineer with the appropriate documentation to demonstrate compliance with those requirements. The district engineer will verify that the appropriate documentation has been submitted. If the appropriate documentation is not submitted, then additional consultation under section 106 may be necessary. The respective federal agency is responsible for fulfilling its obligation to comply with section 106.

(c) Non-federal permittees must submit a pre-construction notification to the district engineer if the NWP activity might have the potential to cause effects to any historic properties listed on, determined to be eligible for listing on, or potentially eligible for listing on the National Register of Historic Places, including previously unidentified properties. For such activities, the pre-construction notification must state which historic properties might have the potential to be affected by the proposed NWP activity or include a vicinity map indicating the location of the historic properties or the potential for the presence of historic properties. Assistance regarding information on the location of, or potential for, the presence of historic properties can be sought from the State Historic Preservation Officer, Tribal Historic Preservation Officer, or designated tribal representative, as appropriate, and the National Register of Historic Places


(see 33 CFR 330.4(g)). When reviewing pre-construction notifications, district engineers will comply with the current procedures for addressing the requirements of section 106 of the National Historic Preservation Act. The district engineer shall make a reasonable and good faith effort to carry out appropriate identification efforts, which may include background research, consultation, oral history interviews, sample field investigation, and field survey. Based on the information submitted in the PCN and these identification efforts, the district engineer shall determine whether the proposed NWP activity has the potential to cause effects on the historic properties. Section 106 consultation is not required when the district engineer determines that the activity does not have the potential to cause effects on historic properties (see 36 CFR 800.3(a)). Section 106 consultation is required when the district engineer determines that the activity has the potential to cause effects on historic properties. The district engineer will conduct consultation with consulting parties identified under 36 CFR 800.2(c) when he or she makes any of the following effect determinations for the purposes of section 106 of the NHPA: no historic properties affected, no adverse effect, or adverse effect. Where the non-Federal applicant has identified historic properties on which the activity might have the potential to cause effects and so notified the Corps, the non- Federal applicant shall not begin the activity until notified by the district engineer either that the activity has no potential to cause effects to historic properties or that NHPA section 106 consultation has been completed.

(d) For non-federal permittees, the district engineer will notify the prospective permittee within 45 days of receipt of a complete pre-construction notification whether NHPA section 106 consultation is required. If NHPA section 106 consultation is required, the district engineer will notify the non-Federal applicant that he or she cannot begin the activity until section 106 consultation is completed. If the non-Federal applicant has not heard back from the Corps within 45 days, the applicant must still wait for notification from the Corps.

(e) Prospective permittees should be aware that section 110k of the NHPA (54

U.S.C. 306113) prevents the Corps from granting a permit or other assistance to an applicant who, with intent to avoid the requirements of section 106 of the NHPA, has intentionally significantly adversely affected a historic property to which the permit would relate, or having legal power to prevent it, allowed such significant adverse effect to occur, unless the Corps, after consultation with the Advisory Council on Historic Preservation (ACHP), determines that circumstances justify granting such assistance despite the adverse effect created or permitted by the applicant. If circumstances justify granting the assistance, the Corps is required to notify the ACHP and provide documentation specifying the circumstances, the degree of damage to the integrity of any historic properties affected, and proposed mitigation. This documentation must include any views obtained from the applicant, SHPO/THPO, appropriate Indian tribes if the undertaking occurs on or affects historic properties on tribal lands or affects properties of interest to those tribes, and other parties known to have a legitimate interest in the impacts to the permitted activity on historic properties.

21. Discovery of Previously Unknown Remains and Artifacts. If you discover any previously unknown historic, cultural or archeological remains and artifacts while accomplishing the activity authorized by


this permit, you must immediately notify the district engineer of what you have found, and to the maximum extent practicable, avoid construction activities that may affect the remains and artifacts until the required coordination has been completed. The district engineer will initiate the Federal, Tribal, and state coordination required to determine if the items or remains warrant a recovery effort or if the site is eligible for listing in the National Register of Historic Places.

22. Designated Critical Resource Waters. Critical resource waters include, NOAA- managed marine sanctuaries and marine monuments, and National Estuarine Research Reserves. The district engineer may designate, after notice and opportunity for public comment, additional waters officially designated by a state as having particular environmental or ecological significance, such as outstanding national resource waters or state natural heritage sites. The district engineer may also designate additional critical resource waters after notice and opportunity for public comment.

(a) Discharges of dredged or fill material into waters of the United States are not authorized by NWPs 7, 12, 14, 16, 17, 21, 29, 31, 35, 39, 40, 42, 43, 44, 49, 50, 51, and 52 for any activity within, or directly affecting, critical resource waters, including wetlands adjacent to such waters.

(b) For NWPs 3, 8, 10, 13, 15, 18, 19, 22, 23, 25, 27, 28, 30, 33, 34, 36, 37, 38, and 54, notification is required in accordance with general condition 32, for any activity proposed in the designated critical resource waters including wetlands adjacent to those waters. The district engineer may authorize activities under these NWPs only after it is determined that the impacts to the critical resource waters will be no more than minimal.

23. Mitigation. The district engineer will consider the following factors when determining appropriate and practicable mitigation necessary to ensure that the individual and cumulative adverse environmental effects are no more than minimal:

(a) The activity must be designed and constructed to avoid and minimize adverse effects, both temporary and permanent, to waters of the United States to the maximum extent practicable at the project site (i.e., on site).

(b) Mitigation in all its forms (avoiding, minimizing, rectifying, reducing, or compensating for resource losses) will be required to the extent necessary to ensure that the individual and cumulative adverse environmental effects are no more than minimal.

(c) Compensatory mitigation at a minimum one-for-one ratio will be required for all wetland losses that exceed 1/10-acre and require pre-construction notification, unless the district engineer determines in writing that either some other form of mitigation would be more environmentally appropriate or the adverse environmental effects of the proposed activity are no more than minimal, and provides an activity-specific waiver of this requirement. For wetland losses of 1/10-acre or less that require pre- construction notification, the district engineer may determine on a case-by-case basis that compensatory mitigation is required to ensure that the activity results in only minimal adverse environmental effects.

(d) For losses of streams or other open waters that require pre-construction notification, the district engineer may require compensatory mitigation to ensure that the activity results in


no more than minimal adverse environmental effects. Compensatory mitigation for losses of streams should be provided, if practicable, through stream rehabilitation, enhancement, or preservation, since streams are difficult-to-replace resources (see 33 CFR 332.3(e)(3)).

(e) Compensatory mitigation plans for NWP activities in or near streams or other open waters will normally include a requirement for the restoration or enhancement, maintenance, and legal protection (e.g., conservation easements) of riparian areas next to open waters. In some cases, the restoration or maintenance/protection of riparian areas may be the only compensatory mitigation required. Restored riparian areas should consist of native species. The width of the required riparian area will address documented water quality or aquatic habitat loss concerns. Normally, the riparian area will be 25 to 50 feet wide on each side of the stream, but the district engineer may require slightly wider riparian areas to address documented water quality or habitat loss concerns. If it is not possible to restore or maintain/protect a riparian area on both sides of a stream, or if the waterbody is a lake or coastal waters, then restoring or maintaining/protecting a riparian area along a single bank or shoreline may be sufficient. Where both wetlands and open waters exist on the project site, the district engineer will determine the appropriate compensatory mitigation (e.g., riparian areas and/or wetlands compensation) based on what is best for the aquatic environment on a watershed basis. In cases where riparian areas are determined to be the most appropriate form of minimization or compensatory mitigation, the district engineer may waive or reduce the requirement to provide wetland compensatory mitigation for wetland losses.

(f) Compensatory mitigation projects provided to offset losses of aquatic resources must comply with the applicable provisions of 33 CFR part 332.

(1) The prospective permittee is responsible for proposing an appropriate compensatory mitigation option if compensatory mitigation is necessary to ensure that the activity results in no more than minimal adverse environmental effects. For the NWPs, the preferred mechanism for providing compensatory mitigation is mitigation bank credits or in-lieu fee program credits (see 33 CFR 332.3(b)(2) and (3)). However, if an appropriate number and type of mitigation bank or in-lieu credits are not available at the time the PCN is submitted to the district engineer, the district engineer may approve the use of permittee-responsible mitigation.

(2) The amount of compensatory mitigation required by the district engineer must be sufficient to ensure that the authorized activity results in no more than minimal individual and cumulative adverse environmental effects (see 33 CFR 330.1(e)(3)). (See also 33 CFR 332.3(f)).

(3) Since the likelihood of success is greater and the impacts to potentially valuable uplands are reduced, aquatic resource restoration should be the first compensatory mitigation option considered for permittee-responsible mitigation.

(4) If permittee-responsible mitigation is the proposed option, the prospective permittee is responsible for submitting a mitigation plan. A conceptual or detailed


mitigation plan may be used by the district engineer to make the decision on the NWP verification request, but a final mitigation plan that addresses the applicable requirements of 33 CFR 332.4(c)(2) through (14) must be approved by the district engineer before the permittee begins work in waters of the United States, unless the district engineer determines that prior approval of the final mitigation plan is not practicable or not necessary to ensure timely completion of the required compensatory mitigation (see 33 CFR 332.3(k)(3)).

(5) If mitigation bank or in-lieu fee program credits are the proposed option, the mitigation plan only needs to address the baseline conditions at the impact site and the number of credits to be provided.

(6) Compensatory mitigation requirements (e.g., resource type and amount to be provided as compensatory mitigation, site protection, ecological performance standards, monitoring requirements) may be addressed through conditions added to the NWP authorization, instead of components of a compensatory mitigation plan (see 33 CFR 332.4(c)(1)(ii)).

(g) Compensatory mitigation will not be used to increase the acreage losses allowed by the acreage limits of the NWPs. For example, if an NWP has an acreage limit of 1/2-acre, it cannot be used to authorize any NWP activity resulting in the loss of greater than 1/2-acre of waters of the United States, even if compensatory mitigation is provided that replaces or restores some of the lost waters. However, compensatory mitigation can and should be used, as necessary, to ensure that an NWP activity already meeting the established acreage limits also satisfies the no more than minimal impact requirement for the NWPs.

(h) Permittees may propose the use of mitigation banks, in-lieu fee programs, or permittee-responsible mitigation. When developing a compensatory mitigation proposal, the permittee must consider appropriate and practicable options consistent with the framework at 33 CFR 332.3(b). For activities resulting in the loss of marine or estuarine resources, permittee-responsible mitigation may be environmentally preferable if there are no mitigation banks or in-lieu fee programs in the area that have marine or estuarine credits available for sale or transfer to the permittee. For permittee-responsible mitigation, the special conditions of the NWP verification must clearly indicate the party or parties responsible for the implementation and performance of the compensatory mitigation project, and, if required, its long-term management.

(i) Where certain functions and services of waters of the United States are permanently adversely affected by a regulated activity, such as discharges of dredged or fill material into waters of the United States that will convert a forested or scrub- shrub wetland to a herbaceous wetland in a permanently maintained utility line right- of-way, mitigation may be required to reduce the adverse environmental effects of the activity to the no more than minimal level.

24. Safety of Impoundment Structures. To ensure that all impoundment structures are safely designed, the district engineer may require non-Federal applicants to demonstrate that the structures


comply with established state dam safety criteria or have been designed by qualified persons. The district engineer may also require documentation that the design has been independently reviewed by similarly qualified persons, and appropriate modifications made to ensure safety.

25. Water Quality. Where States and authorized Tribes, or EPA where applicable, have not previously certified compliance of an NWP with CWA section 401, individual 401 Water Quality Certification must be obtained or waived (see 33 CFR 330.4(c)). The district engineer or State or Tribe may require additional water quality management measures to ensure that the authorized activity does not result in more than minimal degradation of water quality.

26. Coastal Zone Management. In coastal states where an NWP has not previously received a state coastal zone management consistency concurrence, an individual state coastal zone management consistency concurrence must be obtained, or a presumption of concurrence must occur (see 33 CFR 330.4(d)). The district engineer or a State may require additional measures to ensure that the authorized activity is consistent with state coastal zone management requirements.

27. Regional and Case-By-Case Conditions. The activity must comply with any regional conditions that may have been added by the Division Engineer (see 33 CFR 330.4(e)) and with any case specific conditions added by the Corps or by the state, Indian Tribe, or U.S. EPA in its section 401 Water Quality Certification, or by the state in its Coastal Zone Management Act consistency determination.

28. Use of Multiple Nationwide Permits. The use of more than one NWP for a single and complete project is prohibited, except when the acreage loss of waters of the United States authorized by the NWPs does not exceed the acreage limit of the NWP with the highest specified acreage limit. For example, if a road crossing over tidal waters is constructed under NWP 14, with associated bank stabilization authorized by NWP 13, the maximum acreage loss of waters of the United States for the total project cannot exceed 1/3-acre.

29. Transfer of Nationwide Permit Verifications. If the permittee sells the property associated with a nationwide permit verification, the permittee may transfer the nationwide permit verification to the new owner by submitting a letter to the appropriate Corps district office to validate the transfer. A copy of the nationwide permit verification must be attached to the letter, and the letter must contain the following statement and signature:

“When the structures or work authorized by this nationwide permit are still in existence at the time the property is transferred, the terms and conditions of this nationwide permit, including any special conditions, will continue to be binding on the new owner(s) of the property. To validate the transfer of this nationwide permit and the associated liabilities associated with compliance with its terms and conditions, have the transferee sign and date below.”

______________________________________________ (Transferee)

______________________________________________ (Date)


30. Compliance Certification. Each permittee who receives an NWP verification letter from the Corps must provide a signed certification documenting completion of the authorized activity and implementation of any required compensatory mitigation. The success of any required permittee-responsible mitigation, including the achievement of ecological performance standards, will be addressed separately by the district engineer. The Corps will provide the permittee the certification document with the NWP verification letter. The certification document will include:

(a) A statement that the authorized activity was done in accordance with the NWP authorization, including any general, regional, or activity-specific conditions;

(b) A statement that the implementation of any required compensatory mitigation was completed in accordance with the permit conditions. If credits from a mitigation bank or in-lieu fee program are used to satisfy the compensatory mitigation requirements, the certification must include the documentation required by 33 CFR 332.3(l)(3) to confirm that the permittee secured the appropriate number and resource type of credits; and

(c) The signature of the permittee certifying the completion of the activity and mitigation.

The completed certification document must be submitted to the district engineer within 30 days of completion of the authorized activity or the implementation of any required compensatory mitigation, whichever occurs later.

31. Activities Affecting Structures or Works Built by the United States. If an NWP activity also requires permission from the Corps pursuant to 33 U.S.C. 408 because it will alter or temporarily or permanently occupy or use a U.S. Army Corps of Engineers (USACE) federally authorized Civil Works project (a “USACE project”), the prospective permittee must submit a pre-construction notification. See paragraph (b)(10) of general condition 32. An activity that requires section 408 permission is not authorized by NWP until the appropriate Corps office issues the section 408 permission to alter, occupy, or use the USACE project, and the district engineer issues a written NWP verification.

32. Pre-Construction Notification.

(a) Timing. Where required by the terms of the NWP, the prospective permittee must notify the district engineer by submitting a pre-construction notification (PCN) as early as possible. The district engineer must determine if the PCN is complete within 30 calendar days of the date of receipt and, if the PCN is determined to be incomplete, notify the prospective permittee within that 30 day period to request the additional information necessary to make the PCN complete. The request must specify the information needed to make the PCN complete. As a general rule, district engineers will request additional information necessary to make the PCN complete only once. However, if the prospective permittee does not provide all of the requested information, then the district engineer will notify the prospective permittee that the PCN is still incomplete and the PCN review process will not commence until all of the requested information has been received by the district engineer. The prospective permittee shall not begin the activity until either:


(1) He or she is notified in writing by the district engineer that the activity may proceed under the NWP with any special conditions imposed by the district or division engineer; or

(2) 45 calendar days have passed from the district engineer’s receipt of the complete PCN and the prospective permittee has not received written notice from the district or division engineer. However, if the permittee was required to notify the Corps pursuant to general condition 18 that listed species or critical habitat might be affected or are in the vicinity of the activity, or to notify the Corps pursuant to general condition 20 that the activity might have the potential to cause effects to historic properties, the permittee cannot begin the activity until receiving written notification from the Corps that there is “no effect” on listed species or “no potential to cause effects” on historic properties, or that any consultation required under Section 7 of the Endangered Species Act (see 33 CFR 330.4(f)) and/or section 106 of the National Historic Preservation Act (see 33 CFR 330.4(g)) has been completed. Also, work cannot begin under NWPs 21, 49, or 50 until the permittee has received written approval from the Corps. If the proposed activity requires a written waiver to exceed specified limits of an NWP, the permittee may not begin the activity until the district engineer issues the waiver. If the district or division engineer notifies the permittee in writing that an individual permit is required within 45 calendar days of receipt of a complete PCN, the permittee cannot begin the activity until an individual permit has been obtained. Subsequently, the permittee’s right to proceed under the NWP may be modified, suspended, or revoked only in accordance with the procedure set forth in 33 CFR 330.5(d)(2).

(b) Contents of Pre-Construction Notification: The PCN must be in writing and include the following information:

(1) Name, address and telephone numbers of the prospective permittee;

(2) Location of the proposed activity;

(3) Identify the specific NWP or NWP(s) the prospective permittee wants to use to authorize the proposed activity;

(4) A description of the proposed activity; the activity’s purpose; direct and indirect adverse environmental effects the activity would cause, including the anticipated amount of loss of wetlands, other special aquatic sites, and other waters expected to result from the NWP activity, in acres, linear feet, or other appropriate unit of measure; a description of any proposed mitigation measures intended to reduce the adverse environmental effects caused by the proposed activity; and any other NWP(s), regional general permit(s), or individual permit(s) used or intended to be used to authorize any part of the proposed project or any related activity, including other separate and distant crossings for linear projects that require Department of the Army authorization but do not require pre-construction notification. The description of the proposed activity and any proposed mitigation measures should be sufficiently detailed to allow the district


engineer to determine that the adverse environmental effects of the activity will be no more than minimal and to determine the need for compensatory mitigation or other mitigation measures. For single and complete linear projects, the PCN must include the quantity of anticipated losses of wetlands, other special aquatic sites, and other waters for each single and complete crossing of those wetlands, other special aquatic sites, and other waters. Sketches should be provided when necessary to show that the activity complies with the terms of the NWP. (Sketches usually clarify the activity and when provided results in a quicker decision. Sketches should contain sufficient detail to provide an illustrative description of the proposed activity (e.g., a conceptual plan), but do not need to be detailed engineering plans);

(5) The PCN must include a delineation of wetlands, other special aquatic sites, and other waters, such as lakes and ponds, and perennial, intermittent, and ephemeral streams, on the project site. Wetland delineations must be prepared in accordance with the current method required by the Corps. The permittee may ask the Corps to delineate the special aquatic sites and other waters on the project site, but there may be a delay if the Corps does the delineation, especially if the project site is large or contains many wetlands, other special aquatic sites, and other waters. Furthermore, the 45 day period will not start until the delineation has been submitted to or completed by the Corps, as appropriate;

(6) If the proposed activity will result in the loss of greater than 1/10-acre of wetlands and a PCN is required, the prospective permittee must submit a statement describing how the mitigation requirement will be satisfied, or explaining why the adverse environmental effects are no more than minimal and why compensatory mitigation should not be required. As an alternative, the prospective permittee may submit a conceptual or detailed mitigation plan.

(7) For non-Federal permittees, if any listed species or designated critical habitat might be affected or is in the vicinity of the activity, or if the activity is located in designated critical habitat, the PCN must include the name(s) of those endangered or threatened species that might be affected by the proposed activity or utilize the designated critical habitat that might be affected by the proposed activity. For NWP activities that require pre-construction notification, Federal permittees must provide documentation demonstrating compliance with the Endangered Species Act;

(8) For non-Federal permittees, if the NWP activity might have the potential to cause effects to a historic property listed on, determined to be eligible for listing on, or potentially eligible for listing on, the National Register of Historic Places, the PCN must state which historic property might have the potential to be affected by the proposed activity or include a vicinity map indicating the location of the historic property. For NWP activities that require pre- construction notification, Federal permittees must provide documentation demonstrating compliance with section 106 of the National Historic Preservation Act;


(9) For an activity that will occur in a component of the National Wild and Scenic River System, or in a river officially designated by Congress as a “study river” for possible inclusion in the system while the river is in an official study status, the PCN must identify the Wild and Scenic River or the “study river” (see general condition 16); and

(10) For an activity that requires permission from the Corps pursuant to 33

U.S.C. 408 because it will alter or temporarily or permanently occupy or use a

U.S. Army Corps of Engineers federally authorized civil works project, the pre- construction notification must include a statement confirming that the project proponent has submitted a written request for section 408 permission from the Corps office having jurisdiction over that USACE project.

(c) Form of Pre-Construction Notification: The standard individual permit application form (Form ENG 4345) may be used, but the completed application form must clearly indicate that it is an NWP PCN and must include all of the applicable information required in paragraphs (b)(1) through (10) of this general condition. A letter containing the required information may also be used. Applicants may provide electronic files of PCNs and supporting materials if the district engineer has established tools and procedures for electronic submittals.

(d) Agency Coordination:

(1) The district engineer will consider any comments from Federal and state agencies concerning the proposed activity’s compliance with the terms and conditions of the NWPs and the need for mitigation to reduce the activity’s adverse environmental effects so that they are no more than minimal.

(2) Agency coordination is required for: (i) all NWP activities that require pre- construction notification and result in the loss of greater than 1/2-acre of waters of the United States; (ii) NWP 21, 29, 39, 40, 42, 43, 44, 50, 51, and 52 activities that require pre-construction notification and will result in the loss of greater than 300 linear feet of stream bed; (iii) NWP 13 activities in excess of 500 linear feet, fills greater than one cubic yard per running foot, or involve discharges of dredged or fill material into special aquatic sites; and (iv) NWP 54 activities in excess of 500 linear feet, or that extend into the waterbody more than 30 feet from the mean low water line in tidal waters or the ordinary high water mark in the Great Lakes.

(3) When agency coordination is required, the district engineer will immediately provide (e.g., via e-mail, facsimile transmission, overnight mail, or other expeditious manner) a copy of the complete PCN to the appropriate Federal or state offices (FWS, state natural resource or water quality agency, EPA, and, if appropriate, the NMFS). With the exception of NWP 37, these agencies will have 10 calendar days from the date the material is transmitted to notify the district engineer via telephone, facsimile transmission, or e-mail that they intend to provide substantive, site-specific comments. The comments must explain why the agency believes the adverse environmental effects


will be more than minimal. If so contacted by an agency, the district engineer will wait an additional 15 calendar days before making a decision on the pre- construction notification. The district engineer will fully consider agency comments received within the specified time frame concerning the proposed activity’s compliance with the terms and conditions of the NWPs, including the need for mitigation to ensure the net adverse environmental effects of the proposed activity are no more than minimal. The district engineer will provide no response to the resource agency, except as provided below. The district engineer will indicate in the administrative record associated with each pre- construction notification that the resource agencies’ concerns were considered. For NWP 37, the emergency watershed protection and rehabilitation activity may proceed immediately in cases where there is an unacceptable hazard to life or a significant loss of property or economic hardship will occur. The district engineer will consider any comments received to decide whether the NWP 37 authorization should be modified, suspended, or revoked in accordance with the procedures at 33 CFR 330.5.

(4) In cases of where the prospective permittee is not a Federal agency, the district engineer will provide a response to NMFS within 30 calendar days of receipt of any Essential Fish Habitat conservation recommendations, as required by section 305(b)(4)(B) of the Magnuson-Stevens Fishery Conservation and Management Act.

(5) Applicants are encouraged to provide the Corps with either electronic files or multiple copies of pre-construction notifications to expedite agency coordination.

DISTRICT ENGINEER’S DECISION:

1. In reviewing the PCN for the proposed activity, the district engineer will determine whether the activity authorized by the NWP will result in more than minimal individual or cumulative adverse environmental effects or may be contrary to the public interest. If a project proponent requests authorization by a specific NWP, the district engineer should issue the NWP verification for that activity if it meets the terms and conditions of that NWP, unless he or she determines, after considering mitigation, that the proposed activity will result in more than minimal individual and cumulative adverse effects on the aquatic environment and other aspects of the public interest and exercises discretionary authority to require an individual permit for the proposed activity. For a linear project, this determination will include an evaluation of the individual crossings of waters of the United States to determine whether they individually satisfy the terms and conditions of the NWP(s), as well as the cumulative effects caused by all of the crossings authorized by NWP. If an applicant requests a waiver of the 300 linear foot limit on impacts to streams or of an otherwise applicable limit, as provided for in NWPs 13, 21, 29, 36, 39, 40, 42, 43, 44, 50, 51, 52, or 54, the district engineer will only grant the waiver upon a written determination that the NWP activity will result in only minimal individual and cumulative adverse environmental effects. For those NWPs that have a waivable 300 linear foot limit for losses of intermittent and ephemeral stream bed and a 1/2-acre limit (i.e., NWPs 21, 29, 39, 40, 42, 43, 44, 50, 51, and 52), the loss of intermittent and ephemeral stream bed, plus any other losses of jurisdictional waters and wetlands, cannot exceed 1/2-acre.


2. When making minimal adverse environmental effects determinations the district engineer will consider the direct and indirect effects caused by the NWP activity. He or she will also consider the cumulative adverse environmental effects caused by activities authorized by NWP and whether those cumulative adverse environmental effects are no more than minimal. The district engineer will also consider site specific factors, such as the environmental setting in the vicinity of the NWP activity, the type of resource that will be affected by the NWP activity, the functions provided by the aquatic resources that will be affected by the NWP activity, the degree or magnitude to which the aquatic resources perform those functions, the extent that aquatic resource functions will be lost as a result of the NWP activity (e.g., partial or complete loss), the duration of the adverse effects (temporary or permanent), the importance of the aquatic resource functions to the region (e.g., watershed or ecoregion), and mitigation required by the district engineer. If an appropriate functional or condition assessment method is available and practicable to use, that assessment method may be used by the district engineer to assist in the minimal adverse environmental effects determination. The district engineer may add case-specific special conditions to the NWP authorization to address site-specific environmental concerns.

3. If the proposed activity requires a PCN and will result in a loss of greater than 1/10- acre of wetlands, the prospective permittee should submit a mitigation proposal with the PCN. Applicants may also propose compensatory mitigation for NWP activities with smaller impacts, or for impacts to other types of waters (e.g., streams). The district engineer will consider any proposed compensatory mitigation or other mitigation measures the applicant has included in the proposal in determining whether the net adverse environmental effects of the proposed activity are no more than minimal. The compensatory mitigation proposal may be either conceptual or detailed. If the district engineer determines that the activity complies with the terms and conditions of the NWP and that the adverse environmental effects are no more than minimal, after considering mitigation, the district engineer will notify the permittee and include any activity-specific conditions in the NWP verification the district engineer deems necessary. Conditions for compensatory mitigation requirements must comply with the appropriate provisions at 33 CFR 332.3(k). The district engineer must approve the final mitigation plan before the permittee commences work in waters of the United States, unless the district engineer determines that prior approval of the final mitigation plan is not practicable or not necessary to ensure timely completion of the required compensatory mitigation. If the prospective permittee elects to submit a compensatory mitigation plan with the PCN, the district engineer will expeditiously review the proposed compensatory mitigation plan. The district engineer must review the proposed compensatory mitigation plan within 45 calendar days of receiving a complete PCN and determine whether the proposed mitigation would ensure the NWP activity results in no more than minimal adverse environmental effects. If the net adverse environmental effects of the NWP activity (after consideration of the mitigation proposal) are determined by the district engineer to be no more than minimal, the district engineer will provide a timely written response to the applicant. The response will state that the NWP activity can proceed under the terms and conditions of the NWP, including any activity-specific conditions added to the NWP authorization by the district engineer.

4. If the district engineer determines that the adverse environmental effects of the proposed activity are more than minimal, then the district engineer will notify the applicant either: (a) that the


activity does not qualify for authorization under the NWP and instruct the applicant on the procedures to seek authorization under an individual permit; (b) that the activity is authorized under the NWP subject to the applicant’s submission of a mitigation plan that would reduce the adverse environmental effects so that they are no more than minimal; or (c) that the activity is authorized under the NWP with specific modifications or conditions. Where the district engineer determines that mitigation is required to ensure no more than minimal adverse environmental effects, the activity will be authorized within the 45-day PCN period (unless additional time is required to comply with general conditions 18, 20, and/or 31, or to evaluate PCNs for activities authorized by NWPs 21, 49, and 50), with activity-specific conditions that state the mitigation requirements. The authorization will include the necessary conceptual or detailed mitigation plan or a requirement that the applicant submit a mitigation plan that would reduce the adverse environmental effects so that they are no more than minimal. When compensatory mitigation is required, no work in waters of the United States may occur until the district engineer has approved a specific mitigation plan or has determined that prior approval of a final mitigation plan is not practicable or not necessary to ensure timely completion of the required compensatory mitigation.

Further Information:

1. District Engineers have authority to determine if an activity complies with the terms and conditions of an NWP.

2. NWPs do not obviate the need to obtain other federal, state, or local permits, approvals, or authorizations required by law.

3. NWPs do not grant any property rights or exclusive privileges.

4. NWPs do not authorize any injury to the property or rights of others.

5. NWPs do not authorize interference with any existing or proposed Federal project (see general condition 31).

SECTION 401 WATER QUALITY CERTIFICATION (4/7/17):

The State Water Control Board issued conditional §401 Water Quality Certification for NWP 3 as meeting the requirements of the Virginia Water Protection Permit Regulation, which serves as the Commonwealth’s §401 Water Quality Certification, provided that: (1) the deviations from the original configuration or filled area do not change the character, scope, or size of the original design or approved alternative design; (2) the discharge: a) would not increase the capacity of an impoundment, or b) would not reduce instream flows; (3) any compensatory mitigation meets the requirements in the Code of Virginia, Section 62. 1-44.15:23 A through C, except in the absence of same river watershed alternatives in Hydrologic Unit Codes (HUC) 02040303 and 02040304, single family dwellings or locality projects may use compensatory mitigation in HUC 02080102, 02080108, 02080110, or 02080111 in Virginia; (4) the Corps of Engineers shall provide DEQ an annual report of projects authorized by this Nationwide Permit


that includes detailed information on physical changes to water withdrawal structures, such as the maintenance of an intake, dam, weir, or water diversion structure that are deviations from the original configuration, or are a change in the character, scope, or size of the original design, or where those deviations would otherwise reduce instream flows.

COASTAL ZONE MANAGEMENT ACT CONSISTENCY DETERMINATION (4/5/17):

Based on the comments submitted by the agencies administering the enforceable policies of the Virginia CZM Program, DEQ concurs that the 2017 NWPs and Virginia Regional Conditions as proposed, are consistent with the Virginia CZM Program provided the following conditions, discussed below, are satisfied:

1) Prior to construction, applicants shall obtain all required permits and approvals for activities to be performed that are applicable to the Virginia CZM Program's enforceable policies, and that applicants adhere to all the conditions contained therein.

The Virginia Marine Resources Commission's (VMRC) concurrence of consistency with regard to the fisheries management, subaqueous lands management, wetlands management, and dunes management enforceable policies is based on the recognition that prospective permittees may be required to obtain additional state and/or local approvals from the VMRC and/or the local wetlands board prior to commencement of work in both tidal and nontidal waters under the agency's jurisdiction. Such approvals must precede implementation of the projects.

2) The DEQ Office of Wetlands and Stream Protection (OWSP) has provided §401 Clean Water Act (CWA) Water Quality Certification for the 2017 NWPs and Regional Conditions, applicable to the wetlands management and point source pollution control enforceable policies of the Virginia CZM Program. The activities that qualify for the NWPs must meet the requirements of DEQ's Virginia Water Protection Permit Regulation (9 VAC 25-210-130) and the permittee must abide by the conditions of the NWP. DEQ-OWSP has identified specific NWP exceptions. DEQ will process an individual application for a permit or a certificate or otherwise take action pursuant to 9 VAC 25-210-80 et seq. for those activities covered by an NWPs that have not received blanket §401 CWA Water Quality Certification.

The Corps should forward pre-construction notifications to DEQ for applicants that do not comply with or cannot meet the conditions of the §401 CWA Water Quality Certification. Further, the Commonwealth reserves its right to require an individual application for a permit or a certificate or otherwise take action on any specific project that could otherwise be covered under any of the NWPs when it determines on a case-by-case basis that concerns for water quality and the aquatic environment so indicate.

In accordance with the Federal Consistency Regulations at 15 CFR Part 930, section 930. 4, this conditional concurrence is based on the applicants demonstrating to the Corps that they have obtained, or will obtain, all necessary authorizations prior to implementing a project which qualifies for a NWP. If the requirements of section 930. 4, sub-paragraphs (a)(1) through (a)(3) are not met, this conditional concurrence becomes an objection under 15 CFR Part 930, section 940.43.